Details of Subjects

DETAILS OF SUBJECTS

FOK

EXAMINATIONS IN 1936-1937. DETAILS OF SUBJECTS FOK THE SCHOOL INTERMEDIATE EXAMINATION, DECEMBER, 1936.

AGRICULTURAL SCIENCE— Introductory Note-—The focus of attention of the students should be directed towards the biology of plants connected with agriculture, with special refer ence to Victoria. On the botanical side morphology must be taught as a groundwork, but the stress should be laid firstly on|the functions of plant organs, and secondly on the influence which conditions of climate and soil ' have on the development of the plants concerned. In this respect teachers should bear in mind the import ance of inculcating a broad basal knowledge, and of using local conditions as illustrations of that knowledge and also as special cases where circumstances are ex ceptional. Agricultural experience in any district is very prolific of such instances; the trained teacher con use them with considerable effect. Similarly the soil should be looked at as the medium on which plants grow.' Cultivation methods and manorial treatments are therefore to be regarded chiefly as the means by which weeds are, eliminated, and the soil conditions suitable for each crop are produced. In this way the study of agricultural implements and their use has a definite value, and local deviations from the normal practice become interesting rather than harass ing. This syllabus is intended to indicate the scope of the work, but not the order in which the topics are to be treated throughout the course. The proper method of teaching agriculture includes: — (a) Instruction in the fundamental principles cf agriculture. (b) Indoor experiments illustrating the principles, (o) Outdoor work in the school agricultural plots or garden, and, where practicable, on th» school farm. (d) Excursions to neighbouring farms, agricultural shows and factories. (e) The compilation of records of the experimental work and excursions. ^INTERMEDIATE EXAMINATION. 613

I.' THE SOIL. Note.—As far as possible the .following details should be worked out by the student himself, or as class demonstrations, experiments being recorded in a prac tical book. 1. Bock Weathering and soil formation. 2. Composition of soils; mineral matter, organic matter, water, gases, and micro-organisms. Qualitative separation of solid constituents. Classification of soils according to these (e.g. sand, silt, clay,' loam, peat and marl). Ele mentary knowledge bf importance and func tion of these constituents in relation to fer tility of the soils (including nitrification of humus and nitrogen fixation in legumes). -3. Msnuriai requirements of soils. The sources of supply and the use of artificial fertilisers. The chief classes of these — nitrogenous, phosphatic, and potassic. The influence of each class on plant growth. 4. Farmyard manure. Composition; storage and distribution; effects on the soil. 6. Green manures; Their effects on the soil, and their use for certain classes of crop. Con siderations governing their use. 6. Lime in. its various forms; its sources and its action on soils. Gypsum; its sources and its. action, on soils.. 7.. Temperature of the soil and factors affecting it. II. THE PixNT. 1. The seed; structure of broad bean and of maize; reserve of plant- food in seeds; tests for starch and fats., Germination of seeds; con ditions' necessary for germination;. germinat ing capacity and speed of germination; res piration. Limiting temperatures for ger mination and plant rrrowth—a general know ledge only as affecting seasons for the plant ing and growth, of crops in various. 6limate». Effect of planting' seeds at various depths. 2. (a) Root systems; The structure "and func tion of the root; Hoot hairs; Osmosis. 614 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1936|

(b) The external morphology of stems includ ing such specialised types as rhizomes, runners, bulbs, tubers and those of climb, ing plants. Buds; tillering. The func tions of the stem in relation to the move ment of materials in plants. (c) The structure and functions of the leaf; Photosynthesis, Respiration and Trans piration. (d) The organisation of flowers and the struc ture and functions of their parte. Pol lination, fertilisation. The development of seeds and fruits. 3. Life histories, including an elementary know ledge of the morphology and biology of the following plants: — (a) Gramineae; wheat, oata, maize, rye grass. (b) Leguminoseae; pea or bean, lucerne, a perennial and an annual clover. (c) The Potato. (d) Six common weeds of the district, with special reference to the factors regulating their prevalence and control.

III. GENERAL. 1. Climate. Factors determining temperature and rainfall. The climatic zones of Victoria. The distribution of the chief primary indus tries of the State. The influence of climate, soil and geographic features thereon. 2. Objects and methods of cultivation, drainage, and irrigation, with special reference to the crops mentioned in Section II (3). 3. Crop rotation. The principles on which it rests and the'benefits which follow it. Types of rotation. Text Books: — Agricultiur.e (Oonnell and Hadfield). Nature in'Farming (Peterson). For reference: Tapp—Elementary Botany (Australian Edition). INTERMEDIATE EXAMINATION. (J15

ALGEBRA— (The course in Algebra presupposes a knowledge .of the course in Arithmetic. Questions involving inciden tal arithmetic, or entirely arithmetical, may be set, but not on " commercial" topics, such as stocks and .shares or discount.) The expression of an arithmetical generalisation in a formula. Easy questions on the simplification of rational algebraic expressions. The factorisation of ax^ + bxy •+- cifl (by inspection when a b c have suitable numerical values), a£±i/3, x4±y* and of expressions based simply upon these. The solution of linear and quadratic equations in one variable and of simul taneous equations, of which not more than one is quad ratic, in two variables (numerical coefficients). Simple cases of linear equations in one or ,two variables with literal coefficients, and of the transformation .of for mulae (change of .the subject of a formula). The mani pulation of expression's involving simple surds. Elementary treatment of positive and negative integ ral indices, eo far as necessary for their intelligent ute. (Book-work will not be asked in the examination.) An introduction to the study of the functional de pendence of two variables, and its representation by means of tables of corresponding values (Statistics), graphs, and formulae—abased on examples from real life (e.g. vital, economic, sporting .statistics). Physics, etc.; in particular examples leading to formulae of the forms y — ax, y = axrr-.b, y = ajx, y = ax%, i/ = o/x2. Simple problems of .the types: (1) finding the value of a from a given pair of corresponding- values of x and y (pz of a and 6 from ,two such pairs), and the use of -£he formula so .determined in finding other pairs of corresponding yallies; (2) finding a formula to fit a .given table of values; (3) graphical fitting of a for mula cf the form y = ux'+b to ra- tahle of values of x, V affected by small errors of "observation. i(The scope of the work intended in this Section is that of Godfrey and Siddone, TSUmgntary Algebra, .Chap. 16, or Durelf, A New Algebra for'Sehooli, tajrt IH. pp. 2U33.) 61 g DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1936.

The solution of equations by the intersection bf graphs. The general, shape of the graphs of relatione of the form, ax-\-by + c = 0,' y = ax% + bx'+c, y = a\x, x2 + y% = a2: (numerical coefficients). Notes-—(1) The formal work in Algebra should be introduced and developed as far as possible in connec tion , with practical applications. The field to be covered in such applications is that of the ordinary text-books, such as is proper to a good general educa tion. Candidates will be expected to exercise common- sense in the degree of accuracy to which they give the answers to problems. (2) Kayeand Laby's four-figure tables of logarithms, etc., will be provided in the examination. (3) The intended standard of this Syllabus is about that of the relevant portions of Godfrey and Siddons, Elementary Algebra, Vols. I, IT, or Durell, A Neie Algebra for Schools, Parts I-TU. Either of these books would form a suitable and sufficient text-book, but their use is not prescribed.* ,

ANIMAL BIOLOGY— . The study of this subject requires- a previous ac quaintance with ' the principles of Chemistry and Physics, to the standard of the General Science Course. 1. Frnn.—External features; the. alimentary canal, the circulatory system (in main outline only), the excretory, respiratory and nervous sys tems (riot cranial nerves). 2'. Fish.—The respiratory organs and associated blood-vessels, including the heart. 3. Man.—General anatomy of the alimentary, cir culatory, excretory, respiratory and nervous systems, excluding the sense organs! Ele* , mentary anatomy'of joints and muscles"suffi cient to explain the mechianical .principles . of liriib movements.' '".'/'

•Godfrey & Siddons will shortly be superseded by-a completely re written work" bv one of the same' anthbr'si: '' INTERMEDIATE EXAMINATION. fiyq.

4. The Cell in the Protozoan and' Metazoan.' Dif ferentiation of cells and division of labour. The organism as a whole. 5. The principles of metabolism and general physiology, including growth, repair, sources of energy, work performed, animal heat, carbohydrates, fata and proteins. The nature of enzyme action. Physical and chemical characters of food. Principles' of dietetics and cooking. Digestion and absorp tion. Circulation, excretion, respiration. Response to stimulus. Outline of the func tion of tlio nervous system. 6. The histology necessary for the preceding section. 7. Practical Exercises. .All candidates must submit for examination their laboratory note-books (see general note in Handbook on laboratory note-books).' , ' The note-books ' must give evidence that candidates have learnt either by actual dissection or by demon stration:— (a) the main macroscopic features of the alimentary, circulatory, •' excretory, respiratory and ner vous systems of the Frog. If desired, the circulatory system may be demonstrated on the mammal instead: ' < • (b) the respiratory organs and associated blood vessels (including the heart) of a fish; ' (c) the main organs of the thorax (including the dissection of the heart) and: the abdominal organs in: situ, of a mammal;. ;. . (d) some form of Protozoon, preferably: living;-,, .--.-,(*) the microscopic structure of blood,, frog's skin - (in. surface view), mammalian ekjn. (in. amo tion), .intestine (in transverse section)^ • -, (f) simple test-tube experiments with saliva. Books recommended:— -H- Toxt Books. ; ;. ..,.,;. ;.,.,,- ,,;S1 Buchanan: Elements of Animal--Morphology (2nd Edition). ;.>.. Foster and Shore: Physiology for Beginners (in part). • ;. *..,..;,. ; .;,.-.,•,„ ,,..-:-i'?i $]g DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1936,

Books for Reference. Haldane and Huxley: Animal Biology. Bainbridge and Menzies: Essentials of Physiology. ARITHMETIC. The ordinary school course in arithmetic, including: Addition, subtraction, multiplication, division, fac tors, fractions, decimals, square root. British and metric systems of measurement. Mensu ration of areas and volumes of rectangular figures, of the circumference and area of a. circle, of the surfaoe- nrea and volume of the circular cylinder and sphere. Ratio (percentage). Proportion direct and inverse, simple and compound. Simple applications: profit and loss, simple interest, interest and amount at compound interest, rates and taxes, trade discounts and commis sions, stocks and shares. Easy graphical records, and their use. The use of four-figure tables of logarithms, squares, etc. Notes-—(1) A knowledge of recurring decimals will not be required. (2) Questions asking specifically for contracted mul tiplication, etc., will not be set, but questions may be set involving the ability to make a rough estimate or check of an answer and to give answers correct to a stated number of significant figures. (3) Questions on the theory of logarithms will not be set. (4) Kaye and Laby'e four-figure tables of logarithms, etc., will be supplied in the examination. (6) The intended standard of this syllabus is about the same as that of the syllabus it supersedes. Ques tions may, as in the past, be set demanding an accur acy not attainable by use of four-figure tables.

BOTANY— The root, shoot and leaf of some of the commoner trees, shrubs, grasses, garden herbs and weeds. Types of leaf and their arrangement. Buds, scale leaves and stipules. INTERMEDIATE EXAMINATION:- g |.0/<

Types of inflorescence, bracts,- bracteoles and floral leaves: The stamen and types of androecium. The carpel and types of- gynoecium. Plaoentation and' types of ovary, Hypogyriy, perigyny and epigyny. Types of flower. How floral diagrams, floral formulae and vertical' sections are made. Pollination and fertilization. Fruit and seed, formation of, types of, and dis persal of. Germination. Importance, character and types of soil. Capillarity and water-holding capacity. Production of soil; Earth worms and humus. Types of seedlings. Growth. Influence of moisture, temperature, soil and light on growth. Etiolation. Types of root systems. Boot hairs; root cap and cork (in old roots). Osmosis and absorption. Root pressure, conduction of water, wood vessels. Transpiration and conditions affecting it. Stomata and lenticels. The essential constituents of a plant's food. Photosynthesis and chlorophyll. Respiration (aerobic only). Food storage materials and food storage organs. Special forms of nutrition. Parasites (Mistle toe and Dodder):;- insectivorous plants, (Dro- sera); saprophytes (M'ubor, etc.). Spread of Mucor by spores (otherwise the reproduction ot Mucor arid of Spirogyfa'' is' not' required). Relation of plant to its environment. Water (Spirogyra and Water Lily), marsh; sand, heath; woodland and pasture plants, forest trees. Plant communities. Competition for light, leaf movement, leaf mosaics and climb ing plants. Study of deciduous trees to show seasonal rhythm, periodic rhythm, arid life rhythm. Leaf- fall. . _. Pruning, grafting, and healing' of Wounds. 620 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1936 '

The following is a suggested list of plants for study and will vary according to the district. Plants which are related are marked by the same numeral. In the practical examination plants or parts of plants may be given which are either on this list or are closely allied. A distinction should be made between native .and introduced plants. See Flora of Victoria, Ewart. ' ' (1) Karly Nancy . (Anguillaria), (1) Milkmaids (Burchardia), (1) Bulbine, (2) Iris* (2) Onion Grass (Romulea), (3) Brome Grass (Bromus), - (3) Cocks-foot (Dactylis), (3) Buffalo Grass (Stenotaphrum), (4) Wheat (Triticum), (4) Barley (Hordeum), (4) Oats (A vena), (5) Buttercup (Ranunculus), (5) Columbine (Aqui- legia), (b) Wallflower (Cheiranthus), (6) Stock (Matthiola), (7) Wattle (Acacia), (8) Broom (Cytisus), (8) Clover (Trifulium, (8) Burr Clover (Medi.cago), (8) Darling Pea (Swainsona), (8) Pea (Lathyrus), (8) Vetch (Vicia), (8) Kidney Bean (Phaaeolus), (9) Rose (Rosa), (9) Bramble (Uubus), (10) Apple or Pear (Pyrus), (11) Plum or Cherry (Prunus), (12) Eucalyptus, (12) Tea Tree (Leptos- permuml, (13) Grevillea, (13) Needle Bush (Hakea),' (14) Pansy (Viola), (15) Poppy (Papaver), (16) Heath (Epaoris), (17) Petunia, (17) Potato or Kangaroo Apple (Solanum), (18) Toad Flax (Linaria), (18) Snapdragon (Antir rhinum), (19). Salvia, (19) Prostnnthera, (20) '.!•• Groundsel (Senecio), (20) Flatweed (Hypo- chaeris), (20) Cape weed-(Cryptostenima), (21) Thistles (Carduus or Ccntaurea). Books recommended for study and reference; • For Study ; '. - • Botany. •' A ;Junior Book for Schools. Yapp. Australian Edition. For Reference : " . ; ...... J'|cmentary..Botany. .Ewart.. ','•;...... -'' ' Pracfefcal,Plant'Ecology.. ' Tah'sley. 'Flora of Victoria! KwaVt. ..Introduction to. Plant Physiology.. W.. O. •'-'''"^•jaJrie^;--- .-.:•..-J. •• -; L 1NTKBMEDIATE EXAMINATION. 621

PRACTICAL WORK. Every candidate in this subject must have carried out a course of practical work in a laboratory which has been approved after inspection by inspectors appointed by the Schools Board. This course must in clude at least fifteen suitable experiments reasonably distributed over the above syllabus, and some of the experiments must be the independent work of the can didate. A candidate whose practical work has been carried out in a laboratory which has not been inspected may be permitted by the Schools Board to submit his practical notebook for examination with his written paper. This notebook must be certified by the candidate's Headmaster and by bis teacher as being the record of tho candidate's independent work. The Practical Work must show that the candidate has (a) Obtained a practical acquaintance with the general form of the plant and the structure of the flower and the fruit of at least one of each of the groups of plants numbered 1 to 21 above or of allied forms, including the microscopic structure.of two types of pollen grains and stomata, and three types of wood vessels. (b) Performed or seen performed at least 16 experiments in plant physiology (see below), illustrating the' following:—Elements of Plant Nutrition- (by water culture or otherwise). Root absorption. Rise of sap, Transpiration, Carbon-dioxide assimilation, Influence of Light on Photosynthesis, Respi ration, Germination and effect of varying conditions on germination. Growth and growth movements (geotropism, heliotropism, nutation). Movements of adult parte (pulvini, etc.), and non-vital movements (swelling - of seeds, etc.). (c) Attended. at, and described, at least two field excursions illustrating different native plant communities ' in addition to garden and plot work. •''- 6212 DUTAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1936.

The Notes should distinguish betweeri those which are the result of observations of demonstrations and experi ments by the teacher and those which are the record of candidates' own dissections and experiments. Experiments suggested in addition to those given for Sub-Intermediate. Growth of Plants in Water Cultures—Lowson,* p- 163, Expts. 8, 9, 10. Osmosis—Lowson, p. 170, p. 174, Expt. 15. Conduction in Plants—Lowson, p. 177, Expt. 18. (Examine transverse sections of stem and root tested under microscope). Capillarity—*Yapp, p. 45, Expt. 11. Root Pressure—Darwin and Acton.f Expt. 88; Lowson, p. 179, Expt. 20. Transpiration—Darwin and Acton, Expts. 92 and 113; Lowson, p. 184, Expt. 29. Carbon Assimilation— Chlorophyll necessary, Darwin and Acton, Expt. 26; Lowson, p. 187, Expt. 32. Light necessary, Darwin and Acton, Expt. 28; Lowson, p. 188, Expt: 34; "Yapp, p. 58, Expt. 16. Carbon dioxide necessary—*Yapp, p. 59, Expt. 20. Tests for food, materials in seeds. Oil and Starch, and microscopic examination of starch and aleurone grains. Respiration—Darwin and Acton, Expt. 2. Germination of Seeds—*Yapp, chapters III., IV., and V. Movement, Geotropisrri, etc.—#Yapp, chapter XV. Fertilization—*Yapp, p. 151, Expt. 31. Experiments' suggested for Sub-Iritermediate£— Preparation and properties of Oxygen, •Australian Edition. •1

Preparation and properties of Carbon dioxide. Study of common salt, ammonium sulphate. Acids mid alkalies. Soil—*Yapp, • Expt. 9, (a) (b) and (c), p. 44. Transpiration—*Yapp, Expt. 13, p. 48. Conduction—*Yapp, Expt. 12, p. 47. Chlorophyll. Extraction—Darwin and Acton, p. 50. Testing green leaf for starch—*Yapp, p. 58. Conditions necessary for the formation'of Chloro phyll—Darwin and Acton, Expts. fio'and 66. Respiration—*Yapp, p. 33, Expt. 4, and p. 82, Expt. 22. Heat given out by germinating seeds—*Yapp, p. 83, Expt. 23.

BRITISH HISTORY AND CIVIOS— 1. British History— One of the following : (a) British History from 1783 to 1914, together with the history of the discovery, early .settloment a.nd exploration of Australia. (b) Development of the British Empire (es pecially with regard to the Dominions and British India.lt 2. Civics (see the syllabus given in the course of School Study). Eight questions should be attempted, of which six should be selected from Section 1 (a) or Section 1 (b), and two from Section 2. To obtain a pass, a candidate must obtain at least 60 per cent of the marks in one of the History sections and 50 per cent of the marks in Civics. Note.—It is intended that the " Discovery of Austra lia " should include the voyages of Torres, Tasman, and the principal Dutch navigators, Dampier, Cook, Bass and Flinders. "Early Settlement" should include the founding of Sydney, and ite growth, to the departure of Governor Phillip, the founding of Hobart and Laun- ceston, Collins's attempt at settlement in Port Phillip, •Australian Editor. tThis does not Include details ot Inland Exploration ot Aus tralia. (52+ . DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1936.

the first Westernport Settlement, the founding-of Port land and of Melbourne, together with the growth of Melbourne to the arrival of Lonsdale, the foundation of South .Australia, Western Australia to 1830, the settlement on the Brisbane River and the creation of Queensland as a separate colony. The " Exploration of Australia " should include the journeys of Bl&xland, Oxley, .Hume and Hovell, Sturt, Mitchell, Grey, Mc Millan, Strzeleoki, Eyre, Stuart, Leichardt, Forrest and Burke and Wills.

CHEMISTRY— The' simpler physics and chemistry, of the atmosphere and its two chief constituent gases. Examples of chemical change -as opposed to physical change. Combination and decomposition.' Tho chemistry of combustion. Conservation of mass Common fuels and their products. The three states of aggregation of matter and the transition from one state to another, as illustrated by water. The simple chemistry of water and of its elements. Water as a solvent for solids and gases and the simple phe nomena of solution, such as crystallisation, saturation, and super-saturation. • • . .'• The chemistry of carbonate of lime, lime, calcium, car bonic acid (carbon dioxide), carbonic oxido (carbon mono xide), carbon (charcoal, graphite, and diamond); of com mon salt, chlorine, hydrochloric acid, sodium, caustic soda, and tho sodium carbonates; of sulphuric acid, sulphurous acid, hydrogen sulphide, sulphur, and the sodium sulphates; of magnesium, magnesia, and magnesium carbonate; of nitre, nitric acid, the oxides of nitrogen ; ammonia, and ammonium chloride, sulphate, and nitrate. Acids, bases, normal and acid salts. Double decomposi tion. Basic and acidic oxides. The fundamental chemical laws of definite proportions, multiple .proportions, equivalents; and reacting gaseous volumes, as, illustrated by a practical study of the above.. The laws .of Boyle and Charles.. The density of gases. The general characteristics of mixtures, compounds and elements (metallic and non-metallic), allotropic modificar tiohs. :" :-; ••"'" :"••' '•''•' : ' ' •' ;" ; ....:••• INTERMEDIATE EXAMINATION. £05

The atomic and molecular theory may be taught in its simpler developments, but should not be treated as a sub ject of examination.. ' . The general • scope of the work arid the mode of treat-' meut may be gauged from: Doningtoh's: "A Class Book of Chemistry," Parts 1. and TI., or JamieKon's "Junior Chemistry." .••••• PRACTICAL WORK. Every candidate in this subject must have carried out a course ot practical work in a laboratory which has been approved after inspection by inspectors appointed by the Schools Board. This course must comprise at least twenty suitable experiments reasonably distributed over tho .aboye syllabus, mid. the experiments must be the indi- pendent work of the candidate. A candidate whose practical work has lx>cn carried out in a laboratory which has not been inspected may be permitted by the-Schools Board to submit his practical notebook for examination with his written paper. This notebook must be certified by the candidate's Headmaster and by his Teacher as being the record of the^candidate'a independent work.

COMMERCIAL PRINCIPLES AND PRACTICE— Book-keeping :'•—Double Entry—Books and accounts used—Entering—Posting —Balancing. Recon ciliation Statements—Extracting Trading and Profit and Loss Accounts and Balance Sheets from trial Balances—simple Consignment Accounts—^Provisions for Bad Debts and De preciation—Adjustments required at balancing. • Correspondence:—Practice in writing letters' and docu- ...... ments connected with Trading, • General: —Example of a simple telegraphic code. v Description ot a simple card system and of . • loose' leaf books. >: Explanation of Commercial terms and abbre viations. ...,. • Ge'neral office routine including filing systems. Two papers will-he set, the first dealing with Practical Book-keeping and the second with the theory, of accounts Correspondence and General:

40A gOg DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1936|

DOMESTIC SCIENCE— It is assumed that candidates before starting thi» course have completed such a course of general science, as indicated in course of study in general science, in the Handbook, page 143, course (A). Text Books:— General Science, by Caldwell and Eikenberry. Practical Science for Girls, by Evelyn E. Jar- dine. Section A-—Biology. An elementary knowledge of the following: — Germination of a broad bean; nutrition of the green plant. Yeasts and moulds. Fermentation. Nature of ferments. Principal ferments at work in everyday life— e.g., in bread-making. Bacteria. Occurrence and characteristics. Principles of bacteriological cleanliness. Life history of fly. Section B-—Anatomy and Physioloqy. (a) Man: The organs and processes of nutrition, in cluding assimilation. The organs and processes of respiration, circula tion, excretion. The skin. Animal heat. (as treated in Foster and Shore)

Section 0.—The Chemistry of Foods and Dietetics- Carbohydrates, fats, proteins, mineral matter, vita- mines and water. The foods in which each preponderates. Elementary general knowledge of articles of food and beverages (as in text-book). Principles of feeding. Mixed diet. Food re quirements. Effect of heat on food. Objects of cooking. Practical knowledge of the general principles in volved in Boiling, Stewing, Roasting, Frying, Baking and Steaming. INTERMEDIATE EXAMINATION. gOJ

Cooking— Simple Soups: Fish, Meat, Vegetables, Puddings. Pastry (suet and short cruet). Plain cakes. Eggs and Cereals. Comparative value of different forms of food. Arranging meals. Composition of milk.

Section I)-—Elementary Hyqiene. (a) Household Hygiene— Sanitation. Situation, construction, warming, lighting, heat ing and cooling of house. Dangers of flies and mosquitoes. Water. Sources and modes of supply. Impuri ties and means of purification. Air. Impurities and ventilation. Sterilisation. (b) Personal Hygiene— Necessity of right exercise and of rest. Cleanliness. Clothing. Prevention of infectious diseases. Text Book: — Domestic Hygiene, First Stage, Lyster. Teachers' reference: Economics of Modern Cookery, by M. M. Mal- loch, "published by Macmiljan and Co.

Practical Work. Every Candidate in this subject must have carried out a course of practical work in a School which has been approved after inspection by inspectors appointed by the Schools Board. This course must comprise suitable experi ments reasonably distributed over the above syllabus, and the experiments must be the independent work of the candidate. A candidate whose practical work has been carried out in a School which has not been inspected may be permitted 628 .DETAILS. ,0F. SUBJECTS, 1936

by the Schools Board to submit his practical notebook for examination with his written paper. , This notebook must be certified by the candidate's Headmaster and by his Teacher as being the record of the candidate's independent work. Practical Exercises- All candidates must submit for examination their Laboratory note-books (see general note in Handbook on Laboratory note-books). The note-book must give evidence that candidates have performed at least 26 experiments. Suggestions as to experiments which would be suit able for the required laboratory exercises. It must be understood that this list is suggestive only, and not in any way compulsory. (1) Typical Yeasts and Moulds grown in variou* media and examined under microscope. (2) Conditions giving best growths of yeasts and maximum yield of gas. (3) Examinations of Fly through magnifying, glass. (4) Growth and nutrition of the green plant. (6) Simple experiments, showing convection currents- as applied to ventilation. Also conductivity of water and air, and variations in radiation of heat according to surface. (6) Examinations of filter to show material re moved from water. Examination of same through microscope. (7) Examination of different .samples of tea after infusion. Comparison of qualities by amount of stalk, '.size of leaf, etc. Test of coffee pure' and adulterated by chicory. (8) Simple test tube experiments on digestion and respiration. (9) Practical exercises in Cookery as prescribed in Section C. N.B.—It is recommended that 3/5th of the time . available should bo devoted to practical work, minimum time 5 periods per week. •

DRAWING— •••-•••! Candidates must indicate on their entries whether ,they are taking syllabus A or B. INTERMEDIATE EXAMINATION. 'g'29

In each Syllabus candidates must take all four parts, and for a pass must pass in three parts; -and in the remaining Part must satisfy the examiners that they have some knowledge thereof. ' '

SYLLABUS A. Part I.—Drawing from models and objects and drawing from memory. This examination will be divided into two Sections, both of which must be attempted. Section 1.—Candidates will be required to draw a group of not more than two models or ob jects. ' The drawing may be in outline, or in very simple light and shade, and must be executed with a lead pencil. Time—1 hour. Before commencing Section 2, the models will- be removed. Section 2.—Candidates will be required to make a freehand drawing from memory of the objects they have just drawn. The drawing must be made in outline with a lead pencil. Time—30 minutes.. Part II History and Appreciation of Art. Questions on the history and appreciation of Art ot the following periods and subjects: — Grecian—Pheidias and the Parthenon. Roman—Tho Pantheon Rome. Mediaeval—The cathedral builders: Early Eng lish Gothic (Salisbury Cathedral); Decorated Gothic (Exetor Cathedral; Perpendicular Gothic (Henry VII. Chapel), (Westminster Abbey). Renaissance — the decorations of the Sistine Chapel ; An English \ Mansion (Hatfield .' .. , House, Herts.). Italian-rRaphael,' Michel Angelo. ; Spanish—Velasquez. . English—Turner. Time—-li hours. Part III.—Drawing plant forms' from" Nature. 630 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1936

Candidates will be required to make a drawing from nature of a, spray of leaves, or of leaves and flowers, such ns the Eucalyptus, Pittosporum, Laurel, Moreton Bay Fig, Geranium, Periwinkle, Oak, and the like. Tho drawing to be executed with the pencil in outline, or in mass with brush and water colour. Time—1 hour. Part IV.—Decorative Design. Candidates will be required to design a horizontal or a vertical border, diaper, or a filling for a simple shape, such as a square, a circle, or a triangle; using plant form as a motif; either the ground or the deco ration to bo tinted. The medium to be used must be transparent water colour, or "body" colour. Tracing paper may be used to draw repeate. Time—2 hours. SYLLABUS B. Part I.—Drawing from models and objects and drawing from memory. This examination will be divided into two Sections, both of which must be attempted. Section 1.—Candidates will be required to draw a group of not more than two models or objects. The draw ing may be in outliue, or in very simple light and shade, and must be executed .with a lead pencil. Time— I hour Before commencing Section 2, the models will be removed. Section 2. Candidates will be required to make a freehand drawing from memory of the objects they have just drawn. The drawing must be made in out line with a lead pencil. Time—30 minutes. Part II.—Elementary Perspective (Instrumental Drawing). Candidates will be required to apply the principles of linear perspective in the representation of simple solids, such as prisms, pyramids and cylinders, or of common objects based thereon. Tirnc—li hours. Part III.—^Drawing...plant forms from Nature. INTERMEDIATE EXAMINATION. g31

Candidates will be required to make a drawing from .nature of a spray of leaves, or of leaves and flowers, such as the Eucalyptus, Pittosporum', Laurel, Moreton Bay Fig, Geranium, Periwinkle, Oak, and the like. The drawing to be executed with the pencil in outline, or in mass with brush and water colour. Time—1 hour. Part IV.—Geometrical Drawing. The care and use of the drawing board, T- square, set squares, protractor and com passes. To draw by construction, an angle equal to a given angle, an angle to contain a given. nurnber of degrees, and straight-lines parallel and perpendicular to each other. The division of straight lines into equal or pro portional parte; the construction and use of simple plain scales; the proportional enlarge ment or reduction of plane figures; easy problems in the construction of triangles and quadrilaterals; easy problems on the con. struction of regular polygons, given one of the sides, a diagonal, or a diameter. The division of the circumference of a circle into equal parts; tangent to a circle at a given point. Drawing" in plan and elevation, to full size or other scale, simple solids or structures. Development of simple solids, such as cube, square and triangular prisms, cylinder and cone, and the like. Reference Books: — History of Art. " Shown to the Children Series "— Painting: Lawrence Wilson. Architecture : Gladys Wynne. W. R. Dean and H. Jolly—-Perspective and Geometrical Drawing. (Oxford University Press.) Time—1$ hours. ENGLISH— (1-) A composition of 300 words; or about one page and a-half. . [i45 minutes] 632 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1936.

(2) Analysis of sentences into clauses, with explana tion of the grammatical function of each clause. Detailed analysis. A ruled sheet for analysis will be supplied. [15 minutes] . (3) Precis of a simple unseen ' passage, consisting of about 200 words. . [30 minutes] Candidates should read carefully the passage, noting the most important statements and rejecting what is unessential. They should then write out its substance in a clear and logically connected version, occupying about one-third of tho original, or about 70 words, and they should avoid the mere reproduction of the word ing ot the original. The Examiners recommend the use of a Text-Book on Precis Writing, such as: Aughterson — Prcois Writing (Whitcombe and Tombs). Compton—A Systematic Course of Precis Writing—(Harrap). Or, Halliday — Guide to Preois Writing — (E. Arnold). (4) Two set-books for specal study— (a) In Fealty to Apollo (Phillips arid Max. well), (Melb. Univ. Press.) Sections I,

. \-J •. in; iv, VII-X. "•(b) One. of the following: plays: Either Shakespeare, Macbeth, or John Drink- water, Abraham Lincoln- (5) Two set-books for general reading— (a) Australian Essays, ed.- Maurice and Cowling-f Melh. Univ. Press. 3/-"j, p.p. 1-80. (b) Mr. Pickwick (K.T. 216), or H. G. Wells, The Food of the Gods (Collins, 2/-). v Note.—In sections 4 and 5 alternative questions on each book will be asked. In addition to the Essay, Analysis and Precis, candidates must answer two (2) questions from section 4 (one from In Fealty to iApollo, and one on the play chosen),' and one question from section 5 either on (a) or on (b). - _ INTERMEDIATE EXAMINATION. 633

FRENCH— (a) Translation into English of easy passages ot French prose, comprising unseen passages and an extract from the following prescribed text: Ford and Hicks' New French reader (Dent), the following pieces: No. I—Madeleine de Verchercs. No. IV—Noiraud; No. XI—La riviere de diamants. No. Xlt—Croisilles. (b) (i.) A short composition in French on a picture representing an incident or translation into French of an easy unseen passage of English or a short composition or series of short compositions in French on the contents . of the prescribed text, the total length of such composition or compositions to be the same as that of the picture composition. (ii.) Translation into French ot short easy. Eng lish sentences. • • (c)'(i.) Formal questions on accidence and the lead ing rules of syntax, excluding the sub junctive. ' (ii.) Either (a) A'short piece of simple dictation, or (b) Transcription of a passage of pho' netic script of about .130 words into ordinary French—the sub ject matter of the passage to be of the same standard as the piece chosen for dictation. N.B. 1.—The examiners will supply a few headings (in French) for the guidance of candidates choosing the Picture Composition in (b) (i.) above. N.B. 2.—Candidates offering the picture composition would benefit by the use of the following book in their course: French Composition through Pictures .(published by Evans Bros.). ' ''~ '' '/ . N-.B. 3.—See notes on punctuation at the end oil general prescriptions for the Leaving Certificate Exami nation in-French. , . . -. . . '•',; 634 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1936|

GEOGRAPHY— Introductory Note.—Wherever possible the teaching of geography should be based upon observations in the field, and be illustrated by pictures, globe, maps, models, diagrams and sections. Australian geography should be made the basis of much of the comparative work and should be dealt with more fully than that of other countries. In the teaching of the subject during the four years' course leading to the Intermediate Examination, there should be developed the idea of the inter-dependence of the various geographical phenomena, the correlation between (lie astronomical, topographical, and climatio tactors, and the bearing of these on industries, com merce, and human settlement and development. It should be emphasised that the topographic and climatio factors largely control man's environment and over come natural drawbacks. The reading of simple topographical and political maps, and the making of sketch maps should be taught, and in examinations, sketch maps to illustrate the geo graphy of the countries dealt with, should be freely used. Details. Simple proofs of the spherical shape of the Earth. Latitude and longitude (Methods of determination not required). Simple treatment of the chief effects of the rotation ard revolution of the Karth. Experimental demonstra tions should he limited to r.ractical exercises with the shadow stick and readings of meridian altitude. -..' Determination of a north-south line by the shadow- stick. , . . -The distribution of land and water. Kinds of tides .'and their effects (causes not required). Elementary -treatment of surface ocean currents and their effects on climate and trade. An elementary treatment ot the work of rivers, the sea, ice and wind in altering the earth's surface. Plains, plateaux, mountains, rivers, valleys, lakes and coastal features and an elemeritary know ledge of the causes which operate to produce them. INTEBMEDIATE EXAMINATION. 635

Elementary study of the physical build and the natural regions of each of tho continents, those ot Australia and Victoria to be done in greater detail. The effects of latitude, altitude, diurnal and seasonal changes on temperature. Atmospheric pressure, tem perature, humidity and their inter-relation. Mean ings of the terms isotherm, isobar, isohyet. Factors concerning the formation of rain, cloud, dew, snow, frost, and hail. Elementary treatment ot winds with special reference to land and sea breezes, trade winds, cyclones and anticyclones, westerlies, and the mon soons. An elementary study of Australian meteorologi cal charts to illustrate the differences in pressure dis tribution in summer and winter. Factors determining climate. The following natural regions of the world with the activities of man characteristic of each: — Equatorial forest, savannah, hot desert, mediterranean, temperate grasslands, west wind coastal, monsoonal, temperate summer rain regions. Simple geographical study including topography, climate, people and their occupations, products and trade, types of government, and principal cities of the following countries: — Australia. Germany. Great Britain. Italy. Ireland. Russia. Canada. United States of America. India. Argentina. South African Union. Japan, New Zealand. China. France. British Malaya. In tho case of Australia the following topics should be treated in greater detail: — Tho relation between climate and vegetation. The conditions producing forest, grassland and desert. The control exercised by climate and relief on the great primary industries. The importance of artesian water and irrigation systems as a means of compensating . for deficiency in rainfall. The wheat, sheep, cattle, sugar, fruit, timber, coal, gold, lead, and copper mining indus tries. 636 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1930.

The control exercised by climate and natural re sources on the distribution and density of tho population. Geographical conditions -affecting the develop ment of the principal ports. The distribution of manufactures as controlled by the factors of labour supply, raw mat erial, climate, power, and facilities for dis tribution, including topography, transport, and harbours. The principal ocean trade and cable routes from Australia. Note : Special work has been eliminated from the details of the subject. Books tor reference for teachers:— Tho Geography of Victoria—J. W. Gregory. A Geography ot Australasia—Griffith Taylor. Physical Geography for Schools—Bernard Smith. . The World—L. Dudley Stamp and A. Grenfell Price. Physical Geography—Tarr. Australian School. Atlas—Bartholomew and Cramp. Australia, Physiographic and Economic—Griffith Taylor (latest edition). Intermediate Geography Text Book —A. James (Specialty Press). A Modern Geography tor Australian Schools— I. G. Symons (Gillingham Adelaide). Human Geography for Secondary Schools—Fair- grieve and Young. ' Outline ot the Physiography and Geology of Victoria. Edited by Prof.-E. W. Skeats, (Melbourne Uni versity Press).

GEOMETRY AND TRIGONOMETRY. . The more important, theorems of plane geometry up to similar ? triangles, deduced from' a broad axiomatic basis, in accordance with the appended Schedule. (The logical sequence followed in the Schedule is. not obliga tory.) Exercises ori, arid applications of, these theorems. (Algebraical or trigonometrical methods may be used whenever convenient.) .-.••'• INTERMEDIATE EXAMINATION. 637

The sine, cosine and tangent of angles up to four right angles, and their graphs. Solution of triangles, including the finding of areas, preferably by subdivision into right-angled triangles. Easy problems in two dimensions; and the easiest problems in three dimen sions which involve only the solution of right-angled triangles. Use of four-figure tables. (Kaye and Laby's four-figure tables of logarithms, etc., will be pro vided in the examination.) Note.—The intended standard of this Syllabus is about the same as that of the Syllabus it supersedes. Either Forder, A School Geometry or Poster, Plane Geometry, Vols. I md II, together with either Durell and Wright, Element ary Triqnomenlry, Part I or Siddons and Hughes, Trigon ometry, Part I would form suitable and sufficient text-books, but their use is not prescribed.

SCHEDULE. Asterisks denote . that formal proofs will not be asked in examination, but it is of course assumed that teachers .will take proper steps to convince pupils of the truth of the propositions so marked. Section 1.—*The standard theorems, direct and con verse, on angles at a point (adjacent angles, vertically oposite angles). *The fundamental theorems, direct and converse, on parallel lines (corresponding angles, alter nate angles). The sum of the angles of a triangle and of a convex -. '-polygon. *The three fundamental cases for congruence of triangles. *The angles at the base.of an isosceles triangle are equal, and the converse. The congruence of right-angled triangles. The fundamental, theorems on parallelograms. The standard constructions depending on the above theorems (perpendiculars to a line, bisection ,;, of lines and angles, parallels to a given line). ..i.'The " equal intercept" theorems. The division of a line into n equal parts. 63S DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1936.

The mid-point of the hypotenuse of a right-angled triangle is equidistant from the three ver tices. The concurrency of the medians of a triangle. Section 2.—The comparison of the areas of parallelo grams and triangles between the same paral lels. *The measurement of the area of a rectangle. Pythagoras' theorem and its extensions. Apollonius' theorem. .Construction of a triangle or rectangle equal in area to a given polygon. •Geometrical illustration of algebraical identities. Section 3.—The "symmetry" properties of chords of a circle and of the common chord of two intersecting circles. The locus of a point equidistant from two given pointe. The concurrency of the perpendicu lar bisectors of the sides of a triangle. The circum-circle of a triangle. Angles in a segment. Cyclic quadrilaterals. Con currency of tho altitudes of a triangle. The inequality theorems: (i.) If in a triangle b > c, then B > C, and the converse; (ii.) the perpendicular is the shortest distance from, a .given point to a given straight line. The " symmetry" properties of tangents to a circle, and of the common tangents to two intersecting or touching circles. The locus of a point equidistant from two given lines. Concurrency of the angle-bisectors of a triangle. Tho inscribed and escribed circles of a triangle. The alternate segment theorem. •Equal arcs of a circle subtend .equal angles at the centre. The simpler loci and constructions based on these theorems. Section 4.--*A line parallel to the base of a triangle ..divides tho aides proportionally; and the con verse. INTERMEDIATE EXAMTNATIOH. ' G39'

': *The fundamental theorems on similar • triangles. •'• • A right-angled triangle is divided into two'similar triangles by the perpendicular from the right angle to the opposite side. The bisectors of the vertical angle of a triangle < divide the base in the ratio of the sides. Division of a line in a given ratio. The rectangle-property of intersecting chords of a circle.

GERMAN— (a) Translation into English of easy passages of German, comprising unseen passages and an extract from the following prescribed text: Tiudall atd Williams' Easy German Reader (G. Bell & Sons), stories l-VETT. incl., (i.e. pp. 1-50 incl.). ' (b) (i.) A short composition in German on a picture • , , representing an incident or translation into German of an easy unseen passage of English or a, short composition or series of short compositions in German on the contents ot the prescribed text, the total length of such compositions or compositions to be the same as that ot the picture composition. .- > (ii.) Translation into German of short'easy Eng lish sentences. ' ;(c) (i-) Questions on accidence and the leading rules of syntax, (ii.) Either (a) A short piece of simple dictation, or (b) Transcription of a.passage of pho netic script of about 130 words into ordinary German—the sub. ject matter of the passage to ba of the same standard as the piece chosen for dictation. N.B.. 1.-—The examiners will supply a few headings (in German) for the guidance of candidates choosing, the Picture Composition in (b) (i.) above. N.B..2*—See note re German spelling at end of General Prescriptions for German Leaving Hononia' Examination. 640 DETAILS.-OF.' SUBJECTS, 1936 .

N.B, 3.—See notes on punctuation at the end of general prescriptions for the Leaving Certificate Exami nation in German.:

GREEK— (a) Translation into English of easy unprepared passages of Greek prose. Accidence and the leading rules of elementary Syntax. Translation ot easy sentences from English into Greek, as a test of grammatical knowledge. (b) A book of Xenophon's Anabasis, or the equivalent thereof in the Attic dialect. Questions may be set involving translation, grammar and subject-matter. Candidates must do satisfactory work in both (a) and

Special Book.— Xcnophon, Anabasis I, omitting c. 9 (Ed wards, C.U.P.).

HEBREW— (a) Translation into English of easy unprepared pass ages of Hebrew i>rose. Accidence, including a knowledge of the fol lowing weak verbs, initial nun, initial, medial and final guttural, and the leading rules of elementary syntax. Translation of easy sentences from English into Hebrew as a test of grammatical knowledge. Pointing of unpointed text. (b) About nine chapters of prose from the Old Tes tament, together with two of the simpler short psalms. Questions may be set involving translation, grammar and subject matter. Candidates, must do satisfactory work in both (a) and (b). 'Note.—For purposes of examination the square writing and not the cursive script- must be used. Correct punc tuation is essential. INTERMEDIATE EXAMINATION. 641

•Special Books— Genesis cc. 41 to 45 inclusive. Samuel I, c. 17, vv. 12 to 68 inclusive. Psalms 58, 103. LATIN— (a) Translation into English of easy unprepared passages of Latin prose. Accidence and the leading rules of Syntax. Translation of easy sentences from English into Latin, as a test of grammatical knowledge. (b) Portions of easier Latin prose and verse, together not exceeding 950 lines, from Caesar's Gallic War and Virgil's Aeneid, or their equivalent Questions may be set involving translation, scansion, grammar, and subject-matter. Candidates must do satisfactory work in both (a) and (b). Special books under (b) above— Blackwood, Roman' Stories, I, III, IV, VI, VII, IX, X, XII, XIII, XIV, XVII, XVUI. [N.H.—Phis numbering refers to the Fourth Edition.] Syllabus of Syntax uiuley (a) above. 1. Agreement of verb with subject and adjective with noun; adjectives used as nouns; simple apposition. 2. The nominative case (a) as subject, (b) as com plement or secondary predicate; (o) the nomi native with infinitive, with dicor and videor. 3. The accusative (a) as object, (b) of extent of time and space, (c) of motion towards a place, (d) • after prepositions in common use, (o) with impersonal verbs, (f) the double accusative after rogo, doceo, and the more common fac titive verbs. 4. The dative (a) the possessive dative; (b) as in direct object, (c) governed by verbs in common use, as pareo, noceo, and in the impersonal passive construction with such verbs, and after compounds of sum, (d) with adjectives ot likeness, fitness, friendliness, etc., (e) after the gerundive, (f) as predicate. 41A 642 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1936

6. The genitive (a) as a complement to nouns, in cluding the partitive genitive, (b) of descrip tion, with adjectival attribute, (c) after verbs- of remembering and pitying, and with the impersonals paenitet and pudet, (d) governed by adjectives in common use, (e) sapientis est, (f) after judicial verbs. 6. The ablative (a) of motion from a place, sepa ration, and origin, (b) of agent with ab, (o) ot comparison, (d) of instrument, cause, manner, price and measure of difference, (e) in abl. absol. construction,' (f) of point of time, (g)- after verbs and adjectives in common use, (h) after prepositions in common use, (i) of respect, (j) description. 7. The locative. 8. Comparison. 9 Pronouns and pronominal adjectives in common use, meus est. 10. The infinitive (a) as subject or object of verbs,. e.g., invat me facere, possum faoere, (b) after doceo, iubeo, veto, and similar verbs, (c) tho- accusative with infinitive, (dj the future infini tive with verbs of hoping, promising, etc. 11. The gerund, gerundive, and supines. 12. The more common uses of the participle. 18. Impersonal expressions like gratum est and im personal verbs. 14. Direct and indirect simple and disjunctive ques tions. 15. Ordinary co-ordinating conjunctions. 16. Voices and the ordinary uses of the tenses. 17. The sequence of tenses. 18. Final and consecutive sentences with ut, ne, ut. non, and ut and ne with verbs of asking, com manding, and advising. 19. Other uses of ut. 20. Commands, prohibitions and wishes. 21. The construction with verbs ot tearing. 22. Verbs of doubting and hindering negatived and.- not negatived. 23. Temporal sentences not involving the subjunctive. Cum with the past tenses of the subjunctive- 24. Causal sentences. IMTEUMEDIATE EXAMINATION. 643

25. Conditional sentences with indicative and sub junctive. 26. Concessive sentences. 27. Relative sentences with the indicative, and qui with the subj. in final clauses, 28. Correlative clauses with talis, qualis, etc.

"MUSIC The certificates of the Australian Music Examinations Board in Grade III, Theory, or Musical Perception, and Grade TV, Practice, or Grade III, Practice, and Grade TV, Theory, or Musical Perception, passed at the ono -examination, will be accepted.

PHYSICAL SCIENCE— Measurement.—Use of beam balance snd spring balance; volume of solid bodies by measure ment and by displacement—incidental use of pipette, burette, and graduated jar; de termination' of density by separate measure ment of mass and volume. Earth's rotation and pendulum as time measurers; compensation of pendulums. Jilechanic.1-—Weight as a force (pull or push) and its measurement with spring balance; the simple lever law and its application in com mon appliances; Hooke's Law for simple extensions. Speed and velocity; simple treatment of New ton's 1st Law of Motion. - Simple descrip tive treatment of centre of gravity and sta bility. Work and energy; calculation of work in simple cases of lifting weights; kinetic and potential energy, and transfor mations between, them (pendulums, clock work toys, etc.); heat energy and mechani cal energy—simple descriptive treatment of the work of Rumford\ Davy and Joule; heat energy and chemical energy; chemical energy and electrical energy—the lead storage cell; heat energy and- electrical energy; mechanical energy ' and electrical 6^4 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1936.

energy—the movement of a wire carrying/- an electric current in a magnetic field ana tho electric current in a wire moving in a magnetic field; sources of energy of national importance. (All work on transformations of energy to be simple and descriptive.) Properties of Fluids.—General properties of a fluid; thrust and pressure in a liquid; ex pression of pressures in gravitational units- and such units as "cm. ot mercury"; cal culation of pressure as the weight of a column ot liquid of unit cross-section; de scriptive treatment of transmission of pros, sure through liquids and its application to- tho hydraulic press, hydraulic brakes, etc.; descriptive treatment of the siphon arid its applications. Air pressure; the barometer—experiments of Galileo, Torricelli, Pascal, Von Querioke, Boyle; simple lift and compression pumps; applications of air pressure; general physical properties of the air. Buoyancy; Archimedes' Principle; extension to flotation in liquids and in air with ap plications. Elasticity of Air; Boyle's Law; the experi ments of Boyle; simple calculations based! on this law; effect on ineasurement of gas- volume. . Heat -and Temperature-—The thermometer and its t, subdivision; Fahrenheit and Centigrade scales without conversion from one scale to the other; the development of the ther mometer by Galileo, Newton, Fahrenheit, Celsius. Expansion of solids and liquids due '-.,,.-• -to heating; applications. .Simple treatment of conduction and. con vection with applications; simple treatment of radiation; effects due to black and polished - surfaces with applications; differential ther- ,.-.,• mometer or other means of detection and ..,: , • measurement. .. . . -, INTKRMKDlATIi EXAMINATION. 645

Melting and boiling points by direct methods; applications of the use of metals depending! on the melting point. Quantity of heat; the calorie; specific heat of a solid and its measurement with a calori meter; latent heats of fusion and vaporisa tion; Black's experiments; determination of latent heat of fusion ot ice only. Charles' Law for constant pressure; effect on measurement of gas volumes. Combustion.—General study ot burning; methods of starting fires: common fuels, and effect of varying air supply; explosive mixtures of air and gaseous fuels; fire extinguishers; study of candle flame burning in air. , Rusting of iron and combustion of phosphorus to show composition of the air; increase in weight of phosphorus or. magnesium burnt in air; Lavoisier's experiments with tin and . mercury;, Priestley's experiment with calx of mercury. Combustion in oxygen; Priestley's and Schcele's preparation of oxygen; burning ot magnesium, calcium, phosphorus, carbon and sulphur in oxygen. Identification ot . products of combustion of ordinary fuels; hence main constituents of fuels. Solution-—Saturated and unsaturated solutions of solids in water; recovery' of solid by evapo ration ; effect of temperature on solution; crystal growing using alum, bluestone or other suitable substances; specification of solubility in gm. per 100 gm. ol solvent;; general ideas of solubility curves such as those of nitre and common salt; other com mon solvents such as alcohol, petrol, turpen tine, etc. Solubility of gases such as . air and carbon • dioxide in water; effect of pressure and . temperature (soda water). The Study • of TTofer.—Preparation of hydrogen from zinc and dilute hydrochloric acid; 0846 * DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1930.

' • Cavendish's preparation from-iron and dilute i sulphuric acid; examination of salts pro duced; hydrogen a light gas. Combustion of hydrogen; water as hydrogen ' • i oxide; action of hydrogen on hot copper oxide and steam on iron or magnesium _ as qualitative confirmation of the composition ot water. Reduction of hot metallic oxides by hydrogen and carbon; oxidation and reduction; appli cation to the production of metals from their ores by reduction with carbon. Volumetric (by electrolysis) and gravimetric . (simplified form of Dumas' experiment) composition ot water. '.Alkalies, Acids, Bases and SaJta.—General study of the dilute solutions ot the three common acids; simplest treatment of the reactions involved in the preparation of hydrochloric and nitric acids from sulphuric acid; simple description of the contact process for pre paring sulphuric acid. Preparation, of alkalies by the action of metals on water; properties of alkalies; neutrali sation and salt formation. Metals and non-metals; basic and acidic oxides with their relation to base and acid. ..Carbon dioxide and the carbonates; relations ".between limestone (marble), quicklime and "...." slaked lime, relation between basic oxide, • ' .'. acidic oxide and salt. The Law, of Definite Proportions from the composition ot water and other oxides and from the proportion of acid, to alkali in neu tralisation ' '•'Electricity and Magnetism.-^-Permanent magnets; properties and production; simplest treat- ;• -lf riient of the earth as a magnet, to explain the behaviour of a compass needle; work of Thales'' and Gilbert; simplest treatment ot magnetic indtiction'to explain the attraction of ; ii'.)-; '. a;piece of iron. ' INTERMEDIATE EXAMINATION 647

Magnetic effect of an electric current; Oer sted's experiment; application to galvano- c meter, electromagnet and electric hell. Chemical effect of an electric current; electro lysis ot water; a simple case of electro plating; simple form of lead storage cell; simple form of primary cell (theory of tho action in the liquid-is not required). Heating effect of an electric current; applica tion to heating and lighting; simple quali- '• tative idea of electrical resistance.

PRACTICAL WOKK. Every candidate in this subject must have carried out a course of practical work in a laboratory which has been ap proved after inspection by inspectors appointed. by the Schools Board. This course must comprise at least twenty suitable experiments reasonably distributed over the above syllabus, and the experiments must be the independent work of the candidate. A candidate whose practical work has been carried out in a laboratory which has not been inspected may be permitted by the School's Hoard to.submit his practical notebook for 'examination with ;his written paper. This note-book must be' certified by the candidate's Head Master and by his Teaclier as being the'record of the candidate's independent work.' ' " i.: Note: It is intended that at least two years' study should be given to the work' outlined above. Pupils who "have completed the General Science Course should require only one further year for the additional work •Snvol'vwt. i ...-•• i '•'• i PHYSICS— The treatment 'of the subject is to be primarily de scriptive and qualitative in character,, based on com- morisense1 ideas and on simple .experimental work. Im portance will he attached to a knowledge of simple -applications- of physical principles in everyday life. On!" the simplest and most fundamental nnflntities nrp included in the course; while the'mathematical aspect should not ;be' unduly•' stressed,'' sufficient numerical examples should be given to illustrate the relationships ^between relevant physical . quantities. -. . ,'648 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1936

The work in Electricity and Magnetism is only the- most elementary introduction to the subject, and is to be purely descriptive and qualitative.. Note on Units.—The c.g.s. system of. units is to be used througfhout the course prescribed. Other units of importance for particular purposes are expressly men tioned in their proper context. . History Brief historical account of the physical d sooverics of Archimedes, Galileo, Newton to the extent embraced by syllabus. Geometry.—Physical treatment (including measure ment) of Length, Angle, Area, Volume. Specification of position. Displacement; the- geometrical vector. Vernier (1/10), slide cali pers, screw gauge. Mechanics.—Time; standard of measurement. Simple pendulum as a time-measurer and variation of period with length, treated ex perimentally. Motion: Speed (scalar) and velocity (vector); acceleration (vector). Motions of constant acceleration from initial rest (with arithmeti cal discussion); and illustration of accelera tion by inclined plane or other method. Force—Experimental justification for the defi nition of force as a vector-quantity—from consideration of a " particle " in equilibrium under action specified (a) by two, (b) by three, forces. Weieht, and the gmwt and Ibwt units of force. Principle of the lever, established experimentally; moment of a force; elemen tary illustrations—in particular, use of the steel-yard. Centres of gravity . in simple oases. Laws of Motion.—Elementary treatment of New ton's Laws. Mass and its relation to weight; use of the simplest balance for measurement of mass. Work and E«ergy.—The ft.lbwt. Kinetic Energy and Potential Energy in easy ; cases; and : descriptive treatment of transformation of energy.. Friction, 'Mechanical advantage of INTERMEDIATE EXAMINATION. 649

simple machines, lever, single movable pulley, wheel and axle. Power; the watt; the horse power. OraviUdiim-—Descriptive treatment of Newton's Law of gravitational attraction. Motion from rest of freely falling bodies, (with arithmeti cal discussion). Hydrostatics-—Definition of pressure, only in the most elementary cases—especially of pressure at a given depth in a homogeneous liquid at rest under gravity. Archimedes' Principle and the elementary principle of floatation for 'the very simplest cases. Manometers. The mercury barometer and the aneroid. Hydro meter?, variable immersion, e.g., battery tester; specific gravity by balancing columns. Properties of Matter.—Absolute and relative density Boyle's Law. Hooke's Law. Simple treat ment of molecular theory for solids, liquids and gases. Heat.--T«mpernture and the elementary phenomena ot heat, viz., conduction, convection, radiation and expansion—treated oualitatively and de scriptively. Coefficient of linear expansion. Mcrcury-in-glass thermometers. Pixed_points. Fahrenheit and Centigrade scales. Charles' Law for constant pressure. Changes of state and of volume of the substance water, due to changes of temperature—the effects due to phenomenon of maximum density to be treated in detail. Calorimetrv; the calorie. Elementary treatment ot specific heat, defined as calories per gin and of the latent heats, for the case oi water. The phenomenon of change of boiling point with change ot atmospheric pressure, treated qualitatively. Electrostatics. — Two kinds of electrification; elec tric attraction and repulsion; conductors and non-conductors. Electroscopes; including gold-loaf electroscope. No electrification on the internal surface of a charged hollow conductor. (Proof plane method only.) Charging of conductor by induction. 650 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1936.

Mar/netism.'— Methods of making magnets, by means of permanent magnets and solenoids. Mag netic attraction and repulsion. Lines of force, traced by means of magnetic needle and of iron filings. Magnetisation of iron by in duction. Current Electricity.— Elementary experiments giving qualitative treatment of chemical, thermal and magnetic effects of electric currents.

AGRICULTURAL SCIENCE—/'ass. A fuller and more detailed treatment of the work set out for the Intermediate Examination, with the fol lowing additions:—. I.—The Soil. 1. Fertility of the soil—factors governing fertility. (a) Chemical—Available and unavailable plant food ; the limit to the value of chemical analysis; determination of soil requirements by experi ment. Fertilisers.—Composition, sources ot supply, ef fects on the soil and crops of the following: —Guano, bonedust, blood manure, nitrate of soda, sulphate of ammonia, nitrolime, rock phosphate, superphosphate, basic phosphate basic slag, sulphate and chloride of potash lime and gypsum. Unit values and calculation of commercial value* of fertilisers—Vide Vic. Journal ot Agric., January. (b) Physical—Physical constitution of the soil; mechanical analysis; properties of sand, clay, humus, calcium carbonate; soil texture; pore space; water holding capacity; optimum pro portion of water; percolation; capillarity; evaporation; diffusion ot salts; drainape water; specific heat of soils. Physical condition of the soil as modified by tillage, drainage, humus, crop rotation, irri gation, manuring and use of soil ameliorante. (c) Biological—Nature ot the soil flora; bacteria; structure and reproduction of a typical form, such as Bacillus subtilis; functions of bac teria; putrefaction; decay, etc. : ' Soil bacteria; nitrification; denitrifiVation: con ditions favourable; control ot these condi tions; Victorian conditions of rainfall and 652 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1936.

climate favourable to nitrification; Bacillus radicicola; relation to plants and soil; root tubercles; symbiosis; inoculation of soils. 2. A knowledge of the origin and method of forma tion of the soils of the district in which the school is situated. 3. Relation of Climate and Soil to Crop Production. Rainfall of Australia; distribution and incidence; study of rainfall map of Victoria; isotherms; isohyets. Influence of rainfall and temperature on crop pro duction. Climatic and soil requirements for wheat, potatoes, maize, lucerne; distribution of wheat, sheep and cattle and factors governing such distri bution in Australia.

II.—The Plant. 1. Food and water requirements—Sources of food supply—(a) atmosphere, (b) soil; essential ele ments; photosynthesis; osmosis; transpira tion ratio with special reference to the factors influencing it, such as climate and fertilizers. 2. Crops. (a) Wheat—The wheat producing countries of the world; the Victorian wheat belt; factors limiting its boundaries, e.g., transport facili ties, rainfall, competition;, with: more profit able forms of agriculture, etc. Methods of cultivation;. preparation of seed bed; conservation of • moisture; selection, grading, pickling of seed; seeding; manur ing; harvesting; development of use of machinery; wheaten hay. (b) Potatoes—Location of potato growing districts; cultural methods; selection and treatment of " seed." (o) Lucerne—Lucerne-growing districts; prepara tion of seed bed; methods of seeding; manur ing; renovation; irrigation; harvesting and 1 utilisation of lucerne. , .LEAVING EXAMINATION.: •• ,- 653

Note.—A similiar detailed study of some local staple crop may be substituted for either (b) or (c) above. 3. Pastures—Grasses and clovers — Natural and seeded pastures; permanent and temporary pastures; deterioration and improvement of pastures. Collect, identify and preserve ten distinct grasses or clovers which may be either native or introduced species. Fodder values. Drought resistance. 4. Weeds. (a) Habits; harmful effects; spread and control. (b) Collect, identify and preserve specimens of ten common weeds. III.—General. 1. General care ot farm animals; provision of shelter; water supply, conservation of fodder, relative composition of typical fodders—hay, bran, oats, lucerne, oil cakes; balanced rations. 2. Milk; composition; sampling and testing (Bab- cock Test and its underlying principles); herd testing; standard cows. General knowledge of the composition of milk products—dried milk, condensed milk, butter, cheese, milk-sugar, casein, separated milk. 3 Fungi and Bacteria—Life history of a typical fungus—Mucor—general division into para sites and saprophytes; part played by fungi in breaking down organic matter; parasitic. types—Smut, Irish Blight—their life histories, symptoms and prevention Bacteria—structure and reproduction ; control of growth ot bacteria in foodstuffs, milk, etc,, by— (a) Temperature—Freezing, chilling, boil ing, pasteurising. (b) Moisture—Drying fruit, vegetables, fish. (c) Sterilization—Sealing of tinned meats, etc. (d). Hygiene—Cleanliness of person, uten sils, buildings connected with food or • ; milk, supply. •, (e) Osmosis—Brines and syrups. 654 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1936.

4. Insect pests—General -principles of attack depend-' ing on the mode of feeding—distribution of. poison sprays for biting insects and oil emul sions, etc., for sucking insects. Life history of the codlin moth—methods of pre vention. Any local insect pest to be rioted, e.g;, ' cut worms, grasshoppers, borers, etc. 6. Grading and marketing of farm products.

Honours- A more advanced knowledge of the foregoing, to gether with the following subjects: — 1. Plant Breeding—Relation of biological prin ciples to plant breeding, e.g.. Natural selec tion (Darwin); Mutation theory (Do Vrics); •Pure Line theory (Johaiinsen); Segregation of • Unit Characters (Mendel). , Role of selection and hybridisation' in plant im provement; methods of hybridising wheat, maize; examples of improvement effected by cross breeding or selection in wheat, maize,, sugar beet, potato. 2. Classification and physical and chemical charac teristics ot the chief types of Victorian soils.. Books of Reference:— Chapters bearing on tho subject in the following: books will be found useful: — Paterson—Nature in Farming. Fream—Principles of Agriculture. Connell and Hadfield—Agriculture. Percival—Agricultural Botany. Richardson—Wheat and its Cultivation. Howell—Soil Problems in Wheat Growing. Victorian Journal ot Agriculture. Prescott—The soils of Australia in relation to- vegetation. and climate (C.S.I.R. Bulletin, No. 52). Griffith Taylor—Australian Meteorology. Wadham and Vasey—A Century of Agricultural Progress in Victoria (M.U. Press pamphlet). . LEAVING EXAMINATION. 6o5>

Wood, T. B.—Chemistry of Crop Production. Wood, T. B.—Animal Nutrition. > The attention oi teachers is drawn to the Bulletins issued by the Department of Agriculture /'radical Work—Pass and Honours. Every candidate in this subject must have carried out a course of practical work in a School which has been approved after inspection by inspectors appointed by the Schools Board. This course must comprise suitable experiments reasonably distributed over the above syllabus, and the experiments must be the independent work of the candidate. A candidate whose practical work has been carried out in a School which has not been inspected may submit his practical notebook for examination with his written paper. This notebook must bo certified by the candidate's Head master and by his Teacher as being the record of the candidate's independent work. ., : In the case of candidates who have not passed the Intermediate Examination, the practical note-book sub mitted must contain evidence that the practical work of the Intermediate Syllabus has been covered by the candidate.

ANIMAL BIOLOGY— •••-•••» 2W A knowledge of the subject up to Intermediate stan dard is assumed, and questions involving this know ledge may be asked in the examination. In the case of candidates who have not passed the Intermediate examination, the record' of practical, .work must in clude the'work prescribed tor that examination. 1. The structure and life history of Amoeba, Para- - inecium, a simple plant Flagellate. The structure and' life history ot Hydra, the earthworm. • : > Structure and lite history of an insect with a complete metamorphosis. 2. The germ cells and fertilization. Segmentation of the fertilized egg up to the formation of the three germinal layers, as illustrated by 42 §56 I'KTAILS Or" SUUJEC13. .1936,

the frog. Fate of the germinal layers in brief outline. Development and metamorphosis in the frog. 3. General comparison of animals and plants. especially in regard to nutrition. 4. Comparison of external features, and compara tive anatomy of the circulatory, respiratory, digestive, excretory and reproductive systems ot the forms of Protozoa studied. Hydra, earthworm, insect, fish, frog, mammal, ex clusive ot the digestive, excretory and repro ductive systems of the fish. 6. General Physiology, to include some reference to the physiology of the types studied; de tails as for the Intermediate examination, the standard to be that indicated by Huxley. 6. (a) The structure and function of the organs of special sense in man, excluding theories of colour, vision, and hearing, (b) The principal endocrine glands. 7. Each candidate must produce satisfactory evi dence that he has— (a) Personally dissected the mammalian eye and heart. (b) made a practical study of Amoeba; Para- moecium; a simple plant flagellate; Hydra; the earthworm; the external features and metamorphosis of an insect; the external features and lalimcutary canal of tho bird, including the struc ture of a feather; the dissection of the rabbit; the microscopical structure of bone, cartilage, striated muscle, nerve . cell and medullated fibre, epithelia, the gastric mucous membrane, liver, pan creas, kidney, a section of the spinal cord. ,(o) made some practical study of the main stages of the development of the frog -. (external features), (d) performed simple experiments on blood and digestive juices. LEAVING EXAMINATION. 657

Text Books: Buchanan: Elements of Animal Morphology, 2nd Edition. Huxley (revised by Bareroft) : Lessons in Elementary Physiology. For reference: Any elementary text-book of Zoology, such as Bor- radaile or Thomson, for the types mentioned in paragraph 1. Bainbriclge and Menzies: Essentials of Physio logy. Haldane and Huxley: Animal Biology. Holmes: General Biology.

Honours- A knowledge of the subject up to Leaving Pass stan dard is assumed, and questions involving this know ledge may be asked in the examinations. In the case of candidates who have not passed the Leaving Pass Examination, the record of practical work must in clude the work prescribed for that examination. 1. Cell division, mitosis, the chromosomes, meioels (very simply). Heredity. Examples and ex planation ot the mouohybrid arid dihybrid Mendelian ratios. Complex characteristics. The conception of correlation between the characteristics of parent and offspring (as illustrated by the inheritance of stature). The influence of heredity and environment on tho development of the organism. 2. The general characteristics of the following phyla, including their morphology and the physiological principles underlying the function ing of their main systems of organs. Ex cept in the Arthropoda, and Vertebrata, no sub-divisions of phyla are required to bo known by name, but pupils should have some acquaintance from the study of specimens and book illustrations of the general range of - form and modes of life exhibited' in each phylum. 658 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS.. 1936

Protozoa: with Plasmodium. ;. Porifera: Coelenterata : Hydroid and Medusoid types ; colony formation ; the nature of corals. '•'>• :- • Platyhelminthes: tape worm. Nemathelminthes: Ancylostoina. Annelida: very brief comparison of the external features and mode of life of the earthworm, with those of the Poly. chaeta and leeches.' Aithropoda: Crustacea, Myriapoda, Inseota, Arachnida: parthenogenesis, the organisa tion of an insect community such as that of the hive bee or species of ant. Mollusca: The general relation between Gastropoda, Lamellibrauchiata and Cephalopoda. Echinodermata. Vertebrata: Pisces; Amphibia; Reptiles;., Aves; Mammalia (Monotremata, Mar- supialia, and Euthcria). 3. Evolution. Examples of the evidence, from mor phology, embryology, palaeontology, and the geographical distribution of animals (examples to be taken from the Vertebrata). 4. Micro-organisms and disease. Parasitism in general, illustrated by the forms mentioned m Section 2. 5. Lite and work of Darwin and Pasteur. His tory of the discovery of the circulation of the- :'••.• :.. blood. 0. Practical Exercises. ..Each candidate must produce satisfactory evidence - -.(a) that he has personally dissected the frog and '• •-'•• rabbit (excluding the nervous system in the -•'•••- •'• latter)' arid that he has examined - - - " (b) So much as can be. observed without dissection "' (except in the case of the Mollusca) of the- following: three Protozoa in addition to ';.'• • Amoeba and Paramecium; examples of sponge- spicule* and the dried skeleton, of a horny LEAVING EXAMINATION. 659

sponge ; tranavere section ot Hydra (low power only), Obelia, coral; tape-worm; a polyohaete worm, leech; two crustaceans, a spider, cart- " • wheel web of spider; external features of snail, mussel and a Cephalopod, and mantle cavities of snail and mussel; starfish; lizard or snake; two types of Bacteria.

(c) Bryophyta, Marchautia. (d) Pteridophyta, Pteridium, reproduction, macro scopic study of the vegetative structure. (e) Angiospermae, Liliaceae, Amaryllidaceae, Iri- daceae, Gramineae, Kosaceae, Cruciferae, Leguminosae, Proteaoeao, Myrtaceae, Solana- ceao, Labiatae, Compositae. The reproduction, ecology and economic import ance of the types and families in this section should be especially stressed. The work on types should he a study of the evolution from lower to higher forms rather than a scries of isolated life histories. 2. Morphology and Anatomy of the Flowering Plant,. •as for the Intermediate examination, but in greater detail, with the addition of: Distinction between meris- tematic and permanent tissues; Microscopic structure of tissues; Histology of young root, stem and leaf; Seoon- 'dary growth of the Dicotyledon stem. Structure of stamen. Development of ovule, to seed. 3. Plant Physiology.—A detailed knowledge of the chief physio-logical processes in plant life, including re production, with accounts of experiments, which have been performed to illustrate these. See scheme of suggested experiments. 4. Plant Distribution and Ecology.—An elementary knowledge of plant distribution, as studied on at least 3 field excursions, including the modes of dis- jpereal of plants. Accounts and maps, etc., should bo entered into the pupil's practical book. The localities visited should differ from one another as tar as possible- Use of quadrate in studying plant distribution. 5. Brief survey of the life and work of the following! 1. Joseph Dalton Hooker. 2. Baron von Mueller. 3. Robert Brown. 4. Pasteur. 5. Pfeffer. Practical Exercises (See under Honours details). The following books are recommended: — Text-book of Botany—Lowson. or A Text-book of General Botany—Smith, Over ton-, Gilbert, or Botany for Senior Students, Thoday. LEAVING EXAMINATION. 66 J

For Practical Reference: — Flora of Victoria—'Swart. An introduction to Plant Physiology—W. O. .lames. Tho following references will give teachers some idea of how certain experiments can be performed. Uptake of water by seeds—James, p. 231, Expt. 68. Growth—Yapp, p. 36, Expt. 5. Geotropism—Lowson, p. 224; James, p. 217, Expt. 57. Phototropism—.Tames, p. 221, Expt. 65. Plant Ash—Yapp, p. 37, Expt. 6. Carbon Assimilation—Lowson, Expts. 31-36. . Evolution of Oxygen--*Yapp, p. 60, Expt. 21. Transpiration—Lowson, p. 184, Expt. 28. Potomcter—Lowson, p. 183. Respiration—Lowson, p. 204, Expta. 57 and 58. Darwin and Acton Kxpts. 1 and 2. Honours. Includes all School Leaving details for the present year with a mnn- advanced knowledge of 1, 2 and 3, involving a phylogenctic comparison of the reproduc tion of the members of the groups in section (1) to be illustrated by revision ot the types for Leaving Pass, and the following additional types. These should be treated as broadly as possible more from tho point of view of evolution than as individual types. Algae—Vaucheria, Polysiphonia (or some other member of the Florideae). Fungi—Saprolegnia, Penicillium. or Eurotium, Ustilago (Smut), Puccinia (Rust). Lichenes.—Usnea or Parmelia. Musei—A moss. Pteridophyta—Pteridium, Selaginella. Oymnospermae—Pinus. ^4.711/tospermoe—Orcbidaceae, Chenopodiaceae, Bnnun- culaceae, Rutaceae, Scrophulariaceae, and Epacridaceae. Morphology and Anatomy—; Secondary growth in a root. ' : Origin of lateral roots and atoms. '662 DETAILS.OF SUBJECTS, ;]'936

Plant Physiology— .... : Food-storage. j •' Translocation. " Enzymes. Heredity, Evolution and the work-' of Darwin and Mendel. 'Plant Distribution and Ecology— • Types of vegetation such as tropical, temperate, alpine, arctic, desert, coastal and marsh. Practical Exercises, Leaving Pass and Jf»«ours. Every candidate in this subject must have carried out a course of practical work in a laboratory which has been approved after inspection bv inspectors appointed by the Schools Board. • A candidate whose practical, work has been carried out in a laboratory which has not been inspected may be permitted by the Schools Board to submit his practical notebook for examination with his written paper. This notebook must be certified by the can didate's Headmaster' and by. his Teacher as being the record of the candidate's independent work. The pupils' practical. books should give— (1) Sketches and descriptions of the forms studied. , (2) Descriptions and sketches of experiments carried out, or deirionstrations seen. : . (3) Descriptions .of "excursions. Text-books as for Leaving Pass. : Teachers are recommended to consult more advanced works, such as-1- Plant Biology—MaoGregor Skene, Plant Physiology—Raber. Plant Physiology—Maximov.' .' . Plant Geography—Hardy. • .,•.:•'.- .;• Text-book of Bolauy—Strasbnrger... , ;,;.., Flora of Victoria—Ewart. Suggested Experiments: — Mode of measurement of length of vessels, using the ! mercury method. .t Plasmolysis—Lowson, p. ,172, Expti-.i IS. ;,':.' LEAVING EXAMINATION. 663

Growth of leguminous plants in absence of root tubercle bacteria. James p. 91, Expt. 27. Teste for cellulose; ligno-cellulose reactions of fate. .- ' ' James, pp. 67, 68; cuticle under microscope. ' Enzymes—Lowson, p. 200, Expts. 50, 51 and 52 (or use germinating .barley). An oxidase enzyme, as in Potato, Broad Bean, or Apple. Demonstration ot presence and growth of bacteria —Lowson, p. 553. (This, may be simplified by using gelatine, to which a drop or two of meat extract has been added.) Death Point of Oxalis and Tradescantia. Natural arad artificial pollination. Making water-culture solutions. James, p. 150, Expt. 46. Extraction ot Chlorophyll. James, p. 43. Spectroscopic examination of the extract of a green leaf. James, p. 43.

BRITISH HISTORY— Pass. 1. British History from 1603 to 1783. ; 2. Australian History, with special regard to poli tical and constitutional developments. Honours. British History from 1603-1783. In addition— Trevelyan's " England under the Stuarts," chapters 1-10. ! Notes.—(1) The pass paper' in British History will consist of twelve questions, three ot which will be •upon the work prescribed in Australian • History. Not more,than, eight questions are to be answered. For a pass, a.candidate must obtain not-less than 50 per cent, of - the maximum of marks obtainable. The paper will be divided into two sections—(a) Australian His tory; (b) British History. Candidates must answer at least two questions from- section (a). ' •••'-•;.>.. .(2) The honours paper will' be set in two sections. Candidates will be, required•• to take. some...questions from each section. 664 DETAILS OF' SUBJECTS, 1936.

CHEMISTRY— Pass. A fuller treatment of the work prescribed for the In- . . , termediate Examination, and a more detailed study of the following elements and their more important compounds with one another. Hydrogen, chlorine (excluding the oxy-com- poumls), oxygen, sulphur, nitrogen, phos phorus, carbon, (excluding the preparation and detailed properties of the simpler hydro carbons), silicon, sodium, potassium, calcium^ magnesium, copper, zinc, aluminium, silver and iron. - • L'lie chemistry, but not the technical details, involved in the simpler methods ot extraction ot the elements mentioned above (excluding sodium, potassium, calcium, magnesium, and silver), and of the manufacture of glass, superphos phate, and alkali. The molecular and atomic theory. Avogadro's hypothesis. Vapour pressure. Dalton'a Law of Partial Pressures. Vapour density. Dulong and Petit.'g Law of specific heats. Gaseous diffusion. The determination ot molecular weights by the vapour density method. The determination ot atomic weights. The nature of salts, basic and acidic radicles, and the more obvious phenomena ot electrolysis. Dia lysis. Honours. • The details prescribed for the Pass Examination with the addition of the following elements and their more important compounds; chlorine (in cluding the oxy-oompounds), bromine, iodine and fluorine; manganese; chromium; arsenic and antimony; tin and lead; barium; mer cury; the inert gases; and very brief treat ment of cobalt and nickel. The methods of extraction of manganese, chromium, arsenic, barium, nickel and cobalt are not required. The natural classification ot the elements (Periodic Law). LKAVINC- EXAMINATION. 665

A fuller treatment of the molecular theory, includ ing some study of the deviations of gases from the ideal state. Henry's Law of the solu bility ot gases. Graham's Law of Diffusion. An elementary treatment of the modification of the properties of a solvent by the presence of a solute, and the application ot these pheno mena to the determination ot molecular weights in solution by the freezing point and boiling point methods. Reversibility of actions, gaseous dissociation, mass- action and equilibrium treated in a simple manner. Electrolytes and non-electrolytes : au elementary treatment of the ionic theory ot electrolysis, of "strong" and "weak" acids and of double decomposition. The chemical nature, sources and general properties ot the simple hydro-carbons (methane, ethylene, and acetylene), alcohol, acetic acid, fat soap and glycerine. An elementary treatment of the destructive distillation of coal and the fractionation of mineral oil. The principles ot homologous series as exemplified in the paraffins, simple alcohols and fatty acids. The scope and standard of the work for Pass are indicated by the following books: Senter: Text Book of Inorganic Chemistry or Jamieson: Senior Chemistry. It is suggested that teachers should recommend their pupils to read selected parts of Smith's Inorganic Chem istry, edited by Kendall. Practical Exercises—Pass and Honours. Every candidate in this subject must have carried out a course of practical work in a laboratory'which has been approved after inspection by inspectors appointed by the Schools Board. This course must comprise suitable qualitative and quantitative experiments reasonably distributed over the above syllabus, and the experiments must be the independent work of the candidate. A candidate whose practical work has been carried out in a laboratory which has not been inspected may 686 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1936.

be permitted by the Schools Board to submit his practical notebook for examination with his written aper. This notebook must be certified by the oan- Sidate's Headmaster and by his Teacher as' being the record of the candidate's independent work. COMMERCIAL PRACTICE— Pass The Intermediate work prescribed under Bookkeeping ; and, in addition :— Errors in Trial Balance; Adjustments before closing Books; Single Entry problems; Accounts Current; Self-balancing ledgers and adjust ment accounts ; Partnership accounts—forma tion and dissolution—interest on capital— salaries—division of profits; Contingent assets and liabilities: Income and Expenditure Account; Receipts and Payments Statement. Honours. The Pass Work, and, in addition: — Company Accounts—Capital—Preference Shares, Cumulative and non-cumulative—Deferred Shares; Special books—Share Register, Ap plication and Allotment Books, Transfer Jour nal; Preliminary Expenses; Reserves, Reserve Funds, Sinking Funds, and methods of creating same; Methods of providing for Depreciation; Tabularor Columnar Bookkeeping ; Executorship Accounts: Deficiency Accounts; Statement of Affairs; Branch Accounts, excluding branches with a foreign currency. Book of reference— Company Accounts as applied to Australia arid New Zealand by Hislop.

COMMERCIAL PRINCIPLES— .. t'ass. . . Kinds dt,Property, Heal and Personal;. Gommer- ,:iV, oial persons; Contracts;-.Agency; Partner ships; Sale of Goods; -Hire Purchase, Dis- : LEAVING EXAMINATION. 667

tinction from ordinary purchase; Bills of Ex change, Promissory Notes, Cheques ; Insur ance—Life, Fire, Marine—General principles and documents; Bills of Lading, Nature and usual clauses; Nature of. a Company; ! Methods of formation oi different kinds of Trading Companies; Classes ot Shares; Rights and Liabilities of Shareholders. Honours. The Pass Work, and, in addition: — Company Law, as dealt with in Part I of the Vic torian Companies Act, in more detail. Bankruptcy Law, Nature and objects. Acts of Bank ruptcy, Petitions, Methods of Sequestration, Consequences of Sequestration, Statement of Affairs, Property divisible and not divisible; Priority of debts. Discharge, Fraudulent Preferences, Duties and Powers ot Trustee and Official Receiver; Committee of Inspec tion ; Compositions and Schemes of Arrange ment, etc., according to Part , 12 of the Act; Definitions in the Act. Trustees Under Wills-; Nature and - Classification of Trusts; Rights, Powers and Duties of Trustees. .Books ot Reference: — Victorian Companies Act, Part I., where applicable. Federal Bankruptcy Act,, omitting Administration, Jurisdiction of Courts, Evidence, Part XL, and Penalties. Australian Commercial Law and Principles—last1 edition (Mayman). ..; Por Honours; Company Accounts as applied to Australia and New Zealand by Hislop.

DOMESTIC SCIENCE AND ARTS— ;.;. , ,>: Pass- Section A- $tudy of plant forms used as foods, e.g., potatoes, ,* •• , ..cabbage, onions, fruits, etc: . ,-. ; 668 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1930

Section B. Anatomy and Physiology.— (a) A more advanced knowledge of the work as set for the Intermediate examinations. The stan dard to be such as is indicated in Readable Physiology and Hygiene, by J. Argyll Camp bell, on " Digestion, Nutrition, Circulation, Respiration and Excretion.

Section C- The Chemistry of Foods and Dietetics-—Revision and elaboration of the work as sot for the Intermediate Examination. The standard to be such as indicated in Eleuieutary Household Chemistry, by ,J. F. Snell, chap ters XXXI to XXXIX inclusive.

Section ])• General.— (a) The more common animal parasites transmissible to man by meat and vegetables. (b) Occurrence and importance of household animal pests. (0) The origin, choice _ad care ot animal and vege table fabrics in common use. (d) Common poisons and their antidotes. (e) The first treatment of common accidents (not fractures) and simple illnesses. (f) Organisation of work and finances of household. (g) Catering and arrangement of menus. Experimental Work. The candidates must give evidence that they have— (1) Studied the structure of plant forms in Section A; (2) Performed not less than 6 additional experi ments illustrative of Section C. (Intermediate Examination), and of Section C. (Leaving Examination); (3) Carried out (under supervision), the practical application of tho principles involved in Cookery, Laundry work and Housecraft. LEAVING EXAMINATION. 669

Applied Practical Exercises-. Cookery. Grilling, Invalid Cookery, Pastry (rough puff and flaky). More advanced work in Puddings and Cakes. Mak ing of Jams, Bottling of Fruit and Vege tables, etc., in addition to the work done in tho Intermediate Course. Laundry Work. Choice, cost and care ot utensils, labour saving apparatus used in laundry work; choice and economy in the use of cleaning materials. Preparation for washing day, removal of stains, arrangement of wash; making soap jelly, boiling water starch. Washing flannels, woollens stockings (woollen, cotton, silk), and coloured materials; table and body-linen, and household articles. Care and use of ironing table. Starching. Iron ing. Treatment ot lace, coloured embroi dery, silks, and other materials as they are brought into use. Housecraft. Cleaning and polishing materials, home-made or otherwise. Cleaning and polishing metals, woods (plain, painted and varnished), enamel and lacquer ware, glass, brushes, windows; shoes, gas fittings, walls, floors, and floor coverings, baths. Turning out sitting-rooms and bed rooms, daily and weekly routine. Management of gas, oil lamps, candles and electric light. Spring cleaning. Laying of table. Use of labour-saving appliances. Books. The Concise series of Practical Housecraft; 2, Laundrywork, by F. Moat, published by Longmans Green & Co., 39 Paternoster Row, London, E.G.4.; or, Commorisonse Laundry Book, compiled by N:S.W. Cookery Teachers' Association, price 9d. published by Geo. B. Philip i Son, 451 Pitt Street, Sydney. 670 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1936

Housecraft Principles and Practice, by Ruth Binnia and Julie Boxall (Sir Isaac Pitman and .Co.). Honours. This course definitely assumes a more scientific approach to the subject. An elemeritary knowledge of the foundational sciences, physics and chemistry will be ot the greatest value to students taking this course. A more advanced treatment of the work prescribed for Pass with the addition of those aspects of the subject indicated in the details of the course.

DETAILS or SUBJECT: Section A. Elementary Science in relation to the household. The standard to be such as is indicated in Snell, ch. IX to XXXI incl. Section B. Physiology and Hygiene- " (a) The standard and scope of the work is indi cated in J. Argyll Campbell's Physiology and Hygiene. Chapters I to VII incl. Section C- The Cliemistry of Food and Dietetics. A revision arid elaboration of the work as set for tho Pass examination, including a knowledge of the general composition and function of foods; also the dietary requirements bf the body under varying condi tions. Snell: Chapters XXXI to XXXIX incl. J. Argyll Campbell: Chapter VIII. Woods-Hutchinson:. Chapters III. to IX inci-. Section D.-> , , General. -- (a) • Illnesses and defences against illnesses. - Bacteria and other organisms, - insects, etc. ' • • Protection of food and water, infectious diseases, J. Argyll Campbell* Chapter XV. ' • LEAVING EXAMINATION. 671?

I. Textiles—origin, choice and care ot animal and vegetable fabrics. Action of acids and alkalis in each; detection of mixed fibres, bleaching, blueing and dyeing. Snell, Ch. XL to XLIII incl. II. Clothes — uses as protection, influence upon evaporation, absorption and radiation. J. Argyll Campbell, Ch. IX. (c) Ventilation and Heating. J. Argyll Campbell, Ch. X. (d) Organisation of work and budgeting for house hold requirement. Laboratory Work, Pass and Honours. Every candidate in this subject must have carried out a course of practical work in a school which has been approved after inspection by inspectors appointed by the Schools Board. This course must comprise suit able experiments reasonably distributed over the above syllabus, and the experiments must be the independent work of the candidate. A candidate whose practical work has been carried out in a school which has not been inspected may be per mitted by tho Schools Board to submit her practical note-book tor examination with her written paper. This note-book must be certified by the candidate's Head Master and by her teacher as being a record of the candidate's independent work. Candidates must give evidence that they have per formed tho following experimental and practical exer cises : Experimental and Practical Work. Elementary Household Chemistry. (1) At least three experiments to illustrate chemical changes. Snell, Chapters' I to IX incl. (2) Perform at least six experiments- to show the characteristic^ of acids, bases and salts/ 672 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1936

Experimental— Cookery. (a) Determination of amounts in 100 caloric portions of following: meat, vegetable, cereal and nuts. (b) Study of vegetables—structure, classification. Function in the dietary of potato, carrot, onion, bean and cabbage. Experiments to illustrate losses in cook ery in different ways. Examples: potato, carrot and parsnips. Practical— (a) Arrange daily menus for three meals. (a) vegetarian diet. (b) mixed diet, indicating the approxi mate caloric values of each item in the menus. (b) Prepare the dishes in successive lessons suit able for a man engaged in (a) sedentary work. (b) muscular work, at a minimum cost. (c) Prepare a menu ot meals suitable for chil dren six years of age, indicating the approximate caloric values of each, and prepare the dishes. Laundry- (a) Experimental—study the origin, choice and care of animal and vegetable textiles. Examine experimentally the action of acids and alkalis on each using the above in the detection of mixed fibres, (b) Work out a systematic course to be adopted in the removal ot stains from fabrics, cot ton, wool, silk and linen, stained with ink (rod and black), fruit, tea, grease and paint. Show in practical books, specimens which have been treated. Practical.- Test out the above experimental results for practical laundry work and carry out more advanced work than is indicated in the Pass Course. • LEAVING EXAMINATION. 873

Housecraft—Experimental. (a) Perform at least six experiments to show the characteristics of acids, bases and salts. Illustrate specifically their relations to rusts and tarnishes. (b) Soaps and Scouring Powders. Examine at least two commercial soaps and two scouring powders for (i.) Grit and insoluble matter, (ii.) Detergent action of soap. Practical. Apply tho above experiments to the cleaning of metals, wood and carpets. Text Books: — Readable Physiology and Hygiene—J. Argyll Campbell. (Bell and Sons Ltd., London). Tho New Handbook of Health—Woods Hutchin- son. (The Riverside Press, Cambridge, U.S.A.). Elementary Household Chemistry—J. F. Snell. (Macmillan). Hooks for reference :— Chemistry of Nutrition.—H. C. Sherman. (Mac millan). Applied Chemistry—Tinkler and Master. Feeding the Family—Rose. (Macmillan). Primer ot Dietetics.—W. A. Osborne (Ramsay). Domestic Economy — Bidder and Baddeley (Cambridge and University Press). Physics of the Household—C. J. Lynde (Macmil lan). Practical Laundrywork for Home and School— Louise Wetenha.ll (Sir Isaac Pitman & Sons). DRAWING— Pass. Candidates must indicate on their entries whether tlioy are taking Syllabus A or B. In each Syllabus candidates must take all four parte, and for a pass must pass in three Parts; and in the remaining parts must satisfy the examiners that they have some knowledge thereof.

43A 674 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 103G

SYLLABUS A. \ Part I.—Drawing from Models and Objects and Drawing from Memory. The examination will be divided into two Sections. Section 1.—Candidates will be required to draw a group of not more than three models or com mon objects as they appear when placed before thern. The units composing the group will be selected from common objects, such as pails, basins, jugs, boxes, books and the like. The drawing may be executed in out line with the pencil, or in very simple light and shade. Time—1 hour. (Before commencing Section 2 the models will bo removed.) Section 2.—Candidates will be required to make a drawing from memory of the group they have just drawn. Time—30 mins. Part II.—History and Appreciation ot Art: Questions on the history and appreciation ot Art, as for the Intermediate Examination, with the following additions: — Grecian—Grecian Vases. Roman—A Pompeian House. Romanesque—Church of St. Mark, Venice. Renaissance— Italy: Titian, English; Constable. England: Sir Christopher Wren and St Paul's Cathedral. Georgian: Flaxman and Wedgwood; the Furniture Designers, Chippendale and Sheraton. Time—1J hours. Part III.—'Drawing: Plant Forms from Nature.—Can didates will be required to make a drawing from Nature of a spray of leaves, or of flowers and leaves. The work to be executed with the pencil, pen or brush. When executing in silhouette black must not bo used. Time—1 hour. LEAVING EXAMINATION. C75

Part IV.—Decorative Design.—Candidates will be required to design a border, diaper, or a filling for any simple geometric shape, using suitable decora tive forms derived from plant life. The design to bo executed in colour, on a coloured ground, using any medium the candidate chooses, preferably water «olour. Time—2 hours. SYLLABUS B. Part I.—Drawing from Models and Objects and Drawing from Memory. The examination will be divided into two Sections. Section 1.—Candidates Will tie required to draw a group of not more than three models or com mon objects as they appear "when placed before them. The units composing the group will be selected from common objects, such as pails, basins, jugs, boxes, .books and .the like. The drawing may be executed ,in outline with the pencil, or in very simple light and shade. Time—1 hour. (Before commencing Section 2 the models will be removed.) Section 2.—Candidates will be required to make a drawing from memory ut the group they havejust drawn. Time—30 min. Part II.—Geometrical Drawing.—As in the Inter- iriediate Examination, together with, simple Problems on circles touching circles or straight lines; inscription or circumscription of circles within and about circles or other plane figures; toiled figures consisting of tangential arcs or ot semi-circles with adjacent diameters; construction of the ellipse under easy con ditions. Plans and elevations of simple objects' and structures, to scale. Simple isometric drawing, using natural scale only. More difficult exercises in the development of simple solids such as prisms, cylinder, cone pyramid and the like. Time—1J hours. • Part TTT.—Perspective will consist of. easy problems in. the. projection of sunlight shadows cast by, and upon; 576 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1936 simple objects, and upon vertical and horizontal planes. The work to be a freehand drawing, or to be executed with inatheriiatical instruments. Time—1 hour. Part IV.—Drawing in Light and Shade from Casts, using any suitable medium, such as pencil, chalk, char coal, or monochrome water colour. Time—2 hours.

Honours. Candidates must indicate on their entries whether they are taking Syllabus A or B.

SYLLABUS A. Part I.—Drawing from Models and Objects and Drawing from Memory. A more advanced treatment of the work prescribed for Pass. Time—li hours. Part II.—History and Appreciation of Art.—A more advanced treatment of the work prescribed for Pass. Time—1J hours. Part III.—Drawing Plant Forms from Nature. Drawing Plant Forms from Nature.—A more advanced treatment of the work prescribed for Pass, the work to be executed in colour. Tiinc—1 hour. Part IV.—Decorative Design.—A more advanced treat ment ot the work prescribed for Pass, including the employment of not fewer than three tones of colours; or Decorative Design applied to such subjecte as a cover for a school magazine, a portfolio, an initial letter or monogram, a sports programme, a certificate, a simple poster, a menu card, and the like. Time—2 hours. SYLLABUS B. Part I.—Drawing from Models arid Objects, and Drawing from Memory. A mure advanced treatment of the work prescribed for Pass. Tiirie-^-li hours. Part II.—Geometrical Drawing.—As for the Leaving Examination (Pass), with the following additions: LEAVING EXAMINATION. 677

Diagonal scales, and the scale of chords. Sections of nimple =olids and structures. More diilicult exercises in geometric development. ' Time—li hours. Part III.—Perspective.—A more advanced treatment of the work prescribed for Pass. Time—1 hour. Part IV.—Drawing in Light and Shade from Casts— A more advanced treatment of the work prescribed tor Pass. Time—2 hours. Reference Books: — History of Art. "Shown to the Children Series"— Painting: Lawrence Wilson. Architecture: Gladys Wynne. Little Books about Old Furniture— Vol. HI.—Chippendale and His School. Vol. IV.—The Sheraton Period. Geometrical Drawing. Perspective : W. R. Dean and H. Jolly. Perspective ami Geometrical Drawing (Oxford University Press.) ECONOMICS- PASS. Economic Principles affecting the following topics: Wants, Utilities and Welfare; wealth and capital; wealth and income; the national income. Methods of production; factors of production; division of labour and specialisation of pro duction generally; diminishing return; en trepreneurs and industry. Exchange, value and price; marginal utility; con sumers' surplus; specialisation and exchange; business organisation and markets. Demand and supply and market price; elastic and inelastic demand; demand and supply curves. Costs of production; market price and profit; mar ginal producers; representative firm; prices and profits. Land and rent; marginal land-; rent and prices; economic and contract rent; unearned iiore= ment. 678 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1936.

Capital and interest; investment; its risks and rewards; production and the rate of inte rest. • . • •• Labour and wages; causes of wage differences; the demand for goods and the. demand for labour; real and nominal, wages. Management and profits; the reward for forc- ' eight;' the task ot ; management; 'quasi- , ,, rents. .. Monopolies and prices; organisation ot capital; state control of monopolies. Labour organisations; arbitration; basic wage; unemployment. Functions and qualities of money; cash and credit; banking and monetary control; bank deposits and bank notes; central banks. The value of money; general level of prices; index numbers. Credit and business cycles; cheap and dear money; investment and the cycle; specula- • ., • ' tion and crisis. Theory of international trade and foreign ex change; comparative costs; international loans; the balance of payments; rates of exchange. Trade and tariffs; self-sufficiency and diversity-of industries;, employment; dumping; recipro cal treaties. -. • -Functions of Government; industryiand the State; wage and factory regulation.' •' Taxation; theory of taxation; Federal and State taxation-in Australia; public debt. Economic History. The manorial system: growth of the towns; mediaeval trading; Enclosure Acts ^.mercantilism; the wool industry; the Industrial Revolution,' laissez-faire; Fac tory Acts; history of trade unionism; the growth of large scale production and the trust movement. : The paper will be partly Ion.Economics and partly on Economic History, one-third- of • the ;.marks being allotted to Economic History. LEA VINO EXAMINATION. . 679

The topics should be treated as far as possible from .an Australian point) of view. • Students are expected to read the following:

Pass. Crump—A First Book, of Economics. (Macmil- Ian.) ' ••••- :•". Copland—The Australian Econoriiy: Simple Economic Studies. (Angus ' and Robertson.) - . - . Cressy^—Outline of Industrial History. (Mac millan.) Honours- In addition to the books set for Pass students will be required to read: Henderson—Supply and Demand. . (Cambridge Univ. Press.) Lehfeldt—Money. (Oxford Univ. Press.) Irving—Caveman to Capitalist—An Introduction to English and Australian Economic History (Macmillan.) . : ;''

ENGLISH— Pass. •'•!' 1. A short Essay ot about 400 words to test can didates' power of expression, arrangement, and thought. Credit will be given for sub ject-matter, structure, and style. Attention must be paid to handwriting, spelling and punctuation. ., [50 minutes] 2. Precis-Writing.—A short unseen passosre of about 300 words will be.set. Candidates will be-required to reproduce.,in their own words the substance of the passage reduced to about one-third of its original length. The Examiners recommend the use of a Text-Book on Precis Writing, such as: — •MM : -.'Aughterson—Precis Writing (Whiteoinbe and Tombs). -ii. i-r.: •;.-;•• Compton—A Systematic Course' of 'Precis Writing (Harrap). 680 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1936

Or, JLalliiay—Guide to Precis Writing (E. Ar nold). [30 minutes] 3. Two set-books for special study— (a) Shakespeare: Henry IV, Part I; or Bichard II. (b) Milton: Paradise Lost, Book I. 4. Thrae set-books for general reading—- (a) George Eliot: Tlus Mill on the Floss; or Thackeray: Vanity Fair- (b) Essays, English and Australian (Ed. Cowling, O.U.P., 3/-), viz., the essays by Lamb, Hazlitt, Hunt, Deniehy, Clarke, Fitehett and Murdoch. (c) An Anthology of Poetry from Spenser to Arnold (Macmillan). Selections to be studied; — Pope: pp. 311-331. Gray: pp. 339-351. Keats: pp. 495-521. Byron: pp. 635-673. Tennyson: pp. 679-717. In studying the books set for general reading, can didates should endeavour to understand and appreciate each work as a whole. Minute annotational study is not expected, but an English Dictionary such as the " Oxford Pocket Dictionary " should be used. In Sections 3 and 4 two alternative questions on each book will be set. In addition to the Essay, and the Precis, candidates (must answer three (3) questions from Sections 3 and 4, at least One cf which must be from Section 3.

.Honours. PAPER I.— (a) A selection from Chaucer to be studied in the original language. (b) A play ot Shakespeare, to he studied in detail. (c) A Book of Milton's" Paradise Lost. LEAVING EXAMINATION. 681

Five (5) questions must be answered, including a compulsory context-question to test candidates' fam iliarity with the actual text. Books prescribed for December, 1936: Chaucer—Prologue to the Canterbury Tales. Shakespeare—Hamlet. Milton—Paradise Lost, Book I. For reference :— Manly—The Canterbury Tales (Harrap).

PAPER II.—Throe (3) set books for General Reading. The questions will not presume acquaintance with matters of textual criticism or literary history, except, in so far as is necessary tor the understanding ot the prescribed texts. Some choice of Question iri set books will be given. Six (6) questions must be answered. Books prescribed for December, 1936: 1. Shakespeare—Henry IV, Part I. 2. Essays. English and Australian (ed. Cowl ing, O.U.P., 3/-). 3. An Anthology of Poetry from Spenser to Arnold (Macmillan). (Macmillan). Selections to be studied (168 pages): — Four Romantic Poets. Wordsworth, Coleridge, Shelley and Keats (except Endymion)- For general reading, but not set for examination- Groom : Literary History of England (Long mans). Cowling: The Use df English (Mclb. Univ. Press). Modern Poetry, ed. Wollman (Macmillan, 4/6).) Lyon : The Discovery of Poetry (Arnold, 4/6). EUROPEAN HISTORY—. Pass. From the Renaissance to 1914 A.D. 683 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, I936J

Honours. The work prescribed for pass with an intensive study of the; period of Napoleon, 1800-1815.

The Life of Napoleon I. (chapters X to XLI):by Pro fessor J. Holland Rose, is recommended.

FRENCH- GENERAL PRESCRIPTIONS. Puss- (a) Translation into English of passages of French; questions in English on prescribed extensive texts.' (b) Translation into French of short easy passages of English. (c) Original composition iu French. Three subjects arising from the books set for intensive study will be given; a composition of not more than 200 words must be written on one of these. The subjects set by the examiners will be such as are calculated to allow the candidate to make full use of tho vocabulary ' acquired from the study of the above books. (d) Reading aloud from prescribed prose for in tensive Study and Dictation. .

Honours- (a) Translation into English of passages of French. (b) Translation into French ot short passages of English. ' (c) Original composition in French. • Two" subjects will be set on ; the books' prescribed for Knowledge and Appreciation of contents in •' Section (b) of. the • Honours prescriptions. A short essay must be written on one of these. (d) Dictation, Reading aloud from extensive texts. Conversation. '•'. '-' N.B. 1.—Two examination papers will be set for Honours, tho First Paper consisting of passages -for translation from and into French, the Second Paper dealing with Composition. LEAVING EXAMINATION. 683

N.B. 2.—Candidates taking dictation should copy ' down the title exactly as it is written by the examiner, and should know the French names for the punctuation signs, as follow: Point (.) Point d'inteirrogation (?) Point d'exclamation (!) Points de suspension (....) Deux points ('.) ' Point et virgulc (;) Virgiile (,) Parcnth'se (())' Guillemots (" *') Tiret ( ) Trait d'union (hyphen)

SPECIAL DETAILS FOR DECEMBER, 1936, AND FEBRUARY, 1937. Pas*. (a) For Intensive Study— Cornell: Cinq maitres du conte francais (Syd ney, Shakespeare Head Press): — Daudet: L'agonie de la Semillante; La Mule du Pape. Maupassant: Chez un ami; Le loup. France: Riquet. Berthon: Specimens of Modern French Verse (Macmillan), the following pieces: Vigny: Moi'se. Hcredia : Nomcc. Fabie; Les genets. Aicard: Lcgende du chevrier. At least 100 lines of poetry, not necessarily taken from the prescribed books, should be memorised. (b) For Extensive reading— (i.) Moliere: Les fourberies de Scapin (Oxford ed. by Masson). (ii.) Dumas: La tulipe noire (any complete text). N.B.—Extensive texts will be tested by questions to be answered in English on such matters as content, characterisation arid appreciation of pieces set. 684 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, I93C

It is also recommended that at least one number of a magazine, such as " Lectures pour Tous," should be road during the year. Honours. (a) For Translation into English— (i.) Cornell: Cinq maitres du conte fran9ais, as prescribed for Pass, (ii.) Berthon, as for Pass. (b) For Knowledge and Appreciation of Content— (i.) A. France. Le livre do mon ami, etc. (Oxford, ed. by Boyson). (ii.) Mussct; Fantasio and 11 faut qu'unc porto soit ouverte ou fermec. (Blackie, cd. by Prior). At least 150 lines of poetry should be memorised.

GEOGRAPHY— Pass Introductory Note.—-The chief purpose ot Geography as a school subject is to be found in the study of the world in relation to man's activities. It is expected, therefore, that both in the field and in the class room, teachers will emphasise the effects of geographical con ditions upon human life and occupations. The course for the Leaving Examination is based on a fuller study of the syllabus for the Intermediate Examination, together with the following: — Observational—Determination of:— . (a) Latitude at equinoxes and at solstices. (b) Solar time. Ilotation—General proofs and effects of rotation. 1 involution—Effects of revolution. Zone time and the time Zones of Australia. How longitude is determined. General proofs of spherical shape of the earth, in cluding Bedford Level experiment. I'he geographical cycle

Work of ice. Nature and origin of glaciers and io« sheets. Ice movement, ice erosion, deposits left by land and floating ice. Work of wind.—importance in arid climates. Sand dunes, barchans, loess, sand blast erosion. Work of sea along coasts. Description of different coast types such as Atlantic, Pacific, and modified Pacific types. The continental shelf, continental slope. The Great Barrier Reef. Lakes.—Formation and destruction. Study of volcanoes. Types of cones, distribution ot active volcanoes, relation to weak parts of crust. Effects of past and present vuicanicity on man's activities. Nature and distribution of earthquakes. Nature, origin and classification ot the principal land forms— Plains:—alluvial flats, flood, delta, coastal, and lava plains, peneplains, shore plat forms and plains of marine denudation. Plateaux: young and dissected. Valleys and basins. Mountain types: volcanic, residual, fold and block. The build ot each continent, illustrated by sketch maps and cross sections. Ocean surface currents. Their distribution and re lation to wind currents. The production of tides and their effects in open oceans and along coast lines contrasted. Hygrometrie state ot air, dew point, formation of dew, rain, hail, snow, frost, fog, cloud. Planetary circulation of the atmosphere and its causes. Buys Ballot's Law of the Winds. Spe cial study of air circulation over Australia : low and high pressure areas and their weather characteristics, barometric gradient, and study of daily weather charts. Major natural regions of the world considered broadly in relation to man's occupations. A treatment of the principal industries and manu factures of the countries ot the British Em pire, with Australia in fuller detail. United 686 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, lfl'30

States of America, Argentina, France, Italy, Germany, Russia, Japan, China, and the various factors influencing their development, e.g., phy siographic features, climate; mineral wealth, labour, harbour facilities, internal communi cations, markets. The distribution and re lative densities of their population, and the economic effects thereof. The principal ma terials entering into world commerce, with special attention to Australian exports and imports. Distribution of the races making up the chief nations of the world; distribution of the re ligions of the world. Outline of the travels of Columbus, Vasco da Garaa, Captain Cook, Livingstone, and Scott, and a consideration of the geographical and com mercial importance of their discoveries. Construction of maps by methods of conical, globular, and Mereator's projections. Reading of contoured maps and drawing of sections, and descrip tions of the physiography of areas of differ ent character. Practical Exercises—Pass. All candidates must submit for examination indexed Laboratory and Field Note Books. (See general note in Handbook concerning Laboratory Note-books). The note-books should give a record in the student's own words of the field excursions and of the practical work performed by the candidate, but the following are the minimum requirements that will be accepted: — I. Records of astronomical and meteorological observations. II. Descriptions, with sketches and sections of six geographical field excursions (geological in formation should be included only when relevant to a discussion. ot the physical geography of the area described). Descrip tions with sketches of two excursioris illus trating important industries in the locality may replace two of the above field excursions. LEAVING EXAMINATION. 687'

III. Contoured topographic plans* representing three ideal or real areas of distinct and diversified relief, accompanied by descriptions of the physical geography of each area, and by topo graphic sections. IV. A plane table survey of a school yard or other convenient area. Note—" The plane-table survey may be a copy ot a map surveyed under the supervision of the teacher, but each itudent should take a share in its production."

Honours- More advanced treatment ot the work prescribed for the pass examination, together with the following additiona work:— Foucault's Pendulum Experiment. Solar and Lunar Eclipses. Phases of the Moon. The ocean deeps and configuration of the ocean bottom, distribution of oceanic deposits, temperature of the sea at various depths in open ocean and in restricted seas such as the Mediter ranean. . The arid cycle of erosion. Volcanoes; types ot eruptions, geysers. Earthquakes; method of recording earthquakes by the seismograph. Artesian basins; their nature and distribution In Australia, and the origin and uses of ar tesian water. Land forms. The characters, structures and origin of continental and oceanic islands. The struc ture of the Main Divide of Eastern Austra lia, including Victoria and Tasmania, illustrated by sketch maps and cross sections. Study of the development of river systems. All the principal countries of the world must be treated on the lines set out for the countries specified under the Pass Examination. •Set* of S maps suitable for praci.ieal work in Geography may be obtained from the Geological Department, University, at 1/- per Bet. 688 DETAILS. OF SUBJECTS, I9SB

The-boundaries, of the countries of the world; the shifting of boundaries, their coincidence with or departure from natural topographical fea tures, and the recognition of how far politi cal boundaries correspond to or depart from racial and religious divisions. Outline ot the travels of Dampier, Speke, and Flinders. The development ot the geographical knowledge of Australia, illustrated by maps ot different periods. (See Australasian School Atlas— Bartholomew and Cramp.)

Practical Ks.ercivs—Honours. Each candidate must submit for examination hia Laboratory and Field Note Book. (See general note in Handbook concerning Laboratory Note-Books). These note books may include those which have been submitted for Pass, but where the number ot excursions, rriaps, etc., required for Honours exceeds those required for Pass, such additional work must be recorded in the note books submitted. . The note-books should give a record in the student'* own words, of the field excursions and' ot the practical work performed by the/candidate,- but the following are the minimum requirements that will be accepted: — Descriptions, with sketches and sections of nine ,- geographical .field excursions. Descriptions ( with sketches of three excursions illustrating important industries in the locality may re place three of the above field excursions. Contoured topographic plans representing six ideal or real areas of distinct and diversified relief, accompanied by descriptions of the physical geography of each area and by topographic sections. Three of these contoured maps may be replaced by a single contoured map, constructed by the candidate from his own observations made iri the field. . A description of the area and of the method used in contouring must accompany the map. LEAVING EXAMINATION. 689

Note-—Topographic maps other than that mentioned ammediately above, may bo copies of plans duplicated by the teacher or the printed copies obtainable from the "Geological Department, University. Books for reference (Pass and Honours) :— Geography of Victoria—J. W. Gregory. (Whitcombe and Tombs). Structural, Physical and Comparative Geography— J, W. Gregory. (Blackie and Son.) The Pacific Basin -G. L. Wood (Oxford Univer sity Press). The Groundwork of Geography—Wilmore (Geo. Bell & Sons). The World—L. Dudley Stamp and A. Gren- fell Price—(Longmans). A Class Book of Physical Geography— (Simmons and Stenhouse). Australia, Physiographic and Economic—Griffith Taylor, latest Edition. (Oxford University Press). Year Hook of Australia—(Latest Edition). The World—Now Regional Geographies, Book 1 V.—Leonard Brooks. (University of London Press.) Australian Meteorology—Griffith Taylor. (Oxford University Press). Races of Mankind—Fleure (Benn). .Outline of the Physiography and Geology of Vict oria—Edited by Prof. K. W. Skeats. (Melb. University Press).

Subterranean agencies—the movements of the earth's crust, including the formation of anti clinal and synclinal folds and overfolding; fault ing, including the formation ot normal, step, ridge and trough faults ; earthquakes and volcanoes; mountain building (simpler aspects). The chief types ot igneous intrusions. Petrologi'cal Geology—The origin, composition, struc tures, classification and field relations of the • more important stratified, igneous and meta- morphic rocks. Historical Geology—A recognition of the prominent characters of the great subdivisions of the invertebrates and plants, and their value- when found in the fossil state. Methods of fossili/.ation. Classification of the stratified rocks. The great geological groups, their principal subdivisions, and the broad outlines: of tho life forms on the globe during their formation. An elementary knowledge of the stratigraphy of Victoria. Mineralogy—The physical properties, chemical com position and modes of occurrence of the common ores and rock-forming minerals. Tho types of Minerals, Rocks and Fossils to be studied are set out under practical exercises.

* Practical Exercises. All candidates must submit for examination their Laboratory and Field Note-books. (See general note- in Handbook en Laboratory Note-books). The note-books should give a record in the student's own words of the field excursions and ot the practical work performed by the candidate, but the following are the minimum requirements that will be accepted: — (n) Descriptive notes with sections of not less than five geological excursions.

Tl. Sets of 12 maps suitable for practical work in Geology, may be obtained from the Geological Department, University, at 1/- 'per set. 2. Complete sets of Specimens ot Crystal Models, Minerals, Rocks and' Fossils may be obtained from the Geological Pepartment, University, for £6. LEAVING EXAMINATION. 6PI

<(() Not less than five geological diagrams or plana (not necessarily hand-drawn) representing dif ferent ideal or real areas ot diversified geology, with geological sections and descriptions of tbe geology ot each area. •(c) Descriptive notes with sketches illustrating the physical characters, etc., of the following Crystal Models, Minerals, Bocks and Fos sils:— Crystal Models—1, Cubic; 2, Tetragonal; 3, Hexa gonal; 4, Orthorhombio; 5, Monoolinio; 6, Triclinio. Note.—Tho numbers correspond with the numbers of specimens in sets supplied by the Geological Depart ment, University. Crystallographic axes and types ot faces to be shown in sketches. Minerals—1, Quartz; 3, Orthoclase; 4, Labrado- rite; 5, Biotite; 6, Muscovite; 7, Horn blende; 8, Augite; 9, Olivine; 10, Garnet; 11, Chiastolile; 12, Kaolin; 17, Calcite; 18. Aragonite; 19, Magnesite; 23, Barite; 24, Gypsum; 26, Hematite; 27, Magnetite; 28, Limonite; 31, Pyrite; 32, Chalcopyrite; 34, Galena; 35, Sphalerite. Bocks—1, Granite (red); 2, Granite (grey); 3, Granodiorite; 4, Syenite; 5, Diorite; 6, Gabbro; 7, Quartz porphyry; 8, Diabase; 9, Pegmatite; 10, Graphic Granite; 11, Obsi dian; 12, Pumice; 13, Rhyolite; 14, Tra chyte; 15, Daoite; 16, Basalt: 17, Tuff; 18, Breccia; 19, Conglomerate; 20, Sandstone; 22, Mudstone; 23, Shale; 24, Limestone (Tertiary); 25, . Limestone (Palaeozoic); 28, Chiastolite Slate; 31, Slate; 32, Mica Schist; 33, Mica Schist; 36, Gneiss; 36, Gneiss. Fossils—1, Amphistegina; 2, Globigcrina; 3, Tetra- graptus; 4, Didymograptus; 5, Monograptus; 6, Plaootrochus; 7, Favosites;. 8, Cidaris; 9, Lovenia; 10, Spirifer; 11, Terehratula; 12, 692 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, lfl3B

Glyoymeris; 13, Chione; 14, Natica; 15. Tur- ritella; ;16, Amaltheus; 17, Belemnites'; 18, Dalmanites; 19, Calymene; 20, Lepidoden- dron; 21, Glossopteris. Honours. The Examination for Honours will be set on the- work presented for the Pass Examination, together with the following additional work: — Dynamical Geology— The miueralogical and chemical changes by which the valuable constituents of . soil' are made available tor plant foud. Formation of mouo- clinal folds, reversed and thrust faults and the relationship between folds and faults. The chief types of mountains and the processes involved in mountain building. The chief types of igneous intrusions and their modes of origin. Historical Geology.— The great geological groups, their principal sub divisions, including the recognition of ter restrial, lacustrine, marine, glacial and vol canic periods, and periods of great crusta) activity, with special reference to Victoria. Economic Geology.— The nature, distribution and modes of occurrence of important economic rocks, such aa build ing and ornamental stones, road-metals, etc and of economic minerals, and ores, as repre sented in Victoria.

Practical Exercises Honours.,. All candidates must submit for. examination their Laboratory and Field Note Books. (See general note in Handbook concerning Laboratory Note- Books). ..These Note Books may include those which have, been submitted for Pass, but where the number of'excur sions, maps, etc., required for Honours exceeds- those required for Pass, such additional work must be recorded in the Note Books submitted. The note-books should give a record in the student'* own words of the field excursions, and of the practical LEAVING EXAMINATION. 693 work performed by the candidate, but the following are the minimum requirements that will be accepted: — (a) Descriptive notes with sections of not less than eight geological excursions. (b) Not less than twelve geological diagrams or plans (not necessarily hand-drawn) representing different ideal or real areas ot diversified geology, with geological sections and descriptions of the geology ot each area, (r) Descriptive notes with sketches illustrating the physical characters, etc., of the following Crystal Models, Minerals,' Rocks and Fos sils:— Crystal Models—As for pass. Note.—The numbers correspond with the numbers of specimens in sets supplied by the Geological Depart ment. Minerals—1, Quartz; 2, Opal; 3, Orthoclase; 4, Lahradorite; 5, Biotite; 6, Muscovite; 7, Hornblende; 8, Augite; 9, Olivine; 10, Garnet; 11, Chiastolite; 12. Kaolin; 13, Tourmaline; 14, Topaz; 15. Talc; 16, Fluo- rite; 17, Calcite; 18, Aragonite; 19, Mag- nesite; 20, Siderite; 21, Cerussite; 22, Mala chite; 23, Barite; 24, Gypsum; 26, Apatite; 26, Hematite; 27, Magnetite; 28, Limnnite; 29, Graphite; 30, Molybdenite; 31, Pyrite; 32, Chalcopyrite; 33, Arsenopyrite; 34, Ga lena; 35, Sphalerite; 36, Stibnite. Bocks—1, Granite (red); 2. Granite (grey); 3, Granodiorite: 4, Syenite; .5, Diorito; 6, Gabbro; 7, Quartz Porphyry; 8, Diabase; 9, Pegmatite; 10", Graphic Granite; 11, Obsi dian; 12, Pumice; 13, Rhyolite;. 14, Tra chyte; 16, Dacite; 16, Basalt; 17, Tuff; 18, Brecpia; 19, Conglomerate; 20, Sandstone; 21, Sandstone (felspathic); 22, Mudstone; 23,' Shale; 24, Limestone (Tertiary); 25, Lime stone (Palaeozoic); 26, Quartzite; 27, Horn- fels; 28, Chiastolite Slate; 29, Marble; 30, Chert;'31, Slate; 32, Mica Schist; 33, Mica .694 DETAILS OF SUB.IKCTS, 1936

Schist; 34, Talc Schist; 35, Gneiss; 36, Gneiss. Fossils—Same as for pass, with the addition of ten other typical genera to be selected from at least four phyla. Hooks for reference (Pass and Honours) :— W. W. Watts' Geology for Beginners. Rutley's Mineralogy. For Stratigraphy of Victoria, consult:— Outlines ot the Physiography and Geology of Vict oria. Edited by Professor E. W. Skeats. (Melb. University Press). Teachers should consult: — Explanatory Notes to accompany A New Geological Map of the Commonwealth of Australia, by Sir T. W. Edgeworth David. Sydney, 1932. Por geological mapping and section work, consult:— Piatt, John I. and Challinor, J., Simple Geological Structures (Murby).

GERMAN— GENERAL PRESCRIPTIONS. . Pass, (a) Translation 'nto English of passages of Ger man; question in English on prescribed ex tensive texts. (b) Translation into Germ a u of short, easy passages of English. (o) Original composition in German. Three sub jects arising from the books set for inten sive study will be given: a composition of not more than 2U0 words must be written on one of these. The subjects set by the examiners will be such as are calculated to allow the candidate to make full use of the vocabulary acquired, from the study of the above books.- (d) Beading aloud from proscribed prose tor in tensive study, and -Dictation. LEAVING EXAMINATION. 690

N.B.—rSee note re German spelling and punctuation at end of General Prescriptions for Honours. Honours- (a) Translation into English of passages of German. (b) Translation into German of short passages of English. (c) Original composition in German. Three sub jects will be set—one on a general topic, one on a topic chosen from the books set for intensive study, and one on a topic chosen from the books set for extensive reading. A short essay must be written on one of these. (d) Dictation, Reading aloud from extensive texts. Conversation. N.'B. 1.—Two examination papers will be set for Honours, tho First Paper consisting of passages for translation from and into German, the Second Paper dealing with Composition. N.B. 2.—In questions of spelling and. grammatical forms examiners will be guided by the official German regulations as laid down in Der groeze- Duden, Recht- schreibung der deutschcn Spraohe und der Fremd- worter, von Dr. T. Matthias, Bibliographisches Insti- tut, Leipzig. It has, however, been agreed that- the distinction between ss and sz will not be insisted on at the Intermediate Examination. N.B. 3.—-Candidates in dictation should copy down the titles exactly as the examiner writes them, and) should know the German names of the punctuation signs (Satzzeichen), as follow: Pnnkt , Beistrich ; Strichpunkt •: Doppelpunkt ? Fragezeichen . ! Ausrufungszeichcn — Gedankenstrich Bindcstrich (hyphen) " " Anfuhruugszeichen ( ) Elammern (runde Klamiriern) [] Efekige Klammern Absatz (new paragraph) 69G DETAILS OF SUBJKOTS, 1936;

SPECIAL DETAILS ros DECEMBER, 1936, AND FEBETTAHT, 1937. Pass. (a) For Intensive Study— (i.) Schweitzer—Lesebuch fur Quarta und Tertia (ed. 1926), pp. 9-124 incl. (ii.) German Ballads (Dent's Treasuries), pp. 63-87 incl. At least 100 lines of poetry, not ' necessarily taken from the prescribed bonks, sho'ilrl be memorised. (b) For Extensive Reading— (i.) Freytag: Die Joumalisten. (ii.) German Short Stories (Dent's Treasuries), following stories: Die Geschwister. Abseits. N.B.—Extensive texts will be tested by questions to be answered in English on such matters as content, characterisation and appreciation of pieces set. It is also recommended that: at least one number of Westermann's Monatshefte be read during the year. Candidates will benefit greatly it . they subscribe • to "Das deutsche Echo" (published by B. Westermann Co., Zimmerstrasse 35-41, Berlin, S.W. 68. Price 6/- per annum). Honours. (a) For Intensive Study: (i.) Schweitzer: The selections prescribed for Pass, (ii.) German Ballads (Dent's Treasuries), pp. 63- 130 incl. (iii.) Aus Goethes Jugendzeit (Schaffstein's Blaue Band'chen. At least 150 lines of poetry should be memorised. (b) For extensive reading: (i.) Stefan Zweig: Stemstnnden der Menschheit (Insel-Verlag). (ii) Schiller: Die Juugfrau von Orleans. LEAVING EXAMINATION 697

GREEK— Pass- "•'' ' ''• (a) One of the easier Greek plays (omitting the lyrical passages), together with a portion of comparatively easy Greek prose in the Attic dialect, approximately equivalent to the Apology of Plato. The questions set: will re quire attention to grammar, scansion and subject-matter not less than to translation. (b; Translation of a comparatively easy passage into Greek prose. Translation at sight from comparatively easy Greek prcso. The outlines of Greek History to the death of Alexander, together with the geography in volved. Candidates must do satisfactory work in both (a) and (b). , Special Books: — Aeschylus, Prometheus (Bell), omitting 11. 128-192. 397-435, 526-560.' 566-588, 594-608, 687-695. 887-907. • '• ...•., Thucydides I (Macmillan), cc. 24-31, 44-55, 89-117. Honours- (a) A more advanced treatment ot the Special.-Books prescribed for the Pass examination. (b) Passages for translation at sight, consisting of verse and prose in the Attic dialect. (c) Translation from English into Greek prose. The outlines of the History of Greek Literature and of Antiquities, such as is contained in Jcbb's Primer of Greek Literature and (Sow's Companion to School Classics, pp. 00-146, 263- 290. Speciah'-Books: -=- Aeschylus, Prometheus (Bell), the whole: , • Thucydides I (Macmillan), oo. 24-31, 44-55, 89-117. The first paper in both'Latin and Greek will contain passages for Composition and Unseen Translation. Trie Second Paper will contain questions on the Special Books and on History (Pass), or. Literature and Antiquities (Honours). 698 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1936

GREEK and ROMAN HISTORY— Past- 1. Greek History from 595 to 323 B.C., as dealt with in such text-books as those of Bury (smaller edition), Woodhouse, or Oman. 2. Roman History from the beginning to the Battle of Actium, as dealt with in such text-books as those of Shuckburgh (smaller edition), Wells or Pelham. Honours. 1. Greek History from 595 to 404 B.C., as dealt with in such works as that of Bury (larger edi tion). 2. Roman History from 133 B.C. to the Battle of Actium, as dealt with in such works as those of Shuckburgh (larger edition), or Heitland, or How and Leigh or Myron. Recommended for School Libraries: H. R. James—Our Hellenic Heritage (Macmil lan). H. W. Household—Hellas the Forerunner (Dent).

HEBREW— Pass (a) Part or whole of ono of the minor prophets, or part of one of the major prophets, together with six psalms and a selection of Hebrew prose. The questions.set .will refer to grammar, verse form and subject matteras well as to translation. (b) Translation at sight from comparatively easy prose- One passage will be unpointed. (c) Translation of an easy passage into Hebrew prose. (d) Questions on a prescribed period of Hebrew history Candidates must do satisfactory work in both (a) and (b)i For examination purposes the square writing arid hot the cursive script must be used. Correct punctuation is essential. LUAV1NO EXAMINATION. 699

Special Books: Jeremiah, cc. 36, 37. Psalms 1, 12, 14, 17, 28, 72. Ezra. cc. 1, 3. Chronicles I, c. 28. Prescribed Period of Hebrew- History. From the fall of the Northern Kingdom to the com pletion of the Second Temple, together with related geography. Honours. (a) A more advanced treatment or the special books prescribed for the pass examination, together with additional prose and selections from prophetical or wisdom literature. Ths passages prescribed should be studied with regard to their literary structure and their relationship to Hebrew literature in general. (b) Passages for translation at sight, consisting ot both prose and verse. (c) Translation from English into Hebrew prose. (d) Hebrew History from the fall of the Northern Kingdom to the completion ot the Second Temple, together with related geography. Additional Special Books: Isaiah, cc: 32, 33, 34. Ecclesiastes, cc. 11, 12. Habakkuk, the whole. LATIN— Pass. (n) A book of Virgil's Aeneid and a portion of a book of Livy, or their equivalent, together amounting to not more than 1700 lines. The questions set will require attention to gram mar, scansion and subject-matter not less than to translation. (b) Translation at sight from comparatively easy Latin prose or verse. Translation ot a com paratively easy English passage into Latin 700 DETAILS OF SUBJF.CTS, 1U3B.

prose. The outline of Roman History to the death of Augustus, together with the geography involved. Candidates miist' do satisfactory work in both (a) and (b). Special books under (a) above :— Livy, Close of the Second Punic War (Butler), pp. 57-116, XXIX, c. 25 to XXX, c. 45. Vergil, Aeneid IV (Stephenson, Macmillan, or Sldg- wick, C.U.P.). Honours- (a) A more advanced treatment ot the Special Books prescribed for the Pass examination. (b) Passages for translation at sight chosen from authors not earlier than Cicero or later than Tacitus. (c) Translation from English into Latin prose. The outlines of the History of Latin Literature and of Antiquities such as is con tained in Wilkins' Primer of Latin Literature and Gow's Companion to School Classics, pp. 158-237, 257-262. syllabus of Syntax (in addition to the Syllabus for the Intermediate Examination). 1. The more difficult uses of Cases and Prepositions. 2. Uses of Indef. Pronouns and Compound Pronouns. 3. Idiomatic uses of Negatives. 4. Special uses of Tenses, e.g., present and imperfect with iamdudum, etc. 5. Special uses of Participles, e.g., ab urbe condita. 6. Special uses of Gerundive—e.g., after euro, etc. 7. Gerundive of Tendency;, dative of Gerundive (sol- vendo- est, etc.). 8. Translation of English Gerunds—e.g., without wait ing, instead of ..waiting, etc. 9. Potential and Deliberative Subjunctive—Indefinite Second Person ;. vclim adsit, crediderim, etc. 10. Noun clauses in Accusative and Infinitive, with ut with quod; indirect question. Idioms like nescio an, etc. LEAVING EXAMINATION. 701

11. Idioms of quin; conditional sentences depending on quin. 12. Fore ut, futurum fuisse ut. 13. Adjective clauses with Subjunctive. 14. Adverbial clauses, including special idioms — e.g., tantum abest ut . . . ut; subjunctive of alleged and false reason; non est quod venias; dnm, dummodo; cum inverted and frequentative; priusquam, antequam, donee, quoad, dum with subjunctive; cum causal and concessive; limiting use of ita ut; irregular conditions; comparative clauses and idioms. 15. Oratio Obliqna. N.B.—Poetical constructions are to be studied only ih their context, and are not to be imitated in composition.

MATPHEfMATICS. fhneral Note on the new Syllabus in Mathematical Subjects for the School Leaving Examination- I'he Syllabus is planned to provide for two classes of students, namely (i) students whose main interests are not in mathematics and physical science, who wish to take Mathematics as a subsidiary subject; and (ii) students whose interests or abilities are predominantly mathematical, or who wish to study Mathematics as specially relevant to a proposed career. For the first class, the Subject Mathematics I provides a balanced course of suitable standard; tor the second class the three Subjects, Mathematics II, LTJ and IV, together provide a balanced course of higher standard. For these three Subjects, a reasonably good pass in Arith metic, Algebra and Geometry and Trigonometry for Intermediate. Certificate should be regarded as a neces sary pre-requisite. The standard of Mathematics I is a little higher than that of Intermediate Mathematics, and it may profitably be taken by a student whose 'work at Intermediate has not been uniformly up to pass standard. It is recommended that in the school Time Table for students of the class (ii), taking Mathematics II, TLT and TV,' from 12 to 15 periods per 'week be allotted to these Subjects; and that little or no time be allotted 702 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1036. specifically to Mathematics I, which would be largely revision of the previous year's work. Por students of the class (i) Mathematics I should of course receive the usual time-allotment for a Subject. No restriction; is placed upon entry for any combi nation of the four Subjects; but it is recommended that students of tho class (ii) should take Mathematics II, III and TV in the same year. The intended standard of examination in the various subjects is indicated by reference to text-books; these are to be taken as setting the standard in the same sense only as previous examination papers set the standard of examination on an established Syllabus. These text-books are not prescribed. Candidates who have received credit for one or more of Mathematics I, II, III, IV prior to June, 1935, may receive credit lor the remaining subjects after that date as though there had been no change of Syllabus; except that a candidate may not be credited with both Mathematics I, passed prior to that date, and Mathe matics II, passed subsequent to that date.

MATHEMATICS I.— ' Pass. A more mature treatment of the work prescribed for Intermediate Algebra and Geometry and Trigonometry, together with the necessary Arithmetic. In particular, a more extensive knowledge will be required on tho following topics: Ratio and proportion in Algebra and Geometry, including the theorems: The areas ot similar triangles and quadrilaterals are as the squares on corresponding sides. Variation, including simple cases of Joint Varia tion, but' excluding formal theorems thereon. Indices (positive and negative, integral and frac tional) and logarithms. (Bookwork will not be asked in the examination.) Arithmetic and finite geometric progressions. The trigonometric formulae LEA VINO EXAMINATION. 703?

sin A _sinB_sinC a. h c cosA = ? 2bc A = JfecsinA, i and their use in simple problems. JVotc 1.—The intended ;tandard of this Syllabus is - about that of the relevant portions of: (1) Duroll—A New Algebra for Schools, Parts I-IIt. with (2) Fordcr—A School Geometry. or Foster—Plane Geometry, Vols. I and TJ. and (3) Durell and Wright—Elementary Trigonom etry, Parts I and II. or Siddons and Hughes—Trigonometry, Part I, excluding examples marked with an asterisk. Those are suitable and sufficient text-books, but are not prescribed. Note 2.—A Candidate may submit a Note Book contain ing an account of.work done during the year in one or more of the topics set out in the Optional Section of the Course ot Study in Mathematics I. A mark not exceeding one-fifth of the pass-mark will be awarded tor the work shewn in the Note-book, and will be added to the mark awarded for the candidate's examination paper. The ubmission of a Note-book is optional.

Honours. MATHEMATICS I.—HONOURS. AiGEBBA. Elements bf the theory of complex numbers; Speci fication by means of real numbers in the> Cartesian (real-imaginary) and polar (modu lus-amplitude) forme. The complex-number plane'. Definitions of addition, subtraction, • multiplication and division, and the funda mental" laws tor these operations. < Use of - . . polar specification in cases of repeated i mul tiplication .ior. division and.- integral powers. 704 DETAILS. OF SUIUECTS, 1936.

The solutions of the equation zn — a when n is an integer, and a any complex number; fractional powers, (Demoivre's theorem is hero included). Note.—In connection with this work it is desirable that there should be some review ot the principles of the Algebra of real numbers, with reference in par ticular to the distinction between definitions, analysis loading to. definitions, and proofs. Theory of polynomials and polynomial equations: Relation between a factor of a polynomial P(z) and a root of the corresponding equation P(z) = 0. Tho decomposition of a polynomial into linear factors is unique (the theorem that every polynomial equation has a root being assumed). Relation between repeated linear factors of a polynomial and roots of .. '..- tho derived equation. Conjugate roots and factors in the case of a polynomial with real coefficients. Simple examples of this theory (for example factorization of . . 2" +a«, zZn 4.22-nan cos uft + cfin;. , calculation ot cos 2ir/5). Relations between roots and coefficients ot an equa tion. Calculation ot simple symmetric func tions of the roots. Equations with related roots (methods of- symmetric functions and of elimination). ';. • Transformations ot expressions and solution of equa tions, with special reference to symmetry, homogeneity and degree. Graphs of polynomials and rational functions of x in simple cases, and of powers of x. Graphi- cal considerations relating to the number and -. position of real roots of polynomial equations, and approximation to roots by trial. - Condition that' ax^ + lnfi + cz^ + 2fyz + :'gzx + 2hxy - !•-.: may have factors linear in x, y, z. Graph of . the function of x defined implicitly by a quad ratic equation' ax% + 2hxy+ Tnfi +2gx + 2fy + ' V c = 0;(a, b, • . . e numerical)! • V Elements of the theory of selections and arrange- .-.-,..' iments,'with simple examples. LEA VINO'EXAMINATION. 705

'''- Finite.-series: _ Binomial theorem (positive integral '•*" ;V •".•' index); i)iiV-™-3. S-'ooa (o+ «#)., Ssin (a + n/i). Expression of cos n# and sin nfl as-polynomials " in bos 0- arid 'sing., Expression ot cos"0 sinm0 "' • as a series ot cosines or sines ot multiplies of $. Determinants. Elementary properties of deter- r , • minants, with application to tho solution of ... linear equations. Elementary ideas oh inr consistent'. and redundant linear equations^ Elementary cases of elimination. Note.—Questions involving determinants of higher -order than the fourth; and the product theorem, will not be set.' t .-.••' MATHEMATICS IX— Pass. 1... ALOKBBA. The Algebra prescribed for Mathematics I, and in addition: '.'"i Theory of the quadratic function and equation, •'•''' viz.': solution of literal quadratic equations, .'•;; ' relations between the roots and coefficiente, ';.''"''; ;' conditions ,for the roots to be'real, equal or s'••'•• ' unreal; conditions, for a quadratic function to be essentially one-signed or not, and its •;.i graphs in the several cases. Maximum or r •••'-. -- minimum value of a quadratic function. The Remainder Theorem, with application to fae- . t'orisation-and the roots of. simple polynomial .. . ; "'•• equations; •• sketching of" graphs of poly- :••- . nomials such ae can be readily factorised. ;' Harder equations, including equations involving ''' ''.' " "surds, linear equations in three unknowns, ''if -.',/• 'and' simultaneous quadratic equations in two unknowns without first degree terms ., (numerical, coefficiente). Simple cases of ,' ',":'• , literal equations of these types. ' '•' The infinite geometrical progression. Interest and • : ••<• !•-:• payment :by. instalments. Recurring deci mals.- .,-,.:.. 706 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1936.

A higher standard in manipulative work will ba expected than inl Mathematics I, with a view to developing some appreciation of Alge braic " form," including features such as degree, homogeneity, symmetry and gene rality. Note-—The intended standard of this Syllabus is about that of the corresponding portions of the Syllabus in Mathematics I in force in 1934.

2. Co-OBDINATE GEOMETBT. The general form (extent, shape, symmetry) of the- curves defined^ by equations of the form aff-f by-j-c= 0 , y =ax2 -\~bx-\-c , x~ay~ , x^la'-'+y'2!!,'2 =1 , a.-«/aa -y'ijl* = l , xy = c , (numerical coefficients). The general formulae for: the distance between, two points, the co-ordinates of the point hi-. secting or trisecting the join ot two points, the equation of a straight line specified by its gradient and one point or by two points, conditions for parallelism or perpendicularity of straight lines, angles between two straight- lines. The equation of a circle of given* centre and radius; centre and radius of a circle whose- equation is given. Intersections, or in particular tangency, of a straight line with a curve, viz.: Equation of the tangent at a given point of a given curve- (by finding what gradient gives coincident intersections). Equations of tangents from a> given point or in a given direction to a given, curve (by determining, the parameter in the-

tThe focus-directrix property might • form the subject (in a numerical case) of a locus-problem,, but should not be takeu as- the primary definition' of a conic for'the purposes of this Syllabus. "•"Given," here and below, means that the coefficients or co ordinates are specified numerically, not literally,.- LEAVING EXAMINATION. 707

' equation so as to give coincident intersec tions). Formula for the gradient at any point of a given parabola. Simple problems (geometrical properties, loci) in volving the above theory. Note-—There are various stages of generality in Co ordinate Geometry, e.g., (i) we may work with variable or unknown points on definite curves, as when we find the intersections of the line z + 2i/= 1 and the ellipse 4*2+2i/J — 5; (ii) we may work with variable or un known curves, when some or all of the coefficients in .their equations will be literal. The emphasis in this fiyllabus is intended to be on numerical treatment and on working from first principles, but the use ofl general formulae is necessary in all but very elemen tary problems, and a knowledge of certain formulae is prescribed. The intended standard of the Syllabus cannot be stated by unqualified reference to a text-book, as no avail able book is sufficiently elementary. The use of selected portions of Tuokey and Nayler,' Analytical Geometry, or Chigncll and Fryer, Co-ordinate Geometry and Elementary Calculus, is recommended. The diffi- •culty of the Examination questions, will not exceed that of the following Examples from Tuokey and Nayler: , p. 35 Ex. 24 p. 72 Ex. 1002, 104^ p. 36 Ex.-30. 33 p. 81 Ex. S> p. 39 Ex. 50-'5'2 p. 86 Ex. 16s . p. 42 Ex. 22, 23 . p. 92 Ex. 1-5^ p. 66 Ex. 14', 17 p. 94 Ex. 2.3 3,3 5s p. 69 Ex. 58*, 50 • p. 96 Ex. 11 ' p. 71 . Ex. 91 '., p. 98 Ex.473, 483 Honours. ''','•• I." TUNE. GEOMETRY. Euclidean Geometry. !Medial section, :and construc tion of, a regular pentagon. Orthocentre. Nine-points circle. Sim.°on's line. Inversion of straight-lines and 2 To be worked from .first principles. 8 Suitable, provided the ." literal " data are made numerical. 70S DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1936.

circles.. Application to the construction ot. circles to •touch , given straight . lines: and circles. Ptolemy's Theorem. ; Geometry of signed line - segments.. and angles. Theorems' of Ceva, Menelaus, and Desargues. Har monic ranges and pencils; harmonic properties of com plete quadrilateral'- and quadrangle.'' ; (Attention is drawn to Forder, 'Higher' Course Geometry, as a suitable text.) • >• '

II. ANALYTICAL GEOMETRY. •-.•' Analytical geometry of the straight line,. using rec tangular- axes.: Change of rectangular axes. General proofs of tho addition theorems in Trigonometry. . „ • Deduction of the equations of conies (including'.circles) from geometrical definition. Elementary properties ,of ellipse, parabola and hyperbola, including -tangents, normals, diameters, asymptotes, derived from their simplest equations, but with use of general methods. Use of parametric specification. . Notes.—1. Methods of pure geometry, should, be ..used where they are :more. convenient ,than analytical ariethods. 2. Tho,intention.iri this course,should be the- establishment of a body (of geometrical, theorems as (well as the practice of .analytical methods. •'

III. SOLID GEOMETRY. A more .advanced; treatment of the work in Solid Geometry, prescribed for Mathematics III (Pass); anct in addition:— . . ." . ., : Direction cosines, and the angle between two direc- . tione. Elementary calculations relating to polyhectra, in cluding the application of Euler's theorem to> regular polyhedra. ...'.. The sine and cosine formulae for a spherical tri angle, with simple applications to the earth and celestial sphere. r V) -. iV.

';,',(Attention is drawn to Foster, SoKd..(7cpmyjW^.LasJ>a, suitable text; and, for teachers* reference, to Lines', £olid Geometry). ••' -•• - '•" . LBAVINO EXAMINATION. 7Q9

MATHEMATICS. LTJ.— ' ' -.-••"• Pass. -; 1. TEIQONOMBTBT.

; Trigonometrical functions of angles of any magni tude, their periodicity properties and graphs. . . The.;standard formulae for the solution of triangles. Circular measure, and its application to the sines and tangents of small angles. Arc-length and area of a circular sector. The Addition Theorems; transformation of sums and products: simple identities. Simple .trigonometric equations; (ability to give all • solutions in a specified range, but not neces sarily to quote a formula for the • general solution, will be expected). : The expression of asina;-}-i)cos.i; u','' numerical) in- tho form rcos(x-i-c) or rsin (x + d). Simple problems in two and three dimensions, in cluding cases of the method of projection.; ' Note.—The intended standard of this Syllabus 'is about that of the relevant portions of Siddone and Hughes, Trigonometry. Parts I, II, or Durell and Wright, Elementary Trigonometry, Parte I-III. The examples marked with an asterisk in Siddona and Hughes are in general rather beyond the standard of attainment that will be expected.

•; .2. SOLID GEOMETRY. Simple calculations (lengths, angles, areas, volumes) relating to prisms, pyramids, • cylinders, spheres and cones, including radius and arc- length of great and small circles of a sphere in simple cases, but excluding .the formulae ': tor the surface area and volume ot a spherical segment. The following propositions: If each of three planes intersects the other two,' ' either the throe lines of intersection are concurrent, or each is parallel to the other"- two. .-..•'••'.•••.•• Three or more ' parallel planes cut all transversal lines proportionally. •'- -- •'-••• ;710 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1936i

The diagonals of a parallelepiped are concurrent and bisect each other. The lines joining the middle points of opposite edges of a tetrahedron, and those joining the vertices to the centroids of the opposite faces, are concurrent. Construction of the perpendicular to a plane from an external point. Construction of the common perpendicular to two skew lines. Notes.—1. The scope and standard of the intended work is about that of Foster, Solid Geometry, Chapters \XL to XLV, omitting sections and examples marked with two asterisks. 2. The intention of this work is primarily that it should provide training in the power to grasp a configuration in space that is described in words or represented conventionally in a diagram. The foundation for this training lies in the constructions (or improvisation) and use of simple models, and the course should include a certain amount of this prac tical work. Honours. . • CALCULUS. An elementary course iii differential and integral calculus, treated as far as possible from the geometrical point of view, with elementary geometrical and physical applications. Variable quantities; functional dependence of one variable on another; the general properties of the elementary functions (algebraic, trigonometric, exponential and logarithmic) as exhibited by their graphs; continuity ; limiting value; differentiation and derived functions; fundamental cases obtained from first principles ; deriva tives of sum, product, quotient, function of a function, inverse functions, with applications; mean value theorem ; applications of derived function (geometrical, curve sketch ing, maxima and minima, theory of equations, small corrections, kinematics). . Integration in simple cases, including the methods of ohange of variable and integration by parts and the use of partial fractions; geometrical treatment of the definite integral; simple applications (areas, volumes :power series inequalities-for sin«, cos«). ;• ':•: LEAVING EXAMINATION. 711

The standard properties and applications ot hyper bolic functions. The solution of differential equations of the following types: (1) first order equations where the variables are separable,, (2) linear equations of the first order, (3) second order equations such as are effectively of types (1) or (2), or become so on taking the original dependent variable as independent variable. Convergence of infinite series : elementary' notions and the simplest tests; the values ot the coefficients in an assumed power series development of a function (Taylor's series); the power series for e*, sin x, cos x, artan x, log (\+x), (l.+ .v)a deduced as illustrations• ot Taylor's series or (where more convenient) by integration of another power series.

MATHEMATICS IV.— /'as*. 1. CALCULUS. The meaning of d limit and of a derivative. Differ entiation of x' for integral and'simple frac tional values of n, and of sums of such terms. Integration as the inverse of differentiation, applied to sums of terms of the type x" (n not equal to

. •-,!).; • - The simplest geometrical and physical applications of differentiation and integration. Estimation of the derivative of a function from its graph. Approximate evaluation of areas by : counting squares. Note.—The intended scope and standard of this Syllabus is about Tthat of Fawdry and DUrellj Calculus for Schools,' chapters I-VII; or Milne and 'Westcott, A !First Course in the Calculus, chapters 1-3 and 5-9.

2. MECHANICS. Kinematics of rectilinear motion: Displacement (»)i-- velocity (t>), acceleration (

":i ; from-a;given a'-relation or graph. Formulae for uniformly accelerated motion'.'''Motion '• • -. : under gravity is uniformly ' accelerated.* •Determination of g. Independence : of hori zontal -and vertical motions* and' simple oases of the motion of projectiles. Force and its measurement (gravitational system): The spring balance and- Hooke's Law.* - .'• Action, and reaction.* The lever "and Prin ciple: of Moments.* Body in equilibrium , J) , under, parallel forces or not more than three non-parallel forces. Resolution of a force into perpendicular components.'* The Laws of Friction.* Simple machines and the Principle of Work*: the inclined plane, block and tackle (second) system of pulleys), wheel and axle, differen tial pulley, cog wheels, screws. Efficiency of a machine. Power. Capacity of a body ;to do work in virtue of its motion, i.e.. Kinetic • Energy. The energy- equation. Conservation of energy. . Momentum and the momentum-equation. Conser vation of momentum.* "•• -Notes.—(1) It is considered-better in this elementary course to assume such principles as are familiar from ordinary experience, or easily verified by rough experi ments conducted in class, rather than to enter ontheir abstract proofs from Newton's Laws of Motion. Tho principles marked- with an asterisk (*) above belong to this category. The course is treated in this way in Durell, A School Mechanics^ Part I—which covers the syllabus at about the intended standard. This treatment is however not proscribed. . (2) The work in Mechanics should be brought into relation .with the work in Calculus so far as is. pos sible.: - •;.-•.'. Honours. MECHANICS. '-->• Dynamics of a particle-- The equation F = ma, ii- Hi-.'! where m -is constant for any given body, as : :. ,.'.•;.';! a generalisation' • supported by -experience. . _-.' • .:'.;> The law' of action ^and'reaction. The vecto- LKAVINfi ,-KXAMINATJON-.; .7 13

rial character of displacement, velocity,. ac celeration and force. Motion of a particle in- a straight line (1) under constant force, (2) under variable force (simple cases only, but including simple harmonic . . motion), (3) with friction...... Parabolic motion under gravity. Motion in a circle, including small oscillations of a , '.. simple .pendulum. The principles of work and conservation of energy; potential energy ot a particle in a gravita tional field, and of a stretched elastic .. : string. .... Kinematics' of relative motion. Dynamics of motion relative to a frame of reference sub ject to (1) uniform velocity, (2) uniform ac celeration, relative to the standard frame of .., , reference.i • -• • ;• Dynamics, of a system- . The principle ot linear momentum., ...Impact. . .The- principle ..,,.of ,„•/ energy., for-: frictionless systems. ,. Applica- ' l. -..' tions of the principles of momentum, and ; energy..- r-.- Elementary treatment of ;• rotation of a rigid body about a fixed axis. Moment of inertia ot a uniform circular disc, about its axis, of a uni form rod about one end, and of bodies formable from, these by addition or subtraction (e.g. a ring bounded by concentric circles). Time of oscillation of-a rigid pendulum. . .Statics. Equilibrium • of a;'.particle,, including simple, cases .of forces,-in three: dimensions. -Equilibrium of a .rigid body; under coplanar forces. Laws of friction. Efficiency, of machines. •Centre of gravity. ":',-:.:" Simple frameworks (graphical methods , may .be ' used,;,but,are not prescribed). ., ' Simple cases of stablility of equilibrium. ' Note.—As compared with the. Pass; course,' the Honours course should be both more systematic and •more"deductive. -• For instance,- principles like those of Moments and'Linear Momentum, which oanbe deduced >froa'yimor*i--fundamental -principles;:'should be so de duced-:'-Free use should-,' where'.appropriate,-be made of Calculus. 714 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 193«

MUSIC— The certificates of the Australian Music Examinations Board passed as follows will be accepted. A. Grade IT (Practice) together with Grade II Theory, Grade II or Musical Perception, taken at one Examination (to count as two subjects). H.

hygrometers (descriptive Treatment). The mechanical equivalent of heat, and the quantitative specification ot heat in terms.-of energy. Electrostatics.—Quantity of electricity; electrostatic unit ot charge. Experimental study of the distribution of electricity on special forms of conductors. Faraday's ice-pail . experimente.. Electrophorus. Potential: unit of poten tial. 'I'he electric field; lines ot force. Capacity of a conductor; unit of capacity. Current Electricity.—Voltaic cell (without theory); e.m.t.; current strength; resistance; Ohm's Law; the ohm; the volt; the ampere. Re sistance of a system of conductors • (1) in series, (2) in parallel. Wheatstone's Bridge. Heating due to current (quantitative treat ment). Faraday's first law of electrolysis. Magnetism and Electromagnetism. — {Simple treatment only)-—The law of force between poles. The magnetic field; lines ot force. Field due to magnet- in the end-on and broadside-on positions.* The earth's field; dip and declination (without corrections^. Tangent magnetometer.* The electro-magnet Fields due (1) to long, straight conductor, (2) to solenoid. Moving-magnet galvanometer. Effect of magnetic field on conductor carrying current. Moving-coil galvanometer. Lenz'a Laws of electro-magnetic induction; experi ments illustrating electro-magnetic induction and the factors controlling the induced effects. The induction coil. The principle of a simple - type ot direct current generator. (Moving coil in magnetic field and commutator.)

Honours. There will be two papers on Leaving Honours Physics Alternative questions will be set in both of these papers on that part of the Syllabus set out below under the •These parte of the syllabus are to be treated quantita tively; ' . • ' . 716 ; DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1936. heading "'Compulsory Subjects for Study." Questions will also .be set on that part'of the Syllabus set out under the heading " Optional Subjects for Study."

.'.',' Compulsory Subjects for Study. In addition to a fuller treatment of the work pre scribed for Pass: — Mechanics.—Circular motion ot constant speed. Sirriple Harmonic motion; oscillation of a particle suspended by a spring; period of the simple pendulum; measurement of power, brake-dynamometer. Properties of Matter.—Essentials of the history of the development of .Newtonian dynamics includ ing the contributions- of - Copernicus, Tyoho Brahe, Galileo, Kepler, -and Newton, and the theory' of the motion iii a^ circle of a planet round a Sun of relatively large mass. Measure ment of Gravitational Constant (Cavendish or , ' Boys' Method). Stress and Strain. Young's modulus. Method of measuring surface tension by detachment of ring or, plate. Heat.—Radiant heat (see ;under' light).-' Thermal ...conductivity; measurement for solids. Electricity-—Condenser;'' Leyden ,.jar; capacity '. •" , 'of condenser and of system of.condensers in parallel. Condensing electroscope.' The poten- '•"•.\ tiometer. Secondary cells., The alternating '•"'• current generator and transformer.. . History of the idea that negative electricity • is atomic, " • including Johnstone Stpney's arid Helmholtz's deduction of.the atomic,character of .'electricity frh'm Faraday's law o'f electrolysis and the atomic constitution of matter, descriptive treatment of -'i-hoiuson's discovery ot the •.; electron, and Millikan's experiments.!, Wilson's .!;,,•' ray track photographs showing the properties' ,',!• • ,.of electrons.. .,.,.-• -• • ;•• . ,, . W-.ave- Motion-—i-Elements ,'of! wave-motion; • relation between frequency, wave-length, velocity;'' graphic specification. Reflection, refraction. LEAVIKG KXAMIXATIONi" 717'

interference, stationary waves. • The applica tion of the above to. sound and, electromag netic waves; Resonance. Sound.-—The physical basis of the sensation - of loudness, pitch and quality. Pitch. Vibra tion of strings and organ-pipes.: . Beats. £igM.—Intensity; simple photometry. One method of determining the velocity. Plane and spherical mirrors. Prisms; single thin lens. Focal length from position of object and its image. . Magnification. Determination of - refractive index by means of a prism and by total reflection. Dispersion; the spectrum. Descriptive, treatment of the following opti cal instruments; astronomical refracting1 telescope, compound microscope,. camera, and projection- lantern. -.'-'• Introduction to the idea that radiation is a single entity: tho electromagnetic spectrum with special reference to the visible portion, "radiant heat," arid Hertzian .waves. The reflection and refraction of "radiant heat," its emission and absorption, the similarity of its properties to light. Hertzian waves, their production, detection, reflection, and formation of stationary waves, as in Hertz's experiments.

Optional Subjects for Study. Descriptive treatment of the following : The visible phenomena ot the discharge of electricity through gases at low pressures, and one method of production of the necessary low pressure. X-rays : production ; photographic and fluorescent actions: ionization of gases by X-rays as illus trated by Wilson ray track photographs. Thermionic valve: evaporation of thermions, the two electrode valve, its action as a rectifier. The photo-electric cell, a simple application. Candidates will be expected to have seen simple experi ments illustrating the foregoing phenomena. 718 DKTAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1936-

Practical Work—Pass and Honours. Every candidate in this subject .must have carried out a course of practical work in a laboratory which haa been approved after inspection by inspectors appointed by the Schools Board. The course for Pass muht comprise at least fifteen suitable experiments reasonably distri buted over the above syllabus, and the experiments must be the independent work of the candidate ; an ad ditional fifteen experiments must be carried out by candi dates for Honours. A candidate whoso practical work has been carried out in a laboratory which has not been inspected may be permitted by the Schools Board to submit his practical notebook for examination with his written paper. This notebook must be certified by the can didate's Headmaster and by his Teacher as being the record of the candidate's independent work; FACULTY OF AGRICULTURE

DETAILS OF SUBJECTS AND RECOMMENDA TIONS FOR THE- ANNUAL AND SUPPLE MENTARY EXAMINATIONS TO BE HELD EN THE FOURTH TERM, 1930. Students are advised that they are expected to use a considerable part of the Summer and August vacations for reading purposes. In some cases a list of suitable books will be posted on the appropriate notice boards; in other cases the lecturers should be consulted.

AGRICULTURAL BACTERIOLOGY— General Bacteriology and Bacteriological Technique. Isolation, Cultivation, Staining and Characters of Micro-organisms. The Principles ot Immunity. The Bacteriology of water supplies for farm and •factory. Micro-organisms in air. The Bac teriology of Milk, Butter and Cheese. Starters. Soil Bacteria—A practical study of the economic as pects of the various species of soil bacteria, in relation to fertility. The relation of micro organisms to nitrification, dentrifioation, and aunmonification in the soil. The influence of artificial fertilisers. Alcoholic fermentations. Tanning, Acetic fermen tations. Disinfectants, etc. Text-books: — Mackie and McCartney—An Introduction to Practical Bacteriology. For reference: — Oi-la Jensen—Dairy Bacteriology. (2nd edition). Muir and Ritchie—Manual of Bacteriology. (9tb edition). Russell—Micro Organisms of the Soil. Waksman—Principles of Soil Microbiology 40 720 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1936,

AGRICULTURAL BIO-CHEMISTRY— Lectures twice a week for three terms. The Carbohydrates of the vegetable and animal king doms, including their occurrence, chemistry, and the changes they undergo in vital processes. Fats, Waxes, ctud Oils, vegetable and animal. The Lipiiis and Sterols. The Proteins. Classification. Physico-Chemical pro perties, and methods of purification. Chemistry of the proteins with reference to work done on the elucidation of their chemical constitu tion. Colloidal Chemistry. Colloid reactions and their im portance in vital processes. Enzyme Action. General properties and nature of their actions. Special fermentations, e.g., alco holic, lactic, butyric. Bacterial fermentations. Foodstuffs. Their chemical composition and nutrient value. Methods of chemical analysis. Vitamins. Food Preservation. Cool storage of fruit and meat. Milk and its Products. The chemical composition of milk, with the chemistry of the important ingredients. Milk products. Cream, butter and cheese. Pigments. Haemoglobin, chlorophyll, carotin, lipo- chromes, and their derivatives. Animal Metabolism. The use of inorganic salts, carbo hydrates, fats and proteins, with their economy in the animal body. Special Plant Products. Essential oils, gums, gluoo- sides, and alkaloids. The Chemistry of the Hormones, Vitamins, etc. Practical Work will include qualitative and quantitative exercises covering the above subjects. Students are advised to read the Monographs on Bio chemistry. Longmans, Green &, Co.

AGRICULTURAL BOTANY— 1. Agricultural.— Reserve food materials in plncts. Root absorption. AGRICULTURE. 721

Transpiration.- . Sources oi Nitrogen. Carbon assimilation. The digestion ot reserve materials. Respiration and Fermentation. Growth. Types ot reproduction in plants. Seeds—Germination, longevity, testing, recognition, impurities, structure, dispersal. Structure ot stems and roots. Characters and origin of the commoner timbers. Shelter breaks, and farm plantations. Soil types and their characteristic floras.

2. Systematic. An account ot weeds and cultivated plants of such native families as are of economic importance. Three lectures per week and four fours' practical work a week, for three terms and Field Excursions. Students to present not less than 100 mounted herbarium specimens ol economic plants. Specimens should bo in flowet' but fruit sliould also be obtained and included where possible. Students are required to enclose with each mounted specimen brief notes regarding the plant. They are advised to begin the collection during the previous .year. Text book: — Ewart—Flora of Victoria. Books for reference:— Percival—Agricultural Botany. Miller—Plant Physiology. MacQregor Skene—Biology of Flowering Plants. Maximov—The Plant in relation to water.

AGRICULTURAL CHEMISTRY— Physical Chemistry, involving more advanced treat ment than in Chemistry Part I. The physical and chemical properties ot soils, ferti lisers, insecticides, and fungicides. 722 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS. 1936

Laboratory Work— Simple quantitative analysis, volumetric and gravi metric. Physical and chemical analysis of soils. Examination of fertilisers and other agricultural materials. Text-Book :— Russell—Soil Conditons and Plant Growth. Books for reference: — Vageler—An Introduction to Tropical Soils. Comber—Scientific Study of the Soil. Keen—Physical Properties of the Soil. Robinson—Soils, their Origin, Constitution, and Classification. Prescott—The Soils of Australia in relation to Vegetation and Climate. Hall—Fertilisers and Manures. Findlay—Introduction to Physical Chemistry. Hall—Text-book of Quantitative Analysis.

AG-RICULTURAL ENGINEERING AND SURVEY ING— (a) Engineering— Materials of Construction. Design of simple structures. Farm buildings. Internal combustion engines and tractors. Mechanical transmission of power. Use of electrics power on the farm. Wind motors and pumps. Artificial illumination. Refrigeration and cool-room construction. Water supply and irrigation systems for fanms. Principles of ventilation. Farm implements and traction dynamometry.

Text-books: — Malcolm—Elementary Surveying. Kershaw—Elementary Internal Combustion En gines (Longman's, 1931). AGRICULTURE. 703

Welch—Notes on the Strength ot Timber (N.S.W. Govt.). Students will be required to execute dimensioned sketches and working drawings of machine parte, build ings, etc., as directed from time to time by the lec turer. Practical work will include testing of materialg and the adjustment and running ot engines. (b) Surve-ying— Construction, adjustment and use of—Clinometer, 'Prismatic Compass, Level, Theodolite and Sextant. Measurement of distances and angles . and run ning of traverses. Reduction of traverses with adjustment of dis crepancies. Contour surveying. Measurement of earthwork. Setting out simple circular curves. Plane table surveying. Students will be required to do chaining, levelling, contouring, traversing and piano tabling in the field, as directed by the lecturer; Field notes must be kept of all such work and submitted for examination. Students must provide themselves during the year with approved drawing instruments and slide rule.

AGRICULTURAL ENTOMOLOGY, PART I.— Classification, .morphology and bionomics ot the more important types of insects. Methods of control (mechanical, chemical and bio logical). Dissections and preparations of forms dealt with in lectures. Field excursions and iusectary demonstrations •• arranged through course. Students to make a collection of insects, represen tative of the types dealt with in lectures and laboratory work. Text-book >— Tillyard—Insects of Australia- and New Zealand. 724 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1936.

Reference books: — Original Papers as indicated in Course. French—The Destructive Insects of Victoria. AGRICULTURAL ENTOMOLOGY, PART II.— More advanced study ot work set down in Part I, conducted wherever possible in Field and In- sec tary. General account and examination of Arachnida in festing domestic animals and plants: their economic importance and control. Reference books: — In addition to those recommended for Part I.— Imms—Text-book of Entomology. VV'ardle and Buckle—Principles of Insect Control. Other reading as indicated in Course.

AGRICULTURAL GEOLOGY— The constitution and origin of the earth. Eiirth movements. The structural features of rooks, including folds, faults, etc. Tho principal rock-foruving minerals. The origin,, field occurrence, classification and chemical relations ot the commoner rock types. The process and results of rock weathering and the chemical changes involved. The formation and geological classification of soils. Soil sur veys and soil maps. The occurrence and origin of mineral fertilizers. Denudation and transport by wind, water and ice. The nature and origin of topographic forms. The circulation of underground water, including artesian water. Elementary Stratigraphy of Victoria. Laboratory Work-—The study of geological maps and the construction ot geological sections; the examination of hand specimens of crystal models, minerals and rooks. Field Work-—Five field excursions will be held on Saturdays during the year. AGRICULTURE. 725

Text Books -.— F. Rutlev—Elements of Mineralogy (Revised by H. Fl' Read). V: A. Singleton—Agricultural Geology Notes (typo- written ). For Reference: — W. B. Scott—An Introduction to Geology. F. V. Emerson—Agricultural Geology. R. H. Ttastall-—Agricultural Geology. G. P. 'Merrill—Rocks. Rock Weathering and Soils. K. D. Glinka—The Great Soil Groups of the World and their Development (Mimeographed Translation by C. F. Marbut). G. AV. Robinson—Soils, their Origin, Constitution and Classification.

AGRICULTURE, PART I.— This course is designed to familiarise the student with tho Practice and Business of farm management as carried out on a farm which is operated under scientific guidance. Tho term "the farm" in the following sylla bus, is intended to mean the State Research Farm, Wer ribee, as long as the studente receive this instruotion on that farm, but other farms in the district will also be visited and studied as opportunity offers.

A. AGRICULTURE— 'The climate, soil types, and economic location of the farm and district and their influence on the types of Agriculture carried out therein. A practical study ot the physical condition of the farm's soils. Their reaction to weather and to tillage. The preparation of all types of machinery and equipment for various farm operations^ and a study of the effect which each has on the soils of the farm. Operations required in the production, harvesting and disposal ot the various crops grown on the farm. Adjustment of methods in accordance 726 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1936.

with special needs of particular soils or seasons. Daily management and organisation ot labour, machinery and power during the season. Use and effects of manures on growth and yield of various crops. Methods of feeding the kinds of live stock kept on the farm. The rations which are in use. Feeding costs. Practical considerations influen cing purchase and sale of stock. Arrangement ot farm buildings and the main tenance of permanent improvements of vari ous kinds, including stock and domestic water supply and distribution. Commoner breeds and types of poultry, their management, the planning and equipment of poultry farms. Every student shall keep an accurate Farm Diary on a plan approved by the lecturer. This diary shall be submitted to the examiners at the Annual Exami nation, and their approval of a student's diary shall be essential for passing the Examination. The examiners may, at their discretion, examine orally a candidate on the subject matter of his diary. Text-books:— John W. Patterson—Nature in Farming (Lothian Publishing Co., Melh.). New South Wales Dopt. of Agriculture—The Farmers' Handbook, Sth ed. Books of reference: — The Journal of the Dcpt. of Agriculture of Vic toria. Bulletins of the Victorian Dcpt. of Agriculture on Agricultural and Irrigation subjects. The State Keouaicii Farm Guide. Book published yearly by Dept. of Agriculture of Victoria.

B. IRRIGATION— The principles and methods followed in laying out land for irrigation. Irrigation practices on the farm and in the district. The seeding and management of lucerne and irrigated pastures. AGRICULTURE. • 707

C. ANIMAL HUSBANDRY— Outlines of Anatomy.—The skeletal, muscular, nervous, vascular and digestive systems ot the Hoi-se, Ox, Sheep and Pig. -Mastication and rumination, digestion and assimilation. Farm Live Slock—Value of the industry. History, form and characteristics of the chief breeds of - horses and cattle including methods ot judging and the relationship of type characters to utility. The Breeding of Fartu Animals.—Tho generative system, the oestrus cycle, sterility and its causes, development of foetus. Care ot sire, dam and progeny. Breeding objectives and practices and the extent to which they conform to the science of genetics. Utility of pedigree and progeny records. The Rearing, Management and Housing ot young and old stock. Tho site of - bnildirgs in re lation to breeding and rearing. Disposal of dead animals. Care ot the skin, teeth and feet. Book of reference: — Rice- Breeding and Management ot Farm Ani mals. D. SHsrr- IICSBAXDEY— Tho various breeds of sheep. Their history, char acteristics, special requirements and uses. Systems of flock management, with special reference to practical details as carried out on the farm. The special features desirable in sheep farms or stations required for various purposes. Management of sheep feeding and of grazing paddocks. The mating and care of the breeding flock. I''at lamb production as carried out on the Farm. Tho farm stud flock Books of reference: — Matthews—Sheep and Wool. The Sheep Industry Bulletin, published by the Department ot Agriculture of Victoria. 728 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1936.

E. Wooi- Preparation of the Clip—Picking up fleeces. Skirting. Rolling and handling. Sorting all grades of Merino, Comeback, and Crossbred Skirtings into lines suitable for large and small clips. Dividing fleeces, showing quali ties and varieties of different parts. Grading and Glassing.—Dividing mixed fleeces into all grades, showing Merino, Comeback, Quarter-bred, Half-bred, Three-quarter bred, Lincoln. Sorting Merino and Cross bred, with a view to length, strength, con dition and quality. Tender Wool. Classing Merino and Crossbred, wool suitable for small and large clips. Pressing and Branding.—Wool-packs. The use of tho wool press. Weights of various classes to put into wool-pack. Correct brand ing and use of stencils. The use of the Bale Book. Specification list Forwarding to market. Terms used in the wool trade (by growers, classers, brokers and buyers), their meaning and signifi cance including exposition of ''Bradford Counts" and the relationship of this feature to values and manufacturing requirements. The relationship between greasy and scoured relative weights. "Clean scoured" yields. Marketing of wool—Selling methods—VVoolbuyer's practices—Calculation of classed wool values estimated on clean scoured yield basis- Selecting and mounting suitable wool samples covering the above course. Books for reference : — The Pastoral Review, Wool Exchange, Mel bourne—Sheep Farm and Station Manage ment. Hawksworth—Sheep and Wool.

P. DAIRYING— The composition and properties of milk. The factors influencing the quantity and quality AGRICULTURE. 739.

of milk. The dairy breeds of cattle—Their characteristic features and suitability for spec ialised dairying—Whole milk supply and cream supply for butter manufacturers—i'he necessary conditions and equipment for both i—Care of utensils—Cooling systems, pasteuri sation and bacterial counts. Herd management and herd recording. Baboook Testing. Breeds of pigs, their feeding and management. The weights, type and quality required for "baconers"' and "porkers." Books of reference: — Wing—Milk and Its Products. Ingle—Manual of Organic Chemistry. Richmond—Dairy Chemistry. Hunziker—The Butter Industry. Henry and Morrison—Feeds and Feeding. Maynard—Australian Dairyman's Handbook. The Victorian Department of Agriculture—Bul letin 16 on the Pig Industry.

AGRICULTURE, PART II.— The Australian climate and its' effects on agri* cultural and pastoral organisation and prac tices. The history and principles of genetics. A systematic and cultural study ot the chief farm crops of Victoria. The elements of statistics, with special reference- to yield trials. Fundamental economic principles and their refer ence to the production and marketing of Australian agricultural, pastoral, and horticultural products. Text-book: — Thurstone—Fundamentals ot Statistics. Students are advised to read: — Wilson—A' Manual ot Menclelism. Hayes and G-arbor—Breeding Crop Plants. 730 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1936.

.Montgomery—Productive Farm Crops. Babcock and Clausen—Genetics in Relation to Agriculture. Griffith Taylor—The Australian Environment. 'laylov—Outline "f Agricultural Economics. Hunter and Leake—Plant Breeding, 'elected Scientific. Papers.

AGRICULTURE I'AHT U.I.- Hi.-itory ot development of agricultural and pastoral industries in Australia. Farm livestock in Victoria. Closer settlement studies. Trend of Australian conditions. Land tenure systems. Farm Accounts and Economic Surveys. A detailed study of Victorian farming systems and' their economic management. Principles and practice of irrigation. Irrigation of special crops. Drainage. Alkali prob lems. The chief results of investigational work of the experiment stations of tho world in relation to problems connected with primary indus tries. Students are advised to read: — Hall—Feeding ot Crops and Stock. Orwin—Farming Coste. Fortier—Tho Use of Water in Irrigation. Roborts—History of Australian Land Settlement. Hopkins—Soil Fertility and Permanent Agri culture. VVidstoe—Irrigation Farming. Hall—The Book of the Rothamsted Experiments. Howell—Soil Problems in Wheat Growing. O'Brien—Agricultural Economics. Federal Dairy Investigation Committee's Report. Federal Wheat Commission's Reports. Selected .Scientific papers.

BOTANY—PART I. (Agricultural Course). As for Botany, Part I. (see under Science). AGRICULTURE. 731

CHEMISTRY—PART I. (Agricultural Course). As for Chemistry, Part 1. (see under Science).

DAIRY TECHNOLOGY— Geographical distribution of dairy factories in Victoria, their sizes. Production figures for Victoria and Australia and the world. Commonwealth exports and. consumption of cheese and butter, values and quantity. His tory of the Australian dairy industry. Prices of product's. Dairy legislation. Salient features of dairy pro duce Acts. Brief survey of contamination of dairy products on the farms. Development ot acidity in cream. Lactic acid fermentation. Normal and abnormal changes. Milk.—Bacteriology of milk, Rjostcurisation. Stan dards and methods of control . in various countries. Food values. Butter.—Physical structure of butter: its relation to keeping1 quality and manufacture. Action of bacteria yeasts and moulds and factors controlling their action. Proteolytic action of bacteria. Pasteurisation. Bacterial sur veys of butter factories. Method and appli cation. Chemical deterioration, tallowiness, rancidity and fishinesa, and the controlling factors. Influence ot metals. Wood taints. Relation of acidity and quality. Detergents. Materials used' in equipment. Systems of payment in butter factories. Overrun. Sources of loss oi butter fat. Layout of butter. factories. Details of methods of manufacture. Butter flavours and aromas, diacetyl, etc. Cheese.—Methods of manufacture. Lactic acid starters. Types of organisms. Preparation. Application in cheese, butter and casein fac tories. Sundry milk products.—Ice cream, casein, dried milk, etc Engineering aspects. 732 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1936,

Visits to commercial dairy installations and regu lar observation of, and association with, the work on dairy products at the dairy products laboratory of the University Veterinary School, will be a prominent part of the course. Reference books: — Hammer—Dairy Bacteriology. Hunziker—The Butter Industry. Rogers-r-Pundamentals oi Dairy Science. Journals ot Dairy Research.

ELEMENTARY ORGANIC CHEMISTRY— (The Organic Section of Chemistry Part II (see under Science).

HORTICULTURAL SCIENCE AND PRACTICE— 1. Australian Fruit Production. Fruit Production Statistics, and a discussion of the main features of the principal areas de voted to fruit productions in each of the States. 2. Horticultural Practice in Victoria. Practical work will be given in this section wherever possible. (a) Orchard Practice. A study of the methods of orchard manage ment for the main" Victorian fruits. Selec tion of site, preparation of land, planting, maintenance ot soil fertility, pruning, inter- pollination, budding and grafting; and the methods of harvesting, packing and disposal of fruit. N.B.—Brief reference only will be made to "spray ing," as this subject will be dealt with in lectures on ;Plant Pathology and Entomology. (b) Nursery Practice. A discussion of the methods of propagating fruit tree stocks from seeds, root grafts. AGRICULTURE. 733 layers and stools, cuttings, etc.; and the budding and grafting of the stocks with the varieties desired, (c) Fruit Preservation. A short account of the cool storage, canning and drying of fruits. 3. Horticultural Science. (a) A study of the principles underlying the prac tice of horticulture in the light of experi mental results obtained in Australia and at research stations in other countries. (1) The annual cycle of growth in fruit trees in relation to physiological factors. (2) The jela.tionship ot vegetative. growth to fruitfulness involving a study of— (a) The carbohydrate/nitrogen ratio theory. (b) Fruit bud initiation and development. (c) Fruit setting phenomena. (d) Periodicity in bearing. 3. The improvement of fruits by selection. 4. The interrelationships of stock and scion in fruit trees and their bearing on nursery prac tices. 5. The fertility of orchard soil with especial reference to the use of artificial fertilizers and green crops. 6. Cool Storage of Fruit. (b) The Planning of Horticultural Experiments. Text-book:— Quinu—Pruning for Australia. Books for reference: — Auohter and Kuapp—Orchard and Small Fruit Culture. Morris—Nut Growing. Coit—Citrus Fruits. Bradford, Gardner and Hooker—Fundamentals of Fruit Production. Chandler—Fruit Growing. Hall and Crane—The Apple. Hoblyn—Field Experiments in Horticulture, Imp. Bur. Fruit Prod. T.C., 2, 1931. 734 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1936.

Attention is particularly directed also to the Journal ot Pomology and Horticultural Science, and to the DProcoedings ot the American Society for Horticultural Science.

NATURAL PHILOSOPHY—PAKT I.(AgriculturalCourse). As tor Natural Philosophy, Part I. (See under Science).

PHYSIOLOGY (Agricultural Course)— Elementary Biocliemistry. Proximate constituents ol mammalian body. Water, inorganic salts, carbohydrates, tat*, lipins, proteins,, colloids, enzymes. Physiology—General and Comparative- Muscular system. General physiology of muscular work. The horse as a machine, Muscular co-ordination. Locomotion. Digestive system- Digestion in mouth, stomach, and intestines of horse, cow, sheep and pig. Correlation of activity in alimentary canal. Functions of liver and pancreas. Absorption. The fate ot the foodstuffs. Animal nutrition. The functions ot the nutrients. Food rations. Nutritive ratio. The essentials of a diet for— (a) Milk production. (b) Growing animals. (c) Working animals. (d) Production of meat. Vascular system. Blood, heart, blood vessels. The circulation and its nervous control. 'I'he lymphatic system. AOBIOULTUEB. 735.

Animal Heat- The regulation of temperature in the various types- of domesticated animals, with special reference to the effects of characteristic Australian cli matic conditions, both local and general. Shearing, clipping, rugging, in their relation to aai mal heat. Beproducbion- A general account. The oestrous cycle. Nutrition of the foetus. Influence of internal secretions. Lactation. Controlling factors—internal secretions. Importance in relation to dairying and export Iamb. industries. Milk—its composition and suitability tor the need^ of the young. Practical. A practical knowledge of the chemistry of the animal body, its secretions—including milk—and excretions— including urine; together with the simple reactions of the mam constituents of fodders—hay. oats, maize, etc., is acquired by students attending the laboratory once a week and personally performing such experi mental work. Time- Two lectures per week (two terms). One practical class per week for three terms. The standard of the systematic course is given by the lectures. Text-books: Marshall—Physiology of Farm Animals. Osborne and Young—Elementary Biochemistry. PLANT PATHOLOGY.— Principles involved in the nutrition, metabolism and growth of fungi; an introduction to cnl- tural methods. 736 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1036.

A general treatment of Myxomyoetes, Phycomy- oetes, Ascomyoetes, Basidiomy«etes and Fungi Imperfecti, with special reference to pathogenic forms. Etiology, distribution and treatment of plant diseases ot various kinds. Methods ot eontrol. All Students are required to present before the end of the year a collection of not less than 20 pressed specimens to the satisfaction of the Lecturer. Text Books: — Gwynne-Vaughan and Barnes—The Fungi. Brooks—Plant Diseases. For reference: — Heald—Manual ot Plant Diseases. Gaumaun-Dodge—Comparative Morphology of Fungi. Stevens—The Fungi which cause Plant Disease. Massee—Diseases of Cultivated Plants and Trees. McAIpine—Systematic arrangement of Austra lian Fungi.

PRINCIPLES OF VITICULTURE— Introductory. The vine in antiquity—Vine industry of the world to-day. Diversity of vine products. The different branches of the industry—Wine—Dried grapes—table grapes—by-products—World Statistics—Australian Sta tistics. 1. Botanical Study of Vine and Collateral Genera. Its place in classification—Family of Ampelidae— Genus Vitis—European, Asiatic and Ameri can Vine species—Study ot Vitis Vinitera— Morphology, Anatomy and Physiology of root, stem, leaf, flower and fruit. Factors influencing the vine and its produote;^a) Climate, influence of irrigation, etc.; (b) Soil . and fertilisers—rinineral requirements of the vine; (c) Vine varieties; (d) Cultural methods. AGRICULTURE. 737

Anipelography.—Principles of—Description of types ot the following: (I) American vines and hybrids; (a) Re sistant stocks; (b) Direct producers. (II) Varieties of Vitis Vinifera, (a) Wine making sorts, (b) Drying grapes, (c) Table grapes. Propagation of the Vine—seeds—cuttings—layers. Grafting: mechanism of: its influence on the vine and its products. 3, Establishment, of a, Vineyard and its yearly treatment. Selection ot suitable site—Preparation ot land: Clearing—fencing—sub-soiling — draining— laying out of vineyard—distance apart-^-arrangement of blocks. Plantation—vine nurseries—bench grafting—field grafting; Economic aspect: cost of establish ing vineyard. Pruning and training the vine, (a) Winter prun ing: (b) Summer pruning: (c) Forming the young vine. Treatment of established vineyard—annual cycle of operations other than pruning. Cultivation- irrigation — manuring. Economic aspect: annual cost ot working. Vine diseases and their control. 3. The Vintage-— The Products of the Vine. (a) Table grapes—packing, marketing, shipping (b) Drying- grapes—methods ot processing. (c) The fermentation industries—Wine mak ing—Fermentation and subsequent treat ment of wines, (d) Distillation—Brandy and Fortifying Spirit, (e) Acetic fermentation- Vinegar, (f) By-products of Viticulture. (g'i Economic aspects. Annual returns. Books for reference : — Perold—A Treatise on Viticulture. Wickson—Californian Fruits. Arndt—Fruit growing under irrigation. Victorian Dept. 'ot Agriculture—Various Viticul ture! Publications. 738 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1936.

VETERINARY DIETETICS— Natural Foods of animals—evolution of artificial feeding, source and effect ot food, nutrition of animals. Grouping of Foods—Flesh formers. Heat givers. Proximate constituents, water, mineral matter, protein, riitrogeu-freo compounds (carbo hydrates, fats) Palatability and Digestibility of Foods—Paya bility, quantity, dryness, preserved and cured fodders, maturity, preparation of fodders for feeding, frequency of feeding, ratio of food nutrients, influence ot individuality, species and age of animals, determination of digesti bility. Values of Foods—commercial values; nutritive values; basis and standards of valuation. Bations—palatability, suitability, digestibility, cal culation of nutritive ratio; compounding of rations, maintenance rations, rations for work (horses), milk production (cows), (quantities, varieties), development rations (calf, foal and lamb feeding), fattening rations (bullocks, sheep and pigs). Water—source and means of supply (storage tanks, wells, waterholes, pumps and troughs), quan tity, purity and mineral content. VETERINARY PATHOLOGY.— Signs ot Health :— General appearance, habits, temperature, pulse, respiration, mucous membranes, gait. Signs ot disease:— Digestive; Respiratory; Lameness. Evidence of contagion. Notifiable diseases: — Tuberculosis. Actinomycosis. Anthrax. Bovine Pleuro-pneumouia. Swine Fever. Contagious Abortion. Blackleg. Infectious Mastitis. Black Disease. ZOOLOGY—PART 1. (Agricultural Course). As for Zoology, Part I. (See under Science). FACULTY OF ARCHITECTURE

DETAILS OF SUB.1ECTS AND RECOMMENDA- TIONS FOR THE ANNUAL AND SUPPLE MENTARY EXAMINATIONS TO BE HELD IN THE FOURTH TERM 1936.

HONOUR WORK— Except in the cases ot subjects where special details are published, the Examination for Honours will require candidates to have carried out more advanced work than for Pass, and to attain a higher standard and' show more detailed knowledge.

ARCHITECTURAL DRAWING— Study of the Classic orders of Architecture, including drawing and design based on them. Detail drawings of Elementary Building Construction. Reference books: — W. R. Jaggard—Architectural and Building Construction plates. C. F. Mitchell—Forty plates of Building Con struction. G. Ellis—Modern Practical Carpentry. G. Ellis—Modern Practical Joinery. J. Nangle—Australian Building Practice. D. W. Tulloch—Details ot Australian Building Construction. F. Phene Spiers—Orders of Architecture. Amer. Tech. Society—The Orders (Text and plates). Letarouilly—Edifices de Rome Moderne.

ARCHITECTURAL DESIGN, PART I.— For degree studente and for the Diploma ot Archi tectural Design. (Taken at the Atelier). 740 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1936.

Theory. The application of History to Architectural Design. The theory of Composition. Practice. Elementary compositions. Designing based on the Architectural styles, Egypt ian to Gothic (Projets). Short studies in modern design (Esquisses). Advanced drafting methods, free drawing and mono tone rendering. Theses on the historical and structural development of buildings.

ARCHITECTURAL UES1GN, PART 11.— Theory. The evolution of Dasign. The relation ot Structure to Design. Practice. Advanct-d Compositions. Designing based on the Architectural styles, Renais sance to modern times (Projets). Short studies in modem design (Esquisses). The treatment of the elevations and sections of buildings. Elementary color washes and rendering.

ARCHITECTURAL DESIGN, PART III.— Theory. The principals ot planning and decoration. The requirements ot modern practice. Practice. Advanced planning as applied to present day prac tice (Projets). Short studios in modern design (Esquisses). Advanced colour rendering and indication. In all three years students are expected to attend visits to buildings in progiess, and sketching expeditions which are arranged from time to time. ARCHITECTURE. 741

Text-Books : Bannister Fletcher—History of Architecture. Magonigal—Architectural Rendering in Wash. Brown—Letters and Lettering. Speltz and Spiers—The Styles of Ornament. Atkinson—Elements and Theory of Architecture. lla.rbosou—.Study of Architectural Design. The above Text Books are all necessary; the first four however, are prescribed for other subjects.

ARCHITECTURAL HISTORY, PART I.— Historical sketch of Egyptian, Assyrian, Greek, Ro man, Romanesque, Byzantine, Gothic, Renaissance, and Modern Architecture, illustrated by reference to exist ing buildings, analysing their plans, construction, and decoration, and the influences ot material, climate, tools, religion, race, etc., upon these elements. •' Text-book:—. Bannister Fletcher—History of Architecture. Reference books: — H. H. Statham — Short Critical History of Architecture. A. D. F. Hamlin—History of Architecture. D'Espouy—Fragments d'Architecture Antique. D'Espouy—Fragments d'Architecture de la Re naissance. ARCHITECTURAL HISTORY, PART U.— The subject will be that ot Part I at a higher stan dard, together with mouldings, features and oma- mcnto based on the various styles of Architecture. Students are required to compile a sketch book during the year, with examples of all styles of Archi tecture. Reference books: — R. Glazier—Manual of Historic Ornament. A. D. F. Hamlin—History of Ornament. Speltz and Spiers—Styles of Ornament. F. Meyer—Handbook of Ornament. 742 DETAILS OF Sl'BJKCTS, 1936

Owen Jones—Grammar of Ornament. A. Speltz—Coloured Ornament of All Historic Styles. W. H. Ward—French Renaissance Architecture. Anderson—History of Italian Renaissance. R. Blomfield—English Renaissance. Pugin—Examples of Gothic Architecture. Stuart and Revett—Antiquities of Athens. Van Pelt—Theory of Composition.

BUILDING CONSTRUCTION— Practical—The constructive details of buildings and notes on specifications. TextrBook:^- J. Nangle-^-Australian Building Practice. Reference books: -™- (See under Architectural Drawing.) CHEMISTRY, Part I.— (See under Faculty of Science.) ELEMENTARY PLANNING— The elementary principles of planning. Reference books: — Current periodicals.

ESTIMATING— Method of compiling an approximate schedule ot quantities of materials and labour, including the method of estimating cost of same. Reference book:— Mayes — Australian Buildese and Contractors' Price Book.

FREE DRAWING, PART I,— For degree students and tor the Diploma of Archi tectural Design, ARCHITECTURE. 743

Lectures: Necessity of Free Drawing to the Architect. The use of the various media, and the essential equipment. Practice: Geometrical projections) Taken at Engineering Intersections of planes i ' School. Projection of shades and shadows. Elementary model drawing (cubes, eto.) in line. Elementary model drawing (cubes, etc.), in light and shade. Elementary cast drawing (simple plaster casts) in line. Elementary cast drawing (simple plaster casta), in light and shade. Outdoor sketching under instruction. (2 Saturdays per term.) Demonstrations: Use of pencil, charcoal, pen, brush and other equipment. The methods of procedure in relation to the vari ous media. Mounting paper. Text-books: Guptill Sketching and Rendering in Pencil. Magonigal- Architectural Rendering ia Wash. McGoodwin— Architectural Shades and Shadows.

FREE DRAWING, PA±iT II.— Lectures: General Composition in Art. The spectrum. Modelling • The presentation of detail. Practice: Architectural perspective. Elementary model drawing, in wash. Elementary cast drawing, in wash. 744 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1936.

Intermediate model drawing (from objects) in line. Intermediate model drawing (from objects) in light and shade. Intermediate cast drawing, in line. Intermediate cast drawing, in light and shade. Outdoor sketching under instruction, two Satur days per term. demonstrations: Preparation of the wash medium. Laying on of monotone washes. Wash rendering of Architectural Details. FREE DRAWING, PART III.— Lectures: Colour relations and values. Explanation of the colour chart. Harmonies and discords. Formal rendering. The representation of small buildings. Practice: Intermediate model drawing (from objects) in wash. Intermediate oast drawing in wash. Advanced model drawing in line and shade. Advanced cast drawing in line and shade. Experiments in the use of colour. Outdoor sketching under instruction, two Satur days per term. Demonstrations: Application of colour. The cause of harmonies and discords. Colour rendering of Architectural Details. Wash rendering of Architectural drawings. Text Book : Carpenter—Colour. FREE DRAWING, PART IV.— Lectures ; Architectural Rendering. The properties of pigments. ARCHITECTURE. 745.

Practice: Advanced model drawing in line, shade and wash-. Advanced cast drawing in line, shade and wash. Model and cast drawing in simple colour. Modelling from the cast. Drawing of sections ot the human figure from the- cast. Outdoor sketching under instruction, two Satur days per term. For Honours—Human figure from the oast (set subject). Demonstrations: Water colour rendering of Architectural drawings- in wash. Modelling design.

FREE DRAWING, PART V.— Lectures: Mural decorations and painting. The representation of large buildings and layouts.. Practice: Advanced model and cast drawing in colour. Drawing of the human figure from the oast. Water colour rendering. Modelling design. Outdoor sketching two Saturdays per term. Life- work.

GEOLOGY", l-'AHT I. (Architecture Course) - This includes all the work set out under Geology,. Part I (see under Science), provided that if a candi date who enters tor Pass attends to the satisfaction of the Professor ot Geology, the lectures in Palaeon tology, he may be excused the questions in the exami nation, both written and practical, in this portion of the work. Candidates for Honours must do the full examination. In addition it includes work on the geology of build ing stones and stone used in concrete. Students may be required in addition to attend » special field excursion. 746 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1936

Book for Reference: — Howe—The Geology of Building Stones. GRAPHICS— (See under Faculty of Engineering.) MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT OP BUILDINGS—

More advanced treatment of constructive details. Mechanical equipment of buildings, lighting, heating, ventilation, hot water supply, lifts, fire-preventive de tails, acoustic materials. Specification writing. Reference books: — M. & M.B.W. Regulations. Board of Health Regulations. Fire-Underwriters Regulations. Lift Regulations. Specification.

NATURAL PHILOSOPHY, Part I. (See under Faculty of Science.)

PURE MATHEMATICS, Part I (Sea under Faculty of Arts.)

STRENGTH AND ELASTICITY OF MATERIALS- (See under Faculty of Engineering.) •SURVEYING, Part I.— (Architecture Course). This will include all the work set out under Surveying Part. T (see under Engineering) with the exception of Surveying, and. subdivision of land. Redetermination of boundaries. Titles Office Surveys, including written descriptions ot bound aries.

TOWN PLANNING:—(Architecture Course). A. study of the physical, economic, and social con ditions of towns and of the predominant ARCHITECTURE 747;

character and needs ot the various districts. Development of a street plan with regard to con tour, drainage, grade, economy of construc tion, local and through traffic, subdivision of land, building facilities, landscape archi tecture. The economic factors determining the width ot. streets—traffic, cost of construction and maintenance, air and light, building lines. Public amenities, educational, recreational, social. The selection of sites for public and semi- public buildings, parks, gardens, playing fields. The growth of towns and cities—comparison of ordered with disordered growth, preplanning with replanning. Replanning problems. The selection of sites for new towns. The utilisation ot waste and barren lands. Street and landscape architecture as related to building and property lines, heights of build ings, street scenery and vistas, squares,, places, public buildings, parks, and gardens, points of vantage. Housing problems, congestion in factory and office buildings, prevention ot slums, garden suburbs and industrial villages. Note.- Students will execute such designs in the drawing office as the Lecturer may direct, and attend visits and submit reports and designs in connection therewith as required. Books for reference: — John Nolen—City Planning. Raymond Unwin—Town Planning in Practice. Sulman—Town Planning in Australia. Thompson—Site Planning in Practice. Purdom—The Building of Satellite Towns. Adams—Recent advances in Town Planning.

ANNOUNCEMENTS. 1. Candidates taking the subjects of Architectural Design and Free Drawing shall attend the Atelier on 748 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1936. at least three official working periods per week of not less than two hours' duration each during term. 2. Candidates shall attend the freehand drawing •classes on at least one official working period per week, and one of such attendances will be credited in those required by Clause 1. 3. The official working periods of the Atelier are on Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, and Thursday ot each week during term, from 7 p.m. to 10 p.m. 4. Candidates in each year shall attend at least four of the outdoor sketching expeditions, as set out in the List of Fixtures. 5. At the conclusion of three years of work each can didate must have complied with the following condi tions : — (a) That he has kept the course of work for each year. (b) That he has completed 75 per cent, of the number of subjects set during the year, (o) For his nine beet subjects he must have an average mark of not less than 6.5, out of a possible 20; . and he must receive at least two Mentions during the year; or, alter natively, he must have an average of 8.0 and have received one Mention. (d) That he has passed at the yearly examination the En Loge design subject, and the terminal and yearly tests in the Atelier Art Course. (e) That he has in tho First Year completed 75 per cent, of the number ot theses set during the year, and has received one Mention and an average of 6.5, or, alternatively, an average of 8. 6. Honours—For a student to enter for the Honour Examination in Design or Free Drawing, he must com ply with the following conditions: — (a) He inust complete 10 of the subjects set during the year exclusive of terminal tests; (b) For First Class Honours, he must receive five mentions during the year and an average mark of 10, with a mention in the en loge subject. For Second Class Honours, he must receive four mentions during the year and an average mark ARCHITECTURE. 749

ot 9. with a mention in the en lege subject. For Third Class Honours, he must receive three mentions during the year and an average mark of 8, with a mention in the en loge subject.

ARCHITECTURAL ATELIEB. (Diploma of Architectural Design). The Atelier has been established by the University in co-operation with the Royal Victorian Institute of Archi tects, with the object of promoting the study of principles of architectural design. It enables its members to acquire training in the Art of Architectural Composition. The student must, before coining to the Atelier, be thoroughly familiar with the History of Architecture, Free Drawing and Perspective Drawing, and should, in addition, possess a fair general education. Should he not have any graphic training, he should spend at least one preliminary year in the Atelier Art Course. All can didates are required to submit examples ot drafting and freehand drawing. A test exam, is held on the first .night of the first term. The Work of the First Year tor the Diploma con sists principally in the application of Architectural History to Design. ('I'he importance of this subject is seldom realised by studente commencing the study of , Architectural Design.) In this year, also, particu lar attention is paid to composition and advanced drafting methods. A Thesis is called for in each sub ject, and requires that a student shall have reached a fair standard in English and Architectural History. The work of this year prepares a student for R.A.I.A. Probationary Examination. The Second Year Compositions deal with the Archi tectural treatment of the Elevations and Sections of Buildings, in any Style, in conjunction with a well- composed plan. The Third Year Work requires an advanced know ledge ot planning and. the principles oi decoration. The designs, which may be expressed in amy medium, deal with subjects such as may be expected to be met with 750 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1936. in modern every-day practice, and are of similar nature to those set to candidates for the Entrance Examina tion of the Royal Australian Institute of Architects. Exhibitions-—A series of Exhibitions and Lectures by specialists are held at intervals throughout the year, and are open to all members. Concurrently with the design work in each year stu dents attend the Atelier Art Classes for free-hand draw ing, rendering, modelling, etc. The Free Drawing Course may be taken as a special subject. It is strongly recommended that persons in tending to take the Atelier Diploma Course should take the two preparatory years during their first and second years in an office. Institute of Architects—The following privilege has been extended to the Atelier by the Council of the Royal Victorian Institute ot Architects in connection with their Examination for Associateship. Members receiving the Atelier Diploma of Architec tural Design will be exempted from the whole ot the design groups of the Institute's Examination. Awards-—Tho following awards are open to mem bers ot the Atelier, particulars of which may be had from the Regulations:—Grice Bronze Medal, President's Prize, Oakley Sketching Prize, R.V.I.A. Scholarship, Porrott Prize for Rendering, V.A.S.S. Prize, R.V.I.A. Memorial Travelling Scholarship, University Diploma. Fees—The fees for the Atelier course are JU5 15/- per annum payable in advance, in three instalments of JE5 5s. Od. each at the following times— (1) A fortnight before the first term commences (2) at the end of the first term and (3) at the end ot the second term. Prospectus-—For fuller details of course see Prospec tus, obtainable from Registrar's Office, or at the Atelier. Text-books: — (As set out under Architectural Design Part I II and III). FACULTY OF ARTS.

DETAILS OF SUUJEuTS AND RECOMMENDATIONS FOR THE ANNUAL AND SUPPLEMENTARY EXAMINATIONS TO BE HELD IN 7HE FOURTH. TERM, 193ti. THE ORDINARY DEGREE.

GROUP I.—LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE. GREEK—PART 1.— Translation from Attic Greek. Translation into Greek Prose. Greek Accidence and Syntax. Special Subjects of Examination. Euripides, Hippolytus (Hadley, C.U.P.). Thucydides IV, cc. 4-2-117 (omitting speeches) (Mills, O.U.P.).

GREEK—PART II.— Translation from Classical Greek. Translation into Greek Prose. Greek Accidence and Syntax. Outlines (Primer)..of History, Antiquities and Litera ture of Classical Greece. Special Subjects of Examination. Sophocles, Oedipus Tyrannus (Jebb and Davies,. C.U.P.). Demosthenes, Leptines (King, Maomillan). Herodotus I, cc. 95-198 (Sleeman, Pitt Press).

GREEK—PART III.— As for Greek, Part TJ, together with Pindar, Olym pians I-VTI, Pythians I-IV (Teubner Text). Candi- 48 752 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 193G. dates will take the paper on the prescribed books set for Greek Part II, in the Course tor the Degree with Honours.

LATIN—PART I.— Translation from Classical Latin. Translation into Latin Prose. Latin Accidence and Syntax.

Special Subjects of Examination. Vergil, Eclogues (omitting II) (Page. Macmillan). Pliny, Selected Letters, 1, 3-5, 7-1.2, 16, 17, 23-25, 80, 31, 34, 35, 39, 48, 57-61, 87-91 (Pritchard and Bernard, O.U.P.1.

LATIN—PART II.— Translation from Classical Latir. Translation into Latin Prose. Latin Accidence and Syntax. Outlines (Primer) of History, Antiquities and Litera ture of Classical Rome. Text-book: — A. Petrie—An Introduction to Roman History, Literature and Antiquities.

Special Subjects of Examination. Cicero, Select Orations, omitting de Imperio Cn. Pompei (King, O.U.P.). Tacitus, Annals IV, (Edwards, C.U.P.). Juvenal, I. Ill, VIII, X (Duff, C.U.P.).

LATIN—PAKT 111.— As for Latin, Part U, together with Plautus, Trin- ummus (Gray, Pitt Press). Candidates will take the paper on the prescribed books set for Latin, Part Ii., in the Course tor the Degree with Honours. ARTS. 753

ENGLISH A— The examination will consist of two papers: — I. (a) An essay on a subject selected from a number of alternatives, some of which have reference to the literature studied. (H hours) (b) Questions on English. (1J hours) Books prescribed: — Cowling, G. H.—'I'he Use of English (Melb. Univ. Press).

II. (a) Questions on certain prescribed books. (3 hours) Questions will be set to test the candidate's knowledge ot the eubiect matter and the meaning of important passages. There will be a compulsory context-question testing the candidate's familiarity with the actual texts. Books prescribed: — Cowling—The Use of English (Melb. Univ. Press). Webster—The Duchess ot Malfi (World's Classics, 199). Shakespeare—Henry IV, Part I. Milton—Sauisou Agouistes. Essays, English and Australian (O.U.P.). Scott—Guy Mannering. The Outline of English Verae (Macmillan), viz.: Chaucer, Seventeenth Century Lyrics, Pope, Blake, Wordsworth, Shelley, Arnold. Arnold—Essays in Criticism (Second Series). Books recommended:— An English Bibliography (Melb. Univ. Press, 1/6). Country students will sit for both papers. Internal students are required to write essays and to attend tutorial classes during the University terms. Inter nal students whose essays and tutorials have reached a credit standard will bo excused Paper I. Students who desire to take honours will take Eng lish Language and Literature Fart I. 43A 754 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1930.

ENGLISH B— I. The study of English Literature from 1600 to 1700, with special reference to certain selected texts: — Books prescribed: — (a) Marlowe: Dr. Faustus. (Everyman, 383). Spenser: Faery Queene, Book I.; Four Hymnes- (Globe ed.). Sidney: Apologie tor Poetrie. Six Elizabethan Plays (World's Classics, 199). Dekker: Guls Hornbook, ete. (Temple Classics). Bacon: Essays (as detailed in class). Milton: Comus ; also Areopagitica, (World's Classics 293). Browne: Religio Medici. Dryden: Absalom and Achitophel. Drydon: All for Love and Congreve; The Way of the World (Everyman, 604). Pepys' Diary (Everyman, 53, pp. 1-262). Grierson: Metaphysical Poetry; Donne to Butler. (b) The Works of Shakespeare, with special refer ence to the Sonnets, Much Ado About Noth ing, Measure for Measure, Henry IV., Henry. VTII., Hamlet, Othello, and The Tempest. Attention is drawn to the importance for these studies of a knowledge of outlines of English literary and social history. For books recommended see : — An English Bibliography (Melb. Univ. Press, 1/6). II. An essay on one of the following subjects, to be submitted to the lecturer in English B*, oni or before September 16th, together with a list of books read or referred to in the essay. This list should contain: Author's name, ' title of book, and date and place of publi cation. The essays should not be longer than 20 pages, or 5000 words. Legibility; arrangement and punctuation will be taken into account.

•Mr. E H. C. Oliphunt ARTS. 755

Country students must pay ut least one term's fees and lodge an entry on the correct form (to be obtained from the Registrar) before forwarding their essays. Subjects: — Spenser and the Faery Q.uecne. Bacon's View of Man and Nature. Shakespeare's Contemporaries (Olipliant—Eliza bethan Dramatists). The Life and Works ot Dryden (Globe, Mermaid, Editions). The Life and Workfi of Milton. , The Life and Works of Donne (Everyman 867 Walton's Life). Seventeenth Century Lyrical Verse. Samuel Pepys (Everyman 53, 64). Students are advised to consult An English Biblio graphy (Melb. Univ. Press, 1/6). Studente who desire to take honours will taka English Literature, Part II.

ENGLISH C— I. The study of English Literature from 1700- 1900, with special reference to certain selected texts: — (a) Swift: The Battle of the Books (Everyman. 347). Addison: Selections from The Spectator (ed. Lobban, Cambr. Univ. Press). Pope: Essay on Criticism. (Globe edition). Johnson: Lives of the Poets (2 vols., World's Classics, 83, 84), viz., Cowley, Milton, Dryden, Swift, Pope and Gray. Sheridan : School tor Scandal. Blake : Songs ot Innocence and of Experience (ed. Cowling, Methueu). Scott: Lay of the Last Minstrel, The Heart of Midlothian (King's Treasuries, Dent). Jane Austen ; Northanger Abbey. Coleridge; Literary Criticism (ed. Mackail). Shelley; Prometheus Unbound. Carlyle: Sartor Resartua. Thackeray: : Esmond. Tennyson: Idylls of the King. 756 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 193G.

Swinburne: Atalanta in Calydon. Vanco Palmer: The Passage. Serle: An Australasian Anthology Murdoch : Speaking Personally. (b) The Poems and Letters of Keats. Attention is drawn to the importance for these studies of a knowledge of the. outlines of English literary and sociial history. For books recommended see :—

% An English Bibliography (Melb. Univ. Press, 1/6). II. Essays on two of the following subjects, to be bo submitted to the lecturer in English C*, one on or before June 7th, and one on or before September 16th, together with a list of books read or referred to in the essay. This list should contain :—Author's name, title of book, and date and place of publication. The Essays should be not longer than 20 pages, or 5000 words. Legibility, arrangement, aud punctua tion will be taken into account. Country students must pay at least one terra's fees and lodge an entry on the correct form (to be obtained from the Registrar) before forwarding their essays. Subjects: — Tho Satire of Pope. Dr. Johnson as a Critic. Wordsworth. Sir Walter Scott. Thackeray. Browning's " The Rii.'g and the Book." Students are advised to consult An English Biblio graphy (Melb. Univ. Press, 1/6). Students who desire to take honours will take Eng lish Literature, Part III.

FRENCH—PAET 1.— (a) Theory and practice of phonetics. Prescribed Text-book—Chisholm: A Manual of French Pronunciation. *.\liss Derliam. AHT8. 757

(b) Composition, translation at sight, and grammar. Prescribed textbook:—Lazare's Elementary French Composition (c) Reading aloud, dictation, conversation. (d) Leotures in English on the chief literary movements of the 19th century. (e) Translation of the following prescribed books: — Hugo—Hernani (Heath, edit. Matzke). Merimee—Chronique du rogue de Charles IX (Nelson). Berthon—Nine French Poets (Macmillan),. omitting the poems which begin on the following pages : 15, 28, 32, 46, 52 (both poems), 59, 60, 63, 66, 70 (both poems), 73, 74, 105, 113, US, 126-132 (i.e. nil Sainte- Beuvo). 137, 13S, 141 (both poems), 1.42, 143 (both poems), 148, 150, 151 (both poems), 152, 153 (both poems), 156, 107.

FRENCH—PART II. (a) Translation into and from French. Prescribed text book—Moraud's French Compo sition (b) Reading, dictation, conversation, practical pho netics. Text-book:—Chisholm: A Manual of French Pronunciation (c) Lectures in French on: — A. Pascal. Bossuet, Fcnelon. B. Le roman de 1870 a 1914. Pass students may choose A or B. (d) Translation of the following prescribed texts: — Oxford Book of French Verse (from Mal- herbe to Andre Chenier, inclusive). Daudet—Les rois en cxil (Flammarion).

FRENCH—PART III.— (o) Translation into and from French. (6) Reading, conversation, practical phonetics. (c) Lectures in French on the following subjects: — A. As for Part II. B. As for Part U. 758 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS. 1930.

Students may choose A or B. (d) Translation of the following prescribed works: — Gauthier Ferrieres—Anthologie des Ecri- vains contemporains, Poesie Hugo—Quatre-vingt-treize (Nelson). All country students should get into touch with the Lecturer at the beginning of the Academic year. N.B.—The course for French, Part I., assumes that students have passed in French at the Leaving Certifi cate Examination. Books of reference recommended for consultation (all years:— Kiiby : Students' French Grammar. Clarke and Charpentier: Manuel lexique des difii- cultes linguistiques du francais Cassell's French-English and English-French Dictionary. Petit Larousse illustre. Depras: Le fran9ais do tons les jours students taking the three years' course are strongly "recommended to purchase these works of reference.)

GERMAN—PART I. (a) Phonetics, including transcription into phonetic script (Victor Die Aussprache des Sohrift- deutschen). (b) Reading aloud, conversation, recitation. Each student to learn by heart twelve poems as set in class during tho year, with a view to the oral test. (c) Composition, translation at sight and grammar (Lubovius—Part II.) (d) History and Civilisation of Germany (Karl Remme—Lesebuch fur stiidierendc Aua. lander).

Books nf reference recommended in Part I: 1. Cassell's New German-English and English-Ger man Dictionary. 2. Knaurs Konvcrsatioiislcxikon, or der Volks- Brockhaus. 3. Der grosze Duden. GERMAN—PART II. (a) Reading aloud, conversation and recitation. Each student to learn by heart 50 lines from Faust, and 50 lines from Grillparzer, with a view to the oral test. ;lj) More advanced translation, composition and essay writing. (e) History and civilisation of Germany from 1740 to the present time. (Schweitzer-Simonnot— Lcsebuch fur Sekunda, Prima und Ob"rprima)., (d) History of German Literature to 1830 (W. Vogelpohl—Von deutecher Dichtung, Teub ner). (e) Intensive study of Goethe's Faust, Part I. (t) Lectures on the following books prescribed for private reading during the long vacation: Schiller und Goethe—Brietwechsel (Velhagen und Klasings Schulausgaben). Hebbel—Maria Magdalena. Kleist—Prinz Friedrich von Homburg. Scheffe'i—Ekkehard (unabridged). GERMAN—PART III. (a) Advanced unseen translation, essay writing and conversation (Nicholson and Brcnnan). (b) History of German Literature (Vogelpohl). (c) Selected passages from Faust, Part II. (d) Freytag—Soil und Haben. (e) A Study of Kleist's Dramas, with readings of selected passages. (f) Contemporary German Drama. Studente are advised to read ihe works referred to in i(d) and (e) as well as some dramas of living German authors during the long vacation. N.B.—The course for German, Part I., assumes that students have passed in German at the School Leaving Examination or reached the standard required at this examination. 760 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1930.

Work done during the year will be taken into account together with the oral and written tests at the an nual examination. Country students should submit notes or other proof of work done during the year. They are advised to get into touch with the associate-professor at the beginning of the academic year. Students should follow current events in Germany by reading the German magazines provided in the University Library, and attending lectures and meetings of the Lesevorein. First-hand acquaintance with these will be required at the Examinations for the ordinary degree and at the Final Examination in Germanic Languages.

COMPARATIVE PHILOLOGY.— The general principles ot Comparative Philology, and the Comparative Grammar of the Greek and Latin Languages. Text-books :— Tucker -Introduction to the Natural History of Language. Giles—Comparative Philology. GROUP 11.—HISTORY, ECONOMICS AND POLITICAL SCIENCE. BRITISH HISTORY A.— The History of England from the earliest times to 1660. Special Study: The period from the Norman Conquest to the accession of Edward I. Books recommended: — Haverfield—The Romanization of Roman Britain. Davis—England under the Normans and An- gevins. Trovelyan—History of England, Books 1, 2, 3 and Book 4, chaps. I. to V. Coulton—Social Life in the Middle Ages, Vol. in. Giraldus Cambrensis' Itinerary and Description of Wales and Henderson's Historical Documents ot the Middle Ages, in Bonn's edition. ARTS. 761

References will also be given to Matthew of Paris in the same edition. Country students should observe that these pre scribed books are all necessary to cover the period, and that Vol. Ill of Coulton's Lite in the Middle Ages, Giraldus Cambrensis' Itinerary and Description of Wales (Everyman), and Henderson's Documents are used for essay work.

BRITISH HISTORY B The general history to 1660, with special regard to the period from 1603 to 1660. Books recommended: — Trevolyan—History of England, Books 1, 2 and 3. Montague—P/olitical History of England, Vol. VII. Gooch—Political Thought from Bacon to Halifax Gardiner—Constitutional Documents of the Puri tan Revolution Firth—Life of Cromwell.

BRITISH HISTORY C— The general History from 1660 to 1914, with special- regard to the period from 1815 to 1914, Books recommended: — Trevelyan—England under the Stuarts, chapters XT. to XV. Grant Robertson — England under the Hanov erians. Gretton—Modern History of the English People. Trevelyan—British History in the Nineteenth Century. Adams and Stephens—Select Documents ot Eng lish Constitutional History.

BRITISH HISTORY D.— The general History from 1600 to 1914, with special regard to the period from 1660 to 1702. 762 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1930

Lodge—Political History of England, Vol. VHJ. Grant Robertson—Select Statutes, Cases and Documents. Grant Robertson—England under the Hanover ians. Trevelyan—British History in the Nineteenth Century. Laski—Political Thought in England, from Locke to Bentham. Macanlay—History ot England. Paul—The Reign of Queen Anne.

AUSTRALASIAN HISTORY—(To be taken in 1937). Tho History ot the discovery of Australia, New Zealand, and the Pacific, political development, im- erial and foreign relations, with special regard to the Shistory of Victoria. Books recommended: Wood—The Discovery ot Australia. Scott—Australian Discovery. Mills—The Colonization ot Australia. Price—The Foundation and Settlement of South Australia. Turner—History of the Colony of Victoria. Roberts—History of Australian Land Settlement. Shann—Economic History of Australia. Reeves—Tho Long White Cloud. Scholefield—The Pacific : Its Past and Future. Marais—Colonization of New Zealand. Cambridge History ot the British Empira—Vol. VII. (Australia and New Zealand).

EUROPEAN HISTORY A.—(To be taken in 1937). The History of the Middle Ages, 326 to 1453, with .special regard to the Mediaeval Empire. Adams—Civilization during the Middle Ages. Emerton—Introduction to the Middle Ages. Emerton—Mediaeval Europe. Emerton—The Beginnings of Modern Europe. Davis—Charlemagne. Henderson—Historical Documents ot the Middle Ages. ARTS. 76J

Thatcher and McNeal—Source Book of Mediaeval History. Bryce—The Holy Roman Empire. The Cambridge Mediaeval History, as referred to in Lectures.

EUROPEAN HISTORY B.— Modern European History from 1453 to 1914, with special regard to the period from 1789 to 1815. Hayes—Political and Social History of Europ* Madelin—The French Revolution. Madelin—The Consulate and Empire. Carlyle—The French Revolution. Holland Rose—life ot Napoleon. Legge—Select Documents of the French Revolu tion. J. M. Thompson—French Revolution Documents. Fisher—N apoleon.

EUROPEAN HISTORY C— Modern European History from 1453 to 1914, with special regard to the period from 1815 to 1871. Books recommended: — Acton—Lectures on Modern History. Hayes—Political and Social History of Modern Europe. Hazeu—Modern European History. Clapham—The Economic Development ot France and Germany, 1815-1914. Marvin—The Century ot Hope. Robinson and Beard—Readings in Modem Euro pean History, Vol. II. Note.—British History A, British History C, and European History C are dealt with in evening Lectures. Australasian History and British History D are taken in alternate years. Australasian History will be taken in 1937. European History A and B are taken in alternate years. European History A will be taken in 1937. 764 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1936.

ANCIENT HISTORY— The History ot Athens and Sparta. The History of Rome to Theodosiue. Books recommended— *Baker—Twelve Centuries of Rome. *Bury—History of Greece. Earp—The Way of the Greeks. Tucker—Life in Ancient Athens. Fowler—Roman Lite in the Age of Cicero. •Fowler—The City State ot the Greeks and Romans. Harrison—Pots and Fans. Botstord and Sihler—Hellenic Civilisation (as referred to in lectures). Note:—Essays will be required and country students should, in addition to the above mentioned books, possess Herodotus (Everyman edition), Livy (Everyman edition) •and Plutarch's Lives.

ECONOMIC HISTORY— Preliminary reading: — Ashley—Economic Organisation ot England. Day—A History of Commerce. The general principles of the evolution of industry and trade; the economic history of England to 1760 in outline; the industrial revolution and ite consequences in England; modern economic history of England, Franco, Ger many and the United States; the economic history of Australia in some detail; modem industrial tendencies. Text Books: — Clapham—The Economic Development of France and Germany. Shann—An Economic History of Australia. Heaton—Modem Economic History.

•Textbooks. ARTS. 766

Knowles—Industrial and Commercial Revolutions in Great Britain during the Nineteenth Century. Meredith—The Economic History of England. Bland Brown and Tawney—English Economic History. Select Documents. Day—A History of Commerce. References for further reading, both general and on special topics, will be made in the lectures. Students are expected to prepare class exercises and essays as set by the lecturers.

ECONOMICS—PAET T. Preliminary reading: — Clay—Economics for the General Reader. Crump—First Book of Economics. Outlines of the general economics of the production, consumption, distribution and exchange of wealth, with special consideration of value, industrial organisation, the economic functions of government, wages, rent, prices, money and banking, and the elementary prin ciples of taxation. Text Books:— Ely—Outlines of Economics (6th Revised Ed.). Gray—The Development of Economic Doctrine.- Taylor—Principles of Economics. Lehfeldt—Money. Layton and Crowther—An Introduction to the Study of Prices. Bower—A Dictionary of Economic Terms. Copland (Ed.)—An Economic Surrey of Australia (The Annals of the American Academy of Political and Social Science, Sept.. 1931), Parts m-VI. References for further reading, both general and on special topics, will be made in the leotures. Students are expected to prepare class exercises and essays as set by the Lecturers. ECONOMICS—PAST II. • Preliminary reading:— 7Q6 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1936.

Robertson—Money. Marshall—Principles of Economics, Books I-IV. Pigou—Economics in Practice (Macmillan). (a) The theory of value, the distribution ot wealth, population, the theory of wages, unemploy ment, trade policy, the relation of the State to economic organisation; treated in greater detail and to a more advanced standard than in Economics Part I. (b) The principles of money, international trade and. the foreign! exchanges, (o) The national income and its measurement. Text-books: — Marshall—Principles of Economics. Hawtrey—Currency and Credit. Copland—Credit and' Currency Control. The Australian Tariff: Am Economy Enquiry. Taussig—Principles of Economics (2 vols.). The Economics of Australian Transport (Supplt. to the Economic Record, Vol. VI.). Colin Clark—The National Income. Hicks—The Theory, of Wages. References for further reading, both general and on special topics, will be made in the lectures. Students are expected to prepare class exercises and essays as set by the lecturers. ECONOMICS—PABT HI. Preliminary reading: — Dalton—Public Finance (Boutledge). Maafie—Theories of the Business Cycle (Maamil- lan). Robinson—The Structure of Competitive Indus try (C.TJ.P.). King—Elements of Statistical Method (Macmil lan). Any three of the following sections may be selected! Leotures will be given in sections (a) and (b) each year, and in sections (c) and (d) in alternate years, viz. (o) in; 1937 and (d) in 1936. Examinations will be held in ARTS. 767 all sections annually, and students will be given guid ance as to reading in the section in which there are no lectures. (a) The theory of money, banking and exchange, international trade; industrial fluctuations. (b) Statistical method 'and Australian statistics. (c) Public finance—expenditure, revenue, theory of taxation, the public debt and means of amortisation. (d) Industrial relations and Economic Organisa tion .

Textbooks:— (a) Keynes—A Treatise on Money (Macmillan), 2 vols. Pigou—Industrial Fluctuations (Macmillan). Copland—Australia in the World Crisis (C.U.P.). Hayek—Monetary Theory of the Trade Cycle. Harrod—International Economics (C.U.P.). (b) Giften—Statistics, edited by Higgs and Yule (Macmillan). Day—Statistical Analysis (Macmillan). Mitchell—Business Cycles (National Bureau of Economic Research, New York). (c) Bastable—Public Finance (Macmillan). Dalton—Public Finance (Routlcdge). Stamp—Fundamental Principles of Taxation (Macmillan). Reports of Commonwealth Grants Commission,. 1934 and 1935 (Govt. Printer, Canberra). (d) Chamberlin—The Theory of Monopolistic Com petition. Clay—The Problem of Industrial Relations (Macmillan). von Beckcrath—(Modern Industrial Organisation (McGraw Hill). Students must 'also consult the Commonwealth Year Book and other publications ot the Statistical Bureaux of the Commonwealth and the States, the budgets of the. Commonwealth and States, and 'articles in the Economic Record, as directed in lectures. 7(i8 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 193«.

HISTORY OF ECONOMIC THEORY— Preliminary reading: — Price—Political Economy in England. • Gide and Rist—History of Economic Doctrines. Development of economic theory from the Mercan tilists to modern times, with special reference to the doctrines of the Mercantilists and the Physiocrats, Adam Smith and the classical period in England, J. S. Mill, the Austrian School, Jevone, Sidgwick, Marshall, Bohm-Bawerk, Marx and the development of socialism, tariff theory; the nature, scope and method of econo mics. Text-books: — Cann-an—A Review of Economic Theory (King). Haney—History of Economic Thought (Macmil lan). Keynes—The Scope and Method of Political Economy (Macmillan). Copland—W. E. Heia-rn: First Australian Econo mist (M.U.P.). Mill.—Principles of Political Economy (Ashley's edition). Jevons—The Theory of Political Economy. Articles in The Review of Economic Theory and other journals, as referred to by the lecturer. Note.—Lectures in this subject will be given in 1936, and thereafter in alternate years.

MATHK.MATICAL ECONOMICS— Lectures will be given in 1937, and thereafter in alternate years.

MODERN POLITICAL INSTITUTIONS— A Comparative Study of the Practice of Modern Government. A. The Democracies- (i.) A brief analysis of the theory of modern demo cratic government. ARTS. 769

(ii.) A study of the working of government in Bri tain, France and U.S.A.— (1) The party system. (2) The electoral system. (3) The legislature. (4) The executive and civil service. Part ot the first term work will be dealt with in the lectures on Public Administration and Finance and will not be repeated in these lectures. |B- Fascism in Italy. The theory and practice ot the corporative state. •0- National Socialism in Germany. The politics and government of Germany before 1918. The Weimar era. 1919-1933. The Third Reich. J). The Soviet System in Theory and Practise. The constitution of U.S.S.R. The organisation and functions of the Communist Party and the Third International. The technique of Soviet planning. Text-books: — L. Woolt—After the Deluge. F. A. Ogg—English Government and Politics. Ramsay M.uir—How Britain is Governed. Wertheimer—Germany Under Hitler. A. Siegfried^—France. Beard—The American Leviathan. J. S. Barnes—Fascism. For reference.— H. Finer—Theory and Practice of Modern Govern ment. H. J. Laski—Grammar of Politics. H. Finer—Mussolini's Italy. Lenin—The State and Revolution. Stalin—Leninism. A. D. Lindsay—Karl Marx's Capital. P. H. Box—Russia. W. P. Middleton—The French Political System. Brogan—The American Political System. 770 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1936.

A large part of the reading in the course will con sist of articles in periodicals. Frequent reference will be maac to the Political Quarterly, Political Science [Quarterly and American Political Science Review. Detailed reading liste are provided each term. The course involves the writing of terminal essays.

CONSTITUTIONAL AND LEGAL HISTORY— Before lectures commence, students should raad carefully: - Pollard—Factors in Modern History. Pifoot—English Law and its Background. Au informal test ot students' knowledge of these books- will be hold during the first week of term. This subject comprises a study of the development of the English constitutional system with special reference to (a) The evolution of Parliament in the Middle Ages. (b) The definition of ' powers' in the 17th century. (o) The evolution of Cabinet Government in the 18th, and 19th centuries. (d) The evolution of the English judicial system. (e) Institutional development in Australia. The text-books recommended are : Maitland—Constitutional History of England. Pollard—Factors in Modern History. Adams and Stephens—Select Documents of Eng lish Constitutional History. Potter—Historical Introduction to English l,aw and. its Institutions. Further references will be given in lectures, especially to: Pollard—The Evolution of Parliament. Holdsworth—History ot Eug ish Law, vol. I. Levy Ullma.nn—The English Legal Tradition. Students will also be required to submit an essay on an approved subject. Law students must make an outline- study, in lieu of the essay, of the history ot certain selected branches of English Law, as directed in class, [the: additional text-book recommended being: ARTS. 771

Fifoot—English Law and its Background. Further references will be given in lectures, especially to Holdsworth—History of English Law, vols. TJ-IX.

INTERNATIONAL RELATIONS— Studente are advised to read the volumes by Mowat and Jackson before commencing lectures. Section I— Tho Evolution of the European State-System from 1500-1914 viewed as an area of diplomacy and international, politics. Section II— The outline ot the Poace Settlement and the modi fication and results thereof in broad outline from 1914 to date. Section III— The chief underlying factors in current International Relations : (a) Political ; (b) Economic. Section IV— The permanent organisation of International Rela tions : (a) The League ot Nations; (b) The International Labour Organisation; (c) The Permanent Court ot International Justice. Text Books— Section I— Mowat: The European State System. Section II— Ramsay Muir: The Political Consequences of the War. J. Hampden Jackson : Europe since the War. Section III— , R, Ij. Bncll : International Relations (2nd Edition). Section IV— Mower: International Government (for refer ence). References to short readings in other authorities and to current periodical literatures will be given in lectures. 772 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1936.

CONSTITUTIONAL LAW- PART I (See Faculty ot Law).

GROUP III.—PHILOSOPHY AND PURE MATHEMATICS. PHILOSOPHY I._ (i.) AJI Introduction to Philosophy; Plato's Republic. Text-book: — Plato—The Republic. (Translated by A. D. Lind say.) (ii.) Psychology.—Psychological Standpoint and Me thods. Analysis of Mental life: Sensibility and Purposive Behaviour. Stages of Mental De velopment : Tho Perceptual and Ideational Levels. Memory and Imagination, Thought and Language. Instinct and Habit. Emo- '-'• tion and Sentiment. Belief and Will. Text-book: — B. Edgell—Mental Life. For reference: — (i.)'Plato—Tho Apology. Plato—Crito. Plato—Gorgias (4S4-499). Nettleehip—Lectures on the Republic of Plato. Barker—Greek Political Theory: Plato and Hia Predecessors. Lowes Dickenson—Justice and Liberty, (ii.) McDougall—Social Psychology. MoDougall—An Outline ot Psychology. Stout—Manual of Psychology. Wood worth—Psychology. Garnett—Instinct and Personality. Nunn—Education (ch. 1-12). James—Text-book of Psychology (ch. x, xi, xxii- xxvi). Clark University—Psychologies of 1925. Tho following works may be recommended for pre liminary reading: — ARTS. 773

James—Talks to Teachers about Psychology and Life's Ideals. L. J. Russell—An Introduction to Philosophy. Notes on Psychology are obtainable from the Mel bourne University Press.

HISTORY OF PHILOSOPHY— (i.) The History of Greek Philosophy from Thales to Aristotle. Books recommended: — Burnet: Early Greek Philosophy. Burnet—Early Greek Philosophy. Adam—The Religious Teachers of Greece. Plato—Meno, Phaedo, Republic (v-vii), Thcae- tetus. Taylor—Plato: The Man and His Work (rele vant Dialogues). Taylor—Aristotle. Selections from the Works of Aristotle. (ii.) The History of Modern Philosophy from Descartes to Hume, with special reference to Descartes, Spinoza, and Locke; Books recommended for reading or reference: Descartes—Philosophical Works (Haldane and Boss). Merrylees—Descartes. A. B. Gibson—The Philosophy of Descartes. Spinoza—Ethics, Do Emendatione (Everyman). Joachim—A Study of the Ethics of Spinoza. Gunu—lieuedict Spinoza. Locke—Essay concerning Human Understanding. (Pringle-Pattison's abbreviated edition.) J. Gibson—Locke's Theory of Knowledge and ite Historical Relations. Notes on the subject are obtainable from the Melbourne University Press.

LOGIC— (1) General Introduction to Logic, leading up to Problems ot Judgment and Inference. 774 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1-9S6.

Text-books: — Gibson—Problem of Logic (Sect. I-IV). Bosauquet—Logic. For reference: — Bradley—Principles of Logic. Latta and Macbeath—The Elements of Logic. Stout—Studies in Philosophy and Psychology. (2) The Logic of Science.—A general account of the method of Science, together with a discus sion ot problems which arise therefrom. TexWJook: — Gibson—The Problem of Logic (Sect. X-XIV). For reference: — J. S. Mill—System of Logic. Poincare—The Foundations of Science. Jevons—The Principles of Science. Joseph—An Introduction to Logic. Notes representing previous treatments ot this sub ject are obtainable from the Melbourne University Press.

ETHICS. The course will not be given in 1936, though an examination in tho subject will be held as usual. De tails for the course in 1937 will be published with the details for that year. The course in 1935 dealt with the History of Ethical Systems, with special roferctioe to Plato's Protagoras, Gorgias and Republic, Aristotle's Ethics, Mill's Utili tarianism, and the Moral Theories ot Butler and Kant. Books reoom me n ded: Plato—Republic, Bks. 1-6. P1 ato—Protagoras. Plato—Gorgias. Taylor—Plato: The Man and his work (relevant dialogues). Aristotle;—Ethics, Bks. 1-3, 6, 10 (ch. 6-9). ARTS. 775

Stewart—Notes on the Nicomachean Ethics. Mill—Utilitarianism. Butler—Three Sermons on Human Nature (W. Matthews, Bell's English Classics). Kant—Fundamental Principles of the Meta- physie of Morals. Green—Prolegomena to Ethics. Field—Moral Theory. Notes on the subject are obtainable from the Melbourne University Press.

POLITICAL PHILOSOPHY— 1. The History of Political Thought, with special reference to the period from Hobbes to the Present Day. Text-Books: — Hobbes—Leviathan (Everyman). Locke—On Civil Government (Everyman). Montesquieu—The Spirit of Laws. Rousseau—The Social Contract (Everyman). Beutham—The Principles ot Legislation. J. S. Mill—Liberty and Representative Govern ment (Everyman). Green—Principles of Political Obligation. Bosanquet—The Philosophical Theory of the State. R. M. Maciver—The Modern State. L. T. Hobhouse—Elements of Social Justice. H. J. Laski—The State in Theory and Practice. E. P. Carritt—.Morals and Politics. Books for Reference: — D. G. Ritchie—Natural Rights. C. E. Vaughan—Studies in the History of Politi cal Philosophy. C. E. Vaughan—The Political Writings of Rous seau. E. HaleVy—The Growth of Philosophic Radical ism. E. Barker—Political Thought from Spencer to To-day. Detailed reading lists will be provided each term. The course involves tho writing of terminal essays. 776 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1936

2. During second term the Professor ot Zoology will give a aeries of ten Lectures in Eugenics.

METAPHYSICS— Courses will be delivered in the following subjects: — (1) The Groundwork of Metaphysics. This course is intended to serve as a systematic In troductiou to the main problems of Metaphysics. Books recommended: — I'ringle-Pattison—The Idea of God. Hoernle—Studies in Contemporary Metaphysics. Hooking—The Self, its Bodv and Freedom. Gunn—The Problem of Time'. (2) Modern Philosophical Movements. In this course some of the main contemporary philo sophical movements will be discussed. Books recommended: — (i.) Text-Book: Bradley—Appearance and Reality. (ii.) References: Boeanquet—Principle of Individuality and Value. Bergsou—Creative Evolution. Bergson—Time and Free Will. Bosauquet—The Meeting of Extremes. Campbell—Scepticism and Construction.

PURE MATHEMATICS. Practice Classes will be held in Pure Mathematics I, II, and III, and Tutorial Classes in Pure Mathema tics I. The work done in the Practice Classes will carry weight in the Annual Examinations.

VACATION READING. The following books, relevant to the study of Mathe. matics, are suitable for reading in the Long Vacations. In addition, reference to books bearing specifically on the work of each Year will be found in the Details for individual Subjects, and additional references may be made in Lectures. ARTS. 777

Historical. . Turnbull—The Great Mathematicians. Sullivan—The History of Mathematics in Europe. Hobson—John Napier and the Invention of" Logarithms. Hobson—Squaring' the Circle. Ball—A Short History of Mathematics. Smith—Source Book of Mathematics. Popular. Whitehead—Introduction to Mathematics. Perry—Spinning Tops. Ball—Mathematical Recreations and Problems. Darwin—The Tides., Bice—Relativity. (Bcnn'e Sixpenny Series.)

PURE MATHEMATICS—PART I. Differential and Integral Calculus—An introductory, course, including a systematic discussion of- the elementary functions, with special regard' to calculation; simple treatment of Taylor's- Theorem; geometrical applications (curvature, arcs, areas, volumes, moments); physical: applications.' Analytical Geometry.—The straight line, with an. introduction to conies. Text-book recommended: — (1) For students who have already done a year's course in Calculus: Gaunt—Infinitesimal Cal culus. (2) For others: Fawdry and Durell—Calculus for Schools. Books for Reference: — Dale—Five-figure Tables ot Mathematical Func tions, or » Castle—(Mathematical Tables. Osgood and Grauatein—Plane and Solid Analytio- Geometry. A knowledge of the work prescribed for Mathematics H and III at the School-Leaving Examination (Pass), will be assumed. 778 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 193«.

PURE MATHEMATICS—PAST II. In the Long Vacation, before undertaking this course, students should read some systematic work on Integra tion, such as Michell and Belz—Introduction to Mathe matical Analysis, chap. 10; also Osgood and Grau- stein—Plane and Solid Analytic Geometry, chaps. 1-6. Calculus-—Development of the First Year Course; functions of two or more variables; methods of integration, including that ot series; double and triple integrals; differential equa tions of the first order and linear differential equations of higher order with constant coeffi cients. Algebra.—Elements of the theory of determinants, infinite series and complex numbers. Plane Geometry.—Elementary analytical methods with the application of the Calculus (in cluding the theory of tangents, normals, asymptotes, singular points, envelopes); the chief properties of conies; special curves. Solid Geometry.—Analytical treatment ef the straight line and plane, with an introduc tion to surfaces of the second order. Text-books recommended; — Michell and Belz—Introduction to Mathematical Analysis. Osgood and Graustein—Plane and Solid Analytic Geometry. PURE MATHEMATICS—PART III.* In the Long Vacation, before undertaking this course students should read some systematic work on Infinite Series, and on Complex Numbers, and should extend their knowledge of Solid Geometry. Read Hardy—Pure Mathematics, chaps. 3, 4, 8.: or •Bowman—Elementary Algebra, chap. 38; and Durell and Robson—Advanced Trigonometry, chaps. 8, 9; together with Osgood and Granstein, chaps 22-24.

*It is intended that tho aection on Principles of Mathematics, which has been prescribed in recent > e»rs will l*e sixain prL'Si:rit>cd for the examina- ••tions in 1937. ARTS. 779'

A : A selection ot topic? from Higher Algebra—Determinants, continued frac tions, theory of equations, matrices, infinite series and products. Plane and Solid Geometry (projective and analyti cal methods). Trigonometry—Higher plane trigonometry; spheri cal trigonometry, with applications. 'B: Analysis.—Definite integrals; elements of the theory ot functions of a complex variable, with applications; Fourier series; differen tial equations. In addition, the course will include Practical Mathe matics (see below), taken for two hours a- week during ono term. Text-books recommended: — Durell and Robsou—Advanced Trigonometry. Dickson—Elementary Theory of Equations. Osgood—Advanced Calculus. Piaggio—Differential Equations. Books for reference: — Burkhardt-Rasor—Functions of a Complex Vari able. Klein—Elementary Mathematics from the Ad vanced Standpoint. Valh'e-Poussin—Cours d'Analyse. \Veber and Wellstein—Enzyklopadie der Elemen- tar-Mathematik. Hobson—Functions of a Real Variable. Heath—The Thirteen Books of Euclid's Elements. PRACTICAL MATHEMATICS— Practical applications of graphical, numerical and: mechanical methods for the solution of problems, to gether with the relevant theory, as follows: — Graphical methods.—Curve tracing; solution of equations; quadrature. Treatment of observational results.—Theory of errors, curve fitting, harmonic analysis. Numerical methods—Interpolation; construction and use of tables; solution ot equations; summa- "780 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1936.

tion ot series; numerical quadrature; use of calculating machines. Text-book recommended: — Whittaker and Robinson—The Calculus of Obser vations.

GROUP IV.—SCIENCE. MIXED MATHEMATICS. Practice Classes will be held in Mixed Mathematics I and II. The work done in the Practice Classes will •carry weight in th< Annual Examinations.

MIXED MATHEMATICS—1>ART I. Kinematics.—Displacement, velocity, acceleration: their specification and composition; plane motion of a particle and ot a rigid body. Dynamics.—Mass, momentum, foroe, energy, angu lar momentum; their specification and mutual inter-relations as furnished by the Laws of Motion; simple practical applica tions of the equations of motion oi particles and of rigid bodies in a plane.; Statics-—Equilibrium of particles, and of rigid bodies under ooplanar forces; application to simple frames, machines and other sys tems of rigid bodies; the energy-criterion for equilibrium and its stability. Hydrostatics-—Fundamental notions on the equili brium of fluids; centre of pressure; equili brium and stability of floating bodies; pres- , sure in a uniformly rotating liquid. Text-books recommended: — Barnard—Elementary Dynamics. Barnard—Elementary Statics. Sen—Hydrostatics. A knowledge of the work prescribed for Mathematioa II, III rand TV at the School-Leaving Examination '(pass) will be assumed. ARTS. 78J

MIXED MATHEMATICS—PAKT 11. In the Long Vacation, before undertaking this course, students should revise their knowledge of integration and of differential equations by reading, for example. Lamb, Calculus, chaps. 6, 7, 11, 12, 13. Statics.—The equilibrium and stability of continuous linear systems, inelastic and elastic (strings, arches, beams, struts) ; analysis of stress and strain, with simple applications. Dynamics-—The analytical treatment of the motions of particles and rigid bodies in two and (in simple cases) three dimensions. The course will be based on Lecture Notes published by the Melbourne University Press. Books for reference : — Lamb—Statics. Lamb—Dynamics. Lamb—Higher Mechanics.

MIXED MATHEMATICS—PA itr 111. In the Long Vacation, before undertaking this course, students should read Weatherburn, Advanced Vector Analysis, chaps. 1-3; and Carshaw, Fourier Series and Integrals, Introduction and chap. 7. Dynamics-—Lagrange's equations; theory of small vibrations about equilibrium or steady motion; variational methods. Stress-strain relations for an elastic solid, with simple ap plications. Equations of Mathematical Physics.—The differen tial and integral calculus of scalar and vector functions of position,- with applications to gravitational, electrostatic and magnetic fields, conduction of heat, diffusion; vibra tions of continuous systems. Text-books recommended: — Wreatherburn—Advanced Vector Analysis. Webster—Dynamics ot Particles and of Rigid. Elastic and Fluid Bodies. 782 DKTA1LS OF SUBJECTS, 1936,

Books tor reference: — Appell—Traite du Mecanique Rationelle Lamb—Hydrodynamics. Prescott—Applied Elasticity. Routh—Statics (Vol. II.). Byerly—Fourier Series and Spherical Harmonics. THEORY OF STATISTICS— An elementary course on the Mathematical Theory of Statistics, inclusive ot:— Graphs and charts, frequencies, mean values, dispersion; index numbers; probability, normal and generalised probability curves; method of least squares; curve fitting, in cluding the method of moments; correlation. Text-books recommended: — Jones—First Course in Statistics. Mills—Statistical Methods. Books for reference :— Bowley—Elements of Statistics. , Yule—Introduction to the Theory of Statistics. Kelley—Statistical Method. Eldertou—Frequency curves and Correlation. Tippett—The Methods of Statistics. Steffenson—Interpolation. Fisher—Statistical Methods for Research Workers. A knowledge ot Mathematics up to the standard ot Pure Mathematics I., will be assumed in this course.

For details of Botany, Part I; Chemistry, Part I; Geology, Part I; Natural Philosophy, Part I: Zoology, Part I, see under Faculty of Science. ARTS. 785

THE DEGREE WITH HONOURS.

A. SCHOOL OP CLASSICAL PHILOLOGY. The Course for the Degree with Honours consists of tho following subjects: — Greek, Parts I., II., and III. Latin, Parte I.. II.. and HI. Comparative Philology. Additional Subject. The details of study and examination for the Annual" Examinations are as follows :—

GREEK—PAET I.— Translation into Greek Prose and Iambic Verse. Translation from unprescribed Greek authors. Greek Accidence and Syntax. Special Books: — (a) The books prescribed for Greek, Part I.. (Ordinary Degree), viz.: Euripides, Hippolytus (Hadley, C.U.P.). Thucydides TV, cc. 42-117 (Mills, O.U.P.). (b) Additional: — Demosthenes, Leptines (King, Macmillan). LATIN—PAKT I.— Translation into Latin Prose, and Heroic and Elegiac Verse. . Translation from unprescribed Latin Authors. Latin Accidence and Syntax. Special Books: — (a) The books prescribed for Latin, Part t (Ordinary Degree), viz.: Vergil, Eclogues, omitting II (Page, Maomillan). Pliny, Selected Letters, with omissions as in Part I (ord.) (Pritchard and Bernard, O.U.P.). 60 -784 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 193C.

(b) Additional: — Juvenal, I, HI, VIII, X (Duff, C.U.P.).

•GREEK—PART 11.— More advanced prose and verse composition and un prescribed translation. Special Books: — Sophocles, Oedipus Tyrannus (Jebb and Davies, C.U.P.). Demosthenes, Leptines (King, Macmillan). Herodotus I, cc. 95-198 (Sleeman, Pitt Press). Pindar, Olympians I-VTJ, Pythians I-IV (Teubner Text). Outlines (Primer) of History, Antiquities and Litera ture of Classical Greece.

LATIN—PART 11 — More advanced prose and verse composition and un prescribed translation Special Books:-- Cicero, Select Orations, omitting de Imperio Qn. Pompei (King, O.U.P.). Tacitus, Annals IV (Edwards, C.U.P.). Juvenal, I, III, VIII, X (Duff, C.U.P.). Plautus, Trinumimus (Gray, Pitt Press). Outlines (Primer) of History, Antiquities and Litera ture of Classical Rome.

GREEK—PART III. ANI> LATIN--PAIIT 111.— Prose and verse composition; unprescribed transla tion ; .History, Antiquities and Literature of Classical Greece and Classical Rome. The Special Books will be the same as tor Greek, Part II., and Latin, Part II., respectively.

COMPARATIVE PHILOLOGY.— The general principles of Comparative Philology, and the Comparative Grammar of the Greek and Latin Languages. ARTS. 785

•Candidates for the Honours Degree in Classical Philology must at Annual Examinations pass Greek, Part I., and Latin, Part I., before they proceed to Greek, Part II., and Latin, Part II., respectively, and Greek, Part LI., and Latin, Part II., before they proceed to Greek, Part III., and Latin, Part III., respectively; Greek, Part I., and Latin, Part I., shall be the subjects in either the course for the Ordinary Degree or the course for the Degree with Honours. Candidates will be examined in the subjects of Greek, Part HI., and Latin Part TJX, at the Pinal Examination for the Degree wiui Honours; and in Comparative Philology at the end of either the second or the third year. The examination in the last, named subject will, in either case, be counted as part of the Final Examination. The Final Examination in Classical Philology will consist of tho following nine papers: — 1. Prescribed Books (Greek). 2. Prescribed Books (Latin). 3. Translation into Greek Prose and Verse. 4. Translation into Latin Prose and Verse. 5. Greek Unseen Translation. 6. Latin Unseen Translation. 7. The History of Greek and Latin Literature 8. General Paper. 9. Special Subjects. 8. The General Paper will include: The Outlines of Greek and Roman History; the chief Greek and Roman Antiquities; Classical Geography; the Ele ments of Palaeography; Greek and Latin Syntax. 9. Special Subjects: — (a) Classical Athens, as treated in leotures. Recommended for reference:— Cambridge Ancient History, Vols. IV., V. (the relevant chapters).

'Candidates who pursue the normal three years' course will naturally take Greek, Part I., and Latin, Part 1., and an additional subject in the first year, Greek, Hart II., and Latin, Part II.. in the second year, and Comparative Philology, in either the secoud or the third year. Candidates •are requested to consult with the Professor of Classical Philology at the tiepim^ng of their course. 60A 786 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1936.

(b) Imperial Homo, as treated in lectures. Recommended for reference :— Bury—Students' Roman Empire. Tacitus! -Annals and Histories. Suetonius—Lives of the Caesars. Dill—Roman Society from Nero to Marcus. Aurolius. Friedliinder—Roman Life and Manners under tho Early Empire. Tucker—Life in the Roman World of Nero- and St. Paul. Sandys—Latin Epigraphy. Rushforth—Latin Historical Inscriptions. Dessau—Inscriptiones Selectae Latinae. The following books are suggested, but not prescribed Those marked with an asterisk are specially recommended for practical use in the first instance— For Comparative Philology ami the Greek and Latin Lan guages— Brugmaun—Kurzu Vergluichende Grummiitik der I.G. Sprachen. Roberts—Introduction to Greek Epigraphy. Thompson—Greek and Latin Faheography. *Gildersleeve and Lodge—Latin Grammar. H. W. Smyth—Greek Grammar. Lindsay—The Latin Language. Bennett—Syntax of Early Latin. Riemann and Goelzer—Gramiuaire Couiparde du gruc at du latin (especially the "syntax). •Giles—Manual of Comparative Philology. For Greek and Roman Literature— •Murray—Ancient Greek Literature ) ,., , •Mackail—Latin Literature . ( Mlull,a18- Mahaffy—History of Greek Classical Literature. •Haigh—The Attic Theatre. Haigh—The Tragic Drama of tho Greeks. •Tyrrell—Latin Poetry. Jebb—Growth and Influence of Greek Classical Poetry Butcher—Aristotle's Theory of Poetry and Fine Art. Duff, J. W.—Literary History ot Rome; I., In th» Golden Age; II., In the Silver Age. ARTS. 787

For History and Antiquities— *A Companion to Greek Studies (Whibley). •A. Companion to Latin Studies (Sandys). Dictionary of Greek and Roman Antiquities (Smith). E. Gardner—Handbook ot Greek Sculpture. •Zimmern—The Greek Commonwealth. •Fowler—Social Life at Rome in the Age of Cicero. •Tucker—Lite in the Roman World of Nero and St. Paul Dill—Roman Society from Nero to Marcus Aurelius. •Mau-Kelsey—Pompeii: Its Life and Art. •Tucker—Life in Ancient Athens. Gardner—Grammar ot Greek Art. •Biiry's History of Greece ~\ .•Heitiand—Short History of the Roman f ,. , Republic. ( n Pelham's Outlines ot Roman History )

B. SCHOOL OF HISTORY AND POLITICAL SCIENCE. The course for the Degree with Honours includes the following subjects:— 1. Ancient History. 'i. British History B. 3. British History D. •I'. European History A or European History B. 3. Modern PolitUal Institutions. <5. Australasian History. 7. Constitutional and Legal History. 8. Economic History. 9. Political Philosophy. 10. International Relations. Candidates must take the subjects numbered 1-4, and any three of the subjects numbered 5-10. In such of these seven subjects as are taken in the first and second years, candidates must be placed in the class list at an annual examination. In addition to the subjects of this School, Candid ates must select a language other than English from the courses for the ordinary, or the honours, degree, so aa to complete a total of eight subjects. 788 DETAILS OP SUBJECTS, 1936,

The details ot study and examination are those pre scribed for the several subjects for the Ordinary Degree, together with the following; —

1. ANCIENT HISTOBY. History of Ancient Empires in outline and ot Greece and Rome in: detail. Books, additional to those prescribed for the pass degree:— Mommsen—History of Rome. Greenidgo—Roman Public Life. Gibbon—Decline and Fall (Chap. 1-13 inclusive). Glotz—Ancient Greece at Work. Whibley—Companion to Greek Studies ; and the Cambridge Ancient History, as referred to in lectures. 0, BRITISH HISTOBY B.— In addition to the work prescribed for the Pass course:—• Early English Voyages of Discovery. The English Colonies to 1688. Early Colonial Policy. The Foundations of British India. Books recommended: — The Cambridge History of the British Empire, Vol. I, chapters 1 to 10. Tyler—England in America Andrews — Colonial Self-Goverument, 1652-1689 Egerton—History of British Colonial Policy, Bks, I and II P. E. Roberts—History of India (ch. 1-6) Hart—American History told by Contemporaries, Vol. I.; Era of Colonisation, 1492-1689 Hakluyt—Voyages (Everyman Ed.)

8. BRITISH HISTOBY D.— In addition to the work prescribed for the Pass course: — The British Colonies from 1688; tho American Revolution; British India; the Dominion* ARTS. 789,

and Crown Colonies in the Nineteenth and Twentieth Centuries. Books recommended: — Cambridge History of the British Empire, Vol. I., Chapters XITJ to XXVT, Vol. IV. Chap ters VII to XXXII, and Vol. V. A. B. Keibh—Select Speeches and Documente on. British Colonial Policy, 1763-1917 P. E. Roberts—History of India S. E. Morison—Sources and Documents illustrat ing the American Revolution Keith—Speeches and Documente on Indian Policy. Egerton—History ot British Colonial Policy.

4. EUROPEAN HISTORY— In addition to the work prescribed tor the Fass- oourse: — Discovery of the New World, Foundation and Government of Spanish, Portuguese, French, Dutch Colonies; German Colonial Policy; Russia in Asia; the Westward Expansion of the United States; the Expansion of Japan; European Expansion and Colonial History in the Nineteenth and Twentieth Centuries. Books recommended: E. J. Payne—History of the New World Called America Raymond Bcazley—Prince Henry the Navigator John Piske—The Discovery of America Sir Arthur Helps—The Spanish Conquest of America. W. Spence Robertson—History of the Latin American Nations. Thwaites—France in America Bourne—Spain in America Sir Harry Johnston—Colonisation of Africa Ramsay Muir—The Expansion of Europe Scott Keltie—The Partition ot Africa. W. C. Abbotte-The Expansion of Europe 790 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 193G.

The following chapters of the Cambridge Modem History are also recommended for study: — Vol. i., chapters 1, 2, and 15; vol. iii., chapters 9 and 19; vol. iv., chapters 24 and 25; vol. v.. chapter 22; vol. vi., chapters 6 and 15; vol. vii., chapters 1 to 7, and chapter 21; vol. ix., chapter 23; vol. x., chapters 8, 9, 10, 21 and 23; vol. ii., chapters 26 and 27; vol. xii., chapters 15, 16, 20 and 25. o. MODERN POLITICAL INSTITUTIONS— A more detailed study of topics selected from the course for the Ordinary Degree. Studente will be re quired to do two terminal essays. Detailed reading references will be given in the discussion classes.

6. AUSTRALASIAN HISTORY— In addition to the work prescribed for the pass course, a closer study ot Imperial relatione in respect to Aus tralia, New Zealand and the Pacific. Books to be consulted: — Keith—Responsible Government in the Do minions. Keith—Imperial Unity and the Dominions. Sweetman—Australian Constitutional Develop ment. Duncan Hall—The British Commonwealth of Nations. Egerton—British Colonial Policy in the Twentieth Century. . Other Works to be mentioned in lectures.

7. CONSTITUTIONAL AND LEGAL HISTORY— Honour students will be expected to show a more advanced knowledge of tfie Pass work, with particular reference to (a) the history ot the mediaeval Parliament, (b) the constitutional theories ot the 17th Century, (c) the history of the Chancery. ARTS. 791

8. ECONOMIC HISTORY— The work prescribed for Economic History in School H (Economics).

9. POLITICAL PHILOSOPHY— A more detailed study of topics selected from the course for the Ordinary Degree. Students will be re quired to do two terminal essays. Detailed reading references will lie given in the discussion classes.

10. INTERNATIONAL KELATIONS- In addition to the Pass Course, Honours reading will be arranged by the lecturer in conference with each Honour student. This reading will develop in details pecific portions ot the Pass Course. The Final Examination in the School of History and Political Science will consist ot seven papers as follows : (a) One in each of the subjects *Ancient History British History B, British History D, European History B, (b) One in each of the three subjects selected by candidates from among the subjects: Modern Political Institutions, Australasian .History, Constitutional and Legal History, Economic History, Political Philosophy, Inter national Relations. And a historical research essay to be completed during the year of the Final Examination.

C. SCHOOL OF PHILOSOPHY. The Course for the Degree with Honours consists of the following subjects: —

* Hooks llecommended— Aristotle—Politics": Constitution of Athens. Thucydides—History of the I'eloponnesian War. Xcnophon — Oeconomicus, Ways and .Means. Tacitus—Annala, Histories, Ayricola. Moniinseu—Provinces of the Itoinan Empire. Haverneld— The Roman occupation of Britain. Uustovsteff—Social and Economic History of the Roman Empire. 792 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS. 1936.

Philosophy I. Logic, Ethics. Political Philosophy. History of Philosophy. Metaphysics. Aesthetics. Candidates should take Philosophy I as prescribed for the Degree with Honours, together with two addi tional subjects, one of which must be a language other than English (preferably German I), at the Annual Examination at the end of their first year. Candidates who at the beginning of their second year decide on taking the School of Philosophy, but have not already passed in Philosophy I, as prescribed for the Degree with Honours, must do so at the Annual Examination at the end of their second year. If they have already taken that subject as for the Ordinary Degree they will be examined in the additional work only. The courses in History of Philosophy, Political Philosophy, and either Logic or Ethics, should be taken in the second year. The details of study and examination in the subjects of the Course are as follows: —

1. PHILOSOPHY I.— (a) As tor the Ordinary Degree. (b) Additional. The Problem of Thought and Knowledge (with special reference to the work of Berkeley). (a) Text-Book: — Berkeley—A New Theory ot Vision; The Prin- . . ciples of Human Knowledge; Three Dialogues between Hylas and Philonous. (Obtainable in one volume in the Everyman Edition.) (b) For Reference : — Dawes Hicks—Berkeley. Q. A. Johnston—The Development ot Berkeley's Philosophy. Stoute-Maniial of Psychology, Bk III., Part II.; Bk, IV., Chap. 1-7. ARTS 793;

2. HISTORY OF PHILOSOPHY— (a) As for the Ordinary Degree. (b) Additional. The Philosophy of Kant.

Ttext-Book : — Kant—The Critique of Pure Reason.

Books recommended; — Hume—Treatise on Human Nature. Leibniz—Monadology. Kant—Prolegomena (tr. Bernard and Mahaffy). Kemp-Smith—A Commentary to Kant's Critique of Pure Reason. Lindsay—Kant. Windelband—Geschichte der Neuen Philosophic (Kant). As a general introduction, Lindsay's "The Philosophy of Kant" (People's Series) may be recommended.

3. ETHICS— The course in Ethics will not be given in 1936. De tails of the course in 1937 will be published with tha Details for that year. The Special Honours Course in 1935 was as follows: — (a) As for the Ordinary Degree. (b) Additional. The Problem of Value. (i.) The meaning of Value. Intrinsic and Ex trinsic Value. The relativity ot Value. The psychological and the logical aspect of the Val ue-Prob lean. (ii.) Theories of Value, subjective and objective* The Austrian School, (iii.) The bases of Value: Utility, Pleasure, Duty. The Right and the Good as ethical standards. (iv.) Hartmann's Theory of Moral Values-. -y 94. DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1936.

Text Books: — N. Hartmann—Moral Values. Bradley—Ethical Studies. Sorley—Moral Values (2-8). Laird—The Idea of Value. Hobhouee—The Rational Good. Books recommended: — Perry—General Theory of Value. Clarke—A Study in the Logic ot Value. Eaton—The Austrian Philosophy of Value. Moore—Principia Ethica. Morris Miller—Mora! Law and tho Highest Good. Bosanquet—The Value and Destiny of the In dividual, Lectures 2, 6, 7. MUirhead—Elements of Ethics (Bk. II, ch. 2 and Bk. V). Urban—Valuation, its Nature and Laws. Crooe—The Philosophy of the Practical.

4. LOGIC— (a) As for Ordinary Degree, (h) Additional: — (i.) Logic and Metaphysics. The Dialectical Method, (ii.) Controversial Problems in Modern Logic. Text Books :— Hegel—Logic (tr. Wallace), ch. 1-6, and 7, pp. 84-98. Cook Wilson—Statement and Inference. Books recommended tor study or reference: — Stace—The Philosophy of Hegel. A. Seth—Hegeliauism and Personality. Morris—Idealistic Logic. Robinson—The Province of Logic. Johnson—Logic. Stebbing—A Modern Introduction to Logic. Burtt—The Metaphysical Foundations ot Mod ern Science. Merzi—History off European Thought in the XlXth Century. AET3. 795.

5. POLITICAL PHILOSOPHY— A more detailed study ot the ground covered in the course for the ordinary degree. Students will be required to do two terminal essays during the year. Further reading references will be given in lectures.

6. METAPHYSICS— (a) The Lectures in tho subject for the Ordinary Degree. (b) Additional. The discussions and the Essay Work will deal with— (i) Metaphysical Systems: (a) Alexander—Space, Time and Deity. (Selected, portions). (b) Whitehead—Process and Reality (Selected portions). (ii) Phenomenology and its Relation to Meta physics : Husserl—Ideas. (Selected portions.)

7. AESTHETICS— Courses for Honour students in their 2nd or 3rd Tear will be delivered' in the following subjects: — (1) The Groundwork of Aesthetics: A General Intro duction. • Textbook: — Carritt—The Theory of Beauty (2nd ed.). Books recommended.— Reid—A Study ot Aesthetics. Croce—Aesthetic. Ducasse—A Philosophy of Art. Santayana—The Sense of Beauty. (2) History of Aesthetic Ideas. Books recommended: — Carritt—Philosophies of Beauty. Listowel—A Recent History of Aesthetic. Bosanquet—History ot Aesthetics. 796 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1936.

The Final Examination in Philosophy will consist of the following six papers: — Logic. Moral Philosophy. Political Philosophy. History of Philosophy. Aesthetics. Metaphysics. LOGIC The Examination will be upon the work for •ie Course of Advanced Logic, as set out under the Details of Subjects for the Degree of B.A. with Honours. MOKAL PHILOSOPHY. The Examination will be upon the work for the Course of Advanced Ethics, as set out under the Details of Subjects for the Degree of B.A. with Honours. POLITICAL PHILOSOPHY. The Examination will be upon • the work for the Course of Political Philosophy, as set out under the Details of Subjects for the Degree of B.A. with Honours. 'HISTORY OP PHILOSOPHY. The Examination will be upon the work for the Course of History of Philosophy, as sot out under the Details ot Subjects for the Degree of B.A. with Honours. METAPHYSICS. The Examination will be upon the work for the course of Metaphysics, as set out under the Details of Subjects for the Degree of B.A. with Honours.

AESTHETICS. (As above.)

D. SCHOOL OF MATHEMATICS. The course for the Degree with Honours includes the following subjects: — Pure Mathematics, Parts I, II, III. Mixed Mathematics, Parts I, II, III. 797

Candidates taking these subjects may proceed in three years either to the degree of Bachelor of Arts with Honours or to the Degree of Bachelor of Science, accord ing to the additional subjects taken. They may also proceed in four years to both degrees by taking suitable additional subjects. (a) Candidates for either degree must pass tha examinations in French and in German, Parts A and B, or Examinations accepted by the appropriate Faculty as equivalents ; but a can didate who has passed the School Leaving Examination in French or in German before entering on his course will be excused the Examination in Part A of the corresponding subject and a candidate who bus obtained First or Second Class Honours at the School Leaving Examination will be excused the Examinations in Parts A and B of the corresponding subject. (Candidates are recommended to take Part A in their first year). (b) Candidates for the degree of B.A. must pass in two additional subjects, viz. (I) Natural Philosophy Part 1, and (2) another subject selected from those for the Ordinary Degree or from a School for the Degree with Honours. The choice of this additional subject must be approved by the Faculty ot Arts ; the Faculty approves the choice ot Logic or Theory of Statistics, and docs not approve the choice of Chemistry Part I, Zoology- Part I, Botany Part I„ or Geology Part I. In addition, such candidates will be required to carry out under direction a study ot a special topic in their Third Year, involving the reading ot certain papers in Mathematical journals. This provision applies also to candidates in a Combined Course which includes Mathematics. (c) Candidates for the degree of B.Sc. must pass in their First Year the additional subjects of Natural Philosophy Part I, and Chemistry Part I, and in their Second Year the additional 798 DETAILS OF SUBJLCTS, 193b'.

subject of Natural Philosophy Fart II. In their Third Year they must pass the Practical portion of the examination tor Natural Philosophy Part III, so as to complete with Mixed Mathematics Part III the subject " Mixed Mathematics Part III with practical Physics." This course should be followed by candidates who wish to proceed to the M.Sc. degree in the School ot Mathematics and Theoretical Physics. (d) The following four-year course for the two degrees of B.A. (Hons) and B.So. is approved: First Year : Pure Mathematics Part 1 (Hons), Mixed Mathematics Part 1 (Hons), Natural Philosophy Part I, Chemistry Part I. Second Year. Pure Mathematics Part 11 (lions), Mixed Mathematics Part 11 (Hons), Natural Philosophy Fart II. Third or Fourth Year: Natural Philosophy Part III, Logic or Theory of Statistics. Fourth or Third Year •. Pure Mathematics Part III (Hons), Mixed Mathematics Part III (Hons). (e) To obtain the degree of B.A. with Honours, candidates must be placed in the Class Lists at the Annual Examination in Pure Mathe matics Part I and Mixed Mathematics Part I, and at the Final Examination in Mathe matics. Candidates, who have made satisfactory progress in Pure and Mixed Mathematics during their second year will be admitted to the third year courses in these subjects without formal examination. Candidates whose progress during the first two terms is not for this purpose considered satisfactory will be notified at the end of the second term that they must sit tor the examination in either or both of Pure Mathematics Part II and Mixed Mathematics Part II as prescribed for Honours in the B.Sc. Course, and their admission to the third year courses will depend on the result of this exam ination. A list of all candidates who will be admitted to the third year courses, containing the names alphabetically within each class, will be published at the end of the year. ,799

These provisions apply also to candidates taking Mathematics as part of a Combined Course. .-•-._• The Dixson Scholarships in Pure Mathema tics Part II and Mixed Mathematics Part II will be awarded on essays and special work set during the second year. The subjects of the Final Examination will be those prescribed for Pure Mathematics* Parte II and III, and Mixed Mathematics Parte II and III. The work done in the) study of a special topic referred to in (b) above, will be taken into account in award ing the Dixson Final Examination Scholar ship and determining the Class List. (f) In the B.So. Course there will be examinations • lor Honours in Pure Mathematics Part II and Mixed Mathematics Part II. These exam inations will cover the easier portions of the subjects prescribed below ' tor the courses in Pure Mathematics Part IT and Mixed Mathematics Part II. Candi dates for the degree ot B.Sc. may compete for the Dixson Final Examination Scholarship under the same conditions as candidates tor the degree of B.A., except that their work in Practical Physics will be taken into account in lieu of the study of a special topic.

VACATION READING. The following books, relevant to the study of Mathe matics, are suitable for reading in the Long Vacations. In addition, reference to books bearing specifically on the (work of each Year is given in the the Details of individual subjects, and additional references may be made in Lectures.

'Historical. Turnbull—The Great .Mathematicians. Sullivan—The History of Mathematics in Europe. Hobson—John Napier and the invention of logarithms 51 800 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, l«3ti.

Hobson—-Squaring the Circle. Rail—A Short History of Mathematics. Smith—-Source Book of Mathematics. Popular. Whitehead— Introduction to Mathematics. Perry—.Spinning! Tops. Ball—JtfatTicitioticaJ Recreations and Problems. Darwin—The Tides. Rice —Relativity. Philosophy of Mathematics and Science. Mach—The Science of Mechanics. Poincare—Science and Hypothesis, Chaps. I to VTI1. Poiiicare—Science and Method, Book 1 and Book 2, Chapters 1 and 2. Dantzig—Number the Language of Science. Jeffreys—Scienlific Inference. Pearson—The Grammar of Science. Klein—Elementary Mathematics from the Advanced Standpoint.

PUBE MATHEMATICS—PART I Analysis.—An introduction to the theory of real numbers aud limits, and its application in the infinitesimal calculus and in the theory of infinite sequences; differential and integral calculus, with geometrical and physical ap plications; simple differential equations. Probability, with applications to statistical variables. .Algebra.—Theory of equations, determinants and continued fractions; complex numbers and elementary functions of a complex variable. Geometry.—Elementary Analytical Geometry of the straight Hue and conic. Text-books recommended: — Durell and Robson—Advanced Trigonometry. Dickson—Elementary Theory ot Equations. Michell and Belz—Introduction to Mathematical Analysis. Sommerville—Analytical Conies ARTS. 801

Books for reference: — . Knopp—Infinite Series. Hardy—Pure Mathematics. Goursa-t—Cours d'Analyse, Tome 1. PURE MATHEMATICS—PART 11.— In the Long Vacation, before undertaking this course, atudente should read Smith—Solid Geometry, chaps. 1-4; and Piaggio—Differential Equations, chaps. 1-7. Analysis-—Elements of the theory of aggregates, ' the number system, theory of limits, func tions defined by limit processes, arithmetical theory of continuous, differential)!e and integ- rable functions, improper integrals, functions of two or more variables, multiple integrals, elements of Fourier series. Differential Equations.—Ordinary and partial dif ferential equations soluble by quadrature, and elementary cases of solution in series. Plane Geometry.—Projective and analytical treat ment of Conies. Algebra-—Elementary Theory ot Linear and Quad ratic Forms. Solid Analytical Geometry.—The straight line and plane, with an Introduction to surfaces of the second order. The course will be based on Lecture Notes published by the Melbourne University Press. Text-books recommended: — Michell and Bclz—Introduction to Mathematical Analysis. Hardy—Pure Mathematics. Sommerville—Analytical Conies. Smith—Solid Geometry. Piaggio—Differential liquations. Books for reference : — Burkhardt-Rasor—Functions of a. Complex Variable. Hobson—Theory of Functions of a Beal Variable. Ince—Ordinary Differential Equations. Goursat—Cours d'Alnalyse. Vallee-Poussin—Coura d'Analyse. 802 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1936.

PURE MATHEMATICS—PART III. In the Long Vacation, before undertaking this course, students should read Burkhardt and Rasor, Funotiona of a Complex Variable. The course will consist of a selection of topics from— Differential Geometry. Functions of a complex variable- Differential Equations. Calculus of Variations. Fourier Series. In addition. PRACTICAL MATHEMATICS (for Syllabus see under PURE MATHEMATICS, PART III., Ordinary Degree) will be taken for two hours a week during- one term. Text-books recommended: — Weatherburn—Differential Geometry. Vallee-Poussiu—Cours d'Analyse. Macrobert—Functions of a Complex Variable. Carslaw—Fourier Series and Integrals. Books for reference: — Bicberbach—D liferent! algleichungen,. Gourant-Hilbert—Methodeu der Math.9matisohe» Physik. Eisenhart—Differential Geometry. Hobson—Theory of Functions of a Beal Variable.. Ince—Ordinary Differential Equations. Whittaker and Watson—Modern Analysis. Goursat—Cours d'Analyse. Kneser—Variationsrechnung. Lovitt—Linear Integral Equations.

MIXED MATHEMATICS—PART I. Kinematics, Dynamics, Statics, Hydrostatics.—A. more advanced treatment ot the Syllabus pre scribed tor Pass, with the use of Vector Algebra, and simple extensions to three dimensions. Text-books recommended: — Plummer—The Principles of Mechanics. Lamb—Statics. ARTS. 80*

Ramsay—Dynamics (for examples). Weatherburn—Elementary Vector Analysis.

MIXED MATHEMATICS—PART II. In the Long Vacation, before undertaking this course, students should read Weatherburn, Advanced Vector Analysis. Dynamics.—Tho analytical treatment of the motions of particles and rigid bodies in two and three dimensions; Lagrange's equations; theory of small vibrations about equilibrium or steady motion; variational methods. Statics and Elasticity-—The equilibrium and sta bility of continuous linear systems, inelastic and elastic (strings, arches, beams, struts); statically indeterminate systems; stress- strain relations for an elastic solid, with simple applications.

Equations of Mathematical Physics- —The differen tial and integral calculus of scalar and vector functions of position, with applications to gravitational, electrostatic and magnetic fields, conduction of heat, diffusion; vibra tions ot continuous systems.

Text-books recommended: — Lamb—Statics. Lamb—Higher Mechanics. Weatherburn—Advanced Vector Analysis.

Books for reference: — Eonth—Analytical Statics (Vol I I.). Webster—Dynamics of Particles and ot Rigid Elastic and Fluid Bodies. Whittaker—Analytical Dynamics. Byerly—Fourier Series and Spherical Har- monies. Jeans—Electricity and Magnetism. gQ4 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1936.

MIXED MATHEMATICS-PART III. This course will consist ot a selection of topics from: General Dynamics. Potential Theory. Electricity and Magnetisi,. Hydrodynamics Elasticity. Theory of Relativity. Quantum Mechanics. Kinetic Theory of Gases. Books for reference: — Whittaker—Analytical Dynamics. Appell—Traite dc Meoanique Rationnelle. Lamb—Dynamical Theory of Sound. Lamb—Hydrodynamics. Love—Elasticity. Rice—Relativity. Eddington—Mathematical Theory of Relativity. Piddiick—A Treatise on Electricity. Livens—Theory of Electricity. Jeans—Electricity and Magnetism. Jeans—Dynamical Theory of Gases. Webster—Dynamics ot Particles and of Rigid, Elastic and Fluid Bodies. Webster—Partial Differential Equations of Mathematical Physics. Kellogg—Foundations of Potential Theory. Frenkel—Wave Mechanics: Elementary Theory. Mott—Wave Mechanics. Thomson and Tait—Natural Philosophy. B. SCHOOL OP ENGLISH LANGUAGE AND LITE- RATUBB. The course tor the Degree with Honours consists of the following subjects: — English Language and Literature, Part I. English Literature, Part II. English Language, Part II. English Literature, Part III. English Language, Part III. In addition to the five subjects of the school, candi dates for the Degree with Honours are required to ARTS. S05- take three approved additional subjects, one of which must be a language, normally Latin Part I, in order to complete a course of eight subjecte. Two of these should constitute a sub-major subject. All Honour Courses must be approved at the beginning of the) session. The details of study and exaauination in the subjects of the Honours course are as follows: —

ENGLISH LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE, PART I. (a) The course in literature and composition pre scribed tor English A. (b) Outlines of the history of the English Lan guage to the close ot the Fourteenth Cen tury, and the special study ot West Saxon texts and ot the language ot Chaucer. Books prescribed: — Cook—First Book in Old English. Sisam—Fourteenth Century Verso and Prose. Books recommended: — Jespersen—Growth and Structure ot the English Language. Ker—English Literature, Medieval.

ENGLISH LITERATURE, PART IT.— (a) The course in Literature prescribed for English B. Books prescribed :—As for English B, and An Eng lish Bibliography (Melb. Univ. Press, 1/6). (b) History ot English Literature (tor second year students). (c) Special Subjects (for second and third year studente). (1) Shakespeare. (2) History of Literary Criticism. (d) Elizabethan Drama. Book Prescribed: — Oliphant—Elizabethan Dramatists. 306 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 19S6.

VACATION READING.

For the course in the History of English Literature, the following books are recommended: — Tacitus, Germania (Everyman, 374); Anglo- Saxon Poetry translated by B. K. Gordon (Everyman, 791) ; Lady Guest's The Mabinogion; Geoffrey of Monmouth, History of the Kings of Britain (Everyman, 577); Malory, Morte D'Arthur (Globe ed.); Chaucer, The Parliament of Foules, Prologue to the Canterbury Tales, and Nun's Priest's Tale, Squire's Tale, Franklin's Tale, Troilus and Criseyde; Henryson, The Testament ef Cresseid (Gam- bridge Plain Texts); The Oxford Book of Ballads; Spenser, Faerie Queene, Foure Hymns, Epithalamium; Lyly, Euphues (Arber's Reprints); Lodge, Rosalyud; Mar lowe, Hero and Leandcr, Dr. Faustus; Kyd, The Spanish Tragedy; Jonson, The Al chemist, Every Man in His Humour, Bar tholomew Pair, Epicoene; Beaumont and Fletcher, The Faithful Shepherdess, The Maid's Tragedy; Webster, The Duehess of Malfy; Bacon, Essays, The New Atlantis; Donne, Songs and Sonnets (Muses Library Donne, Vol. I); Milton, Paradise Lost, and Pamphlets (Scott Library, 89) ; Bun- yan. The Pilgrim's Progress; Sir Thomas Browne, Religio Medici.

ENGLISH LANGUAGE, PART IT— (a) Old and Middle English philology. (b) Old and Middle English prescribed texts.

Books prescribed: — Wyatt—Anglo-Saxon Reader. Cook—Literary Middle English Reader. (o) Chaucer and Langland. ARTS 807

Books prescribed: — Chaucer (Students' Edition. O.U.P.). Langland—Piers the Plowman (ed Skeat, O.U.P.).

ENGLISH LITERATURE. PART HI.— (a) The course in Literature prescribed tor English C. Books prescribed:—As for English C, and "An Eng lish Bibliography (Melb. Univ. Press, 1/6V (b) Special Subjects (for second and third year students). (1) Shakespeare. (2) History of Literary Criticism. (c) Seminar Classes tor the study ot the Special Periods. Either: 1832—1900. or: Elizabethan Drama.

VACATION READING. For the course on the History of Literary Criticism, the following books are recommended : — Plato. Republic, 377-403, 595-608. Five Dialogues of Plato (Everyman 456); Aristotle's Poetics, etc. (Everyman, 901); Longinus, Un Elevation of Style (ed. Tucker, M.U.P.) ; Dante, De Vul gar! Eloquentia, in Latin Works of Dante (Dent's Temple Classics); Sidney, Apologie for Poe- trie; Dryden, Kssay of Dramatic Poesy; Lessing, Laocoon (Everyman), 843); Words worth, Preface to Lyrical Ballads; Shelley, Defence of Poetry; Macaulay, Essay on Mil ton: Victor Hugo, Preface de Cromwell; Ar nold, Essays in Criticism (second series); Meredith, An Essav on Comedy; Grierson, Classical and Romantic (C.U.P.). For the course on Shakespeare, the following books are recommended: — The Works of Shakespeare ; Braudes, William Shakes peare; Sir K. K. Chambers, William Shakes peare, 2 Vols.; Raleigh, Shakespeare (E.M.L. 808 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1936.

Series); Wyndham, The Poems of Shakespeare; Tucker, Shakespeare's Sonnets; Bradley, Shakespearean Tragedy; Vaughan, Types of Tragic Drama; Nichol Smith, Shakespearean Criticism (World's Classics, 312); Onions, Shakespeare Glossary; Shake speare's England; A Companion to Shake speare Studies (C.U.P.).

ENGLISH LANGUAGE, PART III — (a) Beowulf. Book prescribed: — Wyatt and Chambers—Beowulf. (b) History of the English Language. Books recommended: — Wyld—Short History ot English (3rd ed.). Wright—Elementary Old English Grammar. Wright—Elementary Middle English Grammar. Wright—Elementary Historical New English Grammar. (o) Old and Middle English prescribed texts, and unprescribed translation.

Books prescriljed: — Wyatt—Anglo-Saxon Reader. Cook—Literary Middle English Header. All candidates will attend such tutorial classes as the Professor of English may consider advisable. At the end of their first year, candidates will present themselves for examination in English Language and Literature, Part I (a) and (b), and in two additional subjects, one ot which normally will be Latin Part I. At the end ot their second year, candidates will present themselves for examination in English Litera ture Part II, and in English Language Part II. To wards the end of their second year, candidates will select a subject for their Essay, which must be ap proved by the Professor and afterwards completed dur- ARTS. 809 ing the year before the final examination. The essay- must be submitted at the end of the third year. The final Examination in the School ol English Lan guage • and Literature will be in the following sub jects : — 1. Au Essay upon an approved subject, to be com pleted during the year of the final examina tion. 2. English Literature, 1700-1900. 3. A Special Period of English Literature; Either 1832—1900. or Elizabethan Drama. 4. Shakespeare. 5. History of Literary Criticism. 6. Old and Middle English, Prescribed Books I. 7. " Beowulf." 8. History of English Language.

ENGLISH IN COMBINED COURSES.— A. English in Combined Courses will normally con sist ot the following subjects, as for School E. For details, see nnder E, School of English Language and' Literature. English Language and Literatsre, Part I. English Literature, Part II. English Literature, Part III. In addition to the six honours subjects of the Com bined School, candidates for the Degree with Honours are required to take two additional subjects in order to complete a course of eight subjecte. All Combined Courses must be approved at the be ginning ot the session. At the end of their first year, candidates will pre sent themselves for examination in English Language and Literature, Part I (a) and (b), and in one addi tional subject, which normally should be Latin Part I. During their second year candidates will attend also- *he course of lectures on Chaucer and Langiand. At the end of their second year, candidates will present themselves for examination in English Litera ture Part II, and in one additional subject. .§10 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1936.

The final examination in English Language and Literature in Combined Course A will be set in the •following subjects: — 1. English C. 2. A Special Period of English Literature: Either 1832—1900. or Elizabethan Drama. 3. Shakespeare. 4. History of Literary Criticism. B. Candidates who wish to combine another honours subject with English Language may, provided that they show evidence of their ability to take the course, substitute English Language tor English Literature; and, for such candidates, the course will be: English Language and Literature Part I., English Language Part II, English Language Part TXI, English C and :Beminar Class 1832-1900—four subjects in all. Particu lars of these courses will be found under School E, Eng lish Language and Literature. The final examination in English (Combined Course B) will be: — 1. Old and Middle English, Prescribed Books I. 2. "Beowulf." 3. Special period of English Literature: 1832—1909. 4. History of English Language.

F. SCHOOL OP FRENCH LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE. The course for the degree with Honours consists of the •following five subjects: — (a) French, Part I. (b) French, Part II. (o) French, Part III. (d) Language and Literature of the Middle Ages. (e) Language and Biterature of the Sixteenth Cen tury. In addition, three subjecte must be taken from the courses for the Ordinary or Honours Degree, and one of these must be Latin Part I, which is a compulsory -subject also for all combined courses of which French forms a part. Two of these must constitute a sub- major subject. Details of study and examination are as under: — ARTS. 81 1

(ai French, Part I. 1. Sections (a), (b), (o) and (e) of the course tor the- Ordinary Degree. 2. Lectures in French on the literature of the 19th century. The lectures will stress different aspects ot the century each year; students are expected to study the rest of the cen tury's literature in outline, using the fol lowing text: Maynial, Precis de litt. francaise moderne, pp. 105-227. 8. Introduction to French Philology and Mediae val Literature. Prescribed Text: Clarke and Murray: Primer of Old French. (b) French, Part II. As for the Ordinary Degree, but Students will take both the A. and B. Literature Courses. (c) French, Part III. Honours students will take Literature A, and B.« which will form part of their Final Examina tion. They will also study the following texts for translation: Huysmans, La, Cathedrals (Plon); Gauthicr-Ferrieres, the anthology prescribed for Part III; Heredia, Les Tro- phees (Lemerre). (d) Language and Literature of the Middle Ages. 1. Phonetics, Morphology and Syntax. 2. Studies in Old French Literature. 3. Study of Old French Texts. Prescribed Text tor 1936: — Chanson de Roland, ed. by Jenkins: (a) lines 1-500, translation and comment; (b) tha remainder for translation only. (e) Language and Literature of the Sixteenth Cen tury. Prescribed Texts tor 1936: — (i.) Rabelais, Pages clioisies (A. Colin^ (ii.) Montaigne, Selected Essays (Manchester U.P., edit. Tilley and Boaae). :812 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1936.

(iii.) Oxford Book ot French Verse, the ex tracts from Marot, Roneard, and du Bellay. Candidates for the degree with Honours in the School of French Language and Literature should take at their first annual examination French, Part I. (Hons.), Latin, Part I. (Pass or Honours), and one other additional subject; at their second annual examination, French, Part II. (Hons.) Course (d), and their remaining addi tional subject; and will include subject (e) in their Final Examination. The final examination in School F. will consist of the following seven papers: — i. Advanced Unseen Translation (from and into French), ii. Essay in French on a prepared literary subject (to be handed in not later than the last day ot January following the examination. iii. Prescribed Honours Texts (Huysmans, Gauthier- Ferrieree and Heredia). iv. Special literary study (A), v. Special literary study (B). vi. Language and' Literature ot the 16th Century, vii. Sixteenth Century Texjts: Translation and Com mentary. There will be a viva voce examination in all the honours work of the third year.

Q. SCHOOL OF GERMANIC LANGUAGES. 1. The Course for the Degree with Honours consists of the following subjects: — German Part I. German Part II. German, Part III. English Language and Literature, Fart I. English Language, Part II. Old and Middle High German and Germanic Philology. 2. In addition to the subjecte of this school, Candi dates must select two additional subjects from the •Course for the Ordinary or the Honours Degree. They ARTS. 813 are advised (but not compelled) to choose as one ol these either Latin, Part I., or Greek, Part I. 3. The Details ot Study and Examination for the Annual Examinations are as follows :— German, Part I. (a) The Lectures in the subject for the Ordinary Degree. (b) Additional; i. For intensive study. Klopstocks Goethes und Schillera Lyrik. Goethe—Hermann und Dorothea. Grillparzer—Sappho. ii. For extensive reading. Ricarda Huch (Deutschcs Schrifttum herausgegebcn von der Deutechen Akademie in Munchen, Hett 3). Weber—Droizehnlinden. German, Part II. (a) The Lectures in the subject for the Ordinary Degree. (b) Additional: i. For intensive study: BacliTnaim - Mittelhochdeutscb.es Lese- buch (pages 177-250: Lyrik, Didaktik). About 80 lines to be memorised. ii. For extensive reading, (during the long vacation): — Goethe—Taeso. Schiller—Kabale und Liebe. Stefan Zweig — Sternstunden der Mensohheit (Insel-Biicherei). Other books recommended for reading during the Long Vacation: — H. M. Elster—Die deuteche Novelle der Qegen- wart. Deuteches Schrifttum herausgegebcn von der Deutechen Akademie in Munchen, . Heft 1 bis 10. 814 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1930.

German, Part III, (a) As for Part III., Ordinary Degree. (b) Old and Middle High Germanand Germanic Philology. Bachmann—Mittelhochdeutsohes Lesebuch. About 100 lines to be memorised. Wright—Old High German Primer. About 25 lines of the O.H.G. text to be memorised. Sperbcr—Geschichte der deutschen sprache. 4. Candidates tor the Honours Degree in Germanic Languages must take; — German, Part I., at tho higher grade, and English Language and Literature, Part I, together with one additional subject at their first Annual Examination; and German, Part IT., at the higher grade, and English Language Part II, together with one additional subject at their Second Annual Examination; and German Part III at the third Annual Exami nation. 5. The Final Examination in Germanic Languages consists of the following five papers: — 1. Unseen Translation. 2. Essay. 3. History ot German Literature. 4. Old aiid Middle High German. 5. Germanic Philology. A viva voce examination will be held on all the mat ters dealt with in the third year's course. N.B. Candidates for Final Honours are expected to read all the more important works of the great authors of the classical period (Lessing, Goethe, 'Schiller), as well as representative works of the chief authors of the later period (for details consult the Associate Professor). Other books recommended—for reading during tha long vacation: — Paul—Prinzipien der Sprachgeschichte. Hirt—Die fndogermanen. Morin^er—Indogernmnisehe Sprachwissenscliaft. Ammtin—Die menschliche Bede. . . ,. . ABTS. 815

W. Fischer—Die deutsche Sprache von Heute. Guntert—Grundlragen der Sprachwissenschaft. Jespersen—Language: Its Nature, Development and Origin. • G. Schnnidt-Bohr—Mutter Sprache. Vogt und Kooh —Gesohichte der deutschen Literatur. Francke —Kiiltiu-wcrte der deutschen Literatur. Nadlcr—Literaturgeschichte der deutechen Stammo und Landschaften. Strich—Deutsche Klassik und Eomantik. E. R. Curtius -Fianzosischer Geist im neuen Europa. Hans (Jiinthcr—Rasscnkunde des deutechen Volkes. Oswald Speugler—Jahre der Entecheidung. Houston Stewart Chamberlain —Auswahl aus seinen Werken (Hirt, Breslau).

H. SCHOOL OF ECONOMICS. The course for the Degree with Honours consists of the fol lowing subjects: — Economic History. Economics, Part 1. Economics, Part II. Economics, Part HE. together with two of the following subjects approved by the Faculty: — History of Economic Theory. Mathematical Economics. Modern Political Institutions. Theory ot Statistics. The Faculty has approved the following pairs of sub. jecte: — (a) History of Economic Theory. Modern Political Institutions. (b) Theory of Statistics. Mathematical Economics. (c) History of Economic Theory. Theory of Statistics. (d) History of Economic Theory. Mathematical Economics. In addition . to the subjects of this School, candi dates must select a language other than English and g]g DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1836.

•one other subject from the courses for the Ordinary or the Honours Degree, so as to complete eight subjects. Provided that candidates may substitute for the lan guage other than English, French A and B, or German A and B, as prescribed for the Honours School of Mathematics, if they select as their additional subjecte one of the following pairs of subjects: — (a) Pure Mathematics, Part I. Pure Mathematics, Part II. (b) Pure Mathematics, Part I. Theory of Statistics. (c) Pure Mathematics, Part I. Mathematical Economics. (d) Pure Mathematics, Part I. Natural Philosophy, Part I. The details of study and examination are those pre scribed for the several subjects for the Ordinary Degree, together with the following books: —

ECONOMIC HISTORY— Preliminary reading:—Vinogradoff—Growth of the Manor. Clapham—An Economic History of Modern Bri tain. Vol. I. The Early Railway Age, 1820-1850. Vol. IF. Free Trade und Steel 1850-1886. Unwin—Studies in Economic History. Vinogradoff.—Growth bf the Manor. Wood—Borrowing and Business ih Australia. Wakefield—A Letter from Sydney.

ECONOMICS—PART I. Taussig—Principles of Economics, 2 vols Copland—The Australian Economy — Simple Economic Studies. The Economic Record (the Journal of the Eco nomic Society of Australia and New Zea land), as referred . to in lectures. ECONOMICS—PART II. Robinson—Economics ot Imperfect Competition. Pigoii—The Economics of Welfare. ARTS. 817..

Gosohen—Foreign Exchanges. Keynes—A Tract on Monetary Reform. ECONOMICS—PART III. Robertson—Banking. Policy and the Price Level. Mises—Tho Theory of Money and Credit (Cape). Hawtrey—The Art of Central Banking (Long mans). Mills—Statistical Methods (Pitman). Garland—Economic Aspects of Australian Land Taxation (M.U.P.). Pigou—Public Finance (Macmillan). Stamp—Wealth and Taxable Capacity (King). Anderson—Fixation of Wages in Australia (M.TJ.P.). Articles in Economic Journals as referred to in Lectures.

HISTORY OF ECONOMIC Theory- Adam Smith—-The Wealth of Nations, Cannan's Edition, 1904. Sidgwick—Principles of Economics (Macmillan). Marx—Capital, Translation by Eden and Cedar Paul (Everyman's Library). Bohm-Bawork—Capital and Interest (Macmillan). MATHEMATICAL ECONOMICS— Books will be prescribed in 1936. MODERN POLITICAL INSTITUTIONS— Por details see School of History and Political Science. Candidates must be placed in the Class lusts at the Annual Examinations in Economic History, Economics, part I and Economics, Part U. The Final Examination in the School of Economics will include papers on the following subjecte: — Economic History. Genera! Economic Theory. Monetary Policy and Public Finance. Statistical Method and Applications ot Eoonomio Theory. 818 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 193B. together with one paper on each of the two optional honour subjects selected. An essay on an approved subject must be com pleted during the year of the Final Examination.

COMBINED COURSES. Combined Courses are Courses including parts of two- Honours Schools approved by the Faculty as together equivalent to a Single Honours School, with such addi tions as are needed to complete the eight subjects. Additional subjects required in any Course may be taken either from subjects for the Ordinary Degree or the Honours Degree, but must be taken at the Annual Examinations. Other subjects must unless otherwise specified be taken at. the Honours standard. The subjects of Honours Schools forming part of a com bined Course must be taken at Annual Examinations, or at the Final Examination, as prescribed in the case of each such subject for Candidates proceeding in the Honours School to which the subject belongs. The following Specimen Courses have been approved by the Faculty: — I. Latin and French. II. History and English. III. Mathematics and Philosophy. IV. French and German. V. Greek and English. VI. History and Philosophy. VII. History and French. Till, History and German. IX. Latin and Mathematics. X- Mathematics and English. XI. English and Philosophy. XII. Philosophy and German. XIII. English and Latin—Course I. XIV. English and Latin—Course II. XV. English and French. XVI. Economics and Mathematics. XV11. Economics and Philosophy. XVllI. Economics and History. • XIX: Philosophy and French. ARTS. 819

I—LATIN AND FBENCH. First Year: Latin T. (Pass or Honour), French I., Additional Subject. Second Year: Latin II., French II., Additional Sub ject. Third Year: Latin III., French III. Pinal Examination Papers: — (1) Latin Composition. (2) Latin Unseen (Translation from Latin). (3) General Paper and History of Latin Literature. (4) Latin: Special subject (Imperial Rome). (5) Prescribed Books (Latin). (6) French Advanced Unseen Translation, (Paper I. ot School of French). (7) Prescribed Honours Texts in Modern French (Paper III. in School of French). (8) Special French Literary Study A (Paper TV. in School of French). (9) Special French Literary Study B (Paper V. in School of French). Also viva voce examina tion in the Honours work of the third year in French.

II.—HISTORY AND ENGLISH. First Year: British History B., English Language and Literature I., Latin 1. Second Y'ear: British History D., or Australasian History, English Literature II., Additional subject. Third Year: Huropean History, English Literature III. Final Examination Papers: — (1) British History B. (2) British History D or Australasian History. (3) European History. (4) English C. (5) Special Period of English Literature : Either 1832- 1900 or Elizabethan Drama. (6) Shakespeare. (fl) History of Literary Criticism. And a Historical research essay to be completed in the year of the Final Examination. g2(J DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1936.

LTJ.—MATHEMATICS AND PHILOSOPHY. An approved group of three or more subjects for the Degree with Honours chosen from Pure Mathematics I, II, III; Mixed Mathematics I, II, III; Natural Phil osophy I, II; together with Philosophy I, Logic, His tory of Philosophy and Metaphysics (as for Degree with Honours). If, e.g.. Pure Mathematics I, II, III are the subjects chosen, the course would be as follows: — First i'ear: Pure Mathematics 1, Philosophy 1, Lan guage other than English. Second Year: Pure Mathematics II, History of Philosophy. Third Y'ear; Pure Mathematics III, Metaphysics, In addition Logic must be taken cither in the second or the third year. Final Examination Papers:— (l)-(3) Pure Mathematics I, II, HI. (4) Logic. (5) History of Philosophy. (6) Metaphysics.

IV.—FRENCH AND GERMAN. First Year: French I., German I., Latin Part I. Second i'ear; French II., German 11., Additional Subject. Third Year: French III., German III. Final Examination Papers, with Viva Voce: — (1) French Advanced Unseen Translation (Paper I. of School of French). (2) Prescribed Honours Texts in Modern French, (Paper III. ot School of French). (8) Special French Literary Study A (Paper IV. is School of French). (4) Special French Literary Study B (Paper V. in School of French). (5) German Unseen Translation. (6) German Essay. (7) History of German Literature. Note. Tho Viva Voce in French will cover French Third Year Honours work. The Viva Voce in German jwill cover the Third Year's Course. ARTS. 821

V.—GREEK AND BNGLISH. First Year: Greek I., English Language and Lite. ratine I., Latin I. .Second Year: Greek II., English Literature II., Additional subject. Third Year: Greek III., English Literature III.

Pinal Examination Papers: — (1) Greek Composition. (2) Greek Unseen Translation. (3) General Paper (mainly History and Antiquities) (4) History r.f Greek Literature, and special subject (Classical Athens). (5) Prescribed Books (Greek). (6) English C. (7) Special Period ot English Literature : Either 1832- 1900 or Elizabethan Drama. (8) Shakespeare. (9) History ot Literary Criticism.

VI. — HISTOHT AND PHILOSOPHY. A.: First Year: British History B; Philosophy I; Language other than English. Second Year ; British History D or Constitutional and Legal History; Political Philosophy or Ethics; (Modern Political Institutions. Third Year: Constitutional and Legal History or British History D; Ethics or Political Phil osophy. B: First Year: British History B; ±-Uilosophy I; Language other than English. Second Year: Ancient History; History ot Philosophy; Ethics or Political Philosophy. Third Year: European History; Political Philosophy or Ethics. Final Examination Papers:— A : 1. British History B. 2. British History D. 3. Con stitutional and Legal History. 4. Moral Philosophy. 5. Political Philosophy. 6. Modern Political Institutions. £22 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1930.

B: 1. British History B. 2. Ancient History. 3. European History. 4. History ot Philosoph 5. Moral Philosophy. 6. Political Philosophy. A historical research essay, to be completed in the year of the Final Examination, is re quired in both A and B.

VII.—HISTORY AND FRENCH. First Year: British History B.; French I.; Latin Part I. Second Year: British History D., or Australasian History; French IX, Additional subject. Third Year: French III.; European History. Final Examination Papers, with Viva voce in French : (H British History B. (2) British History D. or Australasian History, (3) European History. (4) French Advanced Unseen Translation (Paper I. in School of French). (5) Prescribed Honours Text in Modern French (Paper III. in School of French). (6) Special French Literary Study A. (Paper IV. in School of French). (7) Special French Literary Study B. (Paper V. in School of French). And a historical research essay, to be completed in the year of the Final Examination. Note-—The Viva voce in French will cover French Third Year Honours work.

VIII.— HISTORY ASD GERMAN. First Year: British History B.; German I.; Addi tional Subject. Second Year: British History D. or Australasian History; German U.; Additional Subject. Third Year: German III.; European History. Final Examination Papers with Viva Voce in German: (1) British History B. (,2) British History D. or Australasian History. ARTS. 823

(3) European History. (4) German Unseen Translation. (5) German Essay. (6) History of German Literature. And a historical research essay, to be completed in the year of the Final Examination.

IX.—LATIN AND MATHEMATICS. First Year: Latin 1. (Pass or Honour) ; Pure Maths. T.; Additional Subject. Second Year: Latin IT.; Pure Maths. II.; Additional Subject. Third Year: Latin III.; Pure Maths. III.

Final Examination Papers:— (1) Latin Composition. (2) Latin Unseen Translation. . • (3) General Paper and History of Latin Literature. (t) Latin—Special Subject (Imperial Borne). (5) Prescribed Books (Latin). (6)-(8) Pure Maths. I.. II., 111.

X.—MATHEMATICS AND ENGLISH. First Year: Pure Mathematics I., English Lan guage and Literature I., Latin I. Second Year: Fine Mathematics II., English Lit erature II., Additional subject. Third Year: Pure Mathematics III., English Lit erature III. Final Examination Papers: — (1) English C. (2) Special Period of English Literature : Either 1832- 1900 or Elizabethan Drama. (8) Shakespeare. (4) History ot Literary Criticism. (5) (6) (7) Pure Mathematics I.. TJ., and IH.

XI.—ENGLISH AND PHILOSOPHY. A. First Year: English Language and Literature I., Philosophy T, Latin I. 824 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 193G,

Second Year: English Literature II. Political Philosophy or Ethics, Additional Subject. Third Y'ear: English Literature III, Ethics or Political Philosophy. B. First Year: English Language and Literature I., Philosophy I, Latin I. Second Year: English Literature II, Additional subject. Ethics or History ot Philosophy. Third Year: English Literature III, History of Philosophy or Ethics. Final Examination Papers: — (1) English C. (2) Special Period ot English Literature: Either 1832—1900, or Elizabethan Drama. (3) Shakespeare. (4) History of Literary Criticism. (6) Aesthetics. (6) Moral "Philosophy. (7) Political Philosophy, or History ot Philosophy.

XII.—PHILOSOPHY AND GERMAN. First Year: German I; Philosophy I; Additional Subject. Second Year: German II.; History of Philosophy. Third Year; German III.; Middle High German and Philology: Metaphysics. Final Examination Papers, with Viva Voce in German (1) German Unseen Translation. (2^ German Essay. (3) History ot German Literature. (4) History of Philosophy. (5) Aesthetics. (6) Metaphysics.

XIII.—ENGLISH AND LATIN (Course 1.) First Year; Latin Part I. (Pass or Honour), Eng- glish Language and Literature I., Additional subject. Second Year: Latin Part II., English Literature II., Additional subject. Third Year: Latin Part III., English Literature III. AKTS ' 825'

Final Examination Papers.— (1) English C. (2) Special Period of English Literature: Elmer 1832—1900, or Elizabethan Drama. (3) Shakespeare. (4) History of Literary Criticism. (6) Latin Composition. (6) Latin Unseen Translation. (7) General Paper, and History o! Latin Litera ture. (8) Latin; Special Subject (Imperial Rome). (9) Latin; Prescribed Books.

XIV.—ENGLISH AND LATIN (Course IT). First Year: English Language and Literature I... Latin I. (Pass or Honours), Additional sub ject. Second Year: English Language II, English C,. Latin TJ. Third Year: English Language III., English Litera ture III (o), Latin III. Final Examination Papers; — (1) Latin, Prescribed Books. (3) Latin, Composition. (3) Latin, Unseen Translation. (4) Latin, General Paper and History of Latin- Literature. (5) Latin, Special Subject (Imperial Borne). (6) Old and Middle English, Prescribed Books I. (7) "Beowulf." (8) Special Period of English Literature: 183a— 1900. (9) History of English Language.

XV.—ENGLISH AND FRENCH. First Year: English Language and Literature I:,. French I, and Latin I. Second Hear: English Literature II, Additional- subject, French II. Third Year: English Literature ITT, French III.. .§26 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 19313.

Final Examination Papers, with viva voce in French:— (1) English C. (2) Special Period of English Literature: Either 1832—1900, or Elizabethan Drama. (3) Shakespeare. (4) History of Literary Criticism. (5) French Advanced Unseen Translation (Paper I. in School ot French). (6) Prescribed Honours Texts in Modern French (Paper ITT. in School of French). (7) Special French Literary Study A. (Paper TV. in School of French). (S) Special French Literary Study B. (Paper V. in School of French). The viva voce examination in French will cover all Honours work of the Third Year.

XVI.—ECONOMICS AND MATHEMATICS. First Year: Economics Part I., Pure Mathematics Part I., Language other than English. Second Year: Economics Part II., Pure Mathe matics Part II., Additional subject. Third Year: Economics Part TIL, sections A and B, Pure Mathematics Part III. Theory of Statistics is recommended as the additional subject in the second year. Pinal Examination Papers: — 1. General Economic Theory. 2. Monetary Theory and Crisis. 3. Statistical Methods and the application of Economic Theory. 4. 5, 6. Pure Mathematics, Parts I., II., HI. An Essay upon an approved economic subject must be completed in the year of the Final Examination.

XVII.—ECONOMICS AND PHILOSOPHY. A: First Year: Economics Part I, Philosophy I, Lan guage other than English. Second Y'ear: Economics Part II., Political Philosophy or Ethics, Additional Subject. Third Tear : History of Economic Theory, Ethics or Political Philosophy. S2T

B.: First i'ear: Economics Part I, Philosophy I, Lan guage other than English. Second Year: liconomics Part II, Logic or History of Philosophy, Additional subject. Third Year : History of Kconomic Theory, History of Philosophy or Logic. Final Examination Papers: — 1. General Economic Theory. 2. Monetary Policy and Tariff Problems. 3. History of Economic Theory. 4. Logic or History of Philosophy. 5. Moral Philosophy. 6. Political Philosophy. An Essay upon an approved economic subject must be completed in the year of tho Final Examination.

XVIII.—ECONOMICS AND HISTORY. Eirst Year: Economics Part I., British History B, Language other than English. Second Year: Economics Part II., British History D or Australasian History, Economic History. Third Year: History of Economic Theory, European History B. Note.—As lectures in European History B are given in alternate yeans, the subject may be taken in the second year interchangeably with British History D or Australasian History. Pinal Examination Papers: — 1. General Economic Theory. 2. History of Economic Theory. 3. Economic History. 4. British History B. 5. British History D or Australasian History. 6. European History B. An essay on an approved economic or historical subject must be completed in the year ot the Final Ezamination. •328 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1»36.

DETAILS OF SUBJECTS AND RECOMMENDATIONS FOB THE EXAMINATIONS FOB THE DEGREE OF MASTER OF ARTS TO BE HELD IN THK FOURTH TEtRM, 1936.

(A).-SCHOOL OK CLASSICAL PHILOLOGY. The papers for the Final Examinations in Greek and Latin Literature, Greek and Roman History and Anti quities; two papers with passages for translation und explanation from portions of Greek and of Latin authors at the option of the Candidate, viz.: — One in Liet A, i One in List C, or £ with or Two in List B, ) Two in List D. :Wh* Editions recommended /or une are : Aristotle Ethics (Grant, or Stewart). o Politics (Jowett, or Suscmihl and Hicks, or Newman. Rhetoric (Cope und Sandys). Republic (Adam, or Jowett). Gorgias (Thompson)* Thucydides (Poppo, or the several books in Uaciuillau's Classical Series). Demosthenes De Corona (Goodwin). De Falsa Legatione (Shilleto). Androtion and Timocrates (Wayte). Private Speeches (Paley and Sandys). Olynthiacs (Sandys). ../Eechylus Prometheus Vinctus (Sikes and WilUon). Seven against Thebes (Tucker). Choephori (Tucker). Supplices (Tucker). Agamemnon (Huadlam). Eumenides (Verrall). •Sophocles The several plays (Jebb). Aristophanes .The several pla\s (Blaydes). Acharniana fEtennie). Wasps and Clouds (Starkie). Frogs (Tucker). Homer Iliad (Leaf). Odyssey (Merry,-or "Monro). Xenophon Hellenica I. and II. (Edwards). Livy Pitt)Pr«ss Editions. Annals (Furneaux). 'Tacitus Germania and Agricola (Furneaux) Histories (Spooner). DEOHEE OF M.A. 829

Cicero De Oratore (Wilkins) The separate speeches named (Pitt Press). De Officiis (Holden). De Senectute, De Amicitia (Reid). De Finibus (Reid). Tusculan Disputations (KUbner). Virgil yKneid (Conington). Horace (Wicltham). Juvenal (Mayor, or smaller work by Duff). Persius (Conington). Lucretius (Munro, or separate books by Duff). Plautus Mostellaria (Sonnenschein). Captivi (Lindsay, larger edition). Miles Gloriosus"(Tyrrell). Trinummus(Pitt Press). Terence Adclphi and Heautontimorumenos (Asbmore). Translations recommended: Aristotle Politics and Rhetoric (Wdldon). Ethics (Williams). Plato (Jowett). Thucydides (Jowett). Demosthenes (Kennedy). ifischylus (as rendered in the editions mentioned). Sophocles (in Jebb's editions). , Homer Iliad (Lang, Leaf and Myers). Odyssey (Butcher and Lang). Tacitus Annals and Histories (Ramsay). . Histories, Germania and Agricola (Fyfe). Juvenal (Leeper). Persius (in Conington's edition). Lucretius (Munro). Texts with Translations of the Loeb Series.

Aristotle. Ethics, with Plato's Gorgias. Aristotle. Politics, with any one Book of Thucy dides. Aristotle, Rhetoric, with Demosthenes de Corona and jEschines in Ctesiphontem, or other Orations of Demosthenes of equal length in the aggregate. Flato. Republic, Thucydides. Books I.-IV. Thucydides. Books V.-VI1L, with Xenophon, Hellen- ica. Books I. and II. 830 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1930.

Aeschylus. The Orestean Trilogy and one other Play Sophocles. (Edipus Coloneus, (Edipus Tyrannus Antigone, and ono other Play. Aristophanes. Any four plays. Homer. Iliad, Books I.-XII. Homer. Iliad, Books XI1I.-XXIV. Homer. Odyssey, Books I.-XII. Homer. Odyssey, Books XIII.-XXIV.

C. Livy, Books l.-V. Livy. Books VI.-X. Livy Books XXI.-XXVII. Tacitus. Annals. Tacitus. Histories, Germania and Agricola. Cicero, De Oratore, with either In V'errem Divinatio, Actio I, and Actio II., lib 2", or in Catilinam, in Pisonem, and in Vatinium, or pro Plancio, pro Murena, and pro Milone. Cicero. De Officiis, de Senectute, de Ami-" citia. De Eepublica and de Legibus. Any Cicero. two. Cicero, Tusculanaj Disputationes. Cicero. De Finibus Bonorum et Malorum.

D. Virgil. iEncid. Horace. The whole. Juvenal. Satires (except 2, 6, 9) and Persius. Lucretius. The whole. Plauius. Miles Gloriosus,. Mostellaria, Captivi, Trinummus, with Terence—Adelphi, Heautontimor ii menos.

(B).—SCHOOL OF HISTORY. The History of Europe in the Middle Ages (326-1453). The History of British Colonial Policy. The Prinoiptea of Economios and their Practical Appli cations. Modern Political Institutions (as tor Final Examination) DEGREE OF M.A. 831

Books recommended:— Knowles—Industrial and Commercial Devolutions in Great Britain during the 19th century, 1763- 1914 Taussig—International Trade Dalton—The Incqiialitv of Incomes Copland—Australia in" the World Crisis, 1929-33 (Caaubridgc Univ. Press). Dalton—Public Finance Cassel—The Theory of Social Economy. Chamberlain—The Theory of Monopolistic Com petition. The Australian Tariff: An Economic Inquiry (Melb. Univ. Press). Webb—History of Trade Unionism. H. TV. C. Davis -Mediaeval Europe. Gibbon—Decline and Fall of the Roman Empire. Bryce—The Holy Koiuan Empire. Emerton—Mediaeval Europe. Emerton—Beginnings of Modern Europe. The Cambridge Mediaeval History Beer—British Colonial Policy, 1754-1765. Beer—Tho Oid Colonial System. Curtis -The Problem of the Commonwealth. Duncan Hall-—The British Commonwealth of Nations. Keith—Select Speeches and Documents on British Colonial Policy. Hobhonse—Social Evolution and Political Theory

(C). SCHOOL OF PHILOSOPHY. Candidates will prepare a thesis on some branch of" Philosophy, and will be advised as to a suitable course of reading. Regular onlloquia. will be hold to assist candidates in their studies. Candidates must pass an oral examination, covering such of the subjects proscribed for the B.A. degree with Honours ns are most relevant to the subject of the thesis. Those.* must be submitted not later than 14th February. 63 832 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS. 1936

(Li).—SCHOOL OK MATHEMATICS. Candidates will prepare a thesis on some branch of Mathematics, and will be advised as to a suitable course of reading. Regular colloquia will be held to assist candidates in their studies. y In addition, candidates must ei.ther submit a report of their original work or take a written examination on the subject of thoir thesis, and on' one or more additional subjects which will be announced by May 1st of the year preceding the examination. Theses must be submitted not later than 14th February.

(E).-SCHOOL OF ENGLISH LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE. (i.) . A Dissertation on an approved subject to be completed during the year of the examina tion. (ii.) Old and Middle English Unseens, or Eliza bethan Drama. (iii.) Old Norse; or. French (d)—Language and Lite rature of the Middle Ages. The essay must be sent in at the end of the Third Term. Note.—Candidates are advised to choose a subject for their essay and to have it approved as soon aa possible, as the essay must be completed and handed in at the end of the Third Term. A substan tial essay of at least 100 pages, or 30,000 words is ex pected. It should entail a considerable amount of read ing, and a bibliography of books consulted should ba appended, which should state (1) author's name, (2) title of book, (3) place of publication or name of pub lisher, (4) date of publication. The essay should be typewritten, and should bear on the front page, besides its title, thej name and address of the candidate. In every case the subject should be submitted to the professor for approval before the candidate commences to write. DEGREE OF M.A. j<33

(F). SCHOOL OF FRENCH LANGUAGE AND LITERATUKB. A written and oral examination on subjects approved by the head of the department and' by the Faculty of Arte, along with a thesis on an approved subject. In certain cases candidates may be tested by Thesis and oral examination only.

(Ot). SCHOOL OF GER.MANTC LANGUAGES. (I) Old Norse (Gordon). (TI) Germanic Philology; Paper 5 set tor the Final Examination in the same term together with a viva voce examination. (Ill) An essay written in German on an approved subject, and containing some new contribution to know ledge. The essay should be sent in before the end of the third term.

(a). SCHOOL OP ECONOMICS. (a) An essay of not more than 10,000 words on each) of the following: — (i.) An Australian economic problem as discussed in current books and periodicals. (ii.) Some contemporary problem in economic theory upon which discussion or controversy has been active over the previous three years. The topics for these essays will be set at the begin ning of the first term. The purpose of the ossay is to test the cundidato's knowledge of current literature on eco nomics and his critical ability. The essays must ba submitted by the end ot the third terra. (b) A thesis upon an approved subject. Candidates are advised to select a subject that offers scope for statistical measurement or for con structive criticism of the use of statistics in economic research. This suggestion, however, ia not to be interpreted as debarring a can didate from selecting for his thesis a phase of economic history or a problem of pure theory The thesis must be presented by December 1st.

-63A 834 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 193B.

INSTRUCTORSHIP IN DUTCH. DUTCH (Details of the course offered by the Instructor in Dutch) .- Conversation, Rending and Composition. B. W. Downs and H. Latimer Jackson—A Manual of the Dutch Language. Multatuii—Max Uavelaar. De Genestet—Gedichten (Wereldbibliotheek). Bastiaanse—Overzicht (Vols. ITI. and IV.). Beets—Camera Obsoura. Bergmann—Ernest Staas. Timmernians—Pallieter. Readings from records relating to Voyages and Dis coveries by the Dutch in the sixteenth, seventeenth and eighteenth centuries, and from literature dealing with the Dutch Indies and South Africa.

INSTRUCTOR SHIP IN SCANDINAVIAN LANGUAGES. The classes are adapted to the needs of forthcom ing students. Beginners will use Hugo's Swedish Simplified, Norwegian Simplified, and Danish Simplified. Grammars in use for continued study: Nat. Beckman—Svensk Spniklara; P. Groth—A Norwegian Grammar; or S. W. Hofgaard—Norsk Skolegrammatikk. As readers the following will be used: — Swedish: Sohiick och Lnndahl. Lasebok for Polk- akolans hogre Klasscr, Forsta Delen, Sverige (Lund, Gleerup). Norwegian: Munch og Sveneon, Hjemme og Ute (Steeneke Forlag, Oslo). Danish and Norwegian: Schiick och Lnndahl, Lase bok tor Polkskolans hogre Klasser, Andra Delen, Norge och Danmark (Lund, Gleerup). With more advanced students works of Ibsen, Bjorneon, Selma Lagerlof, Strindberg, Ellen Key, Bigrid Undset, Johau Bojer, etc., will be studied. IN8TRUCT0RS1IIPS. 835

INSTRUCTORSHIP I.\T ITALIAN. ITALIAN (Details of tho course offered by the Instruc tor in Italian): — First Year: Elements ot grammar, pronunciation and phonetics. Orthography. Logical con struction. Article. Conjunctions. Adverbs. Prepositions. Complements, etc. Substan tives. Pronouns. Adjectives. Verbs. Tenses. Indicative and subjunctive mood. Participle and gerund, etc. Syntax. Idioms. Natural and artistic characteristics of the idiom. Various notes. Dictation. Reading. Composition. Conversation. Com mercial application ot the language. Second Year: History ot the Italian Literature. Italian writers. Continuation of the study ot the language. Third Year: Lectures in Italian: — Comments on Dante's Divine Comedy. Text—books: First Year: Hossfeld's Method—Italian Grammar, A. Rota. Seoond Year: Hossfeld's Method—Italian Gram mar, A. Rota; and Cambridge Readings in Italian Literature, E. Ballongh.

INSTRUCTORSHIP IN RUSSIAN. RUSSIAN—(Details of the course offered by the Instructor in Russian).

ELEMENTARY. Elements of Grammar. Pronunciation. Orthography. Reading. Composition. Conversation. Dicta tion. Outlines of Geography.

ADVANCED. Sound knowledge of Grammar. Idioms. Conversa tion. Advanced Composition. Letter Writing. 836 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1936.

Dramatic work. Outlines of Russian History and Literature. Commercial Correspondence. Text-books ; Russian Grammar and Self-Educator, by Louia Segal. The Album, and Other Tales, by Anton Chekhov. Russian-English and English-Russian Dictionarv, by Prof. S. K. Boyanus and Prof. V. K. Muller. Book of reference: Brush up your Russian, by Anna Semeonoff.

INSTRUCTORSHIP IN JAPANESE. First Year: Elements of the Language. Grammar and its construction. Classification and Etymology. Reading, Dictation, Composition. Translation into Japanese and English. Study of 200 Chinese characters in Wa-on and Ewan- on. Oral (text) exercises in various forms (simple terms). Reading, Textbook: Jinjou Shougaku Tokuhon. Books 1, 2, 3 must be studied in the three terms. Second Year: Advanced study of the language. Advanced study of Grammar. Beading, Dic tation, Composition. Translation, both in advanced Japanese and English sentences. Translation, both in simple Japanese and English composition. Simple translation, both from Japanese and English newspapers. Outline ot the Early History in oral form. Study of 400 Chinese characters in Wa-on and E wan-on. Oral, (text) exercises in various forms (general terms). Reading, Text-book: Jinjou Shougaku Tokuhon, Books 4, 5, 6 must be studied in the three terms. Third Tear: Advanced study of the Language. Classic and Modern Literature. Advanced ixsTuucTOHSiiiPS. 837

Japanese Composition, by; various authors (to be translated into English, rhythmic, if possible). Advanced English Composition, by various authors (to be translated and written in Japanese, rhythmic, if possible). History, middle period. Japanese newspapers, with general news (to be translated into English, journalistic style it possible). English News papers with general news (to be translated and to be written in Japanese journalistic style, it possible). Study of 400 Chinese characters in Wa-on and Kwan-on. Oral, (Text) exercises in various forms (ad vanced and literary terms). Reading, Text-book: Jinjou Shougaku Tokuhon. Books, 7, 8, 9 and History, and other text books must be studied in the three terms. Fourth Year: Advanced study of the Language. Literature of all periods. Advanced Japanese Compositions in various styles, and by vari ous authors (to be translated into English, rhythmic if possible). Advanced English Literature, and Composition by various authors to be translated. (Composition to be translated, and written in Japanese, rhythmic if possible). History, later period, especi ally from the Restoration (1868), to present day. Japanese Newspapers, with Commer cial and Political Nows (to be translated into English, joumalietio style if possible). Bnir- ish Newspapers, with Commercial and Poli tical News (to be translated and written in Japanese, journalistic style if possible). Oral, (Text) exercises in various forma (literarr terms).

Books recommended: — 1. Jinjou Shougaku Tokuhon. (Set of 12 books.) 2. Koiitou Tokuhon. (Set of 4 books.) 3. History (Nihon Koku-shi). (Set of 2 books.) 4. Literature (Nihon Bungaku, all peri ds). (4 books.) 6. Composition (Shibungaku) (Classic). (3 books.) £38 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, W3li

6. Grammar (Kokugo Bunpou) (Exercise form), by M. Inagaki. 7. Conversation Text Book (Exercise form), by M. Inagaki. 8. Japanese-English Dictionary. (1) 9. English-Japanese Dictionary. (1). 10. Other books may be needed.

DIPLOMA OF JOURNALISM. (For Arte subjects see under Faculty of Arts.) LAW RELATING TO JOURNALISM— 1. Introductory—Place of Law in the Community— Nature of Law—Sources of Law—History ot the Law— What law is in force in Victoria—Kinds and Divisions ot the Law— Accuracy and inaccuracy in use of Legal Terms. 2. Fundamental Principles of English Law—Parliament and the Constitution—"Rule ot Law" and modern developments—" Administrative Law "—public and private rights. 3. Freedom of Speech and Press—History ot the Press— Licensing—Registration of printing presses—Printers and Newspapers Act 1928; Censorship. 4. Leading Principles of the Law of copyright—Copy right Acts—Relation to Journalism and Broadcasting— International copyright. 5. ( Defamation—law of slander —law ot libel—" injurious 6. < falsehood"—slander ot title or goods—dangerous 7. (. statements—use of charge sheets and Parlia mentary papers, seditions, blasphemous andobscene publications—false advertisement—" Right of Pri vacy." 8. Contempt of Court—Criminal Contempt—Speeches and writings—Contempt of Crown and Parliament. 9. Electoral law—advertisements—legal reporting. 10. Practical law for the Journalist—combines and restraint of trade—self-defence—law of master and servant. JOURNALISM. 839

Text Book? (which students should possess):— Pilley—Law tor Journalists, 2nd Ed., 1932. Cloutman and Luck—Law of Author and Publisher 1927. (Supplemented by Statute and Case Law ot England, the Commonwealth and Victoria.)

Books for Reference.— Dicey—Law of tho Constitution. Robson—Justice and Administrative Law. Jeuks—The Book ot English Law. Salmond on Torts. Odgers on Libel and Slander. Spencer Bower on Defamation. Oswald on Contempt. Copinger on Copyright. Halsbury's Laws ot England Smith on Master and Servant. Bishop—Advertising and the Law. Gatley on Libel. Fisher and Strahan—Law of the Press (1898). Cloutman and Luck—Law ot Printer and Pub lisher, 1929 (for a fuller treatment than in the shorter work). Lord Hewart—The New Despotism. Wheare—The Statute of Westminister, 1931.

PRACTICAL TEST IN JOURNALISM— (A Paper of Three Hours.) Selections will be made from the following topics: 1. The correction of a proof, marking the errors in proper style as understood by printers. 3. Making a summary of about 250 words of a Parliamentary or other speech. 3. Writing a review of about 250 words of a new book. If the book is submitted at the ex amination, the candidate will be advised aa to the book selected three days before tho examination is held. 840 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1930.

4. Writing a short account of a recent theatrical performance. 5. Constructing a narrative in readable form from a few stated facta. 6. Sub-editing a piece of " bad " copy. 7. Elaborating a cable message or preparing a mes sage to be cabled. 8. Writing a short article on a topic of the day, of about 500 words. 9. Explaining the meaning of foreign and other phrases commonly used in public life, and literary and historical allusions in common use. 10. Writing a character sketch of some prominent public person, or an imaginary interview on a topic of the day. FACULTY OF COMMERCE.

DETAILS OF SUBJECTS AND RECOMMENDATIONS- FOR THE ANNUAL AND SUPPLEMENTARY EXAMINATIONS TO BE HELD FN THE FOURTH TERM, 1936. In all subjects students will be expected to prepare- class essays and exercises as set by the Lecturers. Students not complying with this requirement may be- excluded from the annual examination. Candidates for the degree of B.COIH. must attend lec tures in at least four of the subjects of their course. The subjecte must be approved by the Dean of the- Faculty. Not more than two subjects from Group III will be accepted for this purpose. Students undertaking an approved course at Canberra University College may regard attendance at lectures at Canberra as fulfilling due requirements.

1A.CCOUNTANCY PART I.— Preliminary reading : — Webster Jenkinson—Elements ot Book-keeping (Edward Arnold and) Co.). History and Development ot Book-keeping. The Functions of Accountants. Classification ot Accounts. Manufacturing, Trading and Profit and Loss Accounts and Balance Sheets. Prepayments. (Outstandings. De preciation, Appreciation and Fluctuations. Provisions, Reserves, Reserve Funds and Sinking Funds. Columnar Accounting. De partmental and Branch Accounts. Foreign Branch Accounts and the treatment of for eign currencies in accounts. Income and Ex penditure Accounts. Receipts and Payments- Accounts. Consignment Accounts. Joint: -8-1-2 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1931)

Venture Accounts. Ledger Control Accounts. Conversion of Single Fintry to Double Entry. Packages. Goodwill. Partnership Accounts. Simple Company Accounts. The Interpreta tion of Accounts.

"Text-books: — Rowland and Magee—-Accounting (Part I) (Gee and Co.).

Books for reference: — Carter—Advanced Accounts (Pitman). Hislop—Company Accounts as applied to Aus tralia and New Zealand (Pitman). Tovey—Balance Sheets (Pitman).

.ACCOUNTANCY PAKT IIA (to be taken in 1937)— Preliminary reading:— E. V. Nixon—The Ethics of the Accountancy Profession (Institute ot Chartered Accoun tants in Australia). Spioer and Peglcr—Practical Auditing. History and Development of Accountancy and Auditing. Ethics and Etiquette of the Ac countancy Profession. Planning of Accounting Systems. Internal Check. External Audits. Audit of Cash transactions. Audit of the Revenue Account. Balance Sheet Audits. Verification of Assets. Principles of Asset Valuation. Provisions, Reserves, Reserve Funds, and Sinking Funds. Secret Reserves. Divisible Profits and Dividends. Goodwill. Investigations. Form and Content of Pub lished Accounts. The Law Belating to Limited Company Accounts. Hire Purchase Accounts. The Double Account System. Ad vanced Company Accounts. Reconstructions, Amalgamations and Absorptions. Accounts of Holding Companies and their Subsidiaries. Trustees', Liquidators', Receivers' and Execu tors' Accounts. Accounts for various types COMMERCE. £^3-

of businesses and the audit thereof. Duties,, Powers, and Responsibilities of Auditors. Audit Working Papers. Auditors' Certifi cates and Reports.

Text-books: — Carter—Advanced Accounts (Pitman). Spioer and Pegler—Practical Auditing (H.F.L.. Publishers Ltd.).

Books for reference: — A. C. Littleton—Accounting Evolution to 190Q- (American lustitute Publishing Co.). Victorian Companies Act, 1928. Federal Bankruptcy Act and Rules. H. G. Cocke Summary of Principal Legal De cisions affecting Auditors. P. D. Leake—Commercial Goodwill. Sir G. Garnsey—Holding Companies and their Published Accounts. Ranking, Spioer arid Pegler—Executorship Law and Accounts (H.F.L. Publishers Ltd.). A. E. Outforth—Methods ot Amalgamation. Montgomery—Auditing Theory and Practice (Rioiiald). Ross—Hire Purchase Accounting (The Law Book Co.).

ACCOUNTANCY PART 11B.— Preliminary reading :— L. A. Schumer—Cost Accounting (Commonwealth Institute of Aoountante). History and Development of Industrial Accounting. Planning of Accounting Systems. Classifica tion of Accounts. Cost Accounting and Fac tory Organisation. Stock and Store Ac counts. Perpetual Inventories. Plant Re cords and Depreciation. Financial and Cost Accounting as an aid to Management. Inves tigations for Management purposes. Budget ary Control and Standard Costs. Financial. .844 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 19IS6.

and Operating Statements and Reports. Statistics as Applied to Commerce. Text-books: — L A. Schumer—Cost Accounting (Commonwealth Institute of Accountants). J. H. Bliss—Management through Accounts. L. C. Boddington—Statistics and their Applioa- 1 tion to Commerce. Books for reference: — J. 0. McKinscy—Managerial Accounting, Vol. I (University of Chicago Press). T. H. Sanders—Cost Accounting for Control (McGraw-Hill). H. J. Whcldon—Cost Accounting and Costing Methods (MacDonald and Evans). J. H. Bliss—Financial and Operating Ratios in Management. E. A-. Caimnan—Basic Standard Costs (American Institute Publishing Co.). W. B. Castenliolz—Cost Accounting Procedure (La Salle Extension). G. C. Harrison—Standard Coste. J. M. Clark—The Economics of Overhead Cost. A. C. Littleton—Accounting Evolution to 1900 (American Institute Publishing Co.). Sutcliffe—Statistics for the Business Man. A. W. Willsmorc—Business Budgets and Budget ary Control.

NANKING, CURRENCY AND EXCHANGE— Preliminary reading:-— Clare and Crump—The A B C of the Foreign Ex changes. Robertson—Money. Cole—What Everybody Wants to Know about Money. The theory ot money, banking, foreign exchange and international trade; industrial fluctua tions and their control, to an advanced standard. COMMERCE. JJ4g

Text-books: — Keynes—A Treatise on Money (Macmillan), 2 vols. Pigou—Industrial Fluctuations (Macmillan). Hawtrey—The Art of Central Banking (Long mans). Copland—Australia in the World Crisis (C.U.P.). Taussig—International Trade ^Macmillan). COMMERCIAL LAW, PAP/T I.— Preliminary reading : — Pollock—First Book on Jurisprudence, Part j, Chapters 1 and 2; Part II, Chapters 1 and 2; Chapter 4. 1. Introduction : Sources and general nature of Victorian Law with special reference to Commercial Law. 2. General principles cf the Law of Contract. (a) The nature of a Contract. , (b) Formation of Contract. (c) The Operation ot Contract. (d) Interpretation of Contract. (e) Discharge of Contract. (f) Remedies for Breach ot Contract. 3. Special Topics. (a) Principal and Agent. (b) Partnership. (c) Sale of Goods. (d) Negotiable Instruments. (e) Contracts ot Carriage (i) by Sea. (ii) by Laud. (f) Bailments. (g) Bills of Sale and other chattel securities, (h) Principal and Surety. (i) Insurance. Text Books: — Charlosworth—Principles of Mercantile Law (3rd ed., 1934). Commonwealth and Victorian Statutes and oases referred to by the lecturer. Studente should 846 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, I»36.

obtain copies of the Goods Act 1928 and the Commonwealth Bills of Exchange Act 1909- 1912. Books for reference: — Lindley—Law ot Partnership, Byles—Bills of Exchange. Chalmers—Sale of Goods. Anson—Law of Contracts. COMMERCIAL LAW, PART II. Preliminary reading: Halsbury—Vol. 20, Article, Master and Servant. Part 1: The Relation, pp. 64-70. Part III: The Creation of the Relation, pp. 72-78, 81-88. Part IV; Duration and Termination of the Contract, pp. 92-102. 1. .The Law of Master and Servant.—A general out line, including the legal aspects of factory inspection and of the constitution and func tion of industrial tribunals. 2. Trustees, Executors and Administrators.—The appointment, retirement ajid removal of trustees and personal representatives; their duties and powers, and the more common breaches of trust. 3. Bankruptcy.—Bankruptcy proper; Deeds of As. sigumcnt and Deeds of Arrangement. 4. Company Law.— (a) The nature of a corporation. (b) The modern limited company, including its formation, conduct, reconstruction and winding up. (o) Mining Companies. Text-books:— 1. No particular text-book is recommended. Students should obtain copies of the Fac tories and Shops Act 1928, the Workers' Compensation Act 1928, and tho Common wealth Conciliation and Arbitration Act 1904-1930. COMMERCE. 847

2. Sweet and Maxwell—The Trustees' Handbook. Students should obtain copies of the Trus tee Act 1928. 3. Lewis—Australian Bankruptcy Law, 2nd ed. 1934. Students should obtain copies of the Commonwealth Bankruptcy Act 1924-1933. 4. Topham—Principles of Company Law (if pos sible), 6th ed. 1924. (Later editions are to be used with discretion.) Students should obtain copies of the Companies Act 1928. Generally, the authorities referred to in the typed notes and in lectures. Books for reference: — 1. Halsbury—Laws of Bngland, Vol. 20, Article, Master and Serva,nt. Anderson—Fixation ot Wages in Australia. Willis—Workmen's Compensation. 2. Underbill—Trusts and Trustees. 3. McDonald, Henry and Meek—The Australian Bankruptcy Law and Practice. 4. Palmer—Company Law. CONSTITUTIONAL AND LEGAL HISTORY— (For details see Faculty ot Arts) ECONOMIC GEOGRAPHY— (a) Principles of geographic control; natural regions of the world as the basis of produc tion ; factors controlling land utilisation and settlement; the geographical bases of in dustry and trade. Special study of Aus tralian conditions. (b) The localisation of industry; organisation of commerce and industry in special areas; the primary and secondary industries of Aus tralia; transport problems. (c) Leading commodities and their place in interna tional trade, with special attention to Aus- tralan exports; economic problems of produc tion or distribution associated with particu lar commodities; survey ot world trade. g48 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 193(>.

(d) International trade; the theory of comparative costs; the balance of payments; protection and tariffs: regulation o-f international trade, with special reference to Australia and the British Empire. Text-books: — Zimmerman—World Resourecs and Industries (Harper's). Copland (ed.).—Economic Survey of Australia (Annals of tho American Academy of Politi cal and Social Science), Parts I and II. Wood—Tho Pacific Basin (Oxford University Press). Whale—International Trade (H.U. Library).

ECONOMIC HISTORY ECONOMICS. PART I. ECONOMICS, PART II. ! For details EUROPEAN HISTORY, B or C. '[ see Faculty HISTORY OF ECONOMIC ot Arts. THEORY }

INDUSTRIAL AND FINANCIAL ORGANISATION— Preliminary reading: — Robinson—The Structure ot Competitive Industry (Cambridge University Press). Robertson—Control of Industry (Cambridge Uni versity Press). Pigou—Unemployment (Home University Series). McKenzie—The Banking Systems of Great Britain, France, Germany and U.S.A. (Mac millan). The structure of modern industry, commerce and banking; technical and economic influences upon the development of enterprises and plants; plant and market requirements; rationalisation of industry; banking struc ture and the financing ot business; invest ment, money markets and the Stock Ex change; measurement of business conditions; business cycles and the stabilisation of busi- COMMEKCE. 849

ness; employer-employee relation within par- . ticular businesses and within the community at large. Tlio course will have special reference to Australia. Text-books: — Von Beckerath—Modern Industrial Organisation (McGra.w Hill). Parkinson—Scientific Investment (Pitman). Withers—Stocks and Shares. Sykes—Bunking and Currency (Butterworth). Copland—Australian Banking System. Lavington—The Trade Cycle (King). Articles in The Economic Record, as referred to in lectures.

INTERNATIONAL RELATIONS— . (For details see Faculty of Arts.)

MODERN POLITICAL INSTITUTIONS— (For details see Faculty of Arts.)

PHILOSOPHY" 1— (Por details see Faculty of Arts.)

(MARKETING— Preliminary reading :— Clark—Principles of Marketing. Structure of marketing and its divisions; the marketing function in relation to other economic functions; the middleman ; wholesale marketing; retail marketing; specialty marketing; instalment selling; determination of price; marketing primary products; co-operative marketing; the warehouse in marketing; organised produce markets; transport; market finance; export marketing; the costs of marketing; the interests of the •consumer ; the social control ot marketing; psychology in marketing ; market research ; advertising; salesman ship. 850 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 193G.

Text-Books: — Smith—Organised Produce Exchanges. Kitson—The Mind ot the Buyer. Marshall—Industry and Trade. Boiling—Sales Management- Marketing Primary Products, with Special Reference to Australia and New Zealand. Supplement to the " Economic Record," February, 1928. The Economics of Australian Transport. Supple ment to the " Economic Record " August 1930. Lemmon and Others—Some Problems of Market ing. References for further reading, both general and on special topics, will be made in the lectures.

PUBLIC ADMINISTRATION— Preliminary reading: — Lowell—Public Opinion and Popular Government. (Longmans). Bland—Planning the Modern State (Angus and Robertson). Higgs—A Primer of National Finance (Methueu). Uhe theory ot the State in administrative terms.. The relations of Administration to the Legis- •ture and the Judiciary. Budgetary proce dure and financial administration. Prin ciples underlying distribution of powers and functions between administrative agencies. Comparative analysis of forms of local gov- erment administration. The development and problems of Public Service. The course will have special reference to public ad ministration in the Commonwealth and the Australian States. Part ot this course! is dealt with in the leotures ou Modern Political Institutions, and will not be repeated in Public Administration. Students are advised to consult the lecturer in Public Administration for infor mation on these lectures. COMMERCE. 851

Text-books: — White—Introduction to the Study of Public Ad ministration (Macmillan). White (Edr.)—The Civil Service in the Modern State (Univ. ot Chicago Press). Bland—Budget Control. Higgs—The Financial Sy.stom of the United King dom (Macmillan). Finer—The British Civil Service (Allen and Un- win). Harris—Local Government in Many Lands (1933 Edn., King). As referred to in lectures— Articles in " Public Administration " (Journal of the British Institute of Public Administra tion). Artcles in the " Economic Record." Papers and Proceedings, the Regional Group, Institute of Public Administration.

PUBLIC FINANCE— Preliminary reading: — Withers—Our Money and the State. Robinson—Public Finance. Report of Commonwealth Grants Commission, 1934. Public Expenditure; public revenue and the prin ciples of taxation; public borrowing and sinking funds; tlio public debt; principles of war fina.ncc; problems of federal finamce; banking and public finance. The course will have special reference to the public finances of the Commonwealth and Victoria. Textbooks: — Bastable—Public Finance. Dalton—Public Finance. Stamp—The Fundamental Principles of Taxation in the light ot Modern Developments. 852 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1930.

Shann and Copland—The Crisis in Australian Finance, 1929-31. Shann and Copland—The Battle ot Plans. Shanm and Copland—The Australian Price Struc ture, 1932. Adarkar—The Principles and Problems ot Fede ral Finance. Reports of Commonwealth Grants Commission, 1934 and 1935 (Govt. Printer, Canberra). Articles in the " Economic Record," as referred to in lectures. Students must consult the Commonwealth of Austra lia Constitution Act, recent budget statements of the Federal and State Treasurers, and show a knowledge of the main facte concerning; the public finances ot tile Commonwealth and Victoria. References for further reading, both general and on special topics, will be made in the lectures.

STATISTICAL METHOD (To be taken in 193(j) — Preliminary reading :— Elderton—Primer of.Statistics. Bauer—Mathematics Preparatory to Statistics and Finance; Chaps. I—V. Form and nature of statistical data; source of data and methods of collection; classifica tion ; tabulation; summary and review- averages of various kinds (mean, median, mode) and their characteristics; arithme tical and geometrical means; weighted and unweighted averages; distribution about the average and measurement of dispersion; probability of given deviations; accuracy and limits of error; errors due to defective data; errors due to detective classification; probaible error of averages; sampling; necessity for random selection; graphical representation of data and ot averages and other statistical functions; graphical solu tion of statistical problems; nature and use of index numbers; methods of computation; COMMERCE. 853

special application of index numbers to variations in prices and wages; common statistical fallacies; interpretation of publi cations of statistical bureaux of the Com monwealth and States of Australia. Text-books: — King—Elements ot Statistical Method. Giften—Statistics, edited by Higgs and Yule. Day—Statistical Analysis. Bowley—The Measurement ot Social Phenomena Bauer, G. N. — Mathematics Preparatory "to- Statistics and Finance. Commonwealth Year Book—latest editions. Students must also consult the publications of the statistical bureaux of the Commonwealth and States of Australia. References for further reading, both general and on special topics, will be made in the lectures.

THEORY OF STATISTICS— (For details see Faculty of Arts.) SPECIMEN COURSES. Courses of study must be planned subject to the conditions prescribed in Section IV ot the Regulation for the Bachelor of Commerce and Section V of tha Regulation for the Diploma in Commerce. In general courses will not be approved unless the following conditions are observed': — (i.) Economics Part I must be passed before any of the following subjects are taken: — Banking, Currency and Exchange. Industrial and Financial Organisation. Public Administration. Public Finance. Statistical Method. Marketing. History of Economic Theory, (ii.) Pure Mathematics Part I must be passed before Theory of Statistics is taken, (iii.) Part I of any subject must be passed before Part II is taken. 854 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1031).

(iv.) The following subjects must not be taken until candidates have passed in at least two other Arts subjects : -— European History B or C. International Relations. Modern Political Institutions. Constitutional and Legal History.

SPECIMEN COURSES FOR B.COM. DEGREE. It is possible for a student to complete the B.Com. course in three years, but experience shows that it is desirable for even full-time studente to take four years. This is all tho more important in the case of studente •who; wish to take honours in at least six subjecte and to qualify for admission to the M.Cora, degree by thesis. Before deciding on a course students should consult the Dean of the Faculty. The following specimen courses are planned on the assumption that students will take four years. A. All students should take the subjecte of Groups I and IV in approximately the following order: — First Year— Two subjects from Group IV. Economics Part I. Economic Geography. Note.—If two parts of a subject are selected from Group IV the second part will be taken in second year and Economic History in first year. Second Year— Economic History. Financial and Industrial Organisation Accountancy Part I. Commercial Law Part I. Third Year— Statistical Method. Fourth Year— Economics Part II. Preparatory Investigation on Thesis if pro ceeding to M.Com. later. B. The following additional subjects arc recom mended for special courses: — 1. Accountancy. COMMERCE. 855

Third Year— Accountancy Part IIB. Commercial Law Part II. Public Finance. Fourth Year— Accountancy Part IIA. Banking, Currency and Exchange (extra subject). 2. Public Service. Third Year— Public Administration. Modem Political Institutions. Marketing or Commercial Law Part II. Fourth. Year— Public Finance. Banking, Currency and Exchange (extra subject). 3. Managerial Position in Commerce or Manu facturing. Third Year— Banking, Currency and Exchange. Commercial Law, Part II. Accountancy Part IIB. Fourth Year— Public Finance. Marketing (extra subject). 4. Teaching. IViird Year— Accountancy Part IIA, Commercial Laws Part II. Banking, Currency and Exchange. Fourth Year— Public Finance. History of Economic Theory (extra subject). 5. Banking. Third Year— Banking, Currency and Exchange. Accountancy Part- LIB. Commercial Law Part II. , 856 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 193(5.

Fourth Year— Public Finance, Marketing (extra, subject).

6. Statistical or Economic Advisory Work. Third Year— Theory ot Statistics. (It is assumed that the subjects from Group IV will include Pkuro Mathematics Part I and, possibly, also Part IT). Public Finance. Banking, Currency and Exchange. Fourth Year— History of Economic Theory. Extra subject from Group III. Note.—Lectures in certain subjecte will be given in alternate years and the above order -may be modified on this account. The following are the subjects with the year in which lectures will next be given. Accountancy, Part IIA - - 1937 Accountancy Part IIB - - 1936 Commercial Law Part II - - 1936 Public Finance - - 1937 Public Administration - - 1937 History of Economic Theory - 1936 Banking, Currency and Exchange 1936 Marketing .... 1936

SPECIMEN COURSES FOR DIPLOMA IN COMMERCE. Students may complete the course tor the Diploma inl three years, but in many cases where time available for study is restricted four years may be more appro priate. The subjects should be taken in the order suggested, provided that students desiring to pursue the accountancy course may take Accountancy Part I in the first year, and transfer Economic Geography to the second year. A typical three-year course is as follows: — , COMMERCE. N57

First Year— Economic Geography. Economics Part I. Commercial Law Part I. Second Year— Accountancy Part I. Industrial and Financial Organisation. English A, or some other subject from Group n. Third Year— Statistical Method. Two other subjecte from any of the special ised B.Com. courses.

DETAILS OF SUBJECTS AND RECOMMENDATIONS FOR THE EXAMINATIONS FOR THE DEGREE. OP MASTER OF COMMERCE, TO BE HELD IN THE FIRST TERM, 1937. The books prescribed for the Degree of B.Com., to gether with the books prescribed for Honours in Econo mics, Part I and Part II for Arts, will be required. In addition, all candidates must show a knowledge of current economic discussions in Australia, as found in the " Economic Record,"' the Journal of the Economic Society of Australia and New Zealand. 1. History of Economic Thought and General Economie Theory. Pigou—Economics of Welfare. Cassel—The Theory of Social Economy 2 vols. STdgwiok—Principles of Political Economy, rwwney—The Acquisitive Society. Marx—Capital. Translation by Eden and Cedar Paul. 2. Financial Administration of Business- Clark—The Economics ot Overhead Costs. Fraser—Problems in Finance. .858 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1930.

Lincoln—Applied Business Finance. McKinsey—Budgetary Control. Cuttorth—Methods of Amalgamation. Bliss—Financial and Operating Ratios in Man agement. Gerstenberg—Financial Organisation and Man agement. Bruere and Lazarus—Applied Budgeting. :8. Industrial Organisation and labour Problems. (a) Industrial Organisation- Marshall—Business Administration. Haney—Business Organisation a.nd Combination. Report of President's Conference: Recent Econo mic Changes in the United States, Vols. I and II. Levy—Monopslies, Cartels and Trusts in British Industry. Urwick—The Meaning of v Rationalisation Committee on Industry and Trade. (Balfour Com mittee) ; Factors in Industrial and Commer cial Efficiency. (b) labour Problems- Clay—The Problem ot Industrial Relations. Burns—Wages and the State. Lauok—The New Industrial Revolution and Wages. Gemmill—Present-Day Labour Relations. Wertheim Lectures on Industrial Relations, 1928. Higgins—A New Province for Law and Order. Anderson—Fixation ot Wages in Australia. •4. Public Finance, with Special Preference to Taxation. Bastable—Public Finance. Report of the Committee on National Debt and Taxation and Appendices, 1929. Pigou—P«blic Finance. Durell—Parliamentary Grants. Contemporary Reports and Discussions on Aus tralian Public Finance. 6. Economic History and Economic Geography. (a) The books prescribed tor Honours in Eoonomio History for B.A., together with COMMERCE 859'

Tawuey—The Agrarian Problem in the 16th Century. Mun—England's Treasure by Foreign Trade. Fay—Great Britain, from Adam Smith to the Present Day. Lippincott—Economic Development ot the United States (b) Kendrew—Climate. Shanahan—Animal Foodstuffs. Semple—Influence ot Economic Environment. Taylor—Environment and Race. Banking, Currency and Exchange. Keynes—A Treatise on Money 2 vols. Gregory—Documents Relating to British Bank ing, 1832-1928. Marshall—-Money, Credit and Commerce. Roberteon—Banking Policy and the Price Level' Flux—The Foreign Exchanges. FACULTY OF DENTAL SCIENCE.

DETAILS OP SUBJECTS FOR THE ANNUAL AND SUPPLEMENTARY EXAMINATIONS TO BE HELD IN THE SECOND AND FOURTH TERMS 1936, AND THE FIRST TERM, 1937.

FIRST YEAR. In the subjects of Chemistry, Natural Philosophy and Zoology, tho lectures and practical work are the same as for medical students. The standard for the examination is somewhat lower than that for the medical course. Dental students attaining the standard ot the latter examination in any one of these subjects will be returned as having passed in that subject as proscribed for the medical course.

CHEMISTRY— (As for Medical Course).

DENTAL PROSTHESIS (PART T).— The Course ot Lectures include ;— The consideration of the chemical and physical pro perties of the materials used, such as plaster of Paris, artificial stones, impression materials, moulding sand, metals for dies and counter-dies, vulcanite, porcelain teeth. A consideration of the subjects of Soldering. Swaging. Simple vulcanite, partial denture construction. The Laboratory Course embraces :— The manipulation ot plaster ot Paris, with experi ments to demonstrate expansion and the effects ot the retarding and accelerating agents. DENTAL SCIENCE. 861

The making ot plaster casts, suitable for dentnre and for orthodontic purposes. Exercises with vulcanite to demonstrate the necessity for careful vulcanisation to ensure elasticity, strength, and the elimination of porosity, to gether with the construction of solid and hollow cubes, etc. The repairing ot vulcanite. Soldering exercises. Moulding and the production of dies and counter-dies. Text-book:— Turner and Anthony—Prosthetic Dentistry.

NATURAL PHILOSOPHY- (As for Medical Course.)

ZOOLOGY— (As for Medical Course).

SECOND YEAR. ANATOMY— Lectures.—A course of systematic lectures on Anatomy. Dissecting throughout the three terms. Books recommended :— Text-books: — Anatomy for Dental Students, by Six Teachers. For Practical Anatomy .- Cunningham—Practical Anatomy. For Embryology; Frazer—Manual of Embryology. Book for reference: — Keith—Human Embryology and Morphology T5th ' edn.). 869 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 19S(i.

COMPARATIVE DENTAL ANATOMY— Lectures: Twice a week in first term. Leotures and Demonstrations will include: — Evolution. Phytogeny and Otogeny. The Evolution ot the human dentition. Mechanism of mastication. Comparative studies of the teeth ot vertebrates. Textbook: — Brooke-Nicholls—Notes on Comparative Dental Anatomy. Book for Reference: — Todd—Mammalian Dentition. DENTAL EMBRYOLOGY AND HISTOLOGY— Lectures: Twice a week in .second term. Practical Histology Class, once weekly, during second term. Lectures will deal with— General Embryology, with particular reference to the development of the skull, jaws, antra, pharynx, tonsil, larynx. The growth ot bone. The development of the tooth germ. The development of enamel, dentine, oementum, pulp, peridental membrane, and alveolar bone. The histology of these. Tho epithelium ot tho gingival crevice. The eruption of the teeth. Text-book: — Orban—Dental Histology and Embryology. Books for reference : — Widdowson—Notes on Dental Histology. Frazer—Manual of Embryology. DENTAL PROSTHESIS (PART IT)— The Course of Lectures includes the consideration of:— Crown work. Swaged dentines. Casting (Simple). A consideration of the masticatory apparatus and the effects of the loss of teeth. DENTAL SCIENCE. 863

An introduction to the subject of the articu lation of artificial teeth. The Laboratory Course embraces all the technical pro cedures associated with the construetion ot: — The various types of crowns. Swaged metal dentures. Gold, silver and aluminium castings. Partial vulcanite dentures. Bar lower dentures. Obturators. Splints. Book of reference: — Lee Walter Uoxtater—Procedures in Modern Crown and Bridge Work. HISTOLOGY— A course ot thirty lectures, delivered once a week during first, second and third terms in tho Department ot Anatomy; ; and of laboratory classes of 14 hours' duration twice a week during first term and once a week during second and third terms. Text book -.— Lewis and Stolu-—A Text-book ot Histology. Latest edition. PHYSIOLOGY.— (As tor Physiology Part I Science Course). Text boMcs : — Halliburton—Handbook of Physiology, and Osborne and , Y'oung—Elementary Practical Bio- Chemistry. THIRD YEAR. BACTERIOLOGY (Dental Course)— Leotures : Twice a week in Second Term. The course in Bacteriology will consist of leotures, demonstrations and laboratory work, dealing with: The biology, morphology, isolation, cultivation and classification of bacteria and filtrable viruses ot importance in medicine and dentistry. 55 864 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1936

The Principles of immunity, together with their practical applications, including serological teste and methods of vaccination. Text books:— Mackie and McCartney—An Introduction to Prac tical Bacteriology. Bigger—Handbook of Bacteriology. For reference: — Goadby—Mycology ot the Mouth. Appletou—Bacterial Infection. Bulleid—Bacteriology for Dental Studente. Mnir and Ritchie—Manual of Bacteriology—9th edition. CONSERVATIVE DENTAL SURGERY (PART I)— Lectures twice a week in 2nd term—20 Lectures. Instruments—sterilization. .Examination ot patients. .-;'.•,•• Prophylaxis and Scaling. Separation of the teeth. Control ot Saliva. Avoidance of pain in filling teeth. Onset and progress of Dental Caries. General principles of cavity preparation. Pilling materials (desirable properties). Gutta Peroha—cements—amalgams. Text book:— Parfitt—Operative Dental Surgery (latest edition). Book of reference: — G. V. Black—Operative Dentistry (Vol. II).

DENTAL MATERIA MEDICA— One Lecture per week throughout tho 3rd year. (a) Definition and consideration of Materia Medica. Pharmacology, Toxicology, Therapeutics. (b) Pharmacy and Pharmaceutical Preparations. (c) Pharmacopoeias and Official Preparations.

(e) Drugs—names and synonyms, sources, charac ters, preparations, doses, pharmacology and therapeutics. Methods of administering and applying drugs and conditions modifying their actions. Classification of Drugs and Remedies under the following headings:- - Local-—Antacids, Antiseptics and Disinfectants, As tringents Styptics and Escharotics, Bleaching Agents, Counter-Irritants, Demulcents and Emollients, Local Anaesthetics (Analgesics and Obtundents). General-—Alteratives Restoratives and Tonics, Anodynes Sedatives and Hypnotics, Anaes thetics, Antipyretics, Cathartics, Diaphoretics, Diuretics, Emetics, Sialogogues, Stimulants. Artificial Hyneraemia, Massage, Light, Heat, Elec tricity, Radium. (f) Incompatibility—Synergism, Antagonism. (g) Poisons—Their actions and antidotes. (h) Prescriptions—Prescription writing, with and without abbreviations, using Apothecaries' and Metric systems. (i) Ionic Medication —Principles of £j) Anaesthetics—The pharmacology of general and local anaesthetic agents. Note.—The above list is intended as a guide to stu dents and must not bo taken as limiting the scope of the 'lectures or the examinations. Students will be expected to recognise drugs. Text-book : — Buckley—Modern Dental Materia Medica, Pharma cology and Therapeutics (latest edition). DENTAL METALLOGRAPHY— Lectures. One per week. General Physical properties of motals—melting point colour thermal expansion, hardness, ductility. •Crystalline nature ot metals. Effects of alloying on the properties above-mentioned. y66 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 193G.

Considerations involved in the melting of metals— occlusion of gases, oxidation, volatilisation of constituents, use ot fluxes and other protective coverings. Casting ot metals. Factors affecting the strength and ductility. Rate of cooling. Types of mould. Change of volume during solidification. Evolu tion ot gases and the formation of blow holes. Crystal size. Methods of altering the hardness of metals—alloying, cold working such as rolling and wire drawing. Effects of annealing after cold working. Ef fects of heat treatment. Properties of specific metals and alloys—copper, gold, silver, platinum, 18 et. gold, 9ct. gold, garman silver, stainless steels, etc. Effects of cold working and annealing on these metals. Uniting metals. Nature and properties of solders. Use of fluxes. Amalgams. Physical properties. Volume changes. Ageing. Crystallisation. Practical demonstrations—To be given at times to be- tnotified. 1. Testing the hardness ot metals by the Brinell hardness machine. 2. Making alloys in a gas furnace and measurement of the hardness. 3. Melting metals in an electric furnace. 4. Rolling of metals and measuring the hardness after various degrees of rolling. 5. Annealing after rolling and the measurement of the hardness. 6. Wire drawing and the measurement of the tensile strength. 7. Annealing of drawn wires and measurement of the tensile strength. 8. Drawing graphs of properties of amalgams. 9. Making amalgams and measurement ot the]crushing strength. DENTAL SCIENCE. 867

10. Casting metals into chill and sand moulds and noting the effect on the type of fracture. 11. Examination of the inicrostrueture of simple metals and alloys.

DENTAL PROSTHESIS (PART Ilia)— The Course of Lectures include the consideration of :— Bridgework. The retention of dentures and impression taking. The necessity of balanced articulation. The value of, and the necessity for an articu lator ot the anatomical type to produce balance. All the technical procedures associated with the construction ot full and par tial vulcanite dentures (excluding a detailed consideration ot the securing of jaw relations and the selection of teeth, which will be fully considered in the 4th year, when full denture work will be carried out in the clinic). The designing and construction of partial metal dentures (elementary). Casting. The Laboratory course embraces all tho technical pro cedures associated with the construction of :— Bridges. Cast Dentures. Full Dentures. The Clinical course is limited to the repairing of vul canite dentures.

OPERATIVE TECHNIQUE— Lectures and Demonstrations will be given daily during the first term of 3rd Year, dealing with— Tooth Morphology, Cavity preparation and use of filling material, and Technique of inserting fillings. 868 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1936.

During tho First Term students will be required to carry out the following exercises— 1. Carving, moulding and drawing ot various teeth. 2. Preparation ot simpler types of cavities in ex tracted teeth. 3. The insertion of plastic fillings. Subsequently, Clinical demonstrations will be given dealing with the preparation of cavities in the mouth and restoration of teeth by plastic filling material, in cluding— Charting of the Mouth. Prophylaxis. Exclusion of moisture. Chair positions. Technique ot local Anaesthesia and Exodontin. On the completion ot this class to the satisfaction ot the Lecturer, students will enter the Clinic and perform the simpler types of operations in the mouth. During part of the Second Term and the whole of Third Term, Demonstrations will be given dealing with the more complex types of cavity preparations and the insertion of gold (foil and inlay) and ot combination fillings. Text-book: — Parfitt—Operative Dental Surgery (3rd ed.). Books tor reference: — G. V. Black—Dental Anatomy. G. V. Black—Operative Dentistry, Vol. 2. ORTHODONTIA— Nomenclature. The evolution ot the masticatory apparatus. Normal occlusion, and the factors concerned in its establishment. Facial harmony and balance. Oral and facial manifestations of malocclusion Diagnosis and Classification. Etiology of malocclusion. Prognosis and sequelae of malocclusion, and benefits resulting from its correction. Treatment. DENTAL SCIENCE. SG^

Factors influencing method and time of treat ment. The principles ot retention. Tho management of cases, care ot the mouth, and the filing ot records. Books of reference: — McCoy—Orthodontia. Anglo—Orthodontia. Strang—Orthodontia. ORTHODONTIC TECHNIQUE— A practical course occupying one term, designed to train the student in the manipulation of orthodontic appliances.

PATHOLOGY—as for Pathology (not including Bacter iology) of Medical Course, excluding Post-mortem demonstrations and Lectures and Laboratory work on special Pathology.

MINIMUM CLINICAL REQUIREMENTS FOB THIRD YEAR STUDENTS. Students must attend the extracting surgery on the days allotted to them, tor the purpose of extracting. Each Third Year student must complete during the Second and Third Terms— 60 amalgam restorations (of which 25 must be Class 2). 25 Porcelain restorations. 40 cases Infiltration Anaesthesia and Exodontia. Buch to be performed to the satisfaction of and under the personal supervision of the Lecturer in Charge.

FOURTH YEAR. CONSERVATIVE DENTAL SURGERY (PART IT)— During First Term—12 Lectures. Filling materials: Gold—Foil and Inlays. Pulpless teeth and their treatment. Operation of Crowning. 870 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1930. Bleaching. Special considerations in the treatment of chil dren's teeth. Radiographic interpretation. Books ot reference: — Norman G. Bennett—The Science and Practice of Dental Surgery (latest edition). Davis—Operative Dentistry (latest edition> G. V. Black—Operative Dentistry (Vol. II.). Buckley—Modern Dental Materia Medica. DENTAL PROSTHESIS (PART Illb)— The course of lectures includes the consideration of full and partial denture construction. The Clinical course extending over the three terms is confined to the construction of full and partial dentures in vulcanite. The Full Denture Course: — Synopsis of lectures— Preliminary examination. Classification: Mental outlook ot patient. Tissue conditions. Case History. Diagnosis aind Prognosis. Indication tor the Surgical 7)reparation of the mouth. Consideration of the principles under lying retention. Impression materials. Technique of impression taking. The use of stone casts and vulcanite bases. Jaw relations (using intra and extra oral methods ot securing registrations). Articulators and the laws of articulation. The selection and arrangement of teeth. Festooning and cutting up and polishing. • The use of vulcanite, thermo-plastic, and thermo-set materials. Immediate restorations. Rebaeing technique. TBext-Book: — Turner and Anthony—Prosthetic Dentistry (latest edition). DENTAL SCIENCE. 871 DENTAL SURGERY AND PATHOLOGY— Pathological Dentition and Disorders associated with the process of teething. Caries—the theories as to etiology, immunity and prevention. Erosion, Abrasion and Attrition. Diseases of the Pulp. Diseases of the Peridental Membrane. Pyorrhoea Gingivae, its Etiology, Pathology, Bacterio logy and Treatment. Diseases of the Gums. . Odontomes. Odontalgia, and Neuralgia. Oral Sepsis. Text-book • — N. G. Bennett (latest edition). GENERAL ANAESTHESIA— One lecture per week in First Term History of General Anaesthetics. Physiological Action of Anaesthetics. Selection of the Anaesthetic. Preparation of the Patient. Stages of Anaesthesia. Accessory Appliances. Methods ot administration, of the following : Chloroform. Ether. Ethyl Chloride and its substitutes. Nitrous Oxide. Combinations of Nitrous Oxide. Ethylene. Carbon Dioxide Therapy. Technique of Endotrachael insufflation and inhala tion anaesthesia. Basal Anaesthesia. Analgesia. Dangers and difficulties ot anaesthesia. Remedial Measures. Text-Book: — "Practical Anaesthesia"—Staff of Alfred Hospital. §72 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1936.

MEDICINE— Lectures and Demonstrations two mornings per week throughout the year at Alfred Hospital. Introductory, Health and Disease, Old Age, Be ginnings oi disease and early symptoms. Viseeral reserve,- General causes ot disease. Infectious diseases. Nature, Modes of infection. Carriers, Toxin effects. Prophylaxis and im munity Anaphylaxis, Pyrexia, Principles of treatment of fevers. Septicaemia, Pyaemia, Toxaemia, Typhoid, Diph theria, Tonsilitis. Coryza. Influenza, Pneu monia, Tuberculosis, Syphilis, Rheumatic fever. Oral Sepsis. The role of focal sepsis in systemic disease. The Intoxications, Meta bolic diseases. Deficiency diseases. Vitamins and their relation to oral disease. Alimen tary, Renal, Respiratory, Blood, Circulatory and Nervous Systems, and the more obvious- disorders affecting each. Ductless glands and joints. Anaesthetic risks and post operative respiratory complications. Text-book: — Stevens—A Manual of the Practice ot Medicine (latest edition).

SURGERY— 1. Surgical Anatomy of the Mouth, Face, etc. 2. Inflammation, suppuration, ulceration, etc. 3. Control of infection. Asepsis, Antisepsis, Sterili zation. 4. Haemorrhage and its control. 5. New growths, general features. 6. Syphilis in relation to the head and neck. 7. Repair and treatment ot wounds. 8. Fractures and dislocations. 9. Surgical affections of the accessory nasal sinuses. 10. Surgical affections of the tongue and lips. 11. Surgical affections of the salivary glands. 12. Surgical affections of the tonsils, adenoids. 13. Surgical affections of the lips and cheeks. DENTAL SCIENCE. 873-

14. Cleft palate. 15. Complications following operations. Demonstrations at the Alfred Hospital inelude—• Clinical instruction in the wards and out-patients' de partments; attendance at operations, practical work in- the casualty department (dressing ot wounds, bandag ing, etc.); and visite to the museum and laboratories- asaooiated with the Hospital. Text-book: — Appropriate chapters in either— Rose and Carless—Manual ot Surgery, or Spencer and Gask—Surgery. Book of reference: Beesley and Johnston—Manual of Surgical Ana tomy. MINIMUM CLINICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR FOURTH YEAR STUDENTS. Studente must attend the extracting surgery on the- days allotted to them, for the purpose of extracting, and administering anaesthetics. Each student must complete in the year— 75 plastic restorations. 50 gold restorations—25 foil, 25 inlays. 5 Crowns. 15 Root fillings. 100 cases of Local Anaesthesia and Exodontia (in cluding Block Anaesthesia). General Anaesthesia and Exodontia, 60 cases. The treatment ot two oases ot malocclusion (one ot which to be carried out under the super vision of, and to the satisfaction ot, the- Demonstrator. All clinical work must be completed to the satisfac tion of tho Clinician in charge of the case.

FIFTH YEAR. DENTAL PROSTHESIS—PART IV. The Lecture Course includes Partial dentures- and Ceramics. -g74 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1936.

The Clinical Course includes all types of advanced work such as Obturators, Bridges, Full and Partial dentures and Ceramics. The lecture course— History, Examination, Classification, Diag- nosis. Prognosis for partial dentures. Impression methods. Preparation and use of Study Casts. Impression materials and impression methods. Design. Direct and indirect retention. Stress Breakers. Technique of Clasp Surveying and designing. Construction methods. Insertion and Maintainence. Dental Porcelain and its place in den tistry. Electric Furnace and its use. The use of the Pyrometer. The manipulation of porcelain. Inlays. Mineral stains: their practical application in effecting changes in colour and the imitation of natural defects. Firing and the use ot super glaze. The Clinical and Laboratory course includes the construction ot Crowns, Inlays and the stain ing of teeth. Books of reference : — LeGro—Ceramics. Kenaedy—Partial Dentures. ETHICS AND JURISPRUDENCE— Two lectures in the first term.

ORAL SURGERY— A course of lectures and demonstrations during the 1st and 2nd terms dealing with— Acute and chronic infections associated with teeth and associated structures.. DENTAL SCIENCE. 875-

Extraction ot the Teeth. Apicocctomy. Gingevectomy. Alveoleetomy. Dislocation and Anchylosis. Fractures of the Jaws. Diseases of the Antrum. Plastic repairs of the mouth, lips and jaws. . Tumours of the jaws. " Dental " Haemorrhage. Technique of Conduction Anaesthesia. The Principles of Plastic Surgery.

Text Book : — Blair and Ivy—Essentials of Oral Surgery (latest edition).

Books of reference:— Mead— Principles of Oral Surgery. Berger—Principles and Technique of Oral Sur gery (latest edition). PERIDONTIA AND ORAL HYGIENE— Four lecture demonstrations in the first term. PRACTICE MANAGEMENT— Six lectures in first term.

CLINICAL REQUIREMENTS— Students must attend for Clinical Instruction daily. General Anaesthesia and Exodontia— Students must attend the anaesthetic surgery on the days allotted to them, and must complete 30 cases, arranged at the discretion of the) Demonstrator. Local Anaesthesia and Exodontia— Studente 'must attend the extracting snrgery on the days allotted, and complete 60 .cases, in- ;876 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1936.

eluding Block Anaesthesia, Elevator Tech nique and Surgical methods.

DETAILS OF SUBJECTS AND RECOMMENDATIONS FOR THE EXAMINATIONS POR THE DEGREE OF DOCTOR OF DENTAL SCIENCE, TO BB HELD IN MARCH AND SEPTEMBER, 1936. '

1. SUBQICAL PATHOLOGY (Practical and Theoretical). A knowledge of the general principles ot Pathology will -be required, and of the morbid anatomy and pathological .histology of the commoner pathological conditions. Text Books:— MacCallum—Text-book of Pathology. Muir—Text-book of Pathology. Beattie and Dickson—General and Special Pathology. Allen—Pathology, Lectures and Demonstrations. Bowlby—Surgical Pathology. The examination will include examinations of macro scopic and microscopic specimens, 2. BACTERIOLOGY (Practical and Theoretical). Candidates are expected to have a knowledge of the subject to the Honours standard in bacteriology at the • examination in Pathology and Bacteriology for M.B., B.S. ,(4th year). For details of subjects, see Details tor M.B., B.S.

3. PHYSIOLOGY AND BIOCHEMISTRY. Candidates will be expected to have a knowledge of the subjects equivalent to Honours Standard demanded in the examination for Physiology Div. EE. (Medical Course). The examinations will be partly written, partly practical, partly oral.

4. ANATOMY. The course to include lectures, demonstrations and practical work, extended over one academic year. DENTAL SCIENCE. 877

The examination to include the anatomy of the Head, jNeck, Thorax and Central Nervous System up to the Honour standard required for Anatomy in Division II of the Medical Course, and to include the embryological, morphological and anthropological aspects of the cranial region. N.B.—No course will be arranged unless at least three (3) candidates present.

5. NATURAL PHILOSOPHY, CHEMISTRY, AND ZOOLOGY Candidates will be expected to have a knowledge of the subjects equivalent to that demanded in the examination for above subjects Part 11 (Science Course).

6. METALLOGRAPHY. Candidates will be expected to have a detailed know ledge of the following matter: — (1) Application of the phase rule to binary and ternary metallic systems. (2) Crystalline structure, its mode of formation and its effect on the physical properties. (3) Phase changes in the solid state and their application to heat treatment. (4) Methods of determining the following physical properties ot metals:—coefficient of expan sion, melting point, transformation tempera ture, hardness, elastic limit, and tensile strength. (5) Formation of cavities and other types of un soundness in cast metals. (6) Principles underlying the heat treatment of alloys. Quenching and tempering. Age hardening and temper hardening. (7) Influence of cold working, wire drawing and swaging. (8) Influence of annealing after cold working. (9) I'he properties of the following alloy series: — Cu/Ag, Cu/Au, Cu Ag Au. Modification of latter by addition of Pt and Pd. (10) Amalgams. Physical properties and effects of manipulative details. (11) Steel and ite heat treatment. gyy DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1U30.

(12) Stainless steels, their properties and treat ment. There will be two papers and a practical examina tion, which may include an oral examination. The above matter will be partially covered in the subjects Metallography and Properties of Metals Parts 1 and IT in the Faculty of Engineering.

INFORMATION FOK, CANDIDATKS PRESENTING THESES :— Resolution of the Faculty ot Dental Science. That in the opinion of the Faculty a Thesis (1) Should not be any ordinary compilation from books (2) Nor a more compendium ot cases (3) Nor merely observational (4) But should be a substantial contribution to knowledge and (5) Should be in fit form for publication or be already published in approved form. FACULTY OF EDUCATION.

DETAILS OP SUBJECTS AND RECOMMENDATIONS FOR THE ANNUAL AND SUPPLEMENTARY EXAMINATIONS TO BE HELD IN THE FOURTH TERM, 1036.

BACHELOR OP EDUCATION. FIRST YEAR.

PASS SUBJECTS. (To be taken by all Students). a. HISTORY AND PRINCIPLES OF EDUCATION. (a) HISTORY OF EDUCATION. A brief survey of the general history of schools and educational practices from primitive tiiiics to the present day. Text-book: — Cubberley—History of Education. For reference:— Freeman—Schools of Hellas. Cubberley—Readings in the History of Educa tion. (b) PRINCIPLES OF EDUCATION. The Place of Education in Individual and Social Life. The Psychological Foundations of Education. The Sociological Foundations of Education. Principles governing the procedure of various types of school. Text-books: — Chapman and Counts—Principles of Education. Norwood—The English Tradition of Education. For reference -.— Spencer—Essays on Education. Nunn—Education: Ite Data and First Principles. Peters—Foundations of Educational Sociology. Dewey—Democracy and Education. £gO DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 193fi.

2. ORGANISATION OF EDUCATION. A discussion of the following topics: — 1 The State and education. 2. The historical development ot national systems of education (a brief treatment). 3. The place of public and private schools. 4. A general survey ot educational facilities existing at present in Victoria. 5. The scope and function oi Pre-school education. The primary school. Post-primary and secondary schools. Special schools. The University. Adult education 6. The construction and modification of cur ricula. . 7. The problem ef examinations. Current criticisms. Internal examinations in Victoria. 8. Equality of educational opportunity. The reorganisation of post-primary and secon dary education. 9. Typical modern developments in educa tional practice, such as— Individual methods. Activity programmes. Integrated courses. >. Broadcasts to schools. Educational films. The platoon system. Libraries in schools. Modern school architecture. 10. A briet survey ot educational organisation and adinistration in— England. •• United States. France. . . . Denmark. Russia. EDUCATION. 881

Text-books: — Cole (ed.)—The Education of the Adolescent in Australia. N.E.F.—The Examination Tangle and the Way Out. Sneddon—Problems of Secondary Education. For Reference :— Cubberley—History of Education, Part IV. Chapoia.il and Counts—Principles of Education. English Board of Education—Various Reports. Tate—Lessons from Rural Denmark. Kandel—Comparative Education. Various publications ot the Australian Council for Educational Research.

3. EDUCATIONAL PSYCHOLOGY. I- Physiological Psychology. (a) Study in outliue of the nervous system and the organs of response. (b) The sensory equipment of man and the develop ment of sensory powers in children. Sensory defects and aphasias. The Gcstalt theory. (c) The conditioned reflex and behaviorism. The hormic conception of mental life, parallelism and interactionism. Heredity and environ, ment. . H. Psychology of Cognition. (a) Imagery and imaginal types. Growth and range of child's perceptions. Training of the senses, apperception, observation, kinder garten training, left-handedness, mirror- writing. Report psychology. The pedagogi cal significance of imagination. (b) Memory, the laws of association, theory of associationism. Higher thought processes, eduction ot relations and correlates, con ception, judgment, reasoning. The develop ment of language. Nature and measure ment of intelligence. 3g3 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1930.

(c) The laws of learning; improvement, permanence) and fatigue in learning. Transfer of train ing. Educational tests. Psychology of school subjects, special abilities and dis abilities. IH. Psychology of Volition. (a) .Nature ot feeling ajid emotion. The develop ment of emotional reactions in children. (b) The theories of instinct and their application, to education. Interest and attention. (c) 'The growth of sentiments, values, ideals. Tem perament and character. The psychology of adolescents and their educational needs. (d) The psycho-analytic contributions to education.. The unadjusted school child, mental disease and mental hygiene. Text-books: — Sandiford—Educational Psychology. Oolvin—The Learning Process. For reference: — • Watson—Behaviorism. Spearman—The Nature of Intelligence. Petermann—The Gestalt Theory. Brooks—Psychology of Adolescence. Thorndike—Educational Psychology. J. Ward—Psychological Principles. J. Ward—Psychology Applied to Education. McDougall—Social Psychology.

4. METHODS OF TEACHING. I. General Method. Psychological basis of teaching. Types of lessons. Gateways of knowledge. Steps: of method. Motivation. Teaching devices. The art of questioning. Illustrations and teaching aids. Examinations. EDUCATION. 883

Homework and its problems. Methods of study. Personal factors in a teacher's success. Record cards. Courses of study. Text-books; — Oole—The Method and Technique of Teaching. For Reference:— Bagloy—School Discipline. Oaldwell-Cook—The Play Way. Adaime—Modern Developments in Educational Practice. Hall-Quest—Supervised Study in the Secondary School. Bl. Special Methods of Teaching Secondary School Subjects. (Studente are required to select three subjects in order of importance.) The following subjects are offered: — English. History and Economics. Geography. Classics. Modem Lfl.iigu;ige,s. Music. Games and Physical Education. Mathematics. Biological Sciences. Physical Sciences. Art and Handwork. Commercial Subjects.

6. PRACTICAL TEACHING. Practice of Teaching (including Drawing and Writing on the Blackboard and Speech Training). Speech Training involves not only the elimination of possible defects in the student's own voice and speech, fcut an elementary knowledge of methods of dealing with speech defects in school children. 884 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 19?fi.

Full details ot the requirements in Practical Teach ing are given on page —

HONOURS SUBJECTS. (One subject to be selected by students presenting tor Honours.) I. Comparative Education- A comparative study of the educational systems of England, U.S.A., France, Germany, Italy and Russia, with relation to educational develop ment; in Australia. Text-books: — Eundel—Comparative Education. 1934 Year-book of the International Institute, ' Columbia University. II. History of Education (Special topic). (a) Education in the Middle. Ages. (b) A special study of the early Universities of Western Europe. Text-book: — Cubberley—History of Education—Chapters V-IX (inclusive). For reference :— Rashdall—The Universities ot Europe in the Middle Ages

III. Philosophy of Education- A brief study of the effect of the political theory and social development of the following nations upon their national svsteme of education: — England Germany Russia United States Italy Australia France Japan Text-book: — The 1929 and 1934 Year-books of the International Institute ot Teachers' College, Columbia Uni versity. EDUCATION. 885.

For reference :— Kaudel—Comparative Education. Durant—The Story of Philosophy. Gentile—The Reform of Education. Dewey—School and Society. Dewey—Democracy and Education. IV. Modern Developments in Educational Practice- A careful examination ot modern methods of school organisation and the presentation ot subject-matter, such as- - • • - Platoon System. Unit Teaching. Activity Programmes:- Integrated Courses. .'. 1- Dalton Plan. Project Method. " with special investigation of any one-method in which the student has experience or particular interest.-; Text-books: — Adams—Modern Developments in Educational Practice. Rugg—The Child-Centred School. Ballard—The Changing School. For reference:— Morrison—Secondary Teaching. Ruediger—Class Room Procedures. Spain—The Platoon School. Kimmins—The Triumph of the, Dalton Plan. Snedden—Problems of Secondary Education.

PRACTICAL WORK DURING I'HE FIRST YEAR. 1. The prescribed Practical Work consists of: — (o) Attendance at Demonstration and Discussion lessons, with subsequent tutorials on method ("at least 75 per cent, of the total). (b) Observation of teaching in such schools as may be directed. (c) Teaching practice in the practising schools at the disposal of the Professor or. in other £86 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 19311.

schools approved beforehand by the Faculty of Education for this purpose. The amount is determined according to previous experi ence and aptitude of student, minimum, 80 hours; maximum, as prescribed. Records of (a) (b) (c) must be kept in the jjf escribed manner and handed to the Professor of Educa tion at the end of the third term. During second term there will be a period of continuous practice, during which no lec tures will be delivered. (d) Unless the student is specially exempted by the Professor, attendance each week for classes in speech training and for blackboard writing and blackboard drawing. Students exempted from attendance are not necessarily exempted from practical tests gi,ven during or at the end of the year. (e) Such attendance at Tutorials (for essays and discussion of method), and for discussion of teaching practice as may from time to time be directed. (f) The preparing of plans of work and of notes of lessons. (g) The keeping of an approved Observation Book. (h) Attendance at a special course in physical edu cation and games. 2. Arrangements will be made tor students to do some of their practice in approved secondary schools under the following conditions: — (o) That each student be placed under an experi enced form teacher. (6) That the form teacher write in the student's " log book" a criticism on each day's work, and give oral criticism in addition. (e) That a monthly and final report on each student's progress be sent to the Professor of Educa tion by the Principal of the School. (d) That each student be under the supervision of the Professor ot Education and his staff. 3. Till further notice partial exemption from Prac tical Teaching prescribed may be granted to the follow- EDUCATION. 887 ing classes of students, and under the conditions laid down in Sections 4, 5. A- (i.) All teachers of the Education Department nominated under sub-section (1) (c) of section 33 of the University Act 1928. (ii.) All other teachers of the Education Department who hold the Trained Teacher's Certificate and whose reports have been uniformly " good" or *c very good." (iii.) All teachers ot the Education Department other than those included under section 3A (i.) and (ii.) who have been teaching either as head teachers, or as assistants, not less than fira years, and whose record tor the last three years has been uniformly "good" or "very good." B. All teachers in registered schools who have been registered by the Council of Public Education, who have had five years' experience in teaching and whose reports have been uniformly satis factory. 0. (i.) 'leaders in country districts, or in other States, who have had approved experience and have taught under approved supervision for one hun dred and twenty hours, and whose reports are satisfactory, (ii.) Teachers employed by permission ot the Council of Public Education on the staffs of secondary schools and engaged in teaching forms of secondary standard. D. All registered primary teachers who hold the certificate of a training institution approved by the Council of Public Education and by the Faculty of Education, and whose reports have been uniformly satisfactory. 4. Students under section 3 must— (a) Be engaged in the full and regular practice of their profession as teachers. (6) Unless they are bead teachers, be under the supervision of head teachers (or of approved assistant teachers), who are willing to send monthly reports to the Professor of Educa- 388 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 193«

tion as to their progress in the art of teach ing, the responsibility to- rest with the student to see that these reports are regularly forwarded. (c) Undergo satisfactorily such tests in the prac tice of teaching as may be directed by the Professor of Education. (d) Bo supervised regularly by the Professor of Education and his staff. (e) Practise in the University High School for such time as is directed in Section 5. 5. (i) Teachers under Section 3A and H will be re quired to teach three weeks in the University High Pchool, to attend all the Discussion and Demonstration lessn-ns given in this period, and to spend certain periods in observation as directed. (ii.) Teachers under Section 3C (i.) will .be required to to take two years tor the first year of the course. The.y must teach for two months in the University High School, and attend all the Discussion, Demonstration and Observa tion lessons prescribed in that time. (iii.) Teachers under Section 3C (ii.) will be required to take two years for the first year of the course, to attend during the first year tho lectures in History and Prin ciples of Education, Methods of Teaching, and the Dis cussion and Demonstration lessons. During the second year'they will be required to attend the lectures in Organisation and Modern Problems, and in Educational Psychology. During the two years they must teach for a total period of 90 hours under approved super vision, and must attend for four weeks for teaching practice in the University High School. Those who have had approved teaching experience may be exempted, in whole or in part, from the requirement of teaching for 90 hours under supervision, but must teach for a total of from four to six weeks (according to skill) at the University High School. (iv.). Teachers under 3D may continue teaching forms of a secondary standard in an approved secondary school and may do the work of the first year in one year, pro vided that they teach for at least three weeks in the University High School and attend all classes, discus sion and demonstration lessons prescribed during that EDUCATION. 889- period; and also that satisfactory reports arc received from tho principals of the schools in which they have been employed. (v.) Teachers under 3A (ii) (iii), 3H and 3D may be . granted permission to take two years for the first year- of the course it adequate reason is shown. 6. All applications for partial exemption under Sec tion 3 must be set out on the special form to be ob tained from the Registrar. Applications must be addressed directly to the Regis trar, be accompanied by certificate of, employment, and be sent in before March 31st. 7. All applications for exemptions, from attendance at classes in Speech Training and Blackboard Work must be addressed directly to the Professor of Education, not later than 31st March. 8. The same theoretical and practical tests shall be- passed by candidates working under the provisions of Sections 3, 4, 5, as are prescribed for other Diploma students. 9. It any student fails in practice he must undergo in a succeeding year whatever extra ]iractice and tests may be prescribed and must, before re-entering for the final test, lodge an entry for examination with the Re gistrar accompanied by a bank slip for £1/1/-. As a general rule he will not be allowed to present again till September of the following year. If he is then teaching in an approved school, arrangements may be made to permit him to give the final lesson in that school. In all cases the report of the school will be taken into- account. The University High School (Principal, Mr. M. S. Shar- man, M.A., M.Sc.), in Story Street, Parkville, is the official secondary practising school. The Demonstra tion Lessons, Discussion Lessons, and as much of the- secondary practice as possible are taken in this school. All students who are unable to attend lectures should communicate with the Professor and Lecturers in Edu cation before the beginning of the University year, when as far as possible arrangements will be made to guide- them in F.xperimental Education, and in their reading- 8!)0 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 193(1.

The Dwight Prize wm ne awarded to the candidate who has obtained the highest place in the first year (Pass land Honours) of the course, provided that he gains [First or Second Class Honours. Tho Hugh Childers Memorial Prize will be awarded to the candidate securing First Class Honours who ranks next, to tho winner of the Dwight Prize. Students taking Arts, Commerce or Science for Education are advised to communicate with the Professor of Ed- cation in February or early in March in the first or second (preferably the first) year of their course in order that ad vice may be given them as to the suitability of their courses for a teaching career. All students taking Education in 1936 are asked to see the Professor at 3 p.m. on February 14th, or earlier by appointment, in order that arrangements may be made for their teaching practice. There will be a fortnight's practical work with talks on Method before the lectures begin. Unless specially exempted, all studente must begin practical work before 17th March. II. Test in Practical Teaching. Internal studente may be exempted from a final prac tical test if the quality of their teaching under super vision has been satisfactory. If their teaching is much below pass standard, they may not be allowed to present for a final test until they have had further practice. In all cases, the quality ot their lesson notes, blackboard work and speech, as well as their disciplinary power and general teaching skill, are taken into account. Candidates who are required to present for a final practical test must present lesson notes in ;it least three subjects, and must reach the pass standard in at least two lessons. No candidate for the subjects ot the First Year of the course who has not completed the practical work proscribed by the Faculty of Education is allowed to sit for any part of the written examination unless he is proceeding, by permission of the Faculty, under (Section 3C (i.) or 3C (ii.) or 6 (v.), or lias been EDUCATION. 391 granted dispensation by the Faculty on account ot ill ness or other sufficient cause.

SECOND YEAR. A. EXPERIMENTAL EDUCATION (To be taken by all studente). 1. Statistical Metliads.—Collection, classification, and graphical presentation of data; the normal probability curve; measures of cen tral tendency and variability, percentiles, correlation. Application ot statistics to the construction and standardisation ot mental tests. 2. History of Intelligence Testing.—The Binet- Simion teste. Group teste. Performance teste, tests of scholastic attainment, the new-type examination. The educational uses ot tests. Spearman's two-factor theory. 3. Clinical and Vocational Psychology-—The prob lems of youthful delinquencies, the educa tion of retarded and superior children, pre sent-day methods of vocational guidance, employment psychology. 4. Abnormal Psychology.—The nature of functional disorders, the theories ot Freud, Jung, Adler and McDougall. 5. One recent investigation into some important educational problem. Books recommended: — Text-books: — Holzinger—Statistical Methods for Studente in Education. Freeman—Mental Teste. Spearman—The Abilities of Man. Burt—The Young Delinquent. Earle—Methods of Choosing a Career. Wallin—Clinical and Abnormal Psychology. For reference: — Ballard—'i'he" New Examiner. Burt,—Mental and Scholastic Teste. Pintner andPatersoh—AjScale of Performance Tests.. -892 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1930.

Terman—The Measurement of Intelligence. Terman—The Intelligence of School Children. Bachelard—The Education of the Retarded Child. MoDougall—Abnormal Psychology. Terman—Genetic Studies of Genius. 'Ihorudike—Educational Psychology (3 vols.) B. One of the following subjects: — 1. COMPARATIVE EDUCA- TION. 2. HISTORY OF EDUCATION For details see (prescriptions 3. PHILOSOPHY OF EDUCA- lor the Honours TIOiN. pubjecte of the 4. MODERN DEVELOP First Year. MENTS IN EDUCA TIONAL PRACTICE. C. AN EDUCATIONAL INVESTIGATION approved by the Faculty of Education. Topics must be submitted for approval before March 31, and the investigation must be carried out under the direction of the School of Education. The investigation may be concerned with any recog nised educational field. The following topics are given • as samples ot the type of enquiry which will be approved: — 1. An examination of retardation in Victorian primary schools. 2. A critical survey ot various systems of awarding scholarships. 3. Historical reasons tor the establishment in Aus- tralia of highly centralised systems of educa tional administration. 4. Sociological determination of objectives in edu cation in Australia. 5. A Dalton Plan experiment in a rural secondary school. 6. Preparation of a library list for non-academic secondary schools. The student is recommended to submit a topic which ^represents an aspect of his major interest in educa- EDUCATION. 893 tional work. Investigations must be submitted- for examination not later than 31st October.

EXAMINATIONS. All examinations will be held in the fourth term, 1936. Reading-guides will be issued in all subjects. Ex ternal students will be expected to attend seminars specially arranged for them on Saturday mornings and other convenient times. For Interstate candidates a fortnight of seminars and discussions will be arranged immediately prior to the annual examinations. Candidates who obtain, under Section 13 of the Regu lation, an exemption from examination in a special subject will be required to undertake the following reading— Kandel. Comparative Education. 1934 Year-book ot the International Institute and to present an essay on some problem ot modern education approved by the Faculty of Education. 'I'he subject ot this essay should be discussed with the Professor of Education before submission for approval. FACULTY OF ENGINEERING

DETAILS OF SUBJECTS AND RECOMMENDA TIONS FOR THE ANNUAL AND SUPPLE MENTARY EXAMINATIONS TO BE HELD IN THE FOURTH TERM, 1936, AND FOR THE FINAL HONOUR EXAMINATION TO BE HELD IN THE FIRST TERM, 1937.

HONOUR WORK— Except in the cases ot subjects where special details are published, the Examination for Honours will be on the lines indicated for Pass, but candidates will be required to rer.d more advanced work than for Pass, and to attain to a higher standard of knowledge.

ARCHITECTURAL HISTORY, PAET I.— (See under Faculty of Architecture.) BUILDING CONSTRUCTION— (See under Faculty of Architecture.)

CHEMISTRY, PARTS I. and II. (See uader Faculty of Science).

CHEMISTRY, PART II. (Metallurgy Course)— Details as for Chemistry Part II. without the laboratory work (See under Faculty of Science).

CIVIL ENGINEERING (WITH DESIGN), PART I.— Lectures: — General theory of design and methods of con struction : Working stresses; determination ot forces in simple structures; influence lines; cri teria for maximum bending moments and shearing forces under various loadings; ENGINEERING. ,;;.. §95.

deflection of trusses; wind pressure; theory ot earth pressure; elementary soil mechanics; retaining walls; foundations and footings; pile driving and pile structures. Steelwork : Welding processes and applications to engineering structures and industrial pro cesses ; welding procedure and control; in spection ot welds; properties of weld metal and strength of welded joints; design of welded and rivctted members, joints and structures; beams; plate girders, tension and compression members; bearings, bases, and footings; root and bridge trusses, buildings, and other framed structures. Concrete, plain and reinforced: Setting of cement; properties of aggre gates; water-cement ratio; composition and mixing ot concrete; factors affecting the strength ' and permanence of concrete; shrinkage, creep; beams and slabs; columns, footings; bridge decks; flat slab floors; beam and tile floors; tanks and other simple structures; design of torm-work; surface treatment; waterproofing. Timber: Growth; structure; seasoning; preservation; general properties; ultimate strengths and working stresses; detects; beams, columns, joints; trestle and truss bridges, roof trusses, and other structures; uses ot vari ous timbers; elementary methods ot -iden tification.

Drawing Office Work: Studente are required to attend in tho Drawing . Office throughout the year, and to submit for examina tion original designs for simple engineering structures, with calculations, drawings, specifications and quanti ties. Tho work will normally comprise two major de signs and minor design .work. ' 57 £96 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, l

Text Books: — Johnson, Bryan and Turncaure—Modern Framed Structures; or Kirkham—Structural Engineering. Sutherland and Clifford—Reinforced Concrete De sign. J. Singleton Green- -Concrete Engineering, Vol. Jacoby and Davis—Timber Design and Con struction. For reference and vacation reading: — Taylor, Thompson and Smiilski—Concrete, Plain and Rein forced, Vols. I and II. Manning—Reinforced Concrete Design. Andrews--Further Problems in the Theory and Design ot Structures. Hool and Johnson—Handbook ot Building Con struction, Vol. I. Jacoby and Davis—Foundations of Bridges and Buildings. Current Engineering literature, proceedings of societies, reports, and standard specifica tions, as directed in lectures.

CIVIL ENGINEERING (WITH DESIGN), PART IA. Lectures: As for Civil Engineering, Part I. Students will be required to sit for examination in steelwork and fundamental theory only (approximately one-third of the full course), provided that they have atteuded the full course ot lectures throughout the year. Drawing Office Work: Students are required to attend in the Drawing Office for the first two terms only, and to submit work] as for Civil Engineering Part I, but ot approximately half the amount, comprising one major design and minor design work which may include mechanical details. Text Books, Reference Books, etc.: — As for Civil Engineering, Part I. ENGINEERING. 897

CIVIL ENGINEERING, PART re structures : Truss bridges, viaducts, arches, sus pension bridges, cantilever bridges, movable bridges. Water towers, standpipes. Deflec tion, secondary stress. Unbraced frames. Foundations, bridge piers and abutments, coffer-dams, shoring, underpinning. Marine Works: Waves, tides, winds, coastal changes, littoral drift, bars, deltas. Tidal and non-tidal harbours. Training walls, jetties, breakwaters, piers, wharves, docks. Roads and Streets: Location, design, construction, surface treatment and maintenance of roads ot the following types:—Earth, sand-clay, gravel, crushed rook; water-bound macadam, bituminous macadam (penetration and pre- mixed); asphaltic concrete; sheet asphalt; rock asphalt; cement concrete (pro-mixed and penetration); paved roads (including wood blocks, stone-sette, and pitchers;. Chan nelling, footpaths and street cleansing. Railways: Conditions governing methods of trans port. Steam and electric railways. Location, gradients, curves, drainage, permanent way, gauges. Signalling. Narrow gauge and moun tain railways. Rolling stock, brakes. Tramways: Cable and electric tramways; track. Earthworks: Embankment, cutting, tunnelling, shaft sinking, dredging. Plant. Organisation ot Work: The organisation of labour, materials and plant. Cost and progress records. Specifications and contracte, plans, quantities, es timates. The financial aspect of engineering problems.

Structure j. For reference :— Johnson, Bryan and Turneaure—Modern Framed Structures. (3 Vols.). 898 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1936.

Sutherland and Clifford—Reinforced Concrete Design. Urquhart—-Civil Engineering Handbook. Hool—Reinforced Concrete Construction. (3 Vols.). Jacoby and Davis—Timber Design and Construct ion. Jacoby and Davis;—Foundations of Bridges and Buildings. Marine Works.—' For Reference: — Cunningham—Harbour Engineering. Cunningham—Dock Engineering. Greene—Wharves and Piers. Du Plat Taylor—Docks, Wharves and Piers. Boads and Streets-— For reference: — Coaue—Australian Roads. Agg—Construction of Roads and Pavements. Harger—Location, Grading and Drainage of Highways. Railways and Tramways. For reference:— Williams—Design of Railway Location. Dover—Electric Traction. Excavation, Tunnelling and Use of Explosives.— Por reference:— Boulton—Blasting with High Explosives. Hewett and Johannesson—Shield and Compressed Air Tunnelling. Laucbli—Tunnelling. General. For reference .-— Kirby—Specification Writing. McClelland—Civil Engineering Estimates and Contract Costs. Cresswell—The Law Relating to Building and Building Contracte. ENGINEERING. 899

Gillette and Dana—Construction, Costkeeping and Management. •Proceedings of Engineering Societies and Journals, etc., as quoted in lectures.

CIVIL ENGINEERING DESIGN—PART II.- Students are required to attend in tho Drawing Office throughout tile year, and to submit for examina tion original designs, with calculations, drawings, specifications and quantities for advanced types of en gineering work. Designs will usually consist of the following; — (1) A steel structure, such aa a railway bridge, water tower, transmission line tower, etc. and/or (2) A reinforced concrete structure, such as an arch bridge, a building frame, water tower, buttress dam, silo, etc. and (3) A scheme of water supply, irrigation, power, sewerage, etc. Candidates for final honours are required to submit the above or similar approved designs.

ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING, PART I.— Units and standards. Electrical measuring instruments. Energy meters. Direct Current: Primary and storage batteries. Magnetic circuit. Direct Current Generators: • Construction and characteristics. Voltage regulation, calculation of B.M.F. Parallel running of shunt and compound machines. Direct Current Motors: Characteristics ot shunt and series motors. starters, regulators and controllers. 900 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 113(1

Alternating Current: Generating of alternating E.M.F. Current and E.M.F. wave shapes, proper. ties of sine waves. R.M.S. Values. Inductance and capacity and their effects in alternating current circuits. Lead ing and lagging, current, phase dif ferences, power and power factor. Separation of sine wave current into- a power and watt-less component. Theory of watt meter in A.C. circuit. Energy iMeters, D.C. and A.C. Transformers: Theory, construction and characteristics. Three Phase: Three phase electromotive forces and cur rents. Three phase alternator construction. Star and delta connection. A.C. motors. Vector diagrams. A.C. transmission and distribution systems single phase and three phase. Text Books: A. (Essential)— Clayton and Shelley—Elementary Electrical En gineering. Karapetoff—Experimental Electrical Engineer ing, Vol. I. Smith—Practical Alternating Currents. B. (Often required)— Gray—Principles and Practice ot Electrical En gineering. Smith—Practical Testing of Dynamos and Motors. C. (For reference)— Laws—Electrical Measurements. Edgcumbe—Industrial Electrical Measuring In struments. ENGINEERING. 901

Naval Electrical Manual, 1928. MaoCall—Continuous Current Electrical Engineer, iug. Ayrton and Mather: Practical Electricity. Wiring Regulations of State Electricity Commis sion of Victoria.

ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING, PART IA.— Details as set out for Electrical Engineering, Part I, eaoept that, in the ease of studente who have attended a satisfactory proportion of lectures, studente will not be examined on the theory of instruments, and the amount of practical work required will be two-thirds of that required for Electrical Engineering Part I.

ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING, PART II.— Illumination and Photometry: Principles and definitions. Photometry. Polar curves of lamps and fittings, Iso candle diagrams. Mean spherical C.P. and its determination. Illumination requirements. Photo electric cells and their applications. Direct Current Measurements: Precise measurement ot voltage, current and resistance. Alternating Current Theory: Application of symbolic method to circuits with resistance, inductance and capacity. Application to single and polyphase trans mission lines, transformers, alternators, synchronous motors, induction motors and other A.C. apparatus. A.C. wave shapes and harmonic analysis. Wave tracers and oscillographs. Causes of wave distortion and effects of har monics. 902 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS. 1938.

A.C. Measurements: Measurement of alternating currents, voltages, power and energy. Instrument Transformers. A.C. potentio meter. A.C. bridges. Inductance and capacity measurement. Power factor and phase angle measurements. Frequency measurement. A.C. Machinery: Transformers, single and polyphase, construc tion and connections. Alternators, construction, characteristics and regulation. Synchronous motors. Induction motors, construction, characteris tics, circle diagram, various means of starting, speed regulation, power fac tor correction. Alternating Current commutator motors. Conversion of A.C to D.C.: Motor generators, motor converters, rotary converters. Rectifiers—mercury arc, thermionic, copper- oxide. Smoothing of rectified currents, filter circuits. Magnetism: Calculations of magnetic circuits. Testing of magnetic materials with special reference to Permeability, Hysteresis and Eddy Currents. Dielectrics: The dielectric circuit, dielectric losses, high tension, high frequency and surge testing of dielectrics. Transmission Lines: Calculation ot resistance, inductance, and capacity per mile. Calculation of practical transmission lines. ENGINEERING. 903

Generator voltage regulation. Automatic voltage regulators. Synchronous con densers. Feeder regulation—tapping switches, induc-» tion regulators. Protection: Protective devices and relays tor D.C. and A .C. circuits. Unbalanced 3 Phase: Elementary theory of symmetrical com ponents. Oscillating Circuits. Simple oscillating circuits with mechanical analogies. Thermionic Valves—characteristics and ap plications. Text Books recommended: — A. (Essential)— Karapetoit—Experimental Electrical Engineering, Vols. I and II. Karapetoff—The Electric Circuit. Clayton—Power Factor Correction. Still—Electric Power Transmission. B. (Often required)— - Laws—Electrical Measurements. Stubbing.?—Commercial A.C. Measurements. Dwight—Transmission Line Formulas. Clayton—Alternating Currents. Steinmetz—Electrical Engineering. Trotter—Elements of Illuminating Engineering. C. (I'or reference)— Drvsdale and Jolley—Electrical Measuring In struments, Vols. I and II. Edgcumbe—Industrial Electrical Measuring In- trumente. Lawrence—Principles ot Alternating Currents. Palmer—Wireless Principles and Practice. 904 DETAILS OF . SUBJECTS, 193«.

Hague—Alternating Current Bridge Methods. Peek—Dielectric Phenomena in High Volfcage Cir cuits. Hill—Rotary Converters. Prince and Vogdes—Mercury Arc Rectifiers. Marti and Winograd—Mercury Arc Power Recti fiers. Vinal—Storage Batteries. Dover—Electric Traction. Steinmetz—General Lectures in Electrical Engin eering. British Standard Specifications. Gaster and Dow—Modern Illuminante and Illum inating Engineering. Walsh—Photometry. Current numbers of The Illuminating Engineer. Garrard—Electric Switch and Control Gear.

ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING DESIGN— The principles underlying the design of electrical apparatus and machines. The chief applications of electrical plant in modern power systems. The design and layout of power stations, sub stations, and transmission systems. Specifications and Contracte. The drawing office work will include the prepara tion by students of detailed designs of electrical apparatus and machines. These designs, together with all necessary specifications, calculations and drawings, are to be completed bv the student and submitted for examination at such times during the year as may ba notified. Text Books: — Still—Elements of Electrical Design. Wedmore and Treneham—Switchgear for Electri cal Power Control. Reference Books: — Current issues of electrical technical magazines. Warren—Electrical Insulating Materials. Morecombe—Overhead Power Lines. J. and P.—The Transformer Book. ENGINEERING. 905-

Gray—Electrical Machine Design. Garrard—Electric Switch and Control Gear. Wilson—Electric Control Gear and Industrial. Electrification.

ELEMENTARY PLANNING— (See under Faculty of Architecture.)

ENGINEERING DESIGN—PART I.— Drafting, simple specifications, proper use and treatment of materials. The design and calculation of sizes of the following: Joints and Fasteners. Simple Beams and Trusses. Steam Boilers and their fittings. Transmission Mechanism.

Approved original designs, with brief specification* and fair copy of calculations connected therewith, are to be completed by the students, and submitted for examination, at such times during the year as may be notified. Text-books :— Spooner—Machine Design, Construction and: Drawing. Low's, or any other recognised Mechanical Engi neer's Pocket rsooK. Hiller-Steam Boiler Construction. Mechanical Drawing Standards of the Institution of Engineers, Australia. Books for reference :— Unwin—Machine Design, Part I. Halsey—Handbook for Machine Designers audi. Draftsmen. Hyland and Kommers—Machine Design. Norman—Principles of Machine Design. French—Engineering Drawing. Standards Association of Austrian Boiler Code.. 906 DETAILS OP SUBJECTS, 193H.

ENGINEERING DESIGN, PART IA.— The lecture work in this subject will consist of the lec tures in Engineering Design Part I, together with lec tures on the Properties of Materials as given in "Strength and Elasticity of Materials." Students will also be required to spend three hours per week in the drawing office on the preparation of designs, and two hours per week in the Testing Labo ratory on the testing of engineering materials; this latter work will be done in conjunction with the Prac tical Classes in Strength and Elasticity of Materials. ENGINEERING DESIGN—PART II.— The properties, . use and treatment of materials of construction in relation to design of mechan isms and machines, including moulding, casting and machining Books for reference: —• As in Engineering Design, Part 1. Unwin—Machine Design, Part II. Lineham—Mechanical Engineering. B. T. Rolfe—Foundrywork and Metallurgy.

ENGINEERING DESIGN, PART 11A.- The lecture work in this subject will consist of the lectures in "Engineering Design Part II," and in "Properties of Metals Part I." Students are required to spend three hours per week throughout the year in the Drawing Office on tha preparation of designs.

GERMAN (Parte A and B) $ „ ,?«e un*€.r ( Faculty of Science.

GEOLOGY, PARTS I. and II. (See under Science).

GEOLOGY, PART I. (Engineering Course).- This course will . be taken by Civil and Mining Engineering students. It includes all the work sot out under Geology Part I. (see under Science) provided •that if a Civil Engineering candidate who enters for . ENGINEERING. 9QJ

Pass, attends, to the satisfaction of the Professor of Geology, the lectures on Palaeontology, he may be ex cused the questions in the examination, both Written and Practical, in this portion of the work. Candi dates for Honours must do the full examination. In addition it includes work on the geology of building stones and road metals, and geological con siderations affecting the location of sites for dams, reser voirs, etc., provided that it a Mining Engineering can didate attends to the satisfaction of the Professor of Geology, the lectures in this additional work, he may be excused the special examination on Building stones, eto. (whether he enters tor pass or for honours). Students may be required in addition to attend a special field excursion.

GEOLOGY, f ART I. (Metallurgy Course)— The lectures in this course will be those for Geology Part I. (see under Science), omitting Stratigraphy and Palaeontology, and will be limited to the First and Second Terms. Tho practical work in this subject will be two hours per week during three terms.

GRAPHICS— (a) The theory and application ot graphic methods to :— Evaluation of areas and volumes. Determination of the slope of a curve. Sum curve as used for determining areas. Contours and their application to the determination, of volumes. Finding first and second moment areas, and their application in the determination of centroid, second moments and radius: of gyration of plane figures. Determiniitioirof centroids of solids. Bending, thrust and shear diagrams for simple load- systems. Vectors arid rotors. Load analysis of simple structures. Construction and use of log-log curves. The graphic solution ot multinomial equations. •908 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1936.

Motion diagrams connecting time, space, velocity and acceleration. Graphical Representation ot Statistical Facte.

(b) Geometrical Drawing— Use and adjustment of drawing instruments and scales. Drawing conventions. The classification of lines in a drawing: —Centre lines, Boundary lines. Hidden Boundary lines. Dimension lines. Extension lines, line of Motion, line of alternate position. Proper form of arrow-heads. Dimensioning, lettering, inking in, simple colouring and finishing a drawing. Section and section lines. Easy examples, illustrating the above. Geometrical problems relating to lines, rectilineal figures, circles, the conic seetions, cycloidal curves, involute curves, and the helix. Practical methods used in the construction of curves. Theory of stretch and its application to the con struction of the conic sections. Principles of orthographic projection. Nomenclature. Representation on a plane surface ot points, lines and planes in space. Projec tion of plane and solid figures on inclined planes. Problems relating to the intersection of planes and the determination ot true shapes ot figures on oblique planes. Construction ot section of solids. Interpenetration and Development of Surfaces. Isometric projection and Perspective. Examples relating to the above work are to be completed by the student in the drawing office and submitted for examination at such times as may be notified. ENGINEERING. 909

Text Books :- Abbott—Practical Geometry and Engineering Graphics.

Books recommended for reference :— Andrews—TheTheory andDesign of Structures (selec ted portions). Goodman—Mechanics Applied to Engineering (selec ted portions). Cathcart and Chaffee—Elements of Graphic Statics. Henrici and Turner—Vectors and Rotors. Digweed—Graphical Geometry. Harrison and Baxandall—Practical Geometry and Graphics for advanced students Lewis—The Principles of Perspective. Cherry—Descriptive Geometry.

HYDRAULIC ENGINEERING, PART I.—

Hydraulics: General principles; the flow of water through orifices, over • weirs and in pipes and channels. Pumps and Pumping Plante: Theory, design, con struction and details of following types: — reciprocating, centrifugal, Pulsometor, Humphrey, hydraulic ram, jet, airlift. Hydraulic Prime Movers: Water wheels, impulse and pressure turbines. Hydraulic Power Transmission and Appliances: Hydraulic cranes, hoists, transmission gears, dynamometers, meters.

Laboratory work to illustrate the foregoing.

Text Book:— Addison—A Textbook ot Applied Hydraulics. For reference :-— Gibson—Hydraulics and its Applications. Lea—Hydraulics. Daugherty—Hydraulic Turbines. 910 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 193U.

HYDRAULIC ENGINEERING. PART II.— .Rainfall: Distribution, intensity, ruuroff, evapora tion, percolation. Determination ot water way for bridges and culverts. Rivers : Flood prevention, improvement and regulation. Storage Reservoirs: Determination ot capacity; earthen, masonry, concrete and other dams; outlet works, waste weirs. Channels and Pipe Lines: Offtake channels, sluice gates, flumes, inverted siphons ; variable flow in channels ; cast iron, wrought iron, steel, wood stave, and reinforced concrete pipe lines; air and scour valves; cleaning of pipe lines. Service reservoirs, water towers, stand pipes. Water Supply : Purification ot water. Reticulation, Sewerage and Drainage: Sewerage of towns and isolated buildings, drainage, separate and combined systems, sewage treatment and dis posal. Refuse destructors. Irrigation: Conditions suitable, duty of water, methods of application to land, barrages, head-works, regulators, distribution systems. Hydroelectric Engineering: Turbine characteristics; settings; conditions determining choice of type nt turbine; speed regulation; surge tanks; water power schemes. Pumping Plants.

.Books for reference :— Hydraulics.— Addison—A Textbook of Applied Hydraulics. Gibson—Hydraulics and its Applications. Water Supply.— Wegmaim—The Conveyance and Distribution ol Water. . . Sewerage.— Metcalfe and Eddy—Modern Sewerage Practice. Thomson —Modern Sanitary Engineering, (2 Vols.)..- ...... -.; ENGINEERING. 9 J ]_

Irrigation.— Etcheverry—Irrigation Practice and Engineering (3 Vols.). Davis and Wilson—Irrigation Engineering. Parker—The Control of Water. Hanbury Brown—Irrigation. Kanthack—Principles of Irrigation Engineering Hydroelectric Engineering.— Daugherty—Hydraulic Turbines. Gibson—Hydroelectric Engineering: Vol. I. Barrows—Water Power Engineering. Proceedings of Engineering Sooieties and Journals, a» quoted in Lectures. HYDRiAULIC ENGINEERING, PART IIA.— Rainfall: Distribution, intensity, run-oft, evapora tion, percolation. Storage Reservoirs: Determination of capacity; outlet works; waste weirs. Channels and Pipe Lines: Off-take channels; sluice gates; flumes; inverted siphons; pipe-lines. Hydro-electric Engineering; Turbine characteris tics; settings; conditions governing choice of type; speed regulation; surge tanks; water power schemes. Pumping Plants. Books for reference: As for the corresponding portions ot Hydraulic En gineering Part II. MACHINE DESIGN— Design as applied to mechanical undertakings, with special relation to: — Cranes, hoists and presses. Machine tools. Prime movers. Air and gas compressors. Conveying machinery. The layout of power plante, mills and machine shops. The distribution and control of power Specifications and contracts. 912 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 193«.

Approved original designs and drawings, with speci fications and estimates (together with a fair copy ot all computations) are to be completed by the student and submitted for examination, at such times during the year as may be. notified. Book and other references will bo given.

MACHINING (Theory and Practice).— Machining as carried out in the Mechanical Workshop including the correct methods of procedure to ensure accuracy in the final work and the application of these to ensure the economical production of - mechanisms and structures.

MECHANICAL ENGINEERING, PART I.— Theory of machines and mechanisms; constrained motion; kinematics of link mechanisms; relative motion of parts of machines; dis placement, velocity and acceleration dia grams; friction in sliding and turning pairs; friction losses in machines; approximate and theoretically correct straight line mechanisms and their application in machine tools, eto. Measurement ot indicated horse-power; indicators; indicator rigs; measurement of brake horse power; dynamometers, both absorption and transmission. Dynamics ot reciprocating engines; turning effort diagrams; effect of mass ot piston and con necting rod; influence of friction; measure ment of M.I. of engine parts;, dynamics ot the fly-wheel. Governing of engines; simple and loaded governors; sensitivity and stability; isochronous gover nors; spring controlled governors; hunting; friction and inertia effects. The reciprocating steam engine; simple slide valve; valve diagrams and their use; simple valve gears; variable cut off gears, with valve diagrams; reversing gears, Stephen son, Walscheart, Hackworth; determination ENGINEERING. 9 [13

of equivalent eccentric, and effect of " notch ing up " reversing gears. Itfechanioal transmission of power; friction gearing; belt drive and arrangement of pulleys; speed cones; rope drive. Tooth gearing mid its application; bevel gearing and its applica tion; theory of tooth forms; helical gear ing; the principle of tooth generating machi ines; universal coupling, theory and applica tion. Cams: general layout; application of cams in engines and machine tools. Machine tools; screw cutting lathe; boring mill;; radial drill; .shaping machine; planing machine ; etc.

Text Books: — Dunkerley—Mechanism.

Reference Books: — Ewing—The Steam and other Heat Engines. Low—Heat Engines.

MECHANICAL ENGINEERING, PART II.— The properties of steam and gases; the ideal heat engine; the Carnot cycle; the Stirling cycle; the Rankine cycle; entropy; the temperature entropy; diagram and' its iuses; the total heat-entropy diagram; the various ideal cycles and actual cycles illustrated on these diagrams. General outline of steam plant and accessories. Hypothetical steam engine indicator diagrams; cal culation of M.E.P. and steam consumption; effects ot clearance, point of cut-off, and com pression ; steam locomotive tractive effort. Actual behaviour of steam in the cylinder; cylin der condensation; the missing quantity; methods of improving steam consumption; compounding of steam engines; use of superheated steam. The combustion of fuels; losses in boiler plants; boiler teste; CO$ recorders. 914 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1936.

Theory of steam jets; the steam turbine; simple and compounded impulse types; reaction types; velocity diagrams for the blades; use ful and axial thrusts; efficiencies. Steam condensing plants and their auxiliaries. Outline of steam power plant practice. Internal combustion engines; the four-stroke and two-stroke cycles; the constant volume cycled ite use in petrol and gas engines; the car burettor; application of the petrol engine to motor transport; oil engine cycles; com pression ignition^ and other types of oil engine; fuels for internal combustion engines. The suction gas producer and ite theory. Refrigerating plante and their operation; tha thermodynamics of refrigeration. Elements of the mechanics of flight; the aeroplane, ite parts and general structure; control sur faces and their operation; aerodynamic forces on the wings; stalling of the wings anfl stalling speed. Forces on the aeroplane in straight flight and in turns; outline of per formance.

Reference Books: — Low—Heat Engines. Ewin^—The Steam Engine and Other Heat En gines. Swings—The Mechanical Production of Cold. Kermode—The Mechanics of Plight. Other references will be given by the Lecturer.

MECHANICIAL ENGINEERING. PART HA.— A course of practical work in the operation of steam engines, internal combustion engines and boilers, ex tending over seventeen weeks. Students are recom mended to attend the lectures on Aerodynamics given in the third term of the full course of Mechanical En gineering Part TJ. ENGINEERING. 9 J 5

MECHANICAL ENGINEERING, PART III.— Advanced mechanical engineering, including: — The flow of air and ite measurement; air com pressors avnd fans; -their characteristics;,1 methods of testing. Modern internal combustion engines and their fuels. Modern practice in steam power plante. Higher theory of internal combustion engines, steam engines and steam turbines. Tho balancing of engiues and locomotives. Aerodynamics: General consideration of the flight of an aeroplane; the properties ot wings and wing theory; the air-screw and its charac teristics; aeroplane performance and its cal culation; aeroplane structures and aero engines. Heating and Ventilation: The physiological con ditions for health and comfort; the condi tioning and handling of ventilating air in public buildings and factories; direct and in direct heating; pipe reticulation for steam and water heating. Industrial management and works economios. Reference Books: — Ricardo—The Internal Combustion Engine. Pye—The Internal Combustion Engine. Dalby—The Balancing of Engines. Whitlock—Elementary Applied Aerodynamics.

METALS, PROPERTIES OF, PART I.— Structure and mechanical properties (static) ot cast irons and carbon steels, case hardening of mild steel by carbon, and of special steels by nitrogen; influence of such elements as nickel, chromium and tungsten on the pro perties of steel; consideration of defects in castings and in mechanically worked pro ducts. Influence of heat treatment and of cold working on the mechanical properties of metals and alloys. 916 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 193(5.

Mechanical properties of brasses, bronzes and light alloys. The application of the data will be considered in relationship to design. Practical demonstration classes will be given dur ing the third term.

Text-Book: — Greaves and Wrighton—Practical Microscopical Metallography.

Reference Books; — Sherry—Steel-treating Practice. Bullens—Steel and Its Heat Treatment, 3rd ed.

METALS, PROPERTIES OF, PART II.— Structure and properties of special engineering alloys, such as those for resisting abrasion) and corrosion; dynamic properties of metals;. failure under repeated loading; theory of fatigue; theory of corrosion; influence of alternating stresses in conjunction with cor rosive conditions; mechanical properties of metals at elevated temperatures; plastic de formation; creep characteristics of different metals. Application of these considerations to boiler plant and internal combustion engines. Practical work: Mechanical testing and micro examination of steels and oast irons after various treatments; determination of criti cal temperatures in metals by thermal analysis and by thermal expansion.

Reference Books: — Qough—The Fatigue of Metals. Tapsell—Creep of Metals. Monypenny—Stainless Steels. Speller—Corrosion ot Metals. Budgen—Heat Treatment of Aluminium and its Alloys. ENGINEERING. 917

METALLOGRAPHY— One lecture per week. Crystalline nature of metals. Formation of crys talline aggregates and their properties. Ef fects of cold working on properties of metals. Application ot the phase rule to binary con densed systems. Solid solutions. Formation ot stable atomic groups. Phase changes in the solid state and their connection with heat treatment of alloys. Relationship be tween constitution and properties. Constitution and physical properties of copper and aluminium and the more important binary alloys:—brasses, bronzes, duralumin. Age hardening. Practical work: Three hours per week. Hardness determinations. Thermal curves and de termination of critical temperatures in metals and alloys. Micro structures of metals. Ef fects of cold work and heat treatment. Text books:— Greaves and Wrighton—Practical Microscopical Metallography. Reference book: — Jeffries and Archer—The Science ot Metals.

METALLURGY, ELECTRO— Fundamentals of electro chemistry applied to metallurgical processes. The electro-metal, lurgy ot copper, zinc and aluminium. Corros ion of metals. Practical work :— Measurement of electrode potentials, over-voltages, pH values and resistance of solutions under varying conditions. Electro deposition of metals. Reference Books: — Allmaud—Applied Electro-Chemistry. Findlay—Introduction to Physical Chemistry. Findlay—Practical Physical Chemistry. 918 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1936.

METALLURGY, FERROUS— Principles and practice of blast furnace operations. Steel making by the Bessemer, open hearth and electric furnace processes, treated from a physico-chemical point ot view. Effect of casting conditions on' typo of ingot. Mech anical working of steel. Reference Books: — Clements—Blast Furnace Practice. Harbord and Hall—Metallurgy of Steel. METALLURGY, PART 1.— Consideration of various branches ot Metallurgy and review of Australian metallurgical in dustry. Application of phase rule to metallic systems; pyrometry; formation of ore bodies and methods of mining and concentration; metallurgy ot gold and silver; introduction to the study of fuels and refractory mate rials. Practical work: Preparation of drawings and flew sheets; elementary physical metallurgy; simple tests and micro-examination of mine rals; separation of minerals from mixtures; dry and wel assaying.

Reference Books: — Dean—Theoretical Metallurgy. Butte—Metallurgical Problems. Desch—Metallography. Fulton—Fire Assaying. Hatch—Study of Ore Deposits. Spurr—Geology Applied to Mining. Ferry—Practical Pyrometry.

METALLURGY, PART II.— Technology ot fuels; metallurgy ot lead, tin, cop per, zinc and mercury; mineral constitution of ores in relation to ore dressing. Practical work: Assaying; analysis and physical testing of fuels, oils and refractory materials; pyrometry; micro-examination or ores. ENGINEERING. 919

Reference Books: — Austin—Metallurgy ot the common metals. Jiiptner—Heat Energy and Fuels. Lord and Dcmorest—Metallurgical Analysis. Farnham—Determination of Opaque Minerals. Le Chatelier—Le Chauffage Industriel.

METALLURGICAL ENGINEERING—Final Honours— In addition to the details above, special reading of original works will be notified. The practical examination will occupy five days and will be in the nature ot a complete metallurgical problem.

MINERALOGY AND PETROLOGY— This course will include the work in Crystallography, Mineralogy and Petrology, set out under Geology Part II. Field Work.—There will be five field excursions held on Saturdays during the session.

MINING PART 1 — The place of mining iu industry. Review of the Aus tralian mining and metallurgical enterprises. Physical properties of metals and alloys. Methods of formation of ore bodies. Mineral properties affecting extraction pro cesses. Introduction to mining practice and economics. Practical work—Preparation of flowsheets ; elementary physical metallurgy ; simple tests on economic minerals ; introduction to concentration method ; dry and wet assay ing. Reference books:— Dosoh—Metallography. Fulton—Fire Assaying. Hatch—Study of Ore Deposits. Spurr—Geology Applied to Mining. Uayward—Outline ot Metallurgical Practice. Lewis—Elements ot Mining. 920 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1936

MINING PART II— Location of ore bodies by surfa'ce examination, boring and geophysical prospecting. Sampling and valuation ot min- . eral properties. Development and working. Open out and underground methods- Support of mine workings. Rock- breaking appliances. Ventilation and hygiene. Economic aspects of mining. Miniuc legislation. Administration. Practical work—Cutting and assaying of ore samples. Measurement of air flow. Determination ot dust contents of air. Testing of rock-drills; heat-treatment ot drill- steel. Tests on corrosion and abrasion resisting materials used in mine equipment. Reference books :— Imperial Geophysical Experimental Survey Report. Young—Elements of Mining. Peele—Mining Engineers' Handbook. Eaton—Practical Mine Development and Equipment. Hoover—Principles of Mining. Hoover—Economics of Mining. Mitke—Mining Methods. Thome and Hooke—Mining of Alluvial Deposits. Wiitormeyer and Hoffenborg — Witwatersrand Mining Practice.

MINING DESIGN— Design as applied to mining undertakings. The layout ot mine workings. Study of mine plans and records. Calculation of quantities and values. Design of mining appliances. fe Designs and drawings with specifications and estimates are to be completed by the student and submitted tor examination at such times during tho year as may be notified.

MINING GEOLOGY. - (See details of Mining Geology, under Science, Geology, Part III.). MIXED MATHEMATICS, PARTS I., II., and ITT. (See under Faculty of Arts). ENGINEERING. 921'

MIXED MATHEMATICS, PART II. (Engineering Course)— Candidates take the work dealt with in the first two terms of the full course, viz: The Statics and the more- elementary portions of the Particle-Dynamics and of the- Rigid-Dynamics. (For further details see under Faculty ot Arts).

NATURAL PHILOSOPHY, PARTS 1 and II. (See under Faculty of Science). Long Vacation Reading in Preparation for Natural Philosophy Part 11 (Engineering course)— Descriptive and experimental parts of— Roberts—Heat. Grimsehl—Electricity.

NATURAL PHILOSOPHY, PART II. (Engineering, Course)— Properties of matter. Heat. Electricity and Magnetism. (As in Natural Philosophy, Part If., Science- Course).

LABOUATOUY WORK In the Physical Laboratory tour hours a week. Text-books:— Worthington-—Dynamics of Rotation. Poynting and Thomson—Properties' of Matter, (selected portions). Roberts—Heat and Thermodynamics. Poynting and Thomson-—Heat. (Selected por tions). Kzer Griffiths—Measurement of Temperature-... (Selected portions). Starling—Magnetism and Electricity. Practical Physics, Part TI.—Staff of Department. 922 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 193«,

Books of reference :— Laws—Electrical Measurements. Glazebrook—Dictionary ot Applied Physics. NATURAL PHILOSOPHY, PART II.—Honours. (See under Faculty of Science).

ORB DRESSING— Economic and metallurgical aspects of concentra tion and leaching; crushing and .grinding machines and circuits; principles of classi fication, gravity, concentration and flota tion ; mill flow sheete; flotation and leaching practice in detail. Practical work: Gravity concentration. Leaching teste on gold and on copper ores; flotation concentration; mill control teste. Reference books :— Flotation Practice—American Institute of Mining and Metallurgical Engineers. Taggart—Handbook of ore dressing. Truscott—Text-book of ore dressing. Gaudin—Fl otation. Milling Methods. Amer. Inst. Min. and Met. Eng., 1930 and 1934. Rabone—Flotation Plant Practice. Miller—Crushers for Stone and Ore.

PURE MATHEMATICS, Parte I.. II. and III. (See under Faculty of Arts). fiTRENGTH AND ELAiSTICITY OF MATERIALS— Elastic Theory (2 lectures per week). The general theory of the elastic behaviour of engineering materials. Mathematical and graphical investigation ol stress-strain conditions of loaded members and structures. Properties of materials (1 lecture per week). ENGINEERING. 923-

Metals: General description ot metals used in en gineering construction; origin ot defects found in metals; pipe cavities; blowholes; segregation; interpretation of specifications; solidification of metals and alloys; elemen tary considerations of miorostructure, manu facture, mechanical properties and structure of cast iron, wrought iron, and steel. Effects; of cold deformation; properties ot brasses/ bronzes, bearing metals, and duralumin. Concrete: Manufacture of cements; mixing of concrete; properties of concrete. Timber: Properties and testing of timber. Practical Work (2 hours per week). Demonstrations will be given in the Testing Labora tory to illustrate the behaviour of engineering mate rials when subjected to various types of loading. Text Books: — Boyd—Strength of Materials. Selected A.S.T.M. Standards for Students. Reference Books: — Case—Strength of Materials. Johnson—Materials of Construction. Bateon and Hyde—Mechanical Testing.

SURVEYING, PAKT 1.— Principles ot construction, adjustment, and use of the surveying instruments—steel band, clinometer, com pass, barometer, level, theodolite, sextant, piano table and tacheometer. Chain surveying. Ranging of straight lines. Spirit and barometric levelling. Measure ment ot angles. Traversing. Survey and subdivision ot land. Re-determination ot boundaries. Titles Office surveys, including written descriptions of boundaries. Reduction -924 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1930.

•of traverses with adjustment ot discrepancies. Areas, including such as have curved and irregular boundaries. Measurement and setting out of earthwork. Plotting from, field notes and co-ordinates. Setting out curves, -elementary curve problems. Topographical surveys. A short course ot lectures will also be given on Spherical^ Trigonometry and Rlementary Astronomy, for all candidates proceeding to Surveying, Part II. NOTE.—Candidates are required to submit plan and field notes of a survey; reduced notes and drawing ot a level •section, and specimens ot lettering, drawings and tracings -as required by the Lectuner. Text-book: — Clark—Plane and Geodetic Surveying for En gineers, Vol. I.

•SURVEYING, PART II.— Determination of latitude, azimuth, time and longitude with the use of ephemerides. Calculation ot probable error by method of least squares. Harder curve problems. •Trial and permanent surveys for engineering works Selection ot roads and railroads'in flat, undula ting and mountainous country. Determination of gradients. Underground surveying; connection and reduction ot bearings to datum of surface survey; the sur vey of vertical and inclined shafts, drives and workings ; mineral veins, lodes, leads, and drifts, with the measurement of ore bodies. Introduction to geodetic surveying. Location of stations, location and measurement ot baselines, measurement of angles. Spherical excess, computation of sides, latitudes, longitudes and azimuths. Adjustment of angles in simple figures. Measurement of heights. ^Precise levelling and traversing. iRadii of curvature of the geodetic surface. ENGINEERING. 926

Plotting from air photographs. Map projections. Route traversing by mid-latitude method, and by Mercator's method. Hydrngraphic surveying with tide gauging, and pre paration of charts. NOTE.—Candidates are required to produce plan and field notes of an original traverse and subdivisional survey, and a topographical contour map of the area surveyed during the summer camp to the satisfaction of the Lecturer. Text-books: — Chapman—Astronomy for Surveyors. Clark—Plane and Goedetio Surveying for Engin eers, Vol. n. Books for Reference: — Nautical Almanac. Merriman—Precise Surveying and Geodesy. Hinks—Map Projection. Durham—Mine Surveying. Hotine—Simple Methods ot Surveying from Air Photographs.

TOWN PLANNING.— A study of the physical, economic, and social con ditions of towns and ot the predominant character and needs of the various districts. Development of a street plau with regard to con tour, drainage, grade, economy of construc tion, local and through traffic, subdivision of land, building facilities, landscape archi tecture. The economic factors determining the width of streets—traffic, cost ot construction and maintenance, air and light, building lines. Public amenities, educational, recreational, social. The selection of sites for public and semi- public buildings, parks, gardens, playing fields. 926 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1930.

The growth of towns and cities—comparison of ordered with disordered growth, preplanning with replanning. Replanning problems. The selection ot sites for new towns. The utilisation ot waste and barren lands. Transportation—The functions and inter-relation of ports, railways, roads, and canals as units in a transportation system. Alternative situ ations for warehouses. Combined and sepa rate warehouses and transit sheds. Railway assembly yards. Railway and tramway passenger transportation. Note: Students will execute such designs in the Drawing office as the Lecturer may direct, and attend visits and submit reports and designs in connection therewith as required. Books for reference :— John Nolen—City Planning. Raymond Unwin—Town Planning in Practice. Sulman—Town Planning in Australia. Thompson—Site Planning in Practice. Purdom—The Building ot Satellite Towns.

WORKS PRACTICE— The part of Mechanical Engineering, Part III, deal ing with Industrial Management and Works Economics.

RECOMMENDATIONS AND ANNOUNCEMENTS.

REQUIREMENTS AS TO WORK. I. Lectures in Engineering (commence on the 11th Monday of the year. Engineering Students are re quired to devote the first week of the first term before the commencement of lectures to Office work at the Engineering School. This will consist in the case of first year students in Draughting, in the case of second year Students in Engineering Design. Third year Students shall compute and plot the work of the University Survey Camp. ENGINEERING. 927

2. Throughout the course. Students are required to be in attendance during the hours notified on the Time Table, and shall not absent themselves from Drawing Office, Laboratory, Field work or Excursions except with the express permission of the Lecturer or Demonstrator in charge. They shall keep note books, calculation books, and reports fully and neatly, and shall conduct themselves, as if they were doing responsible Engineering work. No Student will be admitted to Examination unless his work and reports be approved by the Lecturer con cerned, or unless he produce a written Certificate showing that he has fulfilled this condition as to Office work, in some Office approved by the Dean. The Dean may grant remission in the case of illness or for other sufficient reason.

UNIVERSITY SURVEY CAMP. 3. A University survey camp is arranged in January or February at a site selected by the Lecturer in Sur veying, to enable students to obtain the practical ex perience required under Section 9b, Regulation XX, Chapter III. Three weeks are devoted to practising the various operations of land and engineering sur veying under the direction of the Lecturer. Three weeks' office work is required to be done in connection with the surveys made. Students who have not ob tained the requisite experience under a competent sur veyor must attend at least one University survey camp and do the office work in connection therewith; stu dents from other Universities! and the recognised Technical Schools may be admitted by the Lecturer. Members • of' the camp defray their own travelling and camp expenses. The University provides the instru ments used and a limited number of tents. A meeting ot intending members is called during the second or third term to elect a student camp committee which is responsible to the Lecturer for arranging details of transport, commissariat, etc. All intending members must be approved by the Lecturer before admission and each must pay to tho committee, at least seven days before the end of the third term, a contribution for camp expenses, about .£5 usuallv, and also an amount, about .£1 to cover 90g DETAILS OF SUBJECTS. 1936. the cost ot transport and repairs and renewals of equipment. If these fees are not paid by the due date admittance to •camp may be refused. PRACTICAL WORK. 4. Various tjovernment and other Engineering De partments have generously made it possible for a limited number of studente who have completed their third year to obtain not less than 5 weeks' practical experience in their employ. Any student wishing to take advantage of this should notify the Dean of tho Faculty ot Engineering during the second week ot the third term, in order that tbe Dean may, at his discretion, make the necessary arrangements. Excursions are held from time to time during the yeariu •connection with certain subjects of the course. In Civil and Hydraulic Engineering, Parts 1 and II, excursions are usually held during the first days of the first vacation and at any other times which may be notified. All Fourth Year Studente in Electrical Engineering are required to attend classes in the mechanical work shops for a period of 2 weeks during the Second Vaca tion Any Student having obtained the necessary experi ence elsewhere may be exempted by the Dean.

LAND SURVEYOR'S EXPERIENCE. 5. Civil and Mining Engineering students who intend to acquire the Land Surveyor's Certificate are required to have passed the examinations for degree of B.C.E. or B.M.E., and to obtain not less than eighteen mouths' experience in the practice of Land Surveying under qualified Land Surveyors. Special arrangements have been entered into between the Lands Department of Victoria and the University, by which students who have passed in Surveying Parts I and II may, it circumstances permit, obtain the necessary Field Experience under the Lands Department by interpolating 15 months of such work between the 3rd and 4th yeaas of their course, i.e. 2 long vacations and 1 academic year. Only such students as intend to acquire the Land Surveyor's Certificate may be taken by the Lands Department. ENGINEERING. 929

Any Student wishing to take advantage ot these arrange ments should notify the Dean ot the Faculty ot Engineering of his desire during the second week of the third term of his third year, to enable the Dean to make the necessary arrangements with the Lands Department.

AMBULANCE CLASSES. 6. Classes for instruotion in Ambulance Work (First Aid to the Injured) will bo held during the second term if there is a sufficient number of entries. The Classes will include five lectures and demonstrations in First Aid to the Injured, and two lectures on Industrial Hygiene, Industrial Hazards (accident and disease) and their prevention. Fee, 10s. 6d. Entry must be made before the end of the first term on a separate Enrolment Card. Mniing Engineering students are advised to take a full St. John's Ambulance Course in view ot the requirements for the Mine Manager's Certificate.

DETAILS FOR FINAL HONOURS. The examination for Final Honours may include all work prescribed for the specified subjects.

REPORT FOR MASTER'S DEGREE. Reports, theses and designs must reach the Registrar B office at least four weeks before the date set down as tho last day ot entry for degrees. FACULTY OF LAW.

DETAILS OF SUBJECTS AND RECOMMENDA TIONS FOR THE ANNUAL AND SUPPLE MENTARY EXAMINATIONS TO BE HELD IN THE FOURTH TERM. 1936.

For Arts Subjects ot the course see Details under Arts. In all the following subjecte the lecturers have pre pared, and issued to students, an extended syllabus of the lectures, showing the course in detail, and set ting out the reading to be pursued, and the references to text-books, cases and statutes made by the lec turers. Studente who desire to obtain these must present to the Secretary of the Law School an order from the Registrar's Office. Applications may be made in person or by post. An additional fee of 5/- for one subject, or 10/- for more than one, is payable tor the Syllabus. This fee-, is payable with lecture fees of the first term.

CONSTITUTIONAL AND LEGAL HISTORY— (See Faculty of Arts). CONSTITUTIONAL LAW, PART I.*— Before lectures commence students should read care fully:— Dicey—Law of the Constitution. An informal test of students' knowledge of this book will be held during the first week of term. This subject comprises: (a) A general study of the structure and functions of the organs ot government in the British constitutional system. (b) A special study of the legal position and func tions of the administration. •This subject includes the subject formerly called Administrative Law. LAWS. 931

The textbooks recommended are: For (a) Dicey—Law of the Constitution. Jennings—The Law and the Constitution. Keir and Lawson—Cases on Constitutional Law. For (b) Robson—Justice and Administrative Law. Report of the Committee on Ministers' Powers (1932), Cmd. 4060. Further references wiSl be given in lectures, more particularly to— Keith—Introduction to British Constitutional Law. Port—Administrative Law. Robinson—Public Authorities and Legal Lia bility. Allen—Bureaucracy Triumphant. CONSTITUTIONAL LAW, PART II.*— Before lectures commence studente should read care fully:— Wheare—The Statute of Westminster. Studies in the Australian Constitution, chaps. .LJ. An informal test of studente' knowledge of thia material will be held during the first week of term. This subject comprises: (a) A study of the constitutional law of the British Commonwealth of Nations. (b) A special study of the constitution of the Com monwealth of Australia, and its judicial in terpretation . The text-books recommended are: For (a) Keith—The Constitutional Law of the British Dominions. Keith—Speeches and Documente on the British Dominions (1918-1931). For (b) Report of the Royal Commission on the Common wealth Constitution. Further references will bo given in lectures. •This subject includes the subject formerly called f.'onstitntion of the Commonwealth of Australia. 932 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 193G.

CONTRACT AND PERSONAL PROPERTY, THE LAW OF— Definition of Contract; Formation of Contract (including the principles governing Offer and Acceptance, " Form, Consideration, Capacity of Parties, Reality ot Consent, and Illegality); Operation of Contract; Inter pretation, Discharge, end the Remedies for Breach of Contract. Distinction between Real and Personal Pro perty; Classifications ot Personal Property; Choses in Action and their Assignment; Negotiable Instruments; Choses in Posses sion and their Ownership; Cases of Quali fied Ownership; Acquisition of Ownership by alienation, devaluation and otherwise. A special study of the Victoria.n Goods Act 1928, Parts I, IT, and III, and the Com monwealth Bills of Exchange Act 1909-12, and the Victorian Instruments Act 1928 as far as dealt with in lectures.

Text-book: — Anson—Principles ot the English Law of Con tract.

For reference: — Joshua Williams—Principles of tho Law of Per. sonal Property. Goppel—Law Relating to Bills of Sale. Reports of a large number of cases referred to in Anson and in lectures will be found in Miles and Brierly's Cases on the Law ot Contracts.

Additional for Honours. An advanced study of the Pass Work. The following cases, with the notes thereto, in Smith's Leading Cases; Birkmyr v. Darnell; Cutter v. Powell; Hadley v. Baxendale. LAW*. 933:

(EQUITY— Prior to the commencement ot Lectures students are expected to read Ashburner on Equity (2nd Ed.), pp. 1-69, a.nd pages 1-31 of the typed notes. • The course comprises: — 1. The nature of equitable interests in property and their priority in relation to other in terests, legal and equitable. 2. Restrictive covenants. 3. Private Trusts: their creation and classifica tion. 4. Charitable Trusts. 5. Administration of Trusts. 6. Administration of the Estates of Deceased Persons. 7. Equitable doctrines: Satisfaction, Ademption, Conversion, Election and Injunctions. 8. Equitable Defences. 9. Bankruptcy Law. 10. Company Law. Of the foregoing, items 1 and 2 will not be treated in detail in Lectures, but are fully discussed in the typed notes. Items 5, 6, 9 and 10 will constitute the major part ot the course. Considerable reference will be made to Underhill, on Trusts and Trustees, and studente will find it convenient to possess or have access to a copy of this work. Students should provide themselves with copies of the following Acts, which will be used in Lectures: — Bankruptcy Act, 1924; Companies Act, 1928; Trustee Act, 1928; Administration and Probate Act, 1928. JURISPRUDENCE, PART I.*— Vacation Reading.— Before lectures commence, students should read care fully— Pollock—First Hook of Jurisprudence.

•This subject takes the place of "Sources and History of English and Australian Law.'1 934 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1936.

An informal test of students' knowledge of this book will be held during the first week ot term. This subject comprises: — (a) Elementary legal notions. (b) The sources of law, custom, precedent, statute. Text-books recommended: — Vinogradoff—Common Sense in Law. Holdsworth—Sources and Literature of English Law. Allen—Law in the Making (2nd edition). Pollock—First Book of Jurisprudence. Reference should be made to: — Salmond—Jurisprudence (as referred to in leo tures). Keeton—Jurisprudence. Further references will be given in lectures- Additional for Honours. A class for Honour studente is held, at which a special course of reading is prescribed.

JURISPRUDENCE, PART II.— Before lectures commence students should read care fully- Salmond-—Jurisprudence. The course comprises— (a) The nature and definition of law: law and the state: law and justice: the end of law. • (b) Fundamental juristic conceptions—personality, legal rights and duties, obligation, property. (c) Divisions of the law. Text-books.—A thorough knowledge ot the following two books will be presumed, and the lectures will be in the nature ot a supplement to, and a criticism of them. Allen—Law in the Making. Salmond—Jurisprudence. The following should be read: — Holmes—The Common Law. Maine—Ancient Law. LAWS. 935

The following should be referred to, as indicated by the lecturer: — Goodhart—Essays in Jurisprudence and the Common Law. Pound—Interpretations ot Legal History. Jethro Brown—Austinian Theory of Law. Further references will bo given by the lecturer.

PRIVATE INTERNATIONAL LAW— Studente are recommended to read the introduction to Dicey, (pp. 1-49) before commencing lectures. This w provide a complete introduction, and explain the nature and scope ot the subject to be studied. Text-books: — G. C. Cheshire—-Private International Law (O.U.P.). For reference: — Dicey-—Conflict of Laws, 5th ed. Westlake—Private International Law, 7th ed.

PROCEDURE AND EVIDENCE, THE LAW OF— General Principles of the Law of Evidence. Civil Procedure in the Supreme Court. Civil Procedure in the High Court relating to Appeals from the Supreme Court. Criminal Procedure— Procedure before Magistrates in and out of Sessions. Proceedings by Presentment and in a Criminal Trial. The Victorian and Commonwealth Statutes and Rules of Court which refer to these subjects will be dealt with by the Lecturer. Textbook: — Cockle—Leading Cases and Statutes on the Law of Evidence. Book of reference: — Blake Odgers—Principles of Pleading and Prac tice. 936 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1930.

PROPERTY IN LAND AND CONVEYANCING, THE LAW OF— Before lectures commence students should read care fully— Holdsworlh—Historical Introduction to the Laud Law. An informal test ot students' knowledge of this book will ba held during the first week of term. Legal Estates and Interests in Laud considered with regard to their nature, commencement, duration and enjoyment Equitable Estates and Interests in Land, with especial reference to their destruction and to their priority in relation to other estates and interests, legal or equitable. Assurances by way of purchase, including leases and assignments of leases; assurances by way of settlement, assurances by way of mortgage, and assurances by will. Contracts of Sale of Land. The rights of creditors against the property of their debtors, not including the rights of the credi tors of deceased persons against estates in the hands ot executors or administrators, or the rights of the creditors of insolvents against estates in the hands of assignees or trustees or the rights of creditors in the liquidation of companies. The Law relating to the Alienation of Property in fraud of creditors. Por information upon these topics Students are referred to the following text hooks aud Statutes :— •Holdsworth—Historical Introduction to the Land Law. •Joshua Williams—Real Property, 23rd edition (or earlier edition), except ch. 9 of Parti, ch. 5 of Part IT, Part III, and Part VII.) •Deane and Spurling—Elements of Conveyancing with Precedents

•Students should obtain these books. LAWS. 937"

Leake—Digest ot the Law of Property in Land, ch. 1,. 3 and 4 ot Part I; Part II, ch. 1, ch. 2, sec tions 1, 2, 3, 4 (i), 5, 6 (i). Leake—Uses and Profits ot Laud, except cb. 6, 9,_ 10, sec. 2, 11, 12 of Part I; sect. 3 ot ch. 3; ch. 4 ot Part II. Supreme Court Act 1928. Parts VI, VII, Divisions. . • • 1, 5 and 6. Transfer of Land Act 1928. Settled Land Act 1928. And other Statutes as referred to in Lectures.

Additional for Honours. Leake—Digest of the Law ot Property in Land. Parts I, II, except ch. 2 of Part I Special study of Restrictive Covenants and Con tracts of Sale ot Land. A Special Study of the cases referred to in lectures.

PUBLIC INTERNATIONAL LAW— This subject comprises: (a) A study of the nature, sources, and history of Public International Law. (b) A study of the rules regarded by States aa legally binding in their relations in time of peace, and of the institutions by which such, rules are created, interpreted and main tained. Text-books recommended :— Brierly—The Law of Nations. (Por preliminary reading.) Oppenheim—International Law, Vol. I (4th ed.). Cases may be studied in Pitt Cobbett—Cases on International Law. Dickinson—Cases and Opinions in International Law. MoNair and Lauterpacht—Annual Digest of In ternational Law Cases. • 938 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 193U,

Further references will be given in lectures, especi ally to Lauterpacht— The Function of Law in the Inter national Community. Private Law Sources and Analogies of Interna tional Law. The Development of International Law. Proceedings ot the Australian and New Zealand Society of International Law, Vol. I. ROMAN LAW— Vacation Reading Before lectures commence stu dente should read Sohm, sections 1-28; Hunter's In troduction to Roman Law (9th ed.), by Lawson. Am informal test of studente* knowledge will be held -iduring the first week of term. This subject comprises : •» The main principles of Roman law, with special reference to the law of contract and of delict: the history in outline of its develop ment and ite influence on modern legal systems. Detailed references will be given by the lecturer. Text-Books: — Vinogradoff—Roman Law in Mediaeval Europe. Leage—Roman Private Law (2nd Ed., by Ziegler). Jolowicz—Historical Introduction to Roman Law. For Reference: — Buckland—Manual of Roman Law. Buckland—Main Institutions of Roman Law. Institutes of Gaius. (Ed. Poste.) Institutes ot Justinian.. Digest of Justinian. Zulueta—Dig. 41.1 and 41.2. Thayer—Dig. 9.2. Moyle—Contract ot Sale in the Civil Law. Cachard—French Civil Code. •Before leotures commence, students should read Sohm, sections 1-28. LAWS. 939

WRONGS, THE LAW OF— Vacation Reading.—Before lectures commence students- should read carefully :— • Kenny—Outlines ot Criminal Law, Books I and II. An informal test ot students' knowledge of this work will be held during the first week of term. This subject comprises : Criminal Law. The Law of Torts. The Victorian and Commonwealth Statutes which refer to these subjects will be dealt with by the Lecturer. Text-Books recommended: — Kenny—Outlines of Criminal Law, Books I a»d H (1933). Kenny—Cases on Criminal Law. Salmond—Law of Torts (1934). And for reference :— Pollock—Law of Torts. Further references will be given by the lecturer.

Additional for Honours- A class for Honour students is held, at which a special course of reading is prescribed.

DETAILS OP SUBJECTS FOR FINAL HONOURS IN LAWS AT THE EXAMINATION TO BE HELD IN FEBRUARY, 1937. By virtue ot tho power conferred by Chapter III. Reg. XI. Section 7, the Faculty of Law directs that the Final Honour Examination which would otherwise be held in February, 1936, shall be held as to the subjects' of Equity, Juris prudence Part II, and Private International Law, at the same time as the Annual Examination, 1935. Note.—In all cases wheie special subjects are prescribed candidates are expected to make a particular study ot the oases on that subject dealt with in lectures. "940 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1936.

•CONSTITUTIONAL LAW— There will be a general paper, requiring an advanced -study of the main features' of work prescribed in Con stitutional Law Parts I and II. CONTRACT AND PERSONAL PROPERTY, THE LAW OF. An advanced study of the Pass and Honour work. The work should include a thorough study of the • authorities (English and Australian) referred to in Anson or in lectures. Honour students are recommended to read Salmond and Winfield on Contracts. EQUITY— The Examination in this subject will be on an advanced study of the work prescribed for the Pass Examination. JURISPRUDENCE PART II. A special class for honours candidates is held ; a course •of reading will be prescribed.

LEGAL HISTORY— (a) An outline study of English legal history, in cluding the history of the judicial system. Plucknett—Concise History of the Common Law, or Potter—History of English Law and its Insti tutions. Holdsworth—History of English Law, Vol. I. Fifoot—English Law and Ite Background. (b) A special study of what Dean Pound (Inter pretations of Legal History) has called " the Great Lawyer Interpretation."

PRIVATE INTERNATIONAL LAW.— The Examination in this subject will be on an advanced • study of the work prescribed for the Pass Examination. LAWS 941 PROPERTY IN LAND AND CONVEYANCING, THE LAW OP.— An advanced study of the Pass and Honour work prescribed for the annual examination. Special atten tion should be given to authorities referred to. WBONGS. THE LAW OF— The examination in this subject will be on an ad vanced study of the work prescribed for the Pass examination. Candidates should note the special references for Honours studente given in the Pass lectures. A special class will be held tor Honours Students at which a course of reading will be prescribed. SUBJECTS OF THE EXAMINATION FOR THE DEGREE OP DOCTOR OF LAWS TO BE HELD IN FEBRUARY, 1937. [N.B.—Candidates who were Graduates of the University before 23rd June, 1890, may proceed either by Thesis or Examination. Candidates who have graduated since that date can proceed by Thesis only. See Chapter UT., Regulation XIII].

JURISPRUDENCE— (1). A general acquaintance with the views of the leading English and American writers on Jurisprudence. (2). The following special subjsct :— The Theory of Law and Justice. PRINCIPLES OF LEGISLATION— The Utilitarians and their successors.

ROMAN LAW— (1). A general acquaintance with the History and Principles of Roman Law (Public and Private) to the death of Justinian. (2). The Lex Aquilia. FACULTY OF MEDICINE.

DETAILS OF SUBJECTS AND RECOMMENDATIONS FOR THE ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS TO BE HELD IN 1936, AND FIRST TERM, 1937.

PIRST YEAR. BOTANY (Medical Course)— Plant cell and comparison with animal cell. Growth and division ot plant cells. Turgidity, plasino- lysis. Osmotic pressure. Permeability and semi-permeability. Chief types ot plant cell. Cell-contents. Changes in cell-wall. Cork, lignin, wood fibre. The storage food materials of plants. Starch, cellulose, cane-sugar, glucose, levulose, inulin, oil; fat, amides, proteins. Distribution of these food materials in chief types of seeds (pea, maize, wheat, castor-oil), vegetables (carrot, potato) and fruits (apple, banana). The mode of nutrition of plants. Dependence of animals on plante tor food and energy. Respiration and transpiration in plants. Influence of plants on air. A typical bacterium. Life history and structure. Types of shape and structure in bacteria generally. Beneficial and injurious bacteria. Root-tubercle bacteria. Yeast. Structure and life history. Beer yeast and wine yeast. Alcoholic fermentation. Zymase and plant enzymes. Types of fungi. Structure and reproduction. Mucor and liuicor yeast. Penicillium. Green mould. Aspergillus. Black or brown mould. Fungi causing disease in animals. MEDICINE. 945

For Honours. Primary and secondary structure ot stem. Secondary- growth. Structure and function of wood. Healing ot wounds- Grafts and grafting. The phylogenetic origin of the flower as evidenced by Pteridinm and Selaginella. The flower and development of the ovule. Pollination and development of the seed. Heredity. Laboratory Work.— Cell, cell contents, cell-tissues. Bacteria, Yeast and Fungi. In addition to the requirements for Zoology, students- will require a flat ground razor. Text Book: Godwin—Plant Biology. Books for reference:— Lowson or Pritsch and Salisbury—Text-book ot Botany W. O. James—Plant Physiology.

CHEMISTRY (Medical Course)— Long Vacation Reading in preparation lor Chemistry (Medical Course): — Philip—Physical Chemistry and its Bearing on Biology and Medicine. A knowledge of chemistry up to the Intermediate Certificate Examination will be assumed. The course of study will include the following topics: —

Physical Chemistry— Atomic and Molecular Theory.—Weight' relations in chemical reactions; the atomic theory, the atom and the molecule; the determina tion of molecular weights, formulae and atomic weights; chemical equations. The Properties of Gases.—The laws of Boyle and Charles, and a qualitative introduction to CO 944 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1936.

the kinetic theory of gases; Gay-Lussac's law of combining gas volumes; Avogadro'a Hypothesis; the molecular weights of gases; the equation of state—PV—nBT; Dalton's law of partial pressures; the rate of gaseous diffusion; deviations from the simple gas laws and the Van der Waals equation; the ideal gas. 2Vie Properties of Liquids and Solids-—Vapour pressure and ite kinetic interpretation; tho critical temperature; simple phase relations in the one-component system solid-liquid- gas. Solutions-—Solutions of gases in liquids, Henrv'a law; liquid-liquid solutions, conjugate solu tions, critical solution temperature; solutions of solids in liquids, saturated and super saturated solutions, simplo phase diagrams of two-component systems. The colligative properties of dilute solutions and the molecular weights of dissolved sub stances—the lowering of vapour pressure and freezing point, the elevation of boiling point, osmotic pressure and their inter-relation; ab normal molecular weights in solution and their interpretation. Electrochemistry.—Simple phenomena of electro lysis; Faraday's laws; the ionic theory; ionic interpretation of acids, bases and salts; chemical equations in ionic form; electro motive force and simple chemical applica tions : the measurement of hydrogen ion con centration . Chemical Kinetics.—The rate of chemical reac tions, and the effect on rate ot concentration, temperature and catalysts; the law of mass action. Chemical Equilibrium.—The equilibrium constant; the law of van't Hoff and the principle of Le Chatelier; ionic equilibria; qualitative treatment of strong and weak electrolytes, hydrolysis, buffer solutions, solubility pro duct; hydrogen ion concentration, pH, and elementary theory of indicators ;• equilibria in analytical reactions. MEDICIJJE. 0/45

Thermochemistry.—Heat of reaction, and ite deter mination by the bomb calorimeter and from van't Boff's law; Hess's law; calorific values of foodstuffs. The Colloidal State.—-The nature of colloids; methods of preparing colloidal solutions; conditions necessary for their preparation, stability and destruction.

'Descriptive Chemistry. The periodic classification of the elements; tha chemical relationships between the different •groups and periods of the periodic table. The chemistry underlying the analytical re. actions for the commoner inorganic radicles. The following elements will ha selected for more de tailed study, with special reference to the topics men tioned with each element:—•

No'n-Metallic Elements. Group VII. Chlorine; hydrogen chloride; the oxides and oxy- ecids of chlorine and their oxidising proper ties. Fluorine, bromine, iodine; relatioiisliips of their compounds to corresponding compounds of chlorine; analytical reactions of iodine. •Group VI. Oxygen; water; oxides (acidic and basic); per oxides; hydrogen peroxide; ozone. Sulplmr; allotropy; hydrogen sulphide and its use in analysis; sulphur dioxide; sulphur trioxide; the oxy-acids of sulphur; principles of industrial processes for sulphuric acid. Group V. Nitrogen; ammonia; oxides of nitrogen; nitrous and nitric acids; nitrogen compounds in na ture and industrial processes for nitrogen fixation; the atmosphere; discovery of the rare gases. 946 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1936.

Phosphorus; allotropy; phosphine; oxides and chlorides ot phosphorus; the oxy-acids; tho phosphate buffer system; superphosphate. Arsenic, antimony, bismuth; their relation to Group V; the detection of As and Sb in small quantities. Group TV. Carbon; allotropy; oxides of carbon; carbonic acid and carbonates; the equilibrium carbonic acid—bicarbonate—carbonate; fuel, combus tion and flame; active charcoal; adsorption phenomena. Silicon-; silica and silica gel; silicic acid and sili cates; ceramics; cement; glass.

Metallic Elements. Group I. Alkali metals; sodium hydroxide; sodium carbon. ate; soap; ammonium and potassium salts. Copper, silver (gold); relation to main group; com plex formation. Group II. Mg, Ca, Sr, Ba, Ba; lime and calcium carbonate;: dissolved impurities in natural waters and their removal; extraction of radium from its ores. Zn, Cd, Hg; relations to main group; com plexes ; amphoteric properties. Group III. Aluminium; alums; amphoteric properties. Group IV. Tin, lead; relationship to carbon and silicon.

Transition Elements. Chromium; variable valency; analytical use of dichromates. Manganese; variable valency; analytical use of permanganates. Iron, cobalt, nickel; their industrial importance. MEDICINE. 947

ORGANIC CHEMISTRY— Meaning and origin of term " Organic Chemis try." Purification and some criteria of the purity of organic compounds. The principles of qualitative and quantitative analysis of organic, compounds. Aliphatic Organic Chemistry.—Ethyl alcohol and some of its derivatives, including ethyl ether, ethyl chloride, and chloroform. The chem istry of other alcohols. Acetic acid and some of ite derivatives, including acetyl chloride and acetic anhydride. Homologous Scries-—Illustrated by the paraffins. Aldehydes and ketones, with special reference to formaldehyde, acetaldehyde, and acetone. What is meant by "polymerisation"? Carboxylic acids, and acid amides. Meaning of terms: esters, fats, oils and waxes. Unsaturated hydrocarbons, especially acetylene and ethylene. Amines, amino acids and proteins. Isomerism in general. "Position isomerism." Stereoisomerism, mirror image isomerism and geometrical isomerism. Tautomerism. The carbohydrates, and some, of the uses of cellu lose and starch may be dealt with. Aromatic Organic Chemistry-—The properties and reactions of several typical compounds, including phenol, picric acid, salicylic acid, aniline, and phenylhydrazine. Laboratory Work.—As for Chemistry Part I (Science •Course).

Text-books.—As for Chemistry Part I (Science •Course). Additional tor Medical Students: — Cohen—Class Book ot Organic Chemistry. Books for reference: — Findlay—Introduction to Physical Chemistry. Walker—Introduction to Physical Chemistry. Oiivcn—Foundations of Chemical Theory. 948 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1936.

NATURAL PHILOSOPHY (Medical Courses- Methods of Physical Science, and outlines of history. Kinematics-—Applications of Geometry; length, angle, urea, volume, standard and unit of length. Time, the sidereal day and the second. Vectors, addition, subtraction; components, resolution. Motion. Specification of velocity, variable velocity. Acceleration; constant acceleration. Motion in circular path with uniform speed. Ribbon Atwood machine. Statics.—Force, addition and resolution of forces. A- particle w in equilibrium when resultant of all forces acting ou it is zero. Parallel forces, principle of lever, couple. Centre of mass. Coplanar forces equivalent to a single force and a couple. Dynamics-—iNewtoii's Law I. Mass, standard, unit. Weight. Conser\atiou of mass. Density. Momentum. Impulse. Newton's Laws II and III. Work, energy, power; unite. Prin ciple ot conservation of energy. Elements of dynamics of rotation. Simple harmonia motion. Gravitation Cavendish experiment, determination of O. Pendulum determination of g. Hydromechanics.—Pressure at a point. Pressure due: to a column of liquid. Archimedes' Principle.. Manometers. Barometer. Principles under lying measurement of blood-pressure; Riva- Rocci method for elimination of rigidity of tissues. Filter pump. Low pressure pumps. Properties of Matter.—Density. Boyle's Law. Hooke's Law. Young's modulus, compressi bility. Osmosis. Viscosity. Surface tension- Diffusion. Constitution of matter. CoUoid State-—Preparation of dispersoids. Appear, auoe under ultra-microscope. Bro.wnian. motion. Heat.—Thermometry. Expansion. Calorimetry, specific and latent heats. Mechanical equiva lent of heat. Change of state, fusion and vaporisation. Liquefaction of- gases. Con- MEDICINE. 949

duotion. Radiation. Conservation of energy and the animal body; the respiration calorimeter; determination of the intake and output of energy for animals. Effect of humidity on the body; regulation temperature of the body; the Kata-thermometer. Reflec tion and refraction. Wave Motion and Sound-—Nature and propagation of waves. Velocity of sound. Pitch, loudness, quality. Reflection. Retraction. Resonance. Stationary waves. Vibration of string's and air columns. Ear and hearing. Light.—Sources, intensity; photometric units. Reflection, mirrors. Refraction, prisms, lenses. Velocity of light. Dispersion. Spectrum analysis. Correction of the defects of vision by spherical and cylindrical lenses. Measurement of lenses. Camera, human eye, microscope, telescope. Nature ot light. Inter ference. Diffraction. Polarisation. Ultra-violet light and applications. lUectrostatics-—Fundamental Phenomena. Inverse square law, quantity. E.S. Unite. Electric field. Lines of force. Potential. E.M.P. Fil«»c- troscope and electrometer. Distribution of electricity. Condensers. Capacity of conduc tors and condensers. Energy of a charged con ductor. Specific inductive capacity. Current-—Electromotive force. Resistance. Ohm's Law, ampere, volt, and ohm. Wheatstone's Bridge. Potentiometer. Joule's Law. Seebeck and Peltier effects. Electrolysis. Primary and storage batteries. Hydrogen Ion Con centration. Magnetism-—Inverse square law. Moment of mag net. The magnetic field. Lines of force. Induction, magnetisation. Properties of iron. Terrestrial magnetism. Magnetic field due to a current-—Magnetic field du» to current in (a) straight conductor, (b) circu lar coil, (c) solenoid. Electro-magnete. 950 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1936.

Electrodynamics.—Action of magnetic fields on conductors; galvanometers, ammeters, volt meters. Electromagnetic induction-—Lenz's and Faraday's laws. Self and mutual induction, henry. The transformer and induction coil. Direct current generator and motor. Alternating currents (elementary treatment). Applications.—Telephone. High frequency cur rents. Wireless telegraphy. Electrical units. Electricity and Matter.—Electric discharge, cathode rays, Rontgfj rays. Radiography. Radio activity. Laboratory Work.—Experiinente relating to the above course. Text-books recommended: — For Pass. Watson—Intermediate Physics; or Duncan and Starling— Text-book of Physics. J. S. Rogers (edited by T. H. Laby)—Physics for Medical Students. For Honours. Watson—Text-book of Physics. For Laboratory Work. PracticaI|Physics—By the Staff of the Department.

ZOOLOGY (Medical Course).— Tho elements of vertebrate and invertebrate mor phology, including the characters ot the chief divisions of the animal kingdom, illustrated by reference to typical examples of each. The more important points in the structure and life- history of the following parasites : Trypanosoma, Plasmodium, Fasoiola, Taenia, Asoans, Ancylostoma, Filaria, Trichinella, and others. Outline of the development of the bird and of the fretal membranes in mammalia. The formation of the germ-cells, meiosis and syn- gamy; elementary genetics. Outline of the Theory of Evolution. MEDICINE. Q51

Laboratory Work.— Examination by means of dissections and preparations of examples of the chief types dealt with in lectures. The types studied include the fol lowing:— Amoeba, Paramecium, Hydra, Hyla, Lepus. Dissection of the mammalian eye. The examination of specimens and sections illustrating the embryology of the fowl and frog. Text Books: — Graham Kerr—Zoology for Medical Students. Buchanan—Elements of Animal Morphology. Reference Books: — Morgan —Physical Basis of Heredity. Donoaster—Heredity in the Light of Recent He- search (Revised Ed.). Students must be provided with the following:- - Microscope, with low and high powers, magnifying at least 60-450 diameters, and provided with coarse and fine adjustments; to be approved by the Professor. Box of approved dissecting instruments. Note books. Slides and Coverslips. Box of coloured crayons.

SECOND and THIRD YEARS. ANATOMY (INCLUDING: HISTOLOGY)— Lectures in Anatomy will be distributed over the three Terms of the Second Year and of the Third Year in accordance with the details published in the Depart ment. PRACTICAL ANATOMY. Each student must dissect the five parte of the human body twice, once in the second year and onoe in the third year, subject to possible omission of one part in the third year, if such omission is directed by the Pro fessor ot Anatomy. Certificated evidence must be pro duced that all dissections have been satisfactorily per formed. 952 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1936.

HisTOLoav AND EMMiiroi.oar. Lectures in Histology and in Embryology will be held at the Department of Anatomy in Second and Third Tears. Practical Classes in Histology will be conducted by the Lecturer in Histology in Second and Third Years, ac cording to a special time-table to be published in the department. Examinations- Second Year: Annual.—The Examination in Novem ber, at the end of the second year and the correspond ing Supplementary Examination will be tor pass only, and will be restricted to the work of the year. Third Year.—The October Annual and November Sup plementary examinations, the former for pass and honours, the latter for pass only, will comprise the sub- jjecto of Anatomy, Surface Anatomy, Histology, and Embryology in full. Books recommended:— Textrbooks :— Cunningham—Text-book ot Anatomy, or Gray—Text-book of Anatomy. Por Practical Anatomy -. Cunningham—Practical Anatomy. For Histology — Text-book: — Lewis and Stohr—A Text-book of Histology. Latest edition. Book for reference: — Maximow—Text-book of Histology. Por Embryology: Text-book: — Frazer—Manual of Embryology.

PHYSIOLOGY— A course of Lectures, about ninety-five in number, on Systematic Physiology (excluding Special Sense) and? MEDICINE. 953;

Bio-Chemistry is given by the Professor ot Physiology and the Associate-Professor in Biochemistry. The lectures extend through the three terms ot the Second and Third Years ot medical study. The aim of the lectures is to present the subject objectively by mean's of experiments and demonstra tions, and the student is expected to keep "pace with the- leotures by reading the appropriate chapters in the pre scribed text-book. Lectures on the Special Senses, some nine in number, and illustrated with experiments and demonstrations, are given by Sir James Barrett-. Students are supplied with a printed synopsis of these lectures, and are expected to carry out simple experiments on the subject, as indi cated in printed directions supplied. Practical Classes in Biochemistry, some thirty-five in 'number, are conducted by the Professor and by the Associate Professor in Biochemistry. Each student is expected to provide himself with a set of apparatus, a description of which is posted in the laboratory at the beginning ot the course. Practical Classes, ten in number, in Experimental Physi ology (including some exercises in Practical Pharmacology) are conducted during the Second and Third Term ot the Second Year. For this course dissecting instruments are necessary. A course of practical exercises in Clinical Biochemis try is given in the latter part of the First Term and' during the Second and Third Terms ot the Third Year by Dr. L. A. I. Maxwell. In this course both chemi cal apparatus and microscope will be required. A course of lectures with experiments and demonstrations,, ten in number, on Physiological Plmrmaeology, is given in the Second Term of the Third Year. Honour Classes in Practical Biochemistry and Practical- Experimental Physiology are held during the three Terms; of the Third Year if suitable candidates present themselves. Books recommended (latest editions) :— Pass. For Practical nwrk-— Osborne and Young—Elementary Practical Bio chemistry. Maxwell—Clinical Biochemistry. •954 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1936.

For Systematic work— Samson Wright—Applied Physiology. Halliburton—Handbook of Physiology Osborne—The Elements of Pharmacology. ' Additional fur Honours. Starling—Principles ot Human Physiology.

FOURTH YEAR. MATERIA MEDICA AND PHARMACY— (a) The general nature and composition, together with the outstanding physical and chemical charac ters, of the more important Phannacopoeial substances, and of selected unofficial drugs in common use. (*) The composition of the official preparations of these drugs, and the processes employed in their manufacture. (c) The doses of these drugs and of their preparations in terms of the Metric System. (d) Weights and Measures of the Metric System and their equivalences in the Imperial System. (e) Prescription writing, with and without abbre viations. (/) Chemical and Pharmaceutical incompatibilities. (g) Recognition of a few of the more important drugs and galenicals. (h) Practical dispensing of the various types ot pre scription. Text-book recommended:— Bruce and Dilling—Materia Medica and Therapeutics OBSTETRICS AiND GYNECOLOGY— For the Pass and Honour Examinations there will be a written paper in Obstetrics and a written paper in Gynaecology, an Oral Examination in Obstetrics, and any candidates may be called upon to undergo a prac tical clinical examination in Obstetrics and Gynaecology. For the Honour Examination, in addition to tlio above, there will be a commentary in Obstetrics an;! a commentary in Gynaecology, MEDICINE. 955.

Books recommended :— On Obstetrics and Gynaecology—Lecture Notes is sued by Melbourne University Press. For reference:— Eden and Holland—Manual of Midwifery. Williams—Obstetrics. Tweedy—Practical Obstetrics. Eden and Lockyer—Gynaecology. Kerr, Ferguson, Young, Heudry—Combined Text book, Obstetrics and Gynaecology. Obstetrics:—Each student will attend the Women's Hospital during the fifth year tor a period ot twelve weeks, comprising a major course of ten weeks and, a refresher course ot two weeks. The major course will consist of residence for six weeks and non-residence for four weeks, while the refresher course will bo en tirely residential. Gynaecology:—Each student will attend the Gynaeco logical Department ot the Women's Hospital for a- period of three weeks, such period being included in the non-residential portion of the major course in-. Obstetrics. In addition each student will attend tho Gynaecological Department of a duly recognised Gene ral Hospital for a further period of three weeks. Each student returned as not passed or absent at a final examination, or at the corresponding supple mentary examination, will go into residence tor four teen days before re-examination.

PATHOLOGY AND BACTERIOLOGY— The course in Pathology consists of :— (a) An introductory course of eight lecture demon strations given before the end of the Third year (b) About 80 lectures on General and Special Patho logy in the three terms ot the fourth year. In, the course ot the lectures some twelve hundred specimens from the Harry Brookes Allen Museum. of Pathology are demonstrated to the class. (c) Practical courses designed to bring the teach ing of Pathology as far as possible into direct relationship with the clinical study ot disease.. ;956 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1936.

These consist of :— 1. Practical instruction in the conduct of autopsies and demonstrations in morbid anatomy by the Lecturers of the University Department and by the Pathologists at the Melbourne, Alfred and St. Vincent's Hos pitals. Students are required to assist personally at autopsies and to act as clerks. 2. A Laboratory Class of Pathological His tology. Preliminary instruction in his tological methods is given during the week immediately preceding the first term ot the fourth year. Sections and specimens illustrating the commoner lesions are studied during the First and Second Terms. 3. A Class ot Practical Morbid Anatomy and Applied Pathology. With the aid ot clinical histories and autopsy notes, the students study the morbid anatomy and histology ot the organs and tissues ot cases coining under observation during the course, and submit tor criticism full descriptions and discussions of these cases. En addition the material obtained at autopsy is studied and demonstrated to the class by the student assisting.

Text-Books recommended :— MacCallum—Text-book ot Pathology. or Muir—Text-book of Pathology, or Beattie and Dickson—General and S])ccial Path ology. "Allen—Pathology, Lectures and Demonstrations. Kettle—Pathology of Tumours. The Course in Bacteriology, beginning in February ;aud continuing through the first term of the 4th year, -consists of lectures, demonstrations, and laboratory 'work dealing with: MEDICINE. 957

Biology, morphology, isolation, cultivation and classification of bacteria, and filtrable viruses of importance in medicine. The commoner pathogenic protozoan parasites. Tho principles of immunity, together with their practical applications, including serological tests and methods of vaccination. Text-books: Mackie and MacCartney—An Introduction to Practical Bacteriology. Bigger—Handbook of Bacteriology. Muir and Ritchie—Manual of Bacteriology. For General Purposes of Reference the following works are recommended :— Allen—Pathology Lectures and Demonstrations. Adami—Principles of Pathology. Pembrey and Ritchie—General Pathology. Boyd—Surgical Pathology and Pathology of In ternal Diseases. Hewlett—Pathological Physiology of Internal Diseases. Kaufmann—Pathology. Ewing:—Neoplastic Diseases. Kettle—Pathology of Tumours. Wells—Chemical Pathology. Topley—Outline of Immunity. Zinsser and Bayne-Jones—Text-book of Bacteriology. Dible—Recent Advances in Bacteriology. Fleming, and Petrie—Recent Advances in Vaccine and Serum Therapy. The Pathological Sections ot the Text-books in Medi cine, Surgery, and Obstetrics and Gyne cology.

SURGICAL ANATOMY— Text Book: — Massie—Surgical Anatomy. Por reference: — Text Books in Anatomy and Surgery. 958 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1936.

THERAPEUTICS— Text book recommended -.— Clark—Applied Pharmacology, 5th edition. For reference :-— Cushny—Pharmacology and Therapeutics, 10th edition. FIFTH. YEAR. MEDICINE— The examination includes the whole subject. Books recommended :— Price—Textbook ot Medicine, or Cecil—Text-book of Medicine. Hutchison and Hunter—Clinical Methods. For reference :— Christian and Mackenzie—The Oxford Medicine. Maclean—Modern Medical Monographs.

SURGERY— The Examination includes the whole subject. Text-books:— Rose and Carless—Manual of Surgery or Spencer and Gask—Surgery. For reference:— Beesly and Johnston—Manual ot Surgical Anatomy. Choyoe—System of Surgery, Carson—Operative Surgery-.

SIXTH YEAR, FORENSIC MEDICINE— Relation ot medical men to Courts of Law. Appear ances in the dead body. Identity. Sudden death. Wounds and Injuries. Asphyxia. Sexual questions. Questions connected with the new-born child. Life insurance. Toxi cology. Examination ot stains. , . , MEDICINE. 959

Text-books recommended :— •• Glaister—Medical Jurisprudence arid Toxicology. Sydney Smith—Forensic Medicine. Bocks of reference ;— Tidy—Legal Medicine. Taylor—Principles and Practice ot Medical Juris prudence. Peterson and Haines—Legal Medicine and Toxi cology.

PUBLIC HEALTH— Health and Disease-—Definitions. The average and the optimal. Discussion of the state ot health of the community. Hygiene.—Hygiene as applied physiology and bio logy. Heredity and environment. The es sentials of health. Deficiency diseases. Nega tive and positive causes of ill-health. Diet.—Nutrition. Dietetics. Observations upon human beings. Animal experiments. Air and Light-—Air aa the medium in which ter restrial animals are immersed. Chemical and physica,! relation to life. . Cooling power. Heat regulation. The influence of "cold." The open-air. Ventilation—methods of— natural and artificial. Sunlight—analysis of —physiological and pathological effects. Artificial light. Artificial heating—methods of. Clothing-—Purposes and effects. Fabrics. Fashions. Colours. Exercise and Best-—Exercise as use—physiological implications. General exercise—ite benefits. The physiology of rest. Mental Factors-—Living as doing. The influence of " mind " on body. Psychology. Poisons—The nature of poisons—chemical acci dents. The common domestic and industrial poisons. Carbon-monoxide, quartz-dust, lead, arsenic, etc. Use and abuse ot alcohol and tobacco. Poisons produced by micro-organisms. fijfgQ DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1936.

Parasites--—The phenomenon ot • parasitism. 'Rela tion to deficiency disease. Macroscopic parasites-^internal and external. 'Worms — species—life history—prevention. Ecto-parasites—mites, ticks, lice, -fleas, bugs, :winged insects. Lite history. Micro-organisms in the symbioses. Microscopic Parasites-—Micro-organisms. Sapro phytic—commensal arid pathogenic. Virul ences and resistances. Infections and infecti ous diseases. Epidemics and epidemiology. Carriers. Immunity. Classification of infec tious diseases. Enteric Infections-—The organisms concerned. Source. Life history. How infection is ac quired and transmitted. Lessons regarding disposal of excreta, contamination of food— water supplies—refuse—fly breeding, etc. Respiratory Infections—The organisms concerned including infections of the central nervous system. Transmission by oro-nasal secretions. Lessons regarding personal hygiene, ventila tion, domestic and restaurant hygiene. 'Infections conveyed by Arthropod Vectors-—The diseases and. their mode of spread. Control. Contact Infections-—Skin diseases. Venereal dis eases. Prevalence and control. Text-book.— Hope and Stallybrass—Text-book of Public Health.

Por reference.— Leonard Hill—The Science of Ventilation and Open Air Treatment, Part II. Hill .and Campbell—Health and Environment. Haelam—Recent Advances in Preventive Medi cine. E. H. A. Plimraer—Food, Health, Vitamins. :'McCollum 'arid 'Simmonds—The Newer Knowledge of -'-N-utrition. MEDICINE. 961

•SPECIAL SUBJECTS— •Books recommended:— •Ophthalmology— Parsons—Diseases of the Eye. •Diseases of Children— Patterson—Sick Children. Eraser—Surgery of Childhood. Public Health Department—A Guide to Infant Feeding. Public Health Department—Infant Feeding Tables. •/• And for reference :— Garrod, Batten, ThursfieUl and Patterson—Diseases of Children. Parsons and Barling—Diseases ot Infancy and Childhood. Thomson and Findlay—Clinical Study and Treat ment ot Sick Children. Anaesthetics— For reference only: — British Journal of Anaesthesia. Practical Amaesthesia—Monographs ot the Haker Institute of Medical Research, No. 1. •Diseases of the Skin— Adamson—Skin Affections in Childhood, Sequeira—Diseases of the Skin. Walker, Sir N.—Introduction to Dermatology. And for reference :— Mackee—X-Rays and Radium Treatment of Diseases of the Skin. Macleod—Diseases of the Skin. Andrews—Diseases of the Skin. •Mental Diseases— Maurice Craig—Psychological Medicine. W. S. Dawson—Aids to Psychiatry. Venereal Diseases— David Lees—Diagnosis and Treatment of Venereal Disease. 9(32 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1936.

For reference: — • • Stokes—Modern Clinical Syphilology. Prank Kidd—Common Infections of Female Urethra and Cervix. Daviee—Primary Syphilis in the Female.

ANNOUNCEMENTS.

These Announcements are liable to variation as the circumstances may demand. CLINICAL MEDICINK AND CLINICAL SURGERY Students must keep records ot the cases in the bads allotted to them, in a, prescribed note-book; and as part of the final examination these note-books must be submitted to the Clinical Examiners by both Pass and Honour Candi dates.

MELBOURNE HOSPITAL. Scheme of Clinical Instruction submitted by the Medical Staff and approved by the Faculty of Medicine.

FOURTH YEAR. Half January and February— Medical, Surgical, and Pathology Tutorial Classes. March, April, May— In-Patient Medical Clerkship. Out-Patient Surgical Instruction. June, July, August— In-Patient Surgical Dressership. Out-Patient Surgical Instruction. September, October, November (to loth November). In-Patient Surgical Dressership. Out-Patient Medical Instruction. MEDICINE. 9g3

FIFTH YEAR. March, April, May— In-Patient Surgical Dressership. Out-Patient Medical Instruction. June, July, August— In-Patient Medical Clerkship. .. Out-Patient Medical Instruction. September, October, November, December (to 15th December)— In-Patient Medical Clerkship. Out-Patient Surgical Instruction. Notes.—(1) The vacation at end of first term oorros. ponds with University vacation, and at end of second term to first fortnight of University vacation. (2) Prom 15th November in 4th Year until 1st Feb ruary in the 6th Year, no clinical teaching is given to 4th Year studente, because of examinations in Novenu ber and December. January is a vacation month. (3) Vacations in Fifth Year are at end of first and second term, as in Fourth Year. (4) Special classes will be held from January loth to February 15th, tor those studente about to sit for final examinations. No instruction will be given from December 15th to January loth. (5) Throughout 4th and 5th Year special instruction is given to small groups of studente at a time in all the phases of Casualty work (including Dressing, Ban daging, Splinting, Minor Surgery, etc.). Classes are also arranged for special clinical instruction in Septic cases. Neurology, Psychiatry, Urology, Orthopaedics, etc. These classes do not interfere with the continuous ward work which each student must perform. (6) During 4th and 5th Years students are required to remain on duty at the hospital on certain days on which their wards are receiving cases, according to a roster which is posted. (7) Work is so arranged that the student has part at least of each morning tree for his clerkship or dressership; lectures, etc., are given before and after luncheon, and clinical instruction by members ot the Teaching Staff, both in the wards and in the Out- Patient Departments in the afternoons. 9(j4 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1936.

There are to be no students unallotted except in interval between Final and Supplementary Examinations.

ALFRED HOSPITAL. Scheme of (Jlinic.il Instruction submitted by the- Medical Staff: — The working year ot the Alfred Hospital commences on J 3th January, 193fi. FOURTH YEAR. The studente are divided into small groups which are attached to the various Clinics according to rosters posted' at the Hospital from time to time. During; the first six weeks Fourth Y'ear students re ceive instruction in Medical and Surgical Tutorial Classes with appropriate practical demonstrations. In addition Tutorial Classes are held in Pathology and! •Bacteriology. The remainder of the year is divided into four equal periods of approximately 10 weeks' duration. The- duties are *o arranged that each student serves one period as In-Patient Clerk, In-Patient Dresser, Out- Patient Clerk, Out-Patient Dresser. The Hospital work is so arranged that the student is continually receiving instruction in Medicine and Sur gery. Classes in Pathology and Bacteriology are con tinued throughout the year. The student attends all -post mortem demonstrations1 conducted in the Hospital throughout the year. From the 14th- January to the 12th November, in the Fourth Year there is no vacation from Hospital work, the students having duties in the wards through out that period. FIFTH YEAR. The year is divided into four periods of approxi mately 13 weeks duration each. Students- are allotted in small groups to Clinics, so) that each student acts for one period as In-patient Clerk, In-Patient Dresser, Out-Patient Clerk-, and Out-- Patient Dresser. MEDICINE. 966)..'

The Hospital work is so arranged that the student is continually receiving instruction in Medicine and. Surgery. Throughout the year students attend Clinical Lec tures, Lectures in Therapeutics, and Post Mortem Demonstrations. From November onwards in the Fifth Year, Coaching Classes are arranged as a preliminary to examinations to be held in February, 1936. During the Fifth Year the studente in groups of two serve for a period of a fortnight in residence as Casualty Studente. As opportunity offers a second period of residence may be arranged.

SIXTH YEAR. Students receive instruction in the various Special Clinics in compliance with the regulations, printed in: the University Calendar. The studyr of Diseases of Children, may be carried out within the bounds ot the Alfred Hospital. Tutorial Classes in Clinical Medicine and Surgery.-- are held in the latter part of the: Sixth Year,.

NOTE. The work is so arranged throughout the years tha, the student hag at least part of each morning free for Clerkship or Dressership. Lectures and Demonstrations are given during the morning, and clinical instruction by members of the Teaching Staff in the. afternoons, both in the Wards and in the Out-Patient Department. A booklet of the details and Time-Table of Hospital practice may be obtained from the Sub-Dean of the Alfred Hospital.

ST. VINCENT'S HOSPITAL. Scheme of Clinical Instruction proposed, by the Staff: of. St; Vincent's Hospital, and approved, by the Faculty of Medicine: — 966 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1936.

FOURTH YEAR. Mid.-January, February, March (Fourth Year)— Tutorial Medicine, Surgery and Pathology. Casualty O.P. Practice with tuition. April-June (Fourth Year)— LP. Medical Practice. O.P. Surgical Practice. Clinical Pathology. Post. Mortem Examinations. July-December (Fourth Year)— LP Surgical Practice. O.P. Medical Practice. Clinical Pathology, Poet Mortems.

FIFTH YEAR. January-March (Fifth Year)— LP. Medical Practice. O.P. Surgical Practice. April-June (Fifth Year)— LP. Surgical Practice. O.P. Medical Practice. LP. Gynaecology. July-December (Fifth Year)— LP. Medical Practice. O.P. Surgical Practice. O.P. Gynaecological Practice. SIXTH YEAR. Special demonstrations on selected subjects.

NOTES. The mornings will be devoted to LP. Teaching and the afternoons to O.P. Teaching. Special demonstrations will be given each afternoon during the 4th and 5th Years from 3.45—4.15 by mem bers of the O.P. Honorary Medical and- Surgical Staffs. MEDICINE. 1)67

Clinical Lectures will be delivered each week from April to December in the 4th and 5th Years. Special demonstrations in Radiology, Psychiatry and Dietetics will be given during the 5th Year. Each student will serve as Resident Student for 14 days during both the 4th and 5th Years. Ward Work will be under the supervision of a Regis trar. Attendance at Post Mortems is compulsory during the 4th and 5th Years. The Michael and Margaret Ryan Scholarships, each of a value of ,£100, will be awarded annually to the students of St. Vincent's Hospital who arc successful in a special clinical examination in Medicine and Surgery. A booklet of the Details and Time-table ot Hospital Practice may be obtained from the Sub-Dean of St. Vincent's Hospital Clinical School. HOSPITAL AND PHARMACY FEES. In addition to the University Fees, Medical Students pay the following Fees, in advance, for Hospital and Pharma ceutical Instruction:— Third Year - College ot Pharmacy, £6 16s. 6d. Fourth Year - Melbourne, Alfred or St. Vincent's Hos pital ; Entrance Fee, J315 15a. Melbourne, Alfred, or St. Vincent's Hos pital ; Clinical Fee, .£14 14s. Fifth Year - Melbourne, Alfred or St. Vincent's Hospital; Clinical Fee, - - .£14 14s. Sixth Year - Melbourne, Alfred or St. Vincent's Hospital; Clinical Fee, - - £10 10s. Fifth Year - Women's Hospital, Obstetrics, £13 13s. „- „ Caution Money .£3 3s. Gynaecology - - - - £2 2s. Sixth Year - Anaesthetics - - - - £1 1 s Diseases of Children - - - £o 5s. Ophthalmology - - - - £1 Is. Diseases of Skin - - - - £1 1 s. Mental Diseases - - - - £1 Is. Fever Hospital - - - - £1 Is. Diseases of Throat, Nose, Ear - £1 Is. Venereal Diseases - - - £1 la. 968 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1931!.

Supplementary Clinical Fee ; Students- who have failed at'their principal and supplementary examinations must, pay an additional Clinical Fee of ,£7/7/-. The Pharmacy Pee must be paid to the Registrar of the College ot Pharmacy. The Clinical Fee must be paid to the credit of tho Uni versity at the National Bank of Australasia Ltd. The Entrance Fee in the case of the St. Vincent's Hospital must be paid to the credit of the University in like manner. Fourth year studeuts. should enter at the Hospitals and pay their entrance, and. clinical fees before the middle of January, in each, year. The Foes for Obstetrics and Caution Moriey must be paid to the Secretary of the Women's Hospital. The tee for Gynaecology must be paid to the credit of the University. The h'ees for Diseases of Children and Fover Hospital must be paid to the Secretaries or other officers specially notified, of the corresponding Hospitals. The other Fees for instruction in Special Departments, amounting to, £6 b' 0, must be paid to the credit of the University in the same manner as the Clinical Fees, with the Lecture Fees for the First Term of the Sixth. Year.

SPECIAL DEPA RTMENTS. GYNECOLOGY. Clinical Instruction in Gynecology is given at the Women's Hospital' under the direction of the Honorary Medical Staff. Monday to Friday, at 2,30 p.m., Saturday, 9,30 a.m. Also at the Melbourne Hospital by Dr. R. \V. Chambers. Also at St. Vincent's Hospital by Mr. R. F, O'Sullivan (In-patient), and by Dr. H, Jacobs and Mr. Eccles McKay (Out-patient). And at the Alfred Hospital, on Mondays, at 9 a.m., and Thursdays, at 3 p.m., by Dr. Robert Fowler. MEDICINE. 969'

OPHTHALMOLOGY. Clinical instruction in- Ophthalmology will be given at the Eye and Ear Hospital by the following Surgeons: Dr. Mark Gardner: Wednesdays and Fridays, at 9 a.m., Mondays at 2 p.m. Dr.. J. O'Brien: Thursdays at 9- a.m., Tuesdays at 2 p.m. Dr. A. S. Anderson: Mondays at 9 a.m., Wed nesdays and Fridays at 2 p.m. Clinical lectures w'iil be given on all parts of ther subject to each section ot studente attending the Hos pital. Special classes for Refraction will be arranged if desired. Clinical instruction will also bo given at tho Melbourne Hospital by Dr. L. J. C. Mitchell on Tuesdays and Fridays at 9.30 a.m. And at the Alfred Hospital on Mondays at 9 a.m.. and. Thursdays at 2 p.m., by Mr. J. R. Anderson. And at St. Vincent's Hospital by the following in structors :— Dr. J. P. Spring and Mr. A. U. Joyce. DISEASES OP CHILDREN. Clinical instruction in Diseases of Children will be given, at the Children's Hospital by the members of the Medical and Surgical Staff, two days of which is devoted to- instruction in Mother Craft and Infant Welfare at a, recognised Baby Health Centre. Studente attend full time daily for a period ot three months. Instruction is also given at the Alfred Hospital on similar conditions, and in addition further classes are held as opportunity arises.

DISEASES OF THE SKIN. Instruction in Diseases ot the Skin will] be,given by Dr. R. Wettenhall, as follows :— Lectures at the Walter and Eliza Hall Instituto- at times to be notified. •970 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 193'i.

Clinical instruction at the Melbourne Hospital will be given on Tuesdays and Fridays at 9.30 a.m., by Dr. R. R. Wettenhall, and on Mondays and Thursdays at y.3o a.m. by Dr. J. H. Kelly. The relative number of Lectures and of Clinical meet ings will be subject to notification from time to time. Clinical Instruction in Diseases of the Skin will be given at St. Vincent's Hospital by Dr. K. G. Colquhouii on Tuesdays and Fridays at 2.30 p.m., and by Mr. H. J. Williams on Wednesdays and Saturdays at 9.30 a.m. Clinical Instruction in Diseases of the Skin will be given at the Alfred Hospital by Mr. Stanley Shields on Tuea- •days at 2 p.m. and Fridays at 9 a.m. MKNTAL DISEASKS. The course as arranged by the Inspector-General of Insane provides for a minimum of 12 Lectures or Demon strations; the majority ot which will be given at the Mental Hospital and Receiving House, Royal Park, by Dr. J. K. Adey, Medical Superintendent. This por tion of the course will include Lectures on Classification and Certification, and Demonstrations will be given on cases of recent origin. At Kew Hospital for the Insane, Mr. J. T. Hollow will deliver one Lecture on cases of Congenital Mental Defect. Dr. C. Parran-Ridge will give one Lecture at Mont Park on -General Paralysis and one Lecture Demonstration on the the Pathology ot Mental Diseases. Text Books: — Psychological Medicine—Maurice Craig. Aids to Psychiatry Dawson. Books for reference : — The Psychology of Insanity-Bernard Hart.

FEVERS. •Clinical instruction in Fevers will be given at the Queen's Memorial Infectious Diseases Hospital by the Medical Super intendent on Tuesdays and Fridays, at 2 p.m. The class •.is divided as found necessary. MEDICINE 9.71

DISEASES OF. THE THROAT. NOSE AND EAR. Instruction in Diseases of the Throat, Nose and Ear will be given at the Melbourne Hospital by Dr. G. C. Scan, tlebury on Mondays and Thursdays at 9 a.m.; and by Dr. Clive Eadie on Tuesdays and Fridays at 9 a.m. Instruction will be given at the Alfred Hospital by Mi-. A. Blaiibaum, on Tuesdays at 2 p.m. (operating), and Fridays, at 9 a.m.; and by Mr. B. Foster on Fridays at 2 p.m. (operating), and Tuesdays at 9 a.m. Instruction will be given at the Eye and Ear Hospital by the following Surgeons:— - Dr. M. Lynch: Fridays, 9 a.m., Tuesdays, 2 p.m. Dr. D. McArthur: Wednesdays, 9 a.m., Fridays, 2 p.m. . Dr. N. Puckle: Thursdays, 9 a.m., Wednesdays, 2 p.m. Dr. L. Johnston: Mondays, 9 a.m., Thursdays, 2 p.m. Dr. Jean Littlejohn, Tuesdays. 9 a.m., Mondays, 2 p.m. Clinical Lectures and Demonstrations will be given as in Ophthalmology. For any information apply to Dr. Mark Gardner, Dean of the Clinical School, "12 Collins Street. The students may if they so desire arrange to attend the hospital on other days than are set out above. Instruction will be given at St. Vincent's Hospital by the following instructors : — Dr. R. Hennessy, on-Tnesdays. at 9.30 a.m. Dr. H. S. Forrest, on Fridays, at 9.30 a.m.

ANJESTHETLCS. The following Instructors in Anaesthetics have been recognised by the Faculty of Medicine:— Melbourne Hospital—Mr. F. W. Green, Dr. H. C. Disher, Dr. G. L. Lillies, Dr. E. Gandevia, Dr. T. W. Hogarth, Dr. J. G. Bowen Allen, Dr. 0. Simpson. Dr. D. G. Renton, Dr. R. W. D. Fisher, Dr. B. W. Howden. ;<9.7-2 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 19a«.

St. Vincent's Hospital—Mr. F. L. Davies, Mr. V. M. O'Grady, Mr. F. E. Keane. Alfred Hospital—Dr. G. L. Lillies, Dr. Newport B. White, 'Dr. D.'G. Benton, Dr. G. A. Kayo, Dr. W. L. Colquhoun. Women's Hospital—Mr. (','. Cunningham, Dr. H. Friedman, Dr. W. A. Kemp, Dr. E.'H. Gandevia, Dr. W. L. Colquhoun, Dr. 'B. W. Homa- brook, and the Medical Superintendent.

VENERKAL DISEASES. The following instructors in 'Venereal Diseases have been ^recognised by the Faculty: Melbourne Hospital—Dr. Westmore Stephens, Thursdays, 4 p.m. •Alfred Hospital—Mr. Alex. Cook, Mr. H. G. Pur- nell, Mr. H. N. Mortenscn. Queen Victoria Hospital—Dr. Edith Barrett, Dr. Edna Nelson.

NOTICE. Medical 'Graduates are warned that, if they are not registered by the Medical 'Board of Victoria, they will be unable to secure registra tion in the United Kingdom. Further, they must procure someone in England .who can personally identify 'them.

•DETAILS OF SUBJECTS FOB EXAMINATION FOE PINAL HONOURS AND SCHOLARSHIPS IN FEBRUAiRY, 1936.

The relative weight of subjecte is:—Medicine, 3; "Surgery, . 3; Obstetrics and Gynaecology, 2. MEDICINE 973

MEDICINE. The examination in Medicine will include a written paper, a commentary, a clinical and oral examination, and a practical examination in Medical Pathology. SURGERY. The'Examination in Surgery will include a written paper, •operative surgery, a commentary, a clinical and oral examination. OBSTETRICS AND GYNAECOLOGY. The examination in Obstetrics will include a written paper, a commentary and a clinical and oral examination. The Examination in Gynaecology will include a written paper, a commentary and a clinical and oral examination. BEANEY SCHOLARSHIP IN PATHOLOGY. Facilities will be afforded to candidates for this Scholar ship who desire, during the fifth year of tho course or thereafter, to pursue their practical studies in pathological histology and bacteriology.

ANNOUNCEMENT.

APPOINTMENT OF RESIDENT MEDICAL OFFICERS. Tha Committee ot Management of the Melbourne Hospital appoints eighteen resident medical officers for one year from amongst the students who have received their clinical training in that Hospital. The Managers ot St. Vincent's Hospital appoint six resident medical officers for one year from amongst the students who have received their clinical training at that Hospital. The Committee of the Alfred Hospitii appoints four teen resident medical officers for one year. 974 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1D3C.

In all these appointments the Hospital Managers will take into consideration— Training in their own hospital; The position ot graduates in the honour list; Their general character and disposition as shown during their course. The Committees of the Golac, Kynoton, Wangaratta, and Warrnambool Hospitals and of the Children's Hospital, Perth, W.A., also appoint resident medical officers from time to time. MEDICINE 975

DETAILS OP SUBJECTS FOR EXAMINATIONS FOR DEGREES OP DOCTOR OF MEDICINE AND MASTER OF SURGERY TO BE HELD IN 1936. DOCTOR OF MEDICINE. FOR CANDIDATKS PROCEEDING BY EXAMINATION. PHYSIOLOGY — Systematic Physiology of the standard indicated by the following books— Samson Wright—Applied Physiology. Lovatt Evans—Recent Advances in Physiology. Pryde—Recent Advances in Bio-chemistry. Maxwell—Clinical Biochemistry. The candidate is also expected to have read the more important articles in the various journals of physiology published in the preceding twelve months in the English Language.

PATHOLOGY, INCLUDING IMMUNOLOGY— The scope of the subject is Pathology (general and special), in relation to general medicine. It will include Immunology, relevant microbiology and a practical examina tion of macroscopic and microscopic specimens. It is recommended that in addition to standard text books of Pathology the pathological sections of some standard work on medicine be studied. A knowledge of appropriate matter in current periodicals in t£» English language will be expected. Book recommended: — Boyd—The Pathology of Internal Diseases. (MEDICINE, including the History of Medicine— The examination includes the whole subject. Know ledge is expected ot neurology, psychiatry, and medical diseases of childhood. Candidates will be required, as part of the exami nation, to show practical acquaintance with the> 976 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1930 methods of Medical Ophthalmoscopy and Laryngoscopy. and- to be familiar with, the- microscopical, . chemical and; bacteriological methods, for the investigation of the blood, exudates cerebro-spinal fluid, saliva, gastric contents and the execretions; together with the clinical significance ot the results ot these investigations. Books recommended in addition, to those prescribed for the course of Medicine: — Foster Moore—Medical Ophthalmology. Recent Advances Series (relevant volumes). Craig and Beaton—Psychological Medicine. MoDougall—Abnormal Psychology. Still—Common Disorders of Childhood. Singer—Short History of Medicine. For reference: — Garrison—History of Medicine. FOR CANDIDATES PROCEEDING BY THESIS. . RESOLUTION1 OF THE FACULTY OF MEDICINE, 22ND JULY, 1914— " That in tho opinion of the Faculty a Thesis (1) Should not be any ordinary compilation from books (2) Nor a mere compendium of cases (3) Nor merely observational (4) But should be a substantial contribution to knowledge and (5) Should be in fit form for publication or be already published in approved form and (6) Should show work at least equal to that in volved in preparation for the examination in Medicine for tho Degree of M.D. by writ ten questions." Examination in Clinical Medicine for Candidates proceeding by The\is. The Examination in Clinical Medicine for such candi dates includes examination of patients, and oral exam ination. It includes a test of practical acquaintance with methods of medical ophthalmoscopy and laryngos copy, and may include tost of practical acquaintance with methods ot examining secretions, including gastric and intestinal contents. MEDICINE. 977 MASTER OF SURGERY. PART I. ANATOMY— Frazer—Anatomy of the Human Skeleton. Or any one of the following: — Cunningham—Text-book ol Anatomy. Gray—Anatomy. Morris—Human Anatomy. PHYSIOLOGY— Samson Wright—Applied Phyiiology. Recent Advances in Physiology (last edition). Lecture notes on Physiology of the Special Senses, by Sir James Barrett. PART n. SURGICAL ANATOMY— An oral examination in Anatomy with special refer ence to Surgical Procedure on the body. 6UBGICAL PATHOLOGY— The scope of the examination is Pathology and Bacteriology in special relation to Surgery. . Boyd—Surgical Pathology. Hlmgworth and Dick—A Text-book of Surgical Pathology. MacFarland—Surgical Pathology. In addition, the Surgical taxt-books and current surgical journals. The examination will include examination of macro scopic and microscopic specimens.

SURGERY (including General and Operative" Surgery and the'History of these subjects): Choyce—System of Surgery. Rowlands and Turner—The Operations ot Surgery Carson—Operative Surgery. Candidates for the M.S. degree are also recommended to read— The British Journal of Surgery. Collected Papers of the Mayo Cliuic.

•62A 97'g' DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 193G.

DETAILS OF SUBJECTS POR POST-GRAD DATE: MEDICAL DIPLOMAS FOR 1934.

DIPLOMA OF PUBLIC HEALTH. PART I. BACTERIOLOGY, ENTOMOLOGY AND PARASITOL OGY— Laboratory Practice will include :— 1. The Bacteriology of Air, Water, Sewage, Soil and F'uod. (1) Methods for determining numbers and characters of micro-organisms present in air, water, sewage, soil, food (fresh and preserved), with special reference to milk and milk products. (2) Detection of pathogenic organisms, tubercle, diphtheria, streptococci, typhoid, para-typhoid, dysentery, cholera, etc. (3) Micro-organisms associated with food poison- ins-. (4) Indications of excremental contamination. De termination of the presence of H. Coli; B- Welchii; Streptococci. (5) Germ carriers. (6) Bacteriological standardisation of disinfectants. 2. M'icrO'biology in relation to Infection and Infectious Diseases, including Diseases of Animals transmissible to Man. Tubercle, leprosy, syphilis, actinomycosis, anthrax, typhoid, dysentery, cholera, diphtheria, plague, pneumonia, cerebrospinal meningitis, polio myelitis, hydrophobia, influenza; gonococcal infections, septicemia and pyremia. 3. Parasitology. (1) Protozoa -. amoebia&U, coccidiosis, malaria, trypan osomiasis, etc., spiroohaetosis. (2) Platyhelminthes: flukes, tapeworms. MEDICINE 979

(3) Nemathelminthes (Round worms) : hook-worms, trichinosis. (4) Artbropoda. 4. Immunity, its principles and their application to the prevention of Infectious Diseases including .-— (1) Practical methods of immunisation. (2) Serological teste; haemolysins, agglutinins. precipitins, opsonins, etc. (3) Allergic tests: tuberculin, Schick test, eto. , (4) Complement Fixation tests. •' (5) The action of toxins and antitoxins. (6) Preparation and standardisation ot - vaccines.; antisera, etc.

CHEMISTRY AS APPLIED TO PUBLIC HEALTH— Laboratory Practice will include :— (1) Air analysis: Humidity, carbonic acid, oxyjfon, carbonic oxide, etc. (2) Water analysis -. Total solids and main ingredienti thereof, acidity or alkalinity, hardness, chlorides, nitrates and nitrites, free and albuminoid ammonia, reducing power. (3) Food analysis: Such typical foods aa milk, broad, meat; alcoholic and non-alcoholic beverages. .(4) Poisons, preservatives and disinfectants : Detection and determination.

PHYSIOLOGY;, BIO-PHYSICS, AND BIO-CHEMISTRY AS APPLIED 'I'O PUBLIC HEALTH.— Laboratory Practice will include:— Determination of physical properties of physiological fluids—specific gravity, viscosity, rotation ot Pol s'• arised light, osmotic pressure, refractive.index, extinction coefficient, ultra-violet absorption, etc. ..-••'. Detection and estimation of air impurities. Effects on the animal body of oxygen starvation .and .of carbon dioxide. Vitiation ot air by breathing and by combustion of fuel.- 980 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 193(5.

Thermometry in physiology. Rate ot evaporation of sweat. Estimation of the heat-retaining pro perties of clothing materials. Microscopy of clothing materials. Calorimetry of foods. Microscopy ot foods. Prepara tion ot food diagrams. Basal metabolism.

PART II. ADMINISTRATION, SANITARY LAW AND VITAL STATISTICS— 1. ADMINISTRATION— (1) History of the evolution of Public Health. . . (2) State .administration. (3) Municipal administration. (4) Enforcement of sanitary laws. (5) Administrative control ot disease — State, Municipal and Commonwealth. (6) Public Health education. . (7) Details of office administration and equipment.

2. SANITARY LAW— • (1) General knowledge of English health laws. (2) Yictoriau Acts and Regulations— Health Acts, Venereal Diseases Act, 1928, Nurses Registration Act, 1928, Midwives Act, 192S, Masseurs. Act, 1928, Goods Act, 1928 (so far as it relates to public health). Dairy Supervision Act, 1928, Local Govern ment Act, 1928 (so far as it relates to public health), Cemeteries Acts. (3) Commonwealth Acts and Regulations— Quarantine Act, Navigation Act (so far as it relates to Pood and Health). (4) Powers, duties and responsibilities of Medical Officers of Health and Health Inspectors. (5) Notices, forms, orders, etc.

8. VITAL STATISTICS— (1) Statistical calculations. (2) Statistical graphics. UEOIC1NE 981

(3) Enumeration and registration. (4) Population— Methods ot estimation—Classification ot pop ulation—Standard population. (5) Birth rates, marriage rates, death rates. (C) Morbidity rates. (7) Occupational diseases. (8) Life tables—use of and methods of computation. AETIOLOGY, DIAGNOSIS AND PREVENTION OP DISEASE— (1) Infectious parasitic and insect-borne diseases. (2) Industrial diseases. (3) .Morbid couditions produced by environment. (4) .Venereal diseases. (5) Tuberculosis services. (6) Infant and maternity welfare. (7) School medica*! inspection. (8) International and interstate control of disease. (9) Epidemiology. (10) Preparation, storage, distribution and use of sera, vaccines and other biological products. (11) Methods ot disinfection and vermin destruction.

GENERAL HYGIENE] (including Meteorology and Climatology)—

(l). GENERAL HYGIENE— (a) Influence of meteorological and geological conditions on health. (b) Food supplies—Sources, manufacture, preparation, preservation, adulteration, storage, distribution and inspection. Effects of bad, innutritious, or insufficient food. (c) Disposal of the dead—Cemeteries—principles in selecting sites—Burial customs of various races —Disposal of bodies during war and pestilence. Mortuaries. (d) Insanitary environment—Effects of overcrowd ing, vitiated air, impure water. (e) Industrial hygiene. (/) Personal hygiene! 982 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1930

(g) Offensive and dangerous trades, sanitation ',of. (h) Sanitation of dwellings, factories, public build ings, hospitals, schools and public baths, (i) Sanitation of ships. (j) Nuisances—detection ot and remedying same, (fc) School and swimming baths hygiene. (I) Military and naval hygiene, (m) Tropical hygiene.

(2). METEOROLOGY AND CLIMATOLOGY - The course of instruction will include (a) Meteorological Instruments — Ordinary types, standards and apparatus for continuous regis tration ; their installation, use, verification and adjustment. (b) Methods of making, reducing and tabulating meteorological observations. (c) Climatology. Mean and extreme values of clim atic elements; their periodical variations and range; their representations by tabular and graphic methods. Prevailing seasonal direction of winds. (d) Weather changes. Synoptic weather charts. Types of distribution ot atmospheric pressure. High and low pressure systems, and their rela tion to wind, rain and temperature. (e) Australian climatology—The monsoon region ; the arid region ; the uniform rain region ; the " Medi terranean " climate region. Their characteristic weather types. •(/) Climate and health.—Areas with high humidity in Australia; health resorts ; climatic distribu tion of diseases.

SANITARY ENGINEERING AMD BUILDING CON STRUCTION— . (1) Water supply and conservancy—Quantity per head ; relative eligibility ot available sources of supply; estimation of yield ; method of utilising und protecting various sources ot supply; storage, subsidence and filtration and other methods of MEDICINE 983

purification ; conveyance and distribution i method of tapping a main under pressure; causes, detection, and treatment of contaminated supply. (2) Excreta, domestic and trade refuse—Nature and quantity; storage, collection, removal and dis posal. (3) Drains, drainage, sewage and scavenging—design and construction of drains and sewers, and of sewage treatment works. Conveyance of drain age and sewage. Purification and disposal of sewage — mechanical, chemical and biological methods. Scavenging. (4) Sanitary planning and construction of buildings —Hospitals, schools, theatres and other public buildings, public baths and wash-houses, fact ories (inclusive ot noxious or offensive or dangerous trade premises), establishments connected with food supplies, dwelling-houses, barracks, camps, ships. Causes and prevent ion of dampness in buildings. (5) Lighting, warming, cooling and ventilation— Characteristics and fitness of various means and methods in use. (C) Materials used for buildings and sanitary work— Character, qualities, and fitness of materials: Brick, stone, sand, lime, cement, concrete, earthenware, -stoneware, metals, wood, paints and other coatings. SANITARY INVESTIGATION AND REPORTING— Each candidate will be required to investigate some specified set of sanitary circiunstances prescribed by the Board of Examiners and report thereon. EXAMINATIONS. Examinations, which will include written, oral and practical tests, will be held in tho following subjects— For Part I.— (a) Bacteriology, entomology and parasitology. (A) Chemistry as applied to public health.- (c) Physiology, bio-physics and bio-chemistry as applied to public health. 984 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 193(>.

For Part II.— (a) Aetiology diagnosis and prevention of disease. (A) General hygiene including meteorology and climatology. c) Sanitary Engineering and building construction. ! d) Administration, sanitary law and vital statistics. (<•) Sanitary investigation and reporting. The details of subjects shall be as prescribed herein but such details shall not be construed as limiting the.power of examiners to test the knowledge of the candidates in any branch of Public Health.

RECOMMENDATIONS AND ANNOUNCEMENTS.

BOOKS RECOMMENDED. Latest editions ot Kenwood—Public Health Laboratory Work (H. K. Lewis, 136 Gower Street, London, W.C.). Mackie and McCartney—An Introduction to Practi cal Bacteriology. Topley and Wilson—Principles of Bacteriology and Immunity. Roseuau—Preventive Medicine and Hygiene (Apple- ton). Johnston—Australian Meat Inspection. (W. Ram say). Francis Wood—Practical Sanitary Engineering. Nicholson—Smoke Abatement, 2nd edition. (C. Griffin and Co. Ltd., Strand, London). Reference may be made also to:— Muir and Ritchie—Manual of liacteriology, Blake—Drainage and Sanitation. (Batsford, 94 High Holborn, London). Turncaure and Russell—Public Water Supplies. Metcalfe and Eddy—Modern Sewerage Practice, Victorian Year Book. Wiley—Foods and their Adulteration. Thresh and Porter—Preservation of Food and Food Examination. (J. & A. Churchill, 7 Great Marl borough Street, London). MEDICINE fl>H5'-

Australian Meteorological Observer's Handbook. Climate and Weather of Australia, by Hunt Taylor and Quayle. Candidates are also advised to study the current periodi cal literature of the subjecte in the monthly "Jour nal of the Royal Sanitary Institute" (Offices: 90- Buckingham Palace Road, London, S.W.), the quarterly "Journal of Hygiene" (Cambridge University Prnss Ware house, Fetter Lane, London), the Bulletin of Hygiene, •the publications issued by the Ministry of Health, England, the Medical Research Council, The Health "Department of the Conimonwealtli of Australia, and the Commission of Public Health, Victoria.

HOSPITALS, INSTITUTIONS AND TEACHERS- RECOGNISED BY THE UNIVERSITY COUNCIL- FOR THE PURPOSES OF THE REGULATION.

(1) INFECTIOUS DISEASES—Instruction in. The prescribed course of instruction will be provided by the Medical Superintendant of the Queen's Memorial Infectious Diseases Hospital (Dr. P. V. Scholes). Timos- ot attendance or period of residence to be fixed by arrangement.

(2) METEOROLOGY—Instruction in. The prescribed course ot instruction will be provided by the Commonwealth Meteorologist (Mr. W. S. Watt), at the Bureau of Meteorology, at such times as may be arranged by him.

(8) QUARANTINE, MARINE SANITATION, SERA AND VACCINES. Tho courses of instruction in relation to Quarantine Services (International and Interstate control ot disease), marine sanitation, and in the preparation ot sera and vaccines will be provided under the direction of the- Commonwealth Director-General of Health (Dr. J. H. L. Curapston). 98fi DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1036.

(4) MEDICAL OFFICER of HEALTH'S DUTIES. Instruction in the duties portaiuing to the office ot Medical Officer of Health will be provided by the Medical Officer of Health of the City of Melbourne (Dr. John Dale), or by such other Medical Officer of Health as may be approved. (fl) ADMINISTRATION, PUBLIC MEDICAL SER VICES AND SANITARY ENGINEERING, ETC. Instruction in Sanitary Administration, Public Medical •Services, Control of intra-state Diseases, Food Inspection, ^Building Construction, and Sanitary Engineering will be provided or arranged, for by the Chief Health Officer, Victoria (Dr. E. Robertson). .(0) VITAL STATISTICS. The prescribed course of instruction in Vital Statistics will be given by Professor L. F. Giblin. FEES. •(]) F"or Instruction: (a) Laboratory Practice in Bacteriology, Parasitology and Entomology; Chemistry and Physiology, Bio- Physics and Bio Chemistry, at the University Laboratories ...... £lb 15 0 (b) Infectious Diseases at the Queen's Memorial Infectious Diseases Hos pital ...... As arranged (c) Meteorology at the Commonwealth Bureau of Meteorology ...... 2 2 0 (d) Quarantine Services, eto, the duties ot a Medical Officer of Health, Ad ministration, Public Medical Ser vices, Sanitary Planning, etc. ... 15 16 0 '(2) For Examination ; (a) For each part (I. and 11.) ...... 5 5 0 (b) For a Supplementary Examination : 1. For one subject ...... 2 2 0 ; 2. For two subjects ...... 3 .3 0 i Fees for (I) (a) and (d) and for (2) to be paid to the .University; other fees to be paid to the Institution con- -cerned. MEDICINK' 987:

-DIPLOMA OP OPTHALMOLOGY. Anatomy including Histology. The examination will include the general anatomy ot the- orbit and the eyeball as well as of the nerves and cerebral centres connected with vision and the histology ot these= parts. In addition to the text-book accounts it is expected that current English periodical literature will be read. Physiology including Physiological Optics. The physiology of visiou and such physiological optics ar are necessary to understand the testing of optical defects; and the prescribing of glasses. Ophthalmology, The medicine and surgery ot vision in all its aspects. . Books recommended: — Percival—Refraction of the Eye. Thofingtou—Methods of Refraction. Duke Elder—Refraction. Fuchs (Duane)—Text-book of Ophthalmology. Duke Elder—Text-book of Ophthalmology." Parsons—Diseases of the Eye. Whitnall—Anatomy of Orbit. Collins and Mayou—Bacteriology and Pathology; Volume in fyle—System of Ophthalmic Prac tice. Mellcr—Ophthalmic Surgery. Beard—Ophthalmic Surgery. Ida Mann—Development of Human Eye. Duke Elder—Recent Advances in Ophthalmology. Brain and Strauss—Recent Advances in Neuro logy. Pathology. The examination will include general pathology, and require a special knowledge ot pathological conditions- affecting the apparatus of vision. ..It is recommended that in addition to standard text books of Pathology the pathological sections of stan dard works on the specialty be studied. A knowledge- •_98b DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 193H.

-of appropriate matter in current periodicals in the English language will be expected. Bacteriology. Candidates will be expected to have a general knowledge of the more common micro-organisms, both pathogenic and saprophytic, and their recognition by microscopic and -cultural methods. Serological methods as applied to the identification of specific organisms, and to the diagnosis of specific infections. Vaccines and sera as used in treatment. In addition a more specialised knowledge ot certain groups of bacteria which are of particular importance in relation to Optlialmology. Books recommended:— Mackie and McCaitney—Introduction, to Practical Bacteriology. Bigger—Handbook of Bacteriology. Mmr and Ritchie—Manual of Bacteriology (9th Edition). Topley and Wilson—Principles of Bacteriology and Immunity.

DIPLOMA OF LARYNGOLOGY AND OTOLOGY. Anatomy, Embryology and Physiology: Tho examination will include the general anatomy and physiology of the ear, nose, throat, pharynx, larynx, trachea, bronchi and oesophagus, together with the -development ot these parts. In addition to the text-book accounts it is expected that current English periodical literature-will-be read. Medicine, Surgery (including Operative Surgery). The medicine and surgery ot the ear, nose, throat, pharynx, larynx, trachea, bronchi and oesophagus. Pathology. The examination will include general pathology, and require a special knowledge ot pathological- conditions affecting the ear, nose, throat, pharynx, larynx; 'trachea, bronchi and oesophagus. MEDICINE 989'

It is recommended that in addition, to standard text books of Pathology, the pathological sections of stan dard works on the specialty be studied. A knowledge of appropriate matter in current periodicals in the Eng lish language will, bo expected. Bacteriology. Candidates will be expected to have a general knowledge of the more common micro-organisms, both pathogenic and saprophytic, aud their recognition by microscopic and cultural methods^ Serological methods as applied to the identification of specific organisms, and to the diagnosis of specific infections. Vaccines and sera as used in treatment. In addition a more specialised knowledge of certain groups of bacteria which are ot particular importance in relation to Laryngology and Otology. Books recommended :— Mackio and McCartney—Introduction to Practical . Bacteriology. Bigger—Handbook of Bacteriology. Muir , and Ritchie—Manual of Bacteriology (9th Edition). T'opley and Wilson—Principles ot Bacteriology and Immunity. DIPLOMA OP GYNAECOLOGY AND OBSTETRICS—

PAKT I. .Anatomy; including Histology and Embryology. Candidates will'be expected to have a sound knowledge of the anatomy of the female pelvis and abdomen; the general embryological development ot the foetus and placenta, the development of the female genitalia, and the histology of these parts. Books recommended:— Cunningham or Gray's Anatomy. Frazer—Manual ot Embryology. :Physiology: Candidates must have a knowledge of- the physiology of the pelvic organs j the involuntary nervous system; 'the endocrine system ; metabolism ; the secretion of urine ; lactation. 990 DETAILS OF SUUJECTS, we.

.Books recommended:— : The appropriate chapters in the following: — Samson Wright—Applied Physiology Ivan Maxwell—Clinical Biochemistry. Recent Advances in Physiology (latest edition).

PAKT II. Obstetrics, including Infant Welfare, and Gynaecology. A thorough knowledge will be expected of both subjects as discussed in the standard textbooks. Books recommended for reference: — Obstetrics. Williams—Obstetrics. Tweedy—Practical Obstetrics. University Lecture Notes. Kerr, Ferguson, Young, Hendry—Combined Text book, Obstetrics and Gynaecology. Gynaecology. Eden and Lockyer. Howard Kelly. Crossen —Operative Gynaecology. Blair Bell—Principles of Gynaecology. Pathology. The examination will include general pathology and a special knowledge of the pathology of diseases peculiar to women. In addition to the standard text-books the pathological sections of standard works should be studied. A knowledge of appropriate matter in current periodicals in the English language will be expected. Bacteriology. Candidates will be expected to have a general knowledge of the more common micro-organisms, both pathogenic and saprophytic, and their recognition by microscopic and cultural methods. Serological methods as applied to the identification of specific organisms, and to the diagnosis of specific infections. Vaccines and sera as used in treatment. In addition a more specialised knowledge ot certain groups .MEDICINE 991 ot bacteria which are of particular importance relation in to Obstetrics and Gynaecology! Books recommended: — Pathology. Frank—Obstetrical and Gynaecological Pathology. • Bacteriology. Mackie and McCartney—Introduction to Practical Bacteriology. Bigger—Handbook of Bacteriology. Muir and Ritchie—Manual ot Bacteriology (9tli Edition). Toplcy and Wilson—Principles of Bacteriology and Immunity. In all subjects candidates will be expected to have a knowledge ot appropriate matter in current literature in the English language.

ANNOUNXEMENTS The recognized special hospital is the Women's Hospital. The recognized gynaecological departments of a general hospital arethoseotthe Melbourne, Alfred and St.Vinceat's Hospitals. The approved instructors are as follows— Operative Obstetrics—Drs. Wilson and Green (W.H.) Pathology and Bacteriology—Dr. King and Professor Woodruff. Radium Therapy—Drs. Cuscaden (W.H.); Chambers (M.H.); Fowlor (A.H.); O'Sullivan (St. V.) Venereal Diseases—Drs. Harley (W.H.); Chambers (M.H.) ; Fowler (A.H.) ; O'Sullivan (St. V.) Infant Welfare—Dr. Kate Campbell (Carlton B.1I. Training Centre.) .. . •. ' I, .Resident Hedical Officers— (a) One year as resident medical officer at tho Women's Hospital;

(b) A period not exceeding six months as gynaeoolog ical resident medical officer at one of the 03 992 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 193(i.

approved general hospitals and the balance of the year as a resident medical officer at the Women's Hospital or other recognized special hospital. Six months ot this period must be spent as an obstetric resident medical officer ; II. Members of the Honorary Staff of an approved Hospital— (a) For those who have held a position as clinical assistant in the gynaecological department of the Women's Hospital or ot a recognized general hospital for one year, a period of six months as a temporary clinical assistant in the obstetric department ot tho Women's Hospital ; or (b) For those who have held the position of an obste tric clinical assistant at the Women's Hospital for one year, a period of six mouths as clinical assistant in gynaecology at the Women's Hospi tal or at a recognized general hospital. These appointments should entail one morning or afternoon attendance per week in each subject.

III. Graduates who have held no hospital appointments— One year as temporary clinical assistant in both Obste trics and Gynaecology at the Women's Hospital. Graduates may submit a statement of previous experi ence in both subjects to the Faculty, who may grant exemption for a portion ot the year's study. The remainder ot the period must be served at the Women's Hospital.

SPECIAL COURSES OF INSTRUCTION Operative Obstetrics— A course of six demonstrations at theWomen's Hospital held in January and February of each year. Pathology and Bacteriology— Courses in each subject held in the appropriate depart ments of the University during the Third Term. MEDICINE 993

.Radium Therapy and Venereal Diseases— A aeries of six demonstrations in each subject given by the approved instructors at the various recog nized hospitals. These may be taken at any period ot the year. Infant Welfare - A course of four demonstrations at the Carlton Baby Health Training Centre in December of each year. •General Clinical Instruction— Apart from the routine clinical work at the various hospitals a special course is held at the Women's Hospital twice weekly during December, January and February. 'Phis is conducted by the Pro fessor ot Obstetrics and the senior members ot the Honorary Staff.

DIPLOMAS OF THERAPEUTIC RADIOLOGY AND ELECTRICITY AND DIAGNOSTIC RADIOLOGY". ANATOMY— The examination will include the general anatomy rpertinent to the subject, and the candidate will be ex pected to be familiar with current literature as well as standard text-book teaching. PHYSIOLOGY— The detailed Physiology of the Alimentary, Cir culatory, Renal, Reproductive and Respira tory systems. Localisation of' function in the Central Nervous System. The Cerebro spinal Fluid. 'The Pituitary gland. PHYSICS— The Course in Physios for candidates tor the Dip loma of Diagnostic Radiology is Part I. The Course for candidates for the Diploma ot Therapeutic Radiology and Electricity is Part I and Part II. gy^ DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 193'i.

Physics and its applications to Radio-diagnosis and Radio-therapy. Part I.—A course of about fifteen lectures with practical work in tie first and second terms. Part II.— A course of about fifteen lectures in tha second and third terms with practical work in those terms and in the long vacation.

Part I. Alternating currents. The transformer. High voltage measurement by spark gap and electrostatic voltmeter. Thermionic cur rents. The two electrode thermionic valve. Mechanical and valve rectified high tension generators. The Electromagnetic spectrum from gamma rays to long x-rays. The production of x-rays. Their properties. Ionization and photographic action. General and characteristic x-rays. The distribution of the energy in the x-ray spectrum. Absorption and scattering of x-rays. The elimina tion of scattering in radiology. Einstein's law Ve = hv. The x-ray tube for diagnosis. Protection against injury by x-rays. Design of radio-diagnostic laboratories. Part II. The wave form of high tension generators. It* effect on the quality and quantity of x-rays. More detailed study of valve rectified high tension generators. The therapeutic x-ray tube. Further consideration of absorption and scattering. The Compton effect. The Dessauer diagram. X-ray filters. X-ray spectra. Measurement of wave-length x-ray spectrometers. The measurement of the intensity of x-rays. Mechanism of the ionising action ot x-rays. -MEDICINE 995

The expression of dosage in r units. Photographic measurement of intensity. Discussion of the physical basis of some of the theories of the biological action of x-rays. The design of a radio-therapy clinic.

Radioactivity.— The alpha, beta, gamma rays. Their ionization, heating and photographic effects. The absorption of gamma rays. 'The Compton effect. The uranium-radium series of elements, with special reference to radium, radon and its active deposit. The chemical properties of radium. The measurement of radium and radon. The preparation of radon for therapeutic use.

PRACTICAL COURSE. Practical work in x-rays-— Part I. 1. Simple teste of a transformer. 2. Current-voltage characteristic of a thermionic tube. 3. Description of the construction (including schematic wiring diagram) and operation of a generator used by the candidate in taking a radiograph, or one used in therapy. 4. Determination of photographic density.

Part II. 6. Determination of the absorption coefficient of x- or gamma rays. 6. Calibration of the milliammeter and voltmeter and phasing of the rectifier of a therapeutio plant. 7. _Photographing ot au x-ray spectrum. 8. Measurement ot dosage by ionization of air. 9. Determination of the degree of protection in an x-ray or radium laboratory. 996 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 193C. Pvactical work in radioactivity.— 10. Construction of electroscopes and the measure ment of gamma ray intensity. The applica tion of the inverse square law in the measurement ct radi;;m or radon. 11. Measurement of the absorption coefficient of, say, lead and copper for gamma rays. 12. Measurement of the growth ot gamma ray activity from a freshly prepared radon source. Tli. A demonstration of the preparation of radon for therapeutic use, including the manufac ture of needles, etc. 14. Measurement of gamma radiation by the photo graphic method. RADIOTHFJRAPY AND ELECTROTHERAPiT.— High frequency currents: methods of production, measurement and general properties. The application of high frequency currents in medicine and surgery.

BADTODIA GN OSIS.— X-ray machines; tubes and accessories; their choice, use and maintenance. The various exposure factors; tlicir use in con-- trolling exposure. Determination of relative speeds and' other qualities of films and in tensifying screens. Construction and use of exposure charts. Radiographic technique in the- examination of all parts of the body. Technique of fluoroscopic examinations. Use of contrast media. Loca tion, of foreign bodies. Methods of marking films for identification. Dark room equipment and technique. Subsequent photographic processes; prints, lantern slides, ete. Interpretation ot films; differential diagnosis; cor relation with clinical findings. Methods of reporting. Organisation of an x-ray department, the keeping of records, etc. MEDICINE 997

PATHOLOGY.— Diplo>na of Therapeutic Radiology and Electricity.^ The course will consist of from fifteen to twenty lectures and demonstrations on the appropriate sections of general and regional Pathology, including special consideration of the action of ladiotherapcutic agents on normal and pathological tissues.

Diploma of Diagnostic Radiology.— The course will consist of from fifteen to twenty leotures and demonstrations on general and regional pathology, with special reference to structural and functional variations which may be brought into evi dence by radiodiagnostic methods. MUSIC.

DETAILS OF SUBJECTS AND RECOMMENDATIONS FOR THE ANNUAL AND SUPPLEMENTARY EXAMINATIONS TO BE HELD IN THE FOURTH TERM, 1936.

ACCOMPANYING, PART I.— Candidates will be expected to accompany satisfac torily a vocal or instrumental composition of fairly difficult standard,

ACCOMPANYING, PART II.— Tne sam. as Part I., but at a more advanced stan dard.

AESTHETICS AND CRITICISM, PART I.— Critical Essays on the Evolution of the Art of Music; Psychological Studies on the work and personalities of the Great Masters from Palestrina to Beethoven, with a detailed analysis of vocal and instrumental. works within the Period. Books recommended for reference—In addition to the Second Year List, Bach (Parry); Conducting (Wag- ner); Style in Art (Parry); Criticism (Calvocoressi); Plotinus on the Beautiful.

AESTHETICS AND CRITICISM, PART II.— Essays on Philosophic Theories of Fine Art; further studies in the Romantic and Modern Periods; knowledge of the Literature of Criticism, Re views of Books, Analytical Programmes, Actual Criticisms of Public Performances, as directed by the Ormond Professor. Books recommended for reference—Aesthetic (Boean- quet); Aesthetic (Croce); Reason in Art (San- tayana); Essays Speculative and Suggestive (Symonds); The Fine Arts (Symonds); Pro- MUSIC 999

gramme Music (Niccks): Studies in Modern Music (Hadow); Philosophies of Beauty (Carritt). Literature on present day com posers and works.

CHIEF AND SECOND PRACTICAL STUDIES PARTS I, 11 AND III.— Studies and works as prescribed during the year.

CHIEF AND SECOND PRACTICAL STUDIES, PART IV., A AND B — Candidates must submit a full concert programme, including one work at least of the following composers: — Pianoforte—Bach, Beethoven, Chopin, Schu mann, Brahms, Debussy or Ravel. Violin—Bach, Beethoven, Vieuxtemps, Spohr, Brahms. For other instrumental subjects details will be pro vided when required. Candidates in Part IV. A must reach a standard equivalent to 1st Class Honours in this test and, in addition, must satisfy the Director as to their platform deportment, whereas candidates in Part IV. B are required to reach the pass standard only.

CHIEF AND SECOND PRACTICAL STUDIES, PART ' IV. C— Candidates must submit a full conceit programme, selected from the main representative schools, including ' Oratorio, must secure first-class honours in this test, and must satisfy tho Ormond Professor as to their platform de portment.

CHIEF AND SECOND PRACTICAL STUDIES, PART IV. D.— Candidates must submit a repertoire of ten roles i of- grand opera; such operas to be sung in the language for which they are written, if re- 1000 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1936.

quired. They must show a thorough know ledge in the portrayal on the stage and the " making-up " and correct dressing for those ten parts, and must secure first-class honours and satisfy the Ormond Professor as to their knowledge of the Art of Acting generally. CHIEF AND SECOND PRACTICAL STUDIES, PART IV. E.— Studies and works as prescribed during the year-

CHIEF PRACTICAL STUDIES, A AND B.-^ Studies and works as prescribed during the year. Candidates must secure first-class honours in this test, must further satisfy the Ormond Professor as to their platform deportment, and, in the case of School B Division (b), as to their knowledge of the Art of Acting. CHIEF AND SECOND PRACTICAL STUDIES PARTS I, II, III, IV (A-E) AND CHIEF PRACTICAL STUDIES A AND B.— In all of the above a work will be set by the Ormond Professor one month before the date of the Practical Examinations in the subject ot the Chief Study which must be prepared unaided and presented at the Examination.

COMPOSITION, PART I.— Examples in simple forma—song, solo and part song, and dance forms..

COMPOSITION. PART II.— As for Part I., but more advanced; older rondo; development sections in preparation tor sym phonic form.

COMPOSITION, PART 111.— Studies embracing the forms up to and including tugal and sonata forms. . MUSIC. 100t

COMPOSITION. PART IV.- Free—(a) Specimens of Double Counterpoint. (b) Specimens of various forms ot Canon, in cluding examples in augmentation and' diminution. (c) General knowledge ot the principles gov erning Triple and Quadruple Counter point. " (d) Complete Fugue, either Choral or Orches tral . (e) Exercises in variation form and string- quartette style.

COMPOSITION, PART V — Candidates must present an original composition, which may be one of the following: — 1. A symphonic movement in Sonata, form with-. slow movement or finale. 2. An overture. 3. A choral and orouestral work on lyric, sacred or dramatic lines, COUNTERPOINT, PART I.— A general understanding of the first, principles of counterpoint will be required,. with examples in two parts in strict and free styles, and also three part strict counter point with one moving part.

COUNTERPOINT, PART II— Strict—Combined Counterpoint in three parts (all species); four part Counterpoint with on» moving part. Free—Specimens of choral writing, illustrating in; a simple form the main features of the Schools of Palestrina and Byrd, and instru mental work in Choral Prelude form.

COUNTERPOINT AND FUGUE— Strict—Four-part writing (a) with one moving part, (b) three-part writing*with two florid parte. 1002 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1936

Free—Simple specimens, ot double counterpoint— contrapuntal writing on a choral or an in strumental prelude, showing the use of figure work. Fugue—The general laws of devices employed in fugal writing. •COUNTERPOINT, CANON, AND FUGUE— Free—(A) Specimens of double counterpoint. (b) Contrapuntal writing in tour parts on a choral or instrumental subject, showing the use of designed figure work. (c) Short canon in four parts 'in tho octave. (d) Complete fugue, either vocal or instru mental up to four parts. iEAR TRAINING— Pitch.—All Intervals, Chords major and minor. Dominant Sevenths, Diminished Seventh, in root position and in inversion. Rhythm.—Any combination ot species of note up to semiquavers, including dotted notes.

ELEMENTARY ACOUSTICS — A course of leotures with experimental illustrations on Acoustics for Music Studente. Text Book recommended: — Harris—Handbook of Acoustics. Recommended for consultation: — Helmholtz—Sensations of Tone (translated by Ellis). E. H. Barton—Text Book of Sound. rPORM AND ANALYSIS, PART I.— Thorough knowledge of the classic musical forms Analysis of such works as may be prescribed during the year

PORM AND ANALYSIS, PART IT.— All musical forms as found in the great masters. Can didates must show a detailed knowledge of such works as may be prescribed during the year. .'.'•MUSIC- ••.;.:'.-.;- 1003-

HARMONY, PART I,— ; Common Chords and Triads in the Diatonic Scales with their inversions. Chords of the Dominant Seventh and its inversions. The simplest forms ot Cadences— perfect, imperfect and interrupted—including those- called Authentic and Plagal. Figuring the Bass ot a given passage and correcting errors in simple four-part writing. Adding three parts about a figured bass, using the Chords, referred to above. Harmonisatiou of a simple melody.

HARMONY, PART II.— General Knowledge of Chords, up to and including the Chord of the Ninth, Suspen sions, etc., laws governing Part Writing, Figured and Unfigured Basses. Harmom- sation ot Melodies in three and four parts,, chiefly diatonic; Harmonic Analyses of Pass ages, writing short passages in which modula tions to near related keys are made. Practical harmony at the pianoforte will be required. The candidate must also be able to play the chief forms of cadences.

HARMONY, PART III.— General knowledge of all chords. Writing passages modulating to related and unre lated keys and harmonic analysis of an instrumental work. Writing short passages- ot original harmony in either vocal or instru mental style. Practical harmony at th» pianoforte will also be required.

HARMONY, PART IV.— Harmonic analysis of modern works. Harmonisa tiou of melodies. Ground Bass. Writing pas sages of original harmony in either vocal or instrumental style. Writing simple instru mental accompaniment to a given melody.. 1004 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1936.

Practical harmony at the pianoforte, i.e., formation of phrases with varied cadences and simple .figured bass, including sevenths and inversions.

HARMONY, PART V.— 1. Harmonisation of melody in five vocal parts. 2. Harmonisation in four instrumental parts (sued as a string quartette), the given part not necessarily being confined to either the upper or lower part. 3. Expansion or development of a given harmonic phrase, or The addition to a given melody of a tree accom paniment, or. The setting to music of given words in the style of a part song or a madrigal. N.B It the Candidate choose the latter alternative, -interesting treatment ot the vocal parts, together with resourceful handling of the harmony, will be expected. 4. Some acquaintance with modern harmonic ten dencies.

/HISTORY, LITERATURE AND AESTHETICS OP MUSIC, PART I.— History ot the progress of the art from the beginning ot the Christian era to the early Beethoven period. HISTORY, LITERATURE AND AESTHETICS OF MUSIC, PART TI.— History, of the art from the transition period to outlines of modern musical history. fllSTORY, LITERATURE AND AESTHETICS OP MUSIC, PART HI.— Candidates must show familiarity with the vocal and instrumental works prescribed by the Director during the year, and with musical history from the period following Beethoven to the present day. MUSIC. 1005

INSTRUMENTAL ENSEMBLE, PART I.- Candidates must show a general knowledge of chamber music literature, to the Romantic period, and give evidence ot practical experi ence in ensemble in their particular subject, by the performance of a work to be submitted to and approved by the Director.

INSTRUMENTAL ENSEMBLE, PART II.— The same as for Part I., in addition to which can didates will be required to show a knowledge of the history and development of chamber music to the present day.

LITERATURE AND AESTHETICS— 1. Essays Historical and Aesthetic dealing with the composers', works and evente of the main periods of music, such as Pre-Christian, Mediaeval, Symphonic, the Romantic Period and Modem Tendencies. 2. Essays on the General Principles of Fine Art. Books recommended for reference:—Oxford His tories; Grove's Dictionary; Beethoven (Grove); Beet hoven (Wagner); Philosophy of the Beautiful (Knight); Three Lectures on Aesthetics (Bosanquet); Renaissance (Pater); Modern Harmony (Hull) ; Art of Music (Parry

MODERN LANGUAGES, PART I,—

ENGLISH DICTION, PART I. Thorough knowledge of the different classes of vowels and their pronunciation. Exercises for perfecting distinct enunciation, illustration and treatment of faults in articulation.

ITALIAN (Music Course), PART .1. The first part of Panagulli's Italian Conversation Grammar. Reading and simple translation. Study of Italian Aria. 1006 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1936.

MODERN LANGUAGES, PART 11.-^- ENGLISH DICTION, PART II. . Thorough knowledge of all consonant and vowel sounds and their classification, pronuncia tion, awent and emphasis. Reading of English prose »nd poetry of moderate difficulty at sight.

ITALIAN (Music Course), PART II. The second part of Panagulli's Italian Conversa tion Grammar. Reading and Dictation. Translation. Study of Italian Opera. and either FRENCH (Music Course), PART I. or GERMAN (Music Course), PART I.

MODERN LANGUAGES, PART 1X1.— ENGLISH DICTION, PART III. To read at sight difficult passages of prose and verse (selected by the examiner). To write a short essay on the necessity and ad vantage of clear, distinct diction and how to attain it. To memorise and .to be able to repeat prepared poetry and prose and to convey its meaning to others. A thorough knowledge of all vowels and consonants and their difficulties in enunciation. ITALIAN (Music Course), PART III. Sauer's Conversation Grammar. Literature and Composition. Study of Italian Opera. and either FKENCH (Musio Course), PART II. (For Candidates who have completed PART I.)- or GERMAN (Music Course), PART II. (For Candidates who have completed PART I.) •• MUSIC. 1007

MODERN LANGUAGES, PART IV.— ITALIAN (Music Course), PART IV. FRENCH (Music Course), PART 111. Por Candi dates who have completed PARTS I. and II.), or PART I. and GERMAN (Music Course), PART 111. (For Candi dates who have completed PARTS I. and II.), or PART I.

MODERN LANGUAGES, PART V.— FKKNCH (Music Course), PART IV. (For Candidates who have completed Parte I., II., and 1X1.), or Part II. and GERMAN (Music Course), PART IV. (For Candidates who have completed Parts I., II., and XII.) or Part II.

MUSICAL TERMINOLOGY; FORM, HISTORY AND Li i KUATUR1-: - A general musical knowledge as dealt with in the Director's Class, including outlines of history up to tho sixteenth century.

ORCHESTRATION, PART I.-- (a) The nature and compass of the various instru ments and their treatment as found in the scores of the chief composers up to the Romantic Period. (b) Reduction of instrumental scores to pianoforte scores. (c) Scoring for orchestra a given work in accord ance with the work studied during the year.

ORCHESTRATION, PART II.— (a) The history of orchestration up to the present lime. (b) Scoring tor orchestra. set works; for example, a song accompaniment and a movement ot a pianoforte sonata. M 1008 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1930.

PEDAGOGICS AND PSYCHOLOGY— Candidates for the teaching division of the Diploma or Degree are required to attend classes as arranged by the Ormond Professor.

PRACTICAL STUDIES, PARTS I. AND IX— Candidates must make a study of a Practical sub ject approved by the Director similar to that of the Second Study in the Instrumental and Vocal Schools PRACTICAL TEACHING, PART I.— • -Candidates in School A must show sound knowledge •'••'• ot the muscular system as used in.the playing of their instrument, and thorough knowledge ot the literature of their instrument and how it should be applied. Demonstrations must be given of methods of teaching various branches of technic and interpretation. Candidates in School B must show sound knowledge of the anatomy of the human vocal organs and the breathing apparatus, how to control the breath; sound knowledge and experience of the variations in the class of a soprano, mezzo-soprano, alto, tenor, baritone and bass. Demonstrations must be given on the methods of teaching. A thorough knowledge of the vocal literature, including classical songs and arias from Oratorio and Opera, must be shown.

PRACTICAL TEACHING, PART IX— As for Part I., and, in addition, a more extensive knowledge of the Art of Teaching, includ ing the modern school of technic and inter pretation.

SIGHT READING, PARTS I. AND p.— A test will be set within the limits of the technical standard of the work of the Chief Study for the year. MDSIO. 1009

SIGHT READING, PART III. (Including Score Read ing and Transposition— (a) Reading Pianoforte, Violin or Vocal Score, etc., according to the Chief Study. (b) Playing on the Pianoforte from Full Vocal, String Quartette and Symphony Score, examples to be taken from works not later than the Classical period. (o) Principles of Transposition. Candidates will be required to transpose the accompaniment to a moderately difficult voeal or instrumental work.

SIGHT READING, PART IV. (Including Score Reading and Transposition). (a) Reading of advanced Pianoforte", Violin or Vocal Score, etc., according to the Chief Study. Vocalists will be required to read an inner part ot a Trio or Quartette. (b) Playing on the Pianoforte from advanced String Quartette and Pull Orchestral Score, . touching on the Romantic and early Modern periods. (c) Transposition of moderately difficult works of the Chief Study.

SPECIAL PRACTICAL STUDY, PARTS X, IX AND XTX— Candidates will be expected to make a general prac tical study of the technic and character istics of the various orchestral instruments, and also the voice, as follows: — Part I.—String Instruments. Part XI.—Wood-wind. Part III.—Voice and Brass

THEORY TEACHING, PART X— A knowledge ot all the usual harmonic combina tions, including part-writing in three and four parte. Harmonization ot melodies and CI A 1010 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1936.

unfigured basses in chorale and also in free instrumental style. Strict and free counter point up to and including four parts. A knowledge of the methods of teaching, and also of literature dealing with the above.

THEORY TEACHING. PART XX— A thorough knowledge of all the laws governing har monic and contrapuntal writing, including movements in sonata and fugal forms. Sound knowledge ot the chief harmonic and contrapuntal writings. Demonstrations of teaching the various branches.

BOOKS RECOMMENDED POR REFERENCE— First Year Diploma. Ear Training—Shinn, Sawyer. Harmony—Bridge and Sawyer; Macplierson (with appendix). (a) Handbook on Form "( Franklin (b) Handbook of Musical Knowledge i Peterson History of Music—Naumaun, Rieiminn, Pratt. Summary of Musical History-Hubert Parry. Dictionary—G rove.

Second Year Diploma. Harmony—Macplierson (with appendix), Bridge and Sawyer, Buck. Counterpoint -Cherubini, Prout, Kitson, Gladstone, Pearce, Bridge. Contrapuntal Technique in tha Sixteenth Century by It. O. Morris. Fugue—Prout, Iliggs. Musical Form—Prout, Macplierson. History of Music—Parry's ' Summary,' Parry's "The Art of Music," "The Oxford," Rieiminn, Collis, Naumann, Pratt, Stanford and- Forsyth. Aesthetics—Pauer, MaoDowell, Spencer's ''Orighv und Function ot Music," Knight, Santayann Bosanquet. FACULTY OF SCIENCE.

DETAILS OF SUBJECTS AND RECOMMENDA TIONS FOR THE ANNUAL AND- SUPPLE MENTARY EXAMINATIONS TO BE ;HELD IN I'HE FOURTH TERM, 1SW5, AND FOR THE EXAMINATIONS FOR THE DEGREE OF, MASTER OF SCIENCE TO.BE HELD IN FIRST TERM, 1930. • - . .'":

HONOUR WORK. Except in the cases of subjects where special details are published,the Examination for Honours will been the lines indicated for Pass, but candidates will require to have iread more advanced work than for Pass, and to attain-a higher standard and show more detailed knowledge.

COURSES IN FRENCH AND GERMAN FOR SCIENCE STUDENTS. • 'The aim of these courses is to give students a reading knowledge ot the foreign language, and also to'give them a first-hand acquaintance with a f<.:\v selected works of high literary value. During the first year the elements of grammar will be •taught, and only simple texts will be read- First Year. FRENCH,-PART A— F. (.'•. Roe—A Junior Commercial French Courss' (Harrap). G. C. 1 larj-inr- -Le Grand Voy:ige"d'A.la.in Gerbfiult. Renault—Petite Granunaire Francaise.

•GEBMAN, PAHT A — Lubovius—German Reader and Writer, Part I H. G. Fiedler and P. E. Sandbach—A First Ger man Course for Science Studente. (Oxford . Univ. Press.) ]Q10 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1936.

Secoml Year. FRENCH, PAUT B— Williams—A Technical and Scientific French; Reader (Earrap). Renault—Petite Grammaire Francaise. ' Cornell—Cinq Maitres du Conte Frnnouis (Selections)

0KUMAN, PART B— Scholz—German Science Reader (Macmillan). Moffatt—Science German Course.

BACTERIOLOGY, •jrUeTERlOLOGY—PA RT X— The course will consist ot lectures, demonstrations and practical work for 4 hours a week during 3 terms, extend ing over not less than 100 hours, and dealing with— Morphology, isolation, cultivation and classification of bacteria. Filtrable viruses. Bacteria in relation to disease; bacteriology of milk and other foods. Soil bacteriology. Some common pathogenic protozoan parasites. The principles of immunity. Practical work will include the study of the morphology,, staining, cultivation and identification ot common sapro phytic organisms, as well as pathogenic bacteria repre sentative of the different groups of organisms. Practical applications of immunity, including serological te»ts.

Text Books:— Mackie and McCartney—An Introduction to Prac tical Bacteriology.

•Parasitology, Parts A. or B.,and Agricultural Entomology, Part I.,may be taken along with Bacteriology Part 1., the three subjects counting as &. (Jroup H. subject. SCIENCE. 1013

For reference :— Muir and Ritchie—Manual of Bacteriology (9th edition). Toplcy and Wilson—Principles ot Bacteriology and Immunity. Russell—Micro-organisms ot the Soil. Orla-Jensen—Dairy Bacteriology.

BACTERIOLOGY—PART II.— •:'-- - In the second year more advanced work will be undertaken along one or more of the following lines: —Medical bacteriology, and immunology; soil bac teriology ; dairy bacteriology, and that of other foods. Topley—Outline of Immunity. Stephenson—Bacterial Metabolism.

BIOCHEMISTRY. Lectures and practical work as set out under Faoulty, ot Agriculture. BOTANY. BOTANY—PART I.— Tho structure of a young and adult Plant .Cell: Modifications of Cell Wall. . Chemical' and Physical properties of Protoplasm. Osmosis. Cell Inclusions. Nuclear division. Tissues. Seed and Germination. Enzymes. Growth. Tropic movements. Structure, function and modifications of the Root. Structure and function of the Stem. Types of branching. Healing of Wounds. Bud ding and Grafting. Struetufe and function of the Leaf and its appen dages. Transpiration and Ascent of Sap. Nutrition. Special modes ot nutrition. Respiration, aerobio and intra-molecular. Structure, Reproduction and Life-History of the following types: — A. Bacteria- B. Protdcoccus, Vaucheria, Spirogyra, Hormosira Folysiphonia, Nemalion (procarp only). ]Q]4 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1930.

C. Mucor or Rhizopus, hymenium of Pez iza Saecharomyces, Aspergillus. Penicillium, Psalliota- D. Marchantia or Lunularia, Funaria. E. Pteridium. P. Selaginella- G. Pinus. Morphology and Histology of the Flower. Pollina tion. Fertilization and development of the Seed. Fruite, their classification and di* persal. A brief account ot the commoner families of Flower ing plante.

Text-books:— Ewart—Flora of Victoria. Tansley—Elements of Plant Biology. or, Fiilsch and Salisbury—Introduction in the Structure and Reproduction of'Plants. or. Smith, Overton, etc.—A text-book of general Botany.

Books recommended for reference: — Strasburger—Text-book of Botany. McGregor Skene—Plant Biology. Scott---Structural Botany of Flowering and F'.owerless Plante. Bower —Botany of the Living Plant. Students must complete not less than four (4) hours practical work per week, exclusive of field excursions. Thirty (30) named and dried specimens must be col lected and presented for examination as part of the field work. This collection and the practical note books form part of the practical examination. Studente must provide themselves with an approved microscope (which can bo hired), a razor, a set of needles, notebook and slides and cover-slips.

Long Vacation lietnimg in preparation for ilotMiiv, .Part ILT:— (1) Buller—Researches on Fungi, Arols. I-V. SCIENCE. 1015

Each student must read at least one volume of tilis series. (2) Stanford, E. E.—Economic Plante. (Copies of these books can be obtained on loan.) BOTANY—PART IX— (1) Plant Physiology—Growth, reproduction and regen eration, the mechanics of tissues, resistance to-ex- trernes, the various forme of nastic, tropic and tactic irritability, heredity, variation and evolution. (2) Plant Pathology and Mycology- (All students will require a micrometer eye-piece scale for this course). (a) Principles involved in' the nutrition, metabolism and growth of fungi, an introduction to cultural methods. (b) A general treatment ot Myxomycetes, Phycoray- cetes, Ascomycetes, Basidiomycetes, and Fungi Iniperfecti with special reference to pathogenic forms and methods of suppression. (c) Virus.und physiological diseases. All Studente are asked to present before tho end of the year a collection of not less than 20 pressed speci mens to the satisfaction ot the Lecturer. . Text-books: — Evvart—Flora of Victoria. Brooks— Plant Diseases. Gwynne-Vaughan and Barnes—The Fungi. For Reference: — Stevens—The Fungi which cause plant disease. McAlpine—Systematic arrangement of Australian Fungi. Eoald—Manual of Plant Diseases. Gaumann-Dodge — Comparative Morphology of Fungi. (3) Systematic Botany (Angiospermae). Comprises the general classification and systematic account of native, economic ' and cultivated plants. Text-book: . • Ewart—Flora ot Victoria. 1016 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS. 1936.

Book for reference: — Bailey—Manual of Cultivated Plants. A11 students are expected to col lect and present before the end of the year a Herbarium of not less than 100 dried" specimens, which should include both flower and fruit. Students are requested to enclose with each mounted specimen brief notes regarding the- plant. It is advised that the collection be begun during the previous year. Long Vacation reading in preparation for Kotanv, Part HI: — Harvey-Gibson—Outlines -of.- thev History , of Botany. Bower—Tho Origin of a Land Flora (pp. 1-254). (Copies can be-obtained-on loan.) '.

BOTANY--PART XIX— - • (1) Plant. Pliysiology,—'i.'he colloidal system involved in the living cell- absorption, conduction and transpiration of water; • significance of mineral substances in metabolism; synthesis of carbohydrates, fats, and other organic compounds; enzymes and enzyme action; translocation; respiration. . (2) Plant Geography (2 terms 1 1. per weckl. with field excursions, (3) Cryptogams (3 terms 1 1. 8 h. pr.). (a) Schizophyta—Myxophyoeae (Bacteria dealt with under Plant'Path'olOgy, Part II). (b) Thallophyta—(i.) Algae—Chlorophyccae, Diato- maceae, Characeae. Phaeophyceae; Rhodopby- ceae; (ii.) Fungi (see Plant Pathology). (c) Lichens. (d) Bryophyta—Bepaticae, Musci. (e) Pteridophyta — Lycopodiales, Equisetales, Spheuo- " pbyllales, Ophioglossales, Filieales. (i) Gymnospermae—(\ term, 1 1. 2 h. pr.). Cyoa- dales, Coniferales, Gnetales. Their structure SCIENCE. 101 T

and life histories, distribution and characters of important species, particularly ot the Coniferae. Practical Work—In addition to the practical work, illustrative of the above, the course will inolude- the identification of Trees and Timbers, micro scopic study of commercial woods. Field excursions will be held at times arranged through out the course. r Text Books: — West and Friteoh—British Fresh-water Algae. Campbell—Mosses and Ferns. Bower—The Perns, Vol. I.-1X1. Ewart—Flora ot Victoria. Coulter and Chamberlain—Morphology of Gymno- sperms. For Reference:— ••••' Goebel—Outlines of Classification and Special/ Morphology. Pfeffer of Jost—Physiology of Plante. Goebol—Organography of Plants. Eaberlandt—Physiological Plant Anatomy. Engler and Prantl—Die naturliohen Pflanzen- familien. - - . : Oltmanns—Morphologic und Biologie der Algen. West—Algae. • Smith—Fresh Water Algae of the United States.

SCHOOL OP BOTANY Final Honours and Degree ot Master of Science. Palaeobotany— The course includes the study ot the morphology, anatomy, and distribution of fossil representatives' ot the following groups of Plants: — Thallophyta. Bryophyta. Pteridophyta, including the Lycopodiales, Spheno- • phyllales, Eqvisctales, Filicales, Psilophytakt. IQIS DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 193(1

Spermaphyta, including the Pteridospermeae, Cor- daifales, Mesosoic Gymnosperms and the Antjiospermfi.n1. . Text-books: — Scott —Studies in Fossil Botany 3rd edition. Seward—Fossil Plants. Vols. I.-TV-. Hirmer—Handbuch der Palaobotanik I. This Course will form approximately one eighth of the work of the 4th year of science. The other sections will be specially set.

Oij'ElUSTKY Long Vacation reading in preparation for Chemistry Part I. Findlay—The Spirit of Chemistry. CllK-UiSTUV. --PA in- 1. The development of the main generalisations of chemi cal science, starting from a consideration of elementary chemical physics, proceeding through a systematic study of inorganic (and a few common organic) substances, and including a simple physico-chemical study of mat. •ter in the dissolved and colloidal states. Laboratory Work.—The Laboratory work will in clude the study of the properties of the more common inorganic radicles and the application of this to simple qualitative analysis. It will also include exercises in .Volumetric analysis. Text-books:—- Alex. Smith (Kendall)—Inorganic Chemistry. Clowes ;;nd Cn'cinan—Elementary Analytical Chem. istry: (revised by Arnall and Appteyard). Bausor—Chemical Calculations. Books for reference: — Certain " |.ortipns of Findlay's Introduction to. ' ' Physical'Chemistry. Roscoe ;md Sclinrlemnu-r—Treatise on Chemistry, Vols.. 1. and II. Kor prjieticul work students ai'd re'i'iired to pi-o\ i'ie themselves with .apparatus in accorchui'.-c \\kh the list POSM-H in the Luhcratorv. SCIENCE.

(flLoiig \a-uiiitui rcolin-: i.i ) «r. -p;i r-.'.'; i.'-n i'-r l- ,e-- '.-'.:••-. Part ii,—Findlay—Introduction to Physical Chemistry. fl'i;:,! ;-:-;;:v. - "• 1'.— The course will include the following topics: — The Conservation of Energy. — Energy; heat con tent; heats of reaction at constant volume and at constant pressure; Hess's Law; heats of formation; temperature variation of heat of reaction; experimental methods. The Gaseuus Stat: of Aggregation.—The gas laws; elementary treatment of kinetic theory of gases; relation between mean tree path, rate of collision and molecular diameter; Avoga- dro's number and' its experimental determ ination. (Perrin's work); deviations from the gas laws and the van der Waals equation; determination ef critical constants; theory of corresponding states. The Liquid State of Aggregation. — Density and molecular volume; additive and constitutive properties; vapour pressure and its measure ment; heat of vaporisation; Trouton's Rule; associated liquids; surface tension. Solutions.—Vapour pressure of solutions; Raoult'a Law; the ideal solution; boiling point curves; fractional distillation. The colligative properties of dilute solutions: lowering of vapour pressure and freezing point, elevation ot boiling point, osmotic pressure, and their experimental measure ment. Aqueous solutions of electrolytes; their colligative properties; specific and molecular conductiv ity and their measurement; the ionic theory of Arrhenius; ionic migration; transport number and ionic mobility and their meas urement by the Bittorf and moving boun dary methods; applications of conductance measurements to titration, solubility deter mination, etc. The Speed of Chemical Beactions.^Law of Mass Action; the rate constant; homogeneous re actions of low order in gases and solutions; 1020 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, l>J3(i.

kinetic interpretation; activated molecules; introduction to mechanism of reactions. Homogeneous. Chemical Equilibrium-—T''e .equili brium constant and ite variation with tem perature (van't Soft's Law); examples of gaseous equilibria; chemical equilibrium in solution; ionic equilibria and the Dilution Law of Ostwald; the anomaly of strong elec trolytes; introduction to the Dcbye-Euckel theory of strong electrolytes; weak electro lytes; ionic product of water; hydrolysis; titration curves; theory of indicators; buf fer solutions. Heterogeneous Equilibrium (Special Cases).—Solu bility product; the distribution law; parti tion coefficient and applications of partition measurements. Second Law of Thermodynamics (Elementary Treat ment).—Work done by spontaneous natural processes; the free energy; application to theory of simple cell; E.M.F. and its mea surement; concentration colls; simple ther modynamic treatment ot equilibrium con stant; equilibrium constant and F,.M.F.; definition of single electrode potentials; ap plications ot reversible electrodes (hydrogen, calomel, silver, quinhydrone and glass elec trodes) to chemical problems, e,g. titration, pE measurement, solubility products, equili brium constants, heats of reaction. Heterogeneous Equilibrium (General Treatment).— Phase, component, degree ot freedom; the Phase Rule; the general features of one-, two- and three-component systems; experi mental methods; applications to chemical problems. Valency and Molecular Structure (Elementary Treatment).—The Bohr-Rutherford nuclear atom; atomic number; Kossel-Lewis-Lang- muir theory of valency; ionic bonds, electron pair bonds and associated physical properties; the co-ordinate bond and co-ordination com pounds ; valency theory and the Periodic Table. Organic Chemistry. SCIENCE. 1021

Students will be expected to read certain original papers according to a list to be posted in the Depart ment. Laboratory Work- Qualitative and quantitative (both volumetric and gravimetric) analysis, including examination of alloys and of mix tures containing compounds of the more common metals and radicles. - • Text-books: — Findlay—Introduction to Physical Chemistry. Rivelt—The Phase Rule and the Study of hetero geneous Equilibria. Perkin and Kipping—Organic Chemistry, or, Holleman—Text-book of Organic Chemistry. Treadwell and Hall—Vol. I. Qualitative Analysis. (Recent edition.) - Hall—Text-book of Quantitative Analysis. Students are also advised to read: — Perrin—Atoms. Preferably in the original French— Les Atonies. Tilden—Famous Chemists. Cohen—Physikalisch—chemische Metamorphose. (Chapters 1-5 for German Practice). Books for reference : — Meyer (trans by Baynes)—Kinetic Theory of Gases. Roscoe and Schorlemmer—Treatise on Chemistry. Taylor—Treatise on Physical Chemistry (2 vols.). The volumes in the Physical Chemistry series edited by the late Sir William Ramsay. For practical work students are required to provide themselves with apparatus in accordance with a list posted in the Laboratory Long Vacation Reading in preparation for Chemistry, Part III, will be prescribed during the year. CHEMISTRY.—PART XIX — Advanced Organic and General Chemistry. Laboratory Work -Qualitative and qualitative ana lysis, inorganic and organic. Preparations of pure substances. Physico-chemical measure ments. IQ22 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1930

Text-books: — Those recommended for Part II. and also the .following : - • Clarke—Handbook of Organic Analysis. Cohen—Practical Organic Chemistry (Recent edi tion). Students are also advised to read: — Burton—The Physical Properties ot Colloidal Solutions. Sidgwick—The Electronic Theory of Valency. F. Kphr:i.iin—Inorganic Chemistry. Cohen—Organic Chemistry for advanced Students. \V. Ostwald — tte Welt der vcruaclilassigten Ilinieiisioneii (Selected portions tor German Practice). Travers—The discovery of the rare gases. Cilelnienl Society, r'n.rn.dn V Lectures. Chemical Society 'Memorial Lectures (3 vols.), selected portions. Books for reference: — Abegg—Haudbuch der anorganlschen Chemie. Nernst—Theoretical Chemistry. Friend (and others)—Text-book on Inorganie Chemistry. Mellor — Comprehensive Treatise on Inorgnnic and Theoretical Chemistry. Werner—New Ideas on Inorganic Chemistry. Van't Boff-—The Arrangement of Atoms in Space: Julius Schmidt—Text Book of Organic Chemistry. Richter—Chemistry of the Carbon Compounds. Meyer and Jaoobsen—Organische Chemie. Gattermauu—Practical Methods of Organic Chemistry. Mellor—Treatise on. Quantitative Inorganic Analysis. Thorpe—Dictionary of Applied Chemistry. For practical work students arc required to provide themselves with apparatus in accordance with a list posted in the Laboratory. SCIENCE. 102$

SCHOOL OP CHF.MISTRY. Final Honours and Degree of Master of Science. The written examination will include papers in General, Inorganic and Organic Chemistry, with special reference to modern developments. Candidates will be advised as to their reading in all sections ot the subject. Weekly Colloquia will be held at which students will present summaries of original memoirs allotted to them for study. A course ot lectures will bo given on the Principles of Applied Chemistry, -and this will be supplemented by visits to suitable Chemical Works. The Practical Examination will last about five day» and will be of the nature of a limited research in a prescribed field. The Laboratory Course during the fourth year will include systematic training supplementary to that given in the earlier years, particularly in physical chemistry and advanced organic chemistry. Students may to come extent select the section in which they desire to specialise. In addition each student will engage in some special piece of work of the nature ot research.

ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING, PART I.- (See under Faculty of Engineering).

GEOLOGY. GEOLOGY—PART X— This course has been arranged to suit the requirements ot students of Science, Arts, Architecture and of Civil, Mining and Metallurgical Engineering. Cosmical Geology The earth as a mass-^its origin, shape, relation to the heavenly bodies, eto. Tectonic Geology-—The study of rock masses in the field. Folds and faults. Mountain structure, Isostasy. JQ24 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1936.

Dynamical Geology-—The forces operating upon and below the earth's surface. Wind, water, and ice as geological agents; chemical and mechanical agents of denudation. Earth movements, volcanoes. Physiographic Geology.—Including the origin of land forms, eto The Geology of Water Supply- The Elements of Mineralogy, Petrology and Paleonto logy.—Including the study of common minerals, rocks and fossils. The Elements of Stratigraphy.—Illustrated mainly by the geology of Victoria. Laboratory Work—The work .in the laboratory includes the study of geological maps and the construction of geological sections; the examination and determination ot hand specimens of crystal models, minerals, rocks, and fossils. Field Work.—There will be six field excursions. These will be held on Saturdays during the session. Apparatus.—Students must supply themselves with a geological hammer, pocket lens and specimen bag, to be approved by the Professor. Text-Books:— Scott, W. B.—An Introduction to Geology (3rd Edition, Vol. I.). Rutley, F—Elements of Mineralogy (Revised by H. H. Read). Skeate, E. W. (ed.).—Outlines of the Physio graphy and Geology of Victoria. For Reference: — Dwerryhouse, A. R.—Geological and Topographical Maps and Their Use. Geifcie, J.—Structural and Field Geology. Chamberlin and Salisbury—Geology, Vol. I. Pro-

Long Vacation Reading in preparation for Geology, Part II, will be prescribed during the year. SCIENCE. 1625

OEOLOGY, PART IX— The lectures and laboratory work will deal with :— Crystallography.—The characters of crystals, their geometrical and optical properties, their sym metry and classification. Mineralogy.—The physical, chemical, crystallo graphic and optical characters of minerals their classification and the description of the more important species. Petrology-—The megascopic and microscopic characters of rocks. The classification and distribution of rocks. The principles that control the solidi fication of rocks from a molten state. Stratigraphy.—The principles of stratigraphies! geology. The interpretation of the evidence of fossils. The Archaean and Palaeozoic rocks and their general distribution throughout the world. The Interpretation of Geological Maps. Physiography, Palaeontology, etc.—More advanced work than that dealt with in Part I. Field Work-—There will be nine field excursions. Three will be held at a week-end including Friday, •Saturday, and Monday, and the remaining six will be held on Saturdays during the session. Apparatus-—In addition to the apparatus required for Geology, Fart X, students must supply themselves with a blowpipe, platinum wire and a petrological micro scope, to be approved by the Professor. The Geological Department has a limited number of microscopes available •for hire.

Text Books: — David, T. W. E.—Explanatory notes to a new Geological map of Australia. Ekeate, E. W. fed.).—Outlines of the Physio graphy and Geology of Victoria. Hatch and Wells—Text-book of Petrology. Part I: The Igneous Rocks. Diama, E. S.—Text-book of Mineralogy. Woods—Pal aeon tology. 1026 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1936

For Reference: — Hatch and Rastall—Petrology of the Sedimentary Rocks. Chamberlin and Salisbury-—Geology. 3 vols. Lake and Rastall—Text-book of Geology. Chapman, F.—Australasian Fossils. Long Vacation reading in preparation for Geology, Part III, will be prescribed during the year.

GEOLOGY, PART III.— The lectures and laboratory work will deal with: — Advanced Crystallography. Advanced Optical Mineralogy Advanced Petrology, including the origin and dif ferentiation of rock magmas. Advanced Palaeontology including Vertebrate Palae ontology. Stratigraphy.—The Mesozoic and Kainozoic rook» and their general distribution throughout the world. Mining Geology.—The character, formation and dU- tributibn of mineral, coal and oil deposits. The chief features of the principal mining fields of the world. The mining fields of Australia in more detail. Field Work—There will be twelve field excursions. Six of these will be held at week-ends including Friday, Saturday, and Monday. The remaining six will be held on Saturdays during the session. Text Books: — Tyrrell—The Principles of Petrology. Larson and Berman—The Microscopic Determina tion of the Non-opaque Minerals. Thomas and McAlister—Geology of Ore Deposits. Chapman, P.—Australiasian Fossils. For Reference: — Miers—Mineralogy. Eastman-Zittel—Text-book of Palaeontology. Seward—Plant Life Through the Ages. Neaverson—Strati graphical Palaeontology. Swiunerton—Outlines of Palaeontology. SCIENCE. 1Q27

Daly. R. A.—Igneous Rocks and the Depths of the Earth. Bowen, N. L.—Evolution ot Igneous Rocks. Lindgren—Mineral Deposits. Emmons—General Economic Geology. Rastall—Geology of the Metalliferous Deposits. Gregory—The Elements ot Economic Geology. Books for reference describing special mining fields will be announced during the lecture course. Reading matter on a prescribed topic will be announced during the First Term.

SCHOOL OF GEOLOGY. Final Honours and Degree of Master ot Science. The candidate will be allotted a special course ot read ing of geological papers. He will also be expected to pass in Surveying, Part I. In addition a special research will be allotted to him involving as a rule both field and laboratory work in a branch of Geology.

GRAPHICS.—(See under Faculty ot Engineering).

HISTOLOGY. The course consists ot thirty lectures delivered once a week during first, second and third terms in the Anatomy Department; and ot laboratory classes of 1 i hours duration twice a week during the first term and once a week during second and third terms. The specimens dealt with include the following :— Blood, bono marrow, epithelial tissues, connective tissues, bono development, muscle, nervous tissues, and all the organs of the mammalian body, including the central nervous system.

MATHEMATICS. MIXED MATHEMATICS, PARTS I., IX, III.—(See under Faculty of Arts). 1028 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1936.

MIXED MATHEMATICS PART ;ITX, WITH PRAC TICAL PHYSICS.— The course is that in Mixed Mathematics, Part III, (see under Fnculty of A rts) together with the Practical portion of the course in Natural Philosophy, Part III.

PURE MATHEMATICS PARTS 1, II, III—(See under Faculty of Arts).

SCHOOL OF MATHEMATICS AND THEORETICAL PHYSICS. Degree cf Master of Science. Candidates will prepare a Thesis on some topic suoh as Quantum Mechanics Theory of Relativity Electomagnetism Statistical Mechanics Partial Differential Equations of Mathematical Physics, and will be advised as to a suitable course of reading- Regular colloquia will be held to assist candidates in their studies. In addition, candidates must either submit a report of their original work or take a written examination on the topic of their thesis and on one or more additional topics which will be announced by May 1st of the year preceding the Examination.

METALLURGY. METALLURGY PART I. (Science Course)— The object ot this course is to apply the principles of chemistry and physics to industrial processes, and tho details are similar to those for Metallurgy Part I, (See Faculty of Engineering.)

VACATION WORK. Students are recommended to spent five weeks during the long vacation in obtaining practical experience in some metallurgical establishment. SCIENCE. r 1029

METALLURGY PART II. (Science Course)— The subject matter of Metallurgy Part II, together with Metallography (see Faculty of Engineering), but the practical work is not so extensive.

SCHOOL OF METALLURGY. Final Honours and Degree of Master of Science. The candidate will be required to attend lectures and practical work and pass the examinations in Proper ties of Metals Part I, and Electro-metallurgy. He will be expected to make a critical review of the literature of one or more general metallurgical or metallographio subjecte, ar.d to carry out a definite piece of research work, and submit a report on this.

NATURAL PHILOSOPHY. NATURAL PHILOSOPHY, PAKT 1. Methods of Physical Science. Physical Quantities. Kinematics.—Applications of Geometry : length, angle, area, volume. Standard and unit of length. Principles ot length measurement. The speci fication of position: frame of reference. Car tesian and Polar co-ordinates. Time, tho sidereal day and the second. Vectors, addition, subtraction; components, resolu tion. Motion. Specifications of velocity, variable velocity. Acceleration; constant ac celeration. Freely falling bodies. Motion in circular path with uniform speed. Statics.—Force: addition and resolution of forces. A particle is in equilibrium when resultant of all forces acting on it is zero. Parallel forces, principle of lever, couple. Centre ot mass. Coplanar forces equivalent to a single force and a couple. Balance. Dynamics.—Newton's Law, I. Mass, standard, unit. Weight. Conservationofmass. Density. Momen tum. Impulse. Newton's Laws II. and III. Law of gravitation. Kepler's Laws. Laws of motion and gravitation account for Kepler's Laws. Work, energy, power ; units. Principle of J030 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1936.

conservation of energy. Elements of dynamics of rotation. I'he gyrostat. Simple harmonic motion. Unite and dimensions. Outline of the history of mechanics. Outliue of the nature of the planets, stars and nebulae. Gravitation.—Cavendish experiment, determination of the gravitation constant. Pendulum determina tion of the acceleration of terrestrial gravity. Hydromechanics.—Pressure at a point. Pressure due to a column ot liquid. Archimedes' Principle. Manometers. Barometer, McLeod Gauge. Bernoulli's theorem and applications of it. Low pressure pumps. Properties of Matter.— Density. Boyle's Law, Hooke s Law. Young's modulus, compressibility, rigidity. Flexure of beam. Torsion. Viscosity, Surface tension. Diffusion. Constitution of matter. Elements of Kinetic Theory. Col loids. Heat.—Thermometry. Expansion. Calorimetry, specific and latent heats. Mechanical equivalent of heat. Change of state, fusion and vaporisation. Liquefaction of gases. Conduction. Heat radiation. Reflection and refraction. Stefan's and Wien's Laws. Wave Motion and Sound.—Nature and propagation ot waves. Velocity of sound. Pitch, loudness, quality. Reflection. Refraction. Resonance. Stationary waves. Vibration of strings and air columns. Light.—Sources. Photometry, photometric unite. Reflection, mirrors. Refraction, prisms, lenses. Velocity ot light. Dispersion. Spec trum analysis. Camera, microscope, tele scope. Nature of light. Polarisation. Simple interference phenomena. Electrostatics Fundamental Phenomena. In vers* square law, quantity. E.S. Units. Electric field, lines of force. Potential, E.M.F. Electroscope and electrometer. Distribution of electricity. SCIENCE. 1031

Condensers. Capacity of conductors and condensers. Energy ot a charged conductor. Specific inductive capacity. Current.—Electromotive force. Resistance. Ohm's Law, ampere, volt, and ohm. Wheatetone's Bridge. Joule's Law. Electrolysis. Prim ary and storage batteries. Hydrogen ion concentration. Thermo-electric phenomena. Magnetism.—Inverse square law. Moment of magnet. The magnetic field. Lines ot force. Induction, magnetisation. Properties of iron. Dia- magnetisui. Terrestrial magnetism. Magnetic field due to a current.—Magnetic field due to current in (a) straight conductor, (b) circular coil, (c) solenoid. Electro-magnets. Electrodynamics.—Action of a magnetic field on a conductor. Galvanometers, ammeters, volt meters. Electromagnetic induction.—Lenz's and Faraday's laws. Self and mutual induction, henry. The trans former and induction coll. Direct current gene rator and motor. Alternating currents (element ary treatment). Applications.—Telegraph. Telephone, High fro. quency currents. Wireless telegraphy. Electrical Units. Electricity and matter-—Electric discharge, cath ode rays. Rontgen rays. Radiography. Radioactivity. Isotopes. Atomic Structure. Laboratory Work.— Experiments relating to the above course.

Text-books recommended:— For Pass. Natural Philosophy, Ft. I. Lecture Notes. Wateon—Text-Book of Physios. Jeans—The Stars in their Courses. Practical Physics I.—By the Staff of the Depart ment. ]032 DETAILS OF SUIUEOTS, 1936.

Books of reference: — Lodge—Pioneers of Science. Mach—Mechanics (Historical portion). Long Vocation raiding in preparation for Natural Philosophy Pt. II: the descriptive and experimental parts ot Roberts—Heat. Griinsehl—Electricity. Bloch—Kinetic Theory ot Gases.

NATURAL PHILOSOPHY—PART II.— Mechanics. Properties ot Matter. Heat. Light. Sound. Electricity and Magnetism Candidates will be expected to read certain original papers. A list of these will be posted in the Department. For Honours. A fuller treatment ot the subjects specified above for the Pass Examination. Practical Work.—The experiments and measurameuts relating to the above course. Text-books recommended :— For Pass and Honours. Worthington—Dynamics of Rotation. Poynting and Thomson—Properties of Matter. Roberts—Heat and Thermodynamics. Wood—Sound. Houston—Light. Starling—Magnetism and Electricity, or Thomson—Elements of Theory of Electricity and Magnet sm. Practical Physics II.—Staff ot the Department. For reference : Tuttle and Satterly—Theory of Measurements. Griffiths—Measurement of Temperature. S0D5N0E. 1033

Blooh—Kinetic Theory of Gases. Crowther—Ions, Electrons and Ionizing Radia tions. Saha and Srivastava—Text-book of Heat. Glazebrook—Dictionary of Applied Physics. Laws—Electrical Measurements. Mdllikan—Tho Electron. Castelfranchi—Recent Advances in Atomic Physics. Long Vacation reading in preparation for Natural Philosophy Pt. HI: Roberts—Beat. Fabry—Elements de Thermodynamique. Riohtmeyer—Introduction to Modern Physios, or Castelfranchi—Recent Advances in Atomic Physics. Pupin—From Immigrant to Inventor.

NATURAL PHILOSOPHY—PAKT III.— General Physics. Heat. Thermodynamics. Light. Electricity and Magnetism. Elementary Electron and Quantum Theory. X Rays. Radioactivity. Propagation of Telephone and Telegraph currents.

For Honours. A fuller treatment of the subjects specified above for the Pass Examination. Practical Work.—Experiments and measurements re lating to the above course. Candidates will be expected to read certain original papers. A list ot these will be posted in the- Department. Text-books recommended:— For Pass. As for Natural Philosophy, Part XX, together with— B irtwistle—Thermodynamics, Sommerteld—Atomic Structure or •1034 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1936.

Ruark and Urey—Atoms, Molecules and Quanta. Fleming—Propagation of Currents in Telephone and Telegraph Conductors. Hague—A. C. Bridge Methods. Hevesy and Paneth—Radioactivity, van der BijI—Thermionic Vacuum Tube. Watson—Practical Physics. Laws—Electrical Measurements. Hooke of reference: — Schuster and Nicholson—Theory of Optics. Jeans—Relativity. Article Encyl. Brit.. 13 Ed. Ewing—Thermodynamics for Engineers. Aston—Isotopes. Whittaker—Analytical Dynamics. Sackur--Thermochemistry and Thermodynamics. Siegbahn—The Spectroscopy of X-Rays. Fowler—Series in Line Spectra. Compto"—Electrons and X-Rays. Whittaker and Robertson—The Calculus ot Ob servations. Bairstow—Applied Aerodynamics. Loeb—Kinetic Theory of Gases. Burton—Colloidal Solutions. Darwin—The Tides. Callendar—Properties of Steam. Wood—Physical Optics. Drude—Theory of Optics. Maxwell—Electricity and Magnetism. Everitt—Communication Engineering. .). .Land G. P. Thomson -Conduction of Electricity through Gases. Whittaker—History ot the Theories of Ether and Electricity. Pauling and Goudsmit—Structure of Line Spec tra. Rutherford, Chiadwick and Ellis — Radiations from Radioactive Substances. Mott—Outline of Wave Mechanics. Allmand—Applied Electro-chemistry. Kohlrausch—Lehrbuch der practischen Physik. Kaye and Laby—Physical and Cliemioai Con stants. Glazebrook—Dictionary of Applied Physios. SCIENCE. 1033-.

Wien und Harms-—Handbuch der Experimental- physik. Geiger und Scheel—Handbuch der Physik.

SCHOOL OF NATURAL PHILOSOPHY. Final Honours and Degree of Master of Science. The Report referred to in the Regulations for this- degree will consist of a thesis on some branch of physics, usually of modern physics, and must embody a critical review ot the literature (including that in French and German). The candidate must also sub mit a Record of an experimental research carried out by him. Copies of the Report and Record must be deposited in the University Library. To assist candidates in their studies a Physios Con ference is held periodically in the Natural Philosophy School. PARASITOLOGY. PARASITOLOGY, PART A.— The full course in Parasitology will comprise work in two years. The first part will consist of lectures, demon strations, and practical work extending over not less than 45 hours, and will deal with the following subject matter: — Parasitism in general: definitions, types and degreea of parasitism, propagation of parasites, pre disposing conditions, influence of parasitism on the host and on the parasite, prophylaxis, treatment, interrelation of man and domesti cated animals as regards their parasites. Directions tor collection, preservation and examina tion of parasites. Systematic study of the parasites of domestic ani mals. General account of the chief distin guishing features of each of the following groups, with brief descriptions ot the more im portant points in the structure, and the life- history of the more common and. important genera ot each:—-Trematoda, Cestoda, Nema- toda, Acanthocephala. QiQ36 DETAILS OB SUBJECTS, 1938,

Books tor Reference— Wallis Hoare—System of Veterinary Medicine (Section on Parasitic Diseases). Neveu-Lemaire — Parasitologic dee animaux domestiques. Macqueen—Neumann's Parasites. Underhill—Parasites and Parasitosis of Domestic Animals. Herms—Laboratory Guide to Parasitology. Baylis—A Manual of Helminthology.

PARASITOLOGY, PART B.— The second part ot this course will consist of lectures, •demonstrations and practical work extending over not less than 30 hours. Parasitism in General: definitions, types and degrees of parasitism, propagation ot parasites, pre disposing conditions, influence of parasitism on the host and on the parasite, prophylaxis, treatment, interrelation of man and domesti cated animals as regards their parasites, if con sidered necessary. Systematic study of the parasites of domestic ani mals (continued), dealing more especially with the Arthropoda inimical to domesticated animals. General account of the chief distinguishing features ot each of the following groups, with brief descriptions of the mora important points in the structure and life-history of the more common and important genera of each: — Arachnida especially Fentastomida and Aoarina. and Eexapoda especially Diptera, Siphon- aptera, Hemiptera, Anoplura, Mallophaga. Books for reference (additional)— Herms—Medical and Veterinary Entomology (Last edition). Alcock—Entomology for Medical Officers. Daniels—Laboratory Studies in Tropical Medi cine. Patten and Evans—Insects, Ticks, Mites and Venomous Animals of Medical and Veterinary Importance. SCIENCE. j 037

NUTRITION AND FOOD STUFFS.

NUTRITION AND FOODSTUFFS, PART X— This course will include (a) two lectures a week on Economics and Market ing, as takeu by students in Agriculture Part (b) sixteen lectures on Public Health, with practi- tical demonstrations. (c) sixteen lectures on Nutrition, with practical work. (d) candidates must also produce evidence that they have had a satisfactory training in Domestic Economy at a school recognised for this purpose by the Faculty.* NUTRITION AND FOODSTUFFS, PAlRT IX— This course will include— (a) Dairy Technology (sec under Agriculture). (b) Technology of Selected Food Manufactures. (c) Group Nutrition with practical work. i. Infants, ii. Children, iii. Adults. (d) Comparative Dietetics. (e) Dieto-therapeutics with Practical work, includ ing Dietetics in relation to i. Diabetes, ii. Anaemias. iii. Alimentary Disorders, iv. Cardiac, Respiratory and Renal conditions. (f) Elementary Dental Anatomy and Physiology and Oral Hygiene. PHYSIOLOGY. Long Vacation Reading in preparation tor Physiology Part I, will be prescribed during the year.

•The following school has been recognised—The Emily McPher son College of Domestic Economy. 1038 DETAILS OF tilili JECTS, 10SS.

PHYSIOLOGY—PAKT I.— Practical Bin-chemistry—The reactions of carbohydrates fats, lipina, enzymes and proteins. Experiments on colloids. The composition of the chief tissues, organs and body fluids and the reactions of their more important constituents. The composition ot foods. Simple experiments on digestion and respiration. Practical Biophysics—The response of muscle and nerve to stimulus; alterations in the response produced by physical and chemical agents. The nature of the heart-beat; the influence on the heart, arteries and capillaries ot physical and chemical agents. Reflex action. Systematic Physiology—The standard is that given by the lectures. Students are advised to read— Halliburton—Handbook of Physiology and Osborne and Young—Elementary Prac tical Bio-Chemistry. For practical work students are required to provide themselves with, apparatus in accordance with a list which will be posted in the Laboratory. Long Vacation Reading in preparation for Physiology,. Part II, will be prescribed during the year.

PHYSIOLOGY—PART IX— Practical Biochemistry—Quantitative estimation ot the chief components of the body and of the chief ingredients of food and excreta. Practical Biophysics—The subjects of Part X, but more advanced. Experiments on respiration with analyses of air. Experiments on special senses. The electric reactions ot living tissues. Systematic Physiology—Mammalian physiology, includ ing the eentral nervous system, of the standard- indicated by Starling's Principles of Human Physiology. SCIENCE. 103if

Biochemistry—A course of lectures as set out in the details of subjects ot the Faculty of Agriculture. 'Text Books:— . . Starling—Principles ot Human Physiology. Bayliss—Principles of General Physiology (selected chapters).

SURVEYING, PARTS 1. and II.—(See under Faculty o Engineering). ZOOLOGY. Long Vacation Reading in preparation for Zoology,. Part I :— Students who have not taken Animal Biology to the School Leaving Pass Standard are recommend to read :— Haldane and Huxley—Animal Hiology.

ZOOLOGY—PAKT I.— (a) Lectures. The elements of vertebrate and invertebrate mor phology. General account of the -following phyla with descriptions of the structure and life history ot typical examples; Protozoa, Porifera, Ooelenterata, Platyhelminthes, Nematoda, An nelida, Arthropoda, Mollusca; Eohinodermata. Chordata. The outlines of development of the frog and bird, and of the foetal membranes in Mammalia. The formation of the germ-cells, meiosis and syn- gamy. Outline of, the Theory of Evolution. Elementary Genetics. Animal behaviour and psychology. (b) Laboratory work and Demonstrations— The examination by means ot dissections and pre parations of examples of the chief types of animals and ot the structures dealt with in the lectures. 06 J 040 ' DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1936.

Text-books— Borradaile:—Manual of Zoology (4th or later Edition). Buchanan—Elements .of Animal Morphology (2nd edition.) Books for reference: — Puunett—Mendelism. 7th Edition. Marshall and Hurst—Practical Zoology (6th sdition). Students must be provided with the following :— Microscope, with low and high powers, magnifying at least 60-450 diameters; to be approved by the Professor. Box of approved dissecting instruments. Note books. Box of coloured crayons. A limited number of Microscopes are available for hire by students not proceeding to Zoology IT. Long Vacation reading in preparation for Zoology Part II. Newman—Evolution, Genetics and Eugenics.

ZOOLOGY.—PABT IX— One ot the two following courses (Sections A and Bi section A includes: — 1. Invertebrata. 2. Cytology and certain general problems of Zoology. Section A. 1. The morphology and life histories of typical examples of the chief divisions of the Inver- tebrata will be treated. In the Laboratory a scries of forms illustrating the lectures will be studied. Textbook:— Borradaile, Eastham, Potts and Saunders—The Invertebrata. SCIENCE. 1041

Books for reference: — Parker and Haswell—Text-book of Zoology (Vol. X), 2nd, or later. Edition. Sedgwick—Text-book of Zoology, Vols. I and XXX Treatise on Zoology—Ed. by E. Ray Lankester. Cambridge Natural Eistory. MacBnde—Text-book of Embryology, Inverte brata. Minchin—Introduction to the Study of the Protozoa. 2. The structure ot the cell and the function of Its various parts, with special reference to Gene tics, together with the principles of cell dif ferentiation in the embryo and other eel) problems. Text-book: — Agar—Cytology. Books ot reference.: — Morgan—Experimental Embryology. Morgan—The Physical Basis of Heredity. Washburn—The Animal Mind. Holmes—The Evolution of Animal Intelligence. Section B includes; — 1. Comparative Anatomy and Embryology of Ver tebrata and the distribution ot animals. 2. Genetics and certain general problems of Zoology. Section B. 1. The Vertebrata from the morphological, embryological and systematic standpoints. The em bryology of the frog and chick will be studied in more detail. A few lectures will deal with the distribution of recent and fos sil animals with special reference to Aus tralia. Books tor reference: — Sedgwick—Text-book of Zoology, Vol. IX Graham Kerr—Text-book of Embryology, Verte brata. j0,1-J. DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1936

Parker and Baswell—Text-book of Zoology (Vol.. IX), 2nd, or later, edition. Lillie—Embryology of the Chick. Cambridge Natural Bistory. Kingsley—Comparative Anatomy of Vertebrates. Heilprin—Distribution of Animals. Newbigin—Animal Geography. 2. These lectures will deal with Heredity, Variation,. Evolution and cognate problems. Text-book: — Crew—Animal Genetics.

Books for reference: — Holmes—The Trend of the Race. Morgan—Physical Basis of Heredity. Thorn dike—Mental and Social Measurements. In both Sections A and B, Sub-section 1 will consist of about 50 lectures, and Sub-section 2 of the remaining lectures. The greater part of the laboratory work will deal with the subject matter of Sub-section 1. Long Vacation reading in preparation for Zoology, Part III will be announced during 3rd term.

ZOOLOGY—PART XIX— Students taking Honours in Part III, are required to- undertake some field work approved by the Professor. This work should be started in the long Vacation. One of the two courses outlined in Sections A and B for Zoology, Fart II., but taken at a higher standard. Candidates take one section only in each year. Candidates who have taken Section A for Part II must take Section B for Part 111, and vice versa. It is to be understood that the second year's work will depend upon a knowledge of the first, and the third year's work upon a knowledge of that of both the first and second years, and that the examination papers set will include questions requiring such knowledge. Where desirable, Laboratory Demonstrations will take the place of Lectures. SCIENCE 1043

Books of reference (in addition to those for Part II): — Original Papers, and other works, as indicated in the course.

SCHOOL OF ZOOLOGY. Final honours and degree of Master of Science. Candidates will be required to carry out some original research and to prepare a thesis embodying a review ot the literature of some wider branch of Zoology. A course of more general reading will also be prescribed far each candidate.

DIPLOMA OP ANALYTICAL CHEMISTRY.— Chemistry, Parts 1., II., and III., and Natural Philosophy, Part 1. (See under Science) Fourth Year. Tho Candidate will be required in the final examina tion of the fourth year to show a general acquaintance with the problems and methods of technical analysis. If his fourth year training has been gained outside the University, he may be granted, on application to the Registrar not less than three mouths before the time of entry for the examination and subject to approval by the Faculty of Science, the right to be examined mainly, though not solely, upon some special branch selected by him self. If his training has been gained within the Uni versity, the examination will be wider in scope but not so stringent in any one particular branch. Candidates may, when entering for this examination, submit any original chemical work which they have published or propose to publish; and such work shall be taken into account by the examiners, but shall not be accepted in lieu of the Examination. The work of the fourth year will include reading in all sections of the subject and, when the work is done in the University laboratory, candidates will be given instruction and demonstrations in technical methods Applied to the following:— ' ••• : 1. Water Analysis: (a) for technical uses, (b) for domestic uses. • •• • 1044 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1936

2. Gas Analysis (elementary): including demon stration in the use of the gas calorimeter. 3. Coal Analysis: proximate and ultimate, includ ing demonstration in the use of the bomb calorimeter. *• Sodp Analysis: determination ot moisture, alka linity, total tatty (and rosin) acids, separa tion of rosin from tatty acids (Twiohell'a method). 6. Oils, Fats and "Waxes: determination of, the typical chemical "constants." Conversion of higher alcohols into corresponding acids. 6. Foodstuffs: (a) milk, complete examination by. official methods, (b) butter (partial), (c) cream of tartar, including search for traces of lead, (d) cereals for crude fibre. 7. Leather: estimation of tains and non-tans in the- valuation of "degree of tannage." 8. Steel Analysis: for carbon, silicon, phosphorus, sulphur, manganese,, nickel; including de monstrations of the so-called "rapid methods, at th"e furnace." .... 9. Arsenic: traces-. 10. Rubber Analysis: for mineral matter, robins. substitutes, and "co-efficient of vuloann*. tion." 11. Paints (ready mixed): separation of pigment, from vehicle, and examination of the latter. 12. Systematic Analysis of Bocks- 13. Hydrogen Ion Concentration: eleotrometrie- methods. DIPLOMA OP DIETETICS— See Specimen Course for B.Sc. ih Dietetics. Fourth Year. •plinical Dietetics. Candidates shall attend such lectures and demon strations at an approved Dietary Department of •» Teaching Eo^pital as the Faculty of Science shall determine. SCIENCE. -104*

Tho examination shall be both- theoretical and prac tical. I*oks recommended: — Gauss—Clinical Dietetics. Hutchison and Mottram—Food and the Principles ol" Dietetics. Records.—Each candidate shall keep full records as prescribed in the Regulations of the work performed in the Dietary Department and shall submit these records to the Examiners. Case .Reports.—Full case reports, including dietary treatment and results of such treatment on. two or more cases shall also be submitted by each candidate to tho Examiners. Thesis on Nutrition.—Each candidate shall carry out in the Physiology or Biochemistry De partment of the University an investigation on a subject relating to nutrition. The sub ject must be approved by the Eead of the Department, and the results ot the investiga tion shall be submitted to him for examina tion. Advanced Dieto-Therape.utics. — Candidates shall attend such leotures and demonstrations, and carry out such practical work in Dieto- Therapeutics as the faculty shall determine. The examination shall include theoretical and clinical Dieto-Therapeutics. Books recommend ed : — McLeeter—Nutrition and Diet in Bealth audi Disease. Josliu—Treatment of Diabetes Mellitu-?.. Periodic literature on Nutrition in relation to disease. FEES. I.—For Instruction- For instruction in an approved Dietary Department of a Teaching Boepital,* to he paid to the institution &Vb 15 0> 1046 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1936.

IT.—For Examination. (Regulation Xa, Section 3.) Sub-section a - - - -.-..380 b - 110 o 110 d ... 220 e - .... 3 3 0 •The Dietary Department of St. Vincent's Hospital has been approved. SCIENCE 1047

Specimen tCourses for the B.Sc. Degree. Approved hi/ the Faculty of Science. First Tear. Second Year. Third Year BACTERIOLOGY; AND BIOCHEMISTRY. I.— Botany I.'"• Zoology I. Chemistry II. f Bacteriology II. Chemistry I, f Physiology I. '. Biochemistry Nat. Phil. I. i Bacteriology I. Chemistry III. Pure Maths. I II.— Botany I. Chemistry II. j Bacteriology 11. Chemistry I. f Physiology I. I Bloohemlstry^ Nat I'hU. I. (.Bacteriology I. and either ' Zoology I. Botany II. or BOTANY Zoology II. I.—MORPHOLOGICAL Botany I. Botany II. Botany III. Chemistry I, Oeology II. Chemistry II. Geology I. Nat. Phil. I. II.—ECONOMIC, LEADING TO FORESTRY— Botany I. Agrlo. Chem. Botany III. Chemistry I. Agrlc. Entomology. {Surveying I. Geology I. Botany II. Nat. Phil. I. Zoology I. III.—SYSTEMATIC AND PLANT GEOGRAPHY— Botany I. Botany II. Botany III. Chemistry I. ^Surveying I. Geology II. Geology I. Nat. Phil. I. - IV.—• PHYSIOLOGICAL— . Botany I. Botany II. Botany III. Chemistry I. ( Physiology, I. Chemistry II. Nat. Phil. I. '(. Bacteriology I. Pure Maths. I. or Graphics. V.—PATHOLOGICAL— Botany I. Botany 11. Botany ill. Chemistry I. Zoology I[. Bacteriology I. Nat. Phil. I. Agr. Entomology 1. Zoology I. Principles of Horticulture. Horticultural Science.

t French ami Gorman A. ami H. ure compulsory for all courses. §Subjct;t to coemption from prerequisites. ' ,.•..•.. 1048 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1938.

First Year. Second Year. Third Year

BOTANY AND PHYSIOLOGY. I. Botany I. Botany II. Botany III. Chemistry I. Physiology I. Physiology II. Graphics. Chemistry II. Nat. Phil. I. II. Botany I. Botany II. Botany III. Chemistry I. Physiology I. Physiology II. Nat. Phil. I. Chemistry II. Zoology I. CHEMISTRY. I. Chemistry I. Chemistry II. Chemistry III. • Graphics.... Nat. Phil. II. Pure Maths. II, Nat. Phil'..I. Pure Maths. 1. II. Chemistry I. Chemistry II. Electrical Eat!. 1. Graphics. Nat. Phil. II. Chemistry III. L Nat. Phil. I. Pure Maths. I. III. Chemistry 1. Chemistry II. Electrical ting. I. Mixed Maths. I. Nat. Phil. II. Chemistry 111. Nat. Phil. 1. Pure Maths, 1. IV. Chemistry I. Chemistry 11. Chemistry 111. Mixed Maths. I. Pure Maths. 11. Pure Maths. III. Nat. Phil. 1. Pure Maths. I. CHEMISTRY AND ENGINEERING. Chemistry I. Chemistry II. Chemistry III. Nat. Phil. I. Nat. Phil. II. Metallography Pure Maths. I. •(Bng. Course) Properties of Graphics Bng. Design IA. Metals I. Properties of Bng. Design II.A Materials (Metals and Concrete) 4th Year (tor M.Sc.) Chemistry, Electrical Engineering I. CHEMISTRY AND GBOLOQY. I, Chemistry I. Chemistry II. Chemistry III. Geology I. Geology II. Geology III. Nat. Phil. I. Zoology I.

•Students will be required in addition to attend the lectures given cm Saturday Mornings during First Term. SCIBNCK 1049'

First Year. Second Year. Third Year. CHEMISTRY AND GEOLOGY (Continued) II. Botany I. Chemistry II. Chemistry III. Chemistry I. Geology II. Geology III. Geology I. Nat. Phil. I. III. Chemistry I. Chemistry II. Chemistry III. Geology I. Geology II. Geology III. Nat. Phil. I. Pure Maths. I. CHEMISTRY AND PHYSIOLOGY. Chemistry I. Chemistry II. Chemistry III.. Nat. Phil. I. Nat. Phil. II. Physiology II. Pure Maths. I. Physiology I. CHEMISTRY AND ZOOLOGY. Chemistry I. : Chemistry II. Chemistry III. Nat. Phu. I. Zoology II. Zoology III. Pure Maths. I. Zoology I. DIETETICS. Nat. Phil. I. Bacteriology 1. Bacteriology II. Chemistry I. Physiology. I. Biochemistry Zoology I. Organic Chemistry Nutrition and Botany I. (as for Chem Foodstuffs II. istry II.) Nutrition and Foodstuffs I. 4th year. Post graduate work in Dietetics. ECONOMIC GEOLOGY. Chemistry I. Chemistry IT. Geology III. Geology I. Geology II. Surveying T.. Graphics Nat. Phil. I. GEOLOGY. I. t!hemistry I. Chemistry II. Geology III. Geology I. Geology II. Nat. Phil. II.. Nat. Phil. I. . Pure Maths. 1. II. Botany I. Chemistry II. Botany II. Chemistry I. Geology II. Geology III. Geology I. Nat. Phil. I. III. Chemistry I. Chemistry II. Geology III.. Geology I. Geology II. Zoology II. Nat. Phil. I. Zoology I. IV. Botany I. Botany II. Geology III.! Chemistry I. Geology II. Zoology II. Geology I. Zoology I. t'1050 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1936.

First Year. Second Year. Third Year. GEOLOGY AND SURVEYING. Chemistry I. Geology II. Geology III. Geology I. Surveying I. Surveying II. Graphics Nat. Phil. I. GEOLOGY AND ZOOLOGY. -Chemistry I. Geology II. Geology III. "Geology I. Zoology II. Zoology III. Nat. Phil. I. Zoology I. MATHEMATICS AND PRACTICAL PHYSICS. Chemistry I. Mixed Maths. II. Mixed Maths. III. Mixed Maths. I. Nat. Phil. II. with Nat. Phil. I. Pure Maths. II. Practical Physics Pure Math*. I. Pure Maths. III. MEDICINE AND SCIENCE. I. Botany I. •Botany n; • Division II. Chemistry 1. Chemistry II; Course for Nat. Phil. !•. Zoology It M.B., B.S,, Zoology I. Degree. METALLURGY. I. Chemistry I. Chemistry II. Chemistry III. Graphics Metallurgy I. Metallurgy II. Nat. Phil. I. (Science Course) (Science. Course) Pure Maths. I. II. Chemistry I. Chemistry II. Geology III. Geology I. Geology II; Metallurgy II. Nat. Phil. I. Metallurgy I. (Science Course) (Science Course) • III. Chemistry 1. Chemistry II. Chemistry III. Geology I. Metallurgy I. Metallurgy II Graphics (Science Course) (Science Course) Not. I'hll. I. NATURAL PHILOSOPHY. Chemistry I. Nat. Phil. II. Nat. PhU. HI. Mixed Maths. I. Pare Maths. II. Pure Maths. Ill Nat. Phil. I. Pure Maths. I. J I. Chemistry I. Nat. PhU. II. Nat. Phil. in. Mixed Maths. I. Pure Maths. II. Mixed Maths. (I. Nat. Phil. I. Pure Maths. I. •III. Chemistry I. Nat. PhU. II. Chemistry II. Mixed Maths. I. Pare Maths. II. Nat. Phil. III. Nat. Phil. I. Pure Maths. I.

Any two of the following. 8CIUNCK 105U

.First Year Second Year Third Year

NATURAL PHILOSOPHY (Continued) IV. Chemistry I. Not. Phil. II. Electrical En Mlied Maths. I. Pure Maths. II. gineering I. Nat. PhU. I. Not. PhU. III. Pure Maths. I. NATURAL PHILOSOPHY AND CHEMISTRY. Chemistry I. Chemistry II. Chemistry III. Nat. Phil. I, Nat. Phil. II. Nat. Phil. III. Pure Moths. I. Pure Maths. IL ZOOLOGY. I. Botany I. Botany II. f Bacteriology I- Chemistry I. Zoology II. lPhysiology I. Nat. PhU. I. Zoology III. Zoology I. II. Botany I. Chemistry II, Botany II. Chemistry I. Zoology II. . Zoology III. Not. Phil. I. Zoology I. III. Botany I. Chemistry II. fBacteriology l. Chemistry I. Zoology II. (.Physiology I. Nat. Phil. 1. Zoology III. Zoology I. IV. Chemistry I. Chemistry II. Geology II. Geology I. Zoology II. Zoology III. Not. Phil. I. Zoology I. ZOOLOGY AND BOTANY. Botany I. Botany II. Botany III. Chemistry I. Zoology II. Zoology III. Nat. Phil. I. Zoology!. ZOOLOGY AND PHYSIOLOGY. Botany I. Chemistry II. Physiology II. Chemistry I. Physiology I. Zoology III. Nat. Phil. I. Zoology II. Zoology I. ZOOLOGY WITH ECONOMIC APPLICATIONS. Botany I. c Bacteriology I. Agrl. Entomology i.. Chemistry I { Physiology I. Bacteriology II. Not. Phil. I. Parasitology Parasitology Zoology I. AorB. AorB. Zoology II. Zoology III. il052 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1936

ADDITIONAL YEAR'S WORK APPROVED FOB •CANDIDATES WHO HAVE COMPLETED THE FOLLOWING COURSES. B.AGR.SC.— (B.) A group II subject distinct from the Agriculture course

Plant Physiology (as prescribed (or Botany III) with Paloeobotany or Physiology II (less Biochemistry). (b) Botany III

Chemistry III (with extra practical work). To) . French A and B, German A and B. B.MET.E.— __ (a) The completion ot any two of the subjects. Chemistry II, Nat. Phil. U, Geology II. (b) Chemistry III or Not. PhU. Ill or Geology III, provided that Part II of the subject chosen-bos been completed under (a). The Faculty will not grant permission to take the Part II i Science subject in a year overloaded with other Subjects.

FOUR TEAR GOUBSB LEADING TO THE TWO DEGREES OF B.A. WITH HONS. AND B.SC. -Chemistry 1. Mixed Maths. II.(Hon, Third or Fourth Year. Mixed Maths. I. (Hon.) Nat. Phil. II. • •.«•• Advanced Lo^ric or .Nat. Phil. I. Pure Maths. II.|(Hon.) Theorv of Statistics •Pure Maths. I. (Hon.) Nat. Phil. III. Fourth or Third Year Mixed Maths. III. (Hon.) Pure Maths. III. (Ron.) Both subjects to be taken at the Final Exam, in Arts Degree with Homt.) PRIZES AND SCHOLARSHIPS.

BOWEN PRIZE.

SUBJECT POR MARCH, 1936. Parliamentary control ot public finance in Victoria.

SUBJECT TOR MARCH, 1937. The relations between Upper and Lower Houses in Australian State Parliaments, 1920-1932. THE COBDEN CLUB MEDAL. The Examination shall be open to all Students who are eligible to compete for the Wyselaskie Scholarship in Economics. The Examination shall be the Examination for the Wyselaskie Scholarship in Economics. If the Scholarship be awarded, the Medal shall be given to the Candidate who is placed second iu order of merit; but if the Scholarship be not awarded, the Medal shall be given to the Candidate who is placed first iu order of merit. Provided that it in any year there be no Examination for the Wyselaskie Scholarship in Economics, the Cobden Club Medal shall be awarded to the Candidate who is placed first at the Final Examination in the School of Economics. THE H. B. HIGGINS SCHOLARSHIP. Group A. The examination will be in two of the following; 11) Greek Poetry. In 1936: — Aeschylus—Prometheus Vinctue. Aristophanes—Frogs. . Sophocles—Eleotra. Theocritus, I-XV. Homer • Iliad VI and IX. 1054 DETAILS OF SUB.1KCTS, 193d.

In 1937:— Theocritus, I-XV. Homer—Iliad VI and IX. Sophocles—Oedipus Tyrannus. Pindar—Olympians I-VIJ. Pindar—Pythitins I-IV. Euripides—Iphigeneia in Aulis. Recommended for reference :— H. Browne—Homeric Stud.y. G. Murray—Kise of the Greek Epic. J. \V. Mackail—Leotures on Greek Poetry. Norwood—Greek Tragedy. J. A. Symonds— Studies in the Greek Poets. S. H. Butcher—Aristotle's 'I'heory of Poetry and Fine Art. VV. K. Roberts—Longinus on the Sublime. Vaughan—Types of Tragic Drama. Woodhouso—The Composition of Homer's Odyssey. Sheppard—The Pattern of the Iliad. ""=°-~— f^nh (3) Latin Poetry. . In 1935 : In 1936: — •Vergil—Aeneid TV. Horace—Odes. Oa,tullus. Plautus—Miles Glorioeus. Lucretius I. In 1937: — Horace—Odes. Lucretius I. Juvenal—I, III, VIII, X. Plautus—Trinummus. Vergil—Georgics I and II. Recommended for reference: — Tyrrell—Latin Poetry. Sellar—Roman Poets. , Gordon—The Classics and English Literature. Duff—Literary History of Home. Campbell—Horace. SCHOLARSHIPS, ETO. 1055-

(3) In 1935, English Poetry. The books of English Poetry and Criticism pre scribed for English Literature, Part HI in 1934. In 1936: — The books of English Poetry and Criticism pre scribed for English Literature, Part HI, in 1935. Group B. The examination will be in two of the following: — French, German, and English Poetry. In 1935: — (1) and (2) The books of French and German Poetry set for Pass and Honours for Part I in 1932, for Part It in 1933, and for Part HI in 1934. Also, in the case of French, a study of the main developments of poetry during the 19th. century. In 1936: — (1) and (2) The books of French and German Poetry set for Pass and Honours for Part I in 1933, for Part TI in 1934, and for Part HT in 1935. (3) English Poetry. In 1935:— The books of English Poetry and Criticism pre scribed for English. Literature, Part UT, in 1934. In 1936:.— The books of English Poetry and Criticism, pre scribed for English Literature Part HI, in 1936.

THE W. T. MOLLISON SCHOLARSHIPS. ]. 'FRENCH— The papers set for the Final Examination is the School of French Language and Litera ture, along with the oral test. 67 1056 DKTAILS OP SUB.1KCTS, 1936.

2. GERMAN— The papers set for the Final Examination in the School of Germanic Languages, along with the oral test.

3. * ITALIAN— (a)'A 'three hours' written examination in Ad vanced Unseen Translation from and into Italian. (b) A three hours' written examination in trans lation from the following: — Silvio PellicO:—Le mie prigioni. Massimo d'Azeglio—La disfida di-Barletta. Vincenzo Gioberti—II primato civile degli Italian!.

.4. JAPANESE— An examination similar to that set.for advanced students of Japanese at the University of Sydney, which includes Classical Texts, Modern .Literature and Newspapers, and Composition. (See Text-books under Instructorship in Japanese.) "Candidates, in .these languages must ^previously have passed in Latin Part .J. SCHOLARSHIPS, ETO. 1057

PROFESSOR MORRIS PRIZE, SUBJECT POB DECEMBER, 1936. Coleridge as a Literary Critic; or, any subject ap proved ae !the dissertation of a candidaite for the .Final Examination in the School of English Language •and Literature. SHAKESPEARE SCHOLARSHIP. Open for Competition in 1937. (a) Examination: Shakespeare's Life, Times and Work. (b) Essay: Shakespearean comedy. THE WYSELASKIE SCHOLARSHIPS. 1. MATHEMATICS— (1) Quantum Mechanics. (2) Theory of Relativity. (3) Electromaguetism. (4) Statistical Mechanics. i(5) '-Partial .Differential .Equations of [Mathematical iPhysics.

2. NATURAL SCIENCE— (1) Geology, Palaeontology and Mineralogy. '' ;. (2)'Chemistry, with Laboratory-work. ;(3) .'Zoology, with Laboratory work. .•(•4) Botany, with Laboratory work. The Examination in the foregoing groups will- cover1 the .•ground'of the following University Courses :— (1) Geology, Parts I., IT., and'HI., with! Laboratory and Field work. (2) Chemistry, Parts I., II., and III., with.Labora tory work. (3), Zoology, Parts I., II., and III., with Laboratory work. (4) Botany, Part I., II., and III., with Laboratory work. The • Examination for the next Wyselaskie Scholarship '4n Natural Science will be in Group (4) of the subjects ' above set out; the next following, in Group (1); and •so on, in rotation, at subsequent Examinations. 67* 1058 DETAILS OF SUBJECTS, 1936.

3. ENGLISH CONSTITUTIONAL HISTORY— The University Course in British History Part B., in British History Part D., in Constitutional and Legal History and in Modern Political Institutions, as proscribed for the Final Examination.

4. POLITICAL ECONOMY— The University Course in Economic History, Economics, Part I, Economios, Part II, Economics, Part III and History of Economic Thought as- prescribed for tho Final Examination, with special reference to the Economic History ot Australia, and contemporary economic conditions in Aus tralia.

5. MODERN LANUUAOES— (1) English (1936). (2) French. (3) German. The Examination for the next Wyselaskie Scholarship) in Modern Languages will be in English, the next foL lowing in French, the next following in German, and so on in rototim. The papers set in the Examination will be, tor English the same papers as those set in the Final Examination for School E.; for French, the papers set in French in the Pinal Examination in the School of French Language and Litera ture, along with the Oral Test; for German, the papers set in German in the Final Examination in the School of Germanic Languages. Candidates in German will also present an Essay on some- subject connected with the examination j the subject will be prescribed before the end of the first term in the year of the examination.

Subject for English for 1936:— Any subject approved for the essay ot a candidate f»r Pinal Honours in the School of English Lan guage and Literature. SCHOLARSHIPS, BTO. 1059

Subject for French when next open. L'idoe de 1'infini dans la poesie moderne.

6. CLASSICAL AND COMPARATIVE PHILOLOGY AND LOGIC— (1) Passages lor translation from any Greek or Latin authors. (2) Passages of English for translation into Greek and Latin prose and verse. (3) Questions on the Phonology, Morphology and Grammar of Greek and Latin in particular. (4) General questions on the outlines ot Greek and Roman history, antiquities, and geography. (5) The University Course in Formal Logic. (6) The University Course in Advanced Logic for the ordinary degree. 'The papers set iu the Examination for subjects (1) and, (4) above will be the same pauers as those set in the Final Examination in the School of Classical Philology in the same term, and entitled respectively Greek Unseen Translation, Latin Unseen Translation, General Paper; the papers set for subjects (2) and (3) will correspond to those entitled Translation into Greek Prose and Verse, Translation into Latin Prose and Verse, Comparative Philology.

By order of the Professorial lioard,.

D. 11. COPLAND, Chairman. 58/7/35 1060 ANNOUNCEMENTS FOK 1936.

ANNOUNCEMENTS.

TERM EXAMINATIONS, 1936. In accordance with the provisions of Chapter II., Regu lation II., Division I., Section 3, Term1-Examinations in- substitution tor the Annual Examinations will be held in 1936 in-the following subjects :— (1) All subjects!-for. Degrees, in Engineering with the- exception of Pure and Mixed Mathe matics, Natural Philosophy, Chemistry, Geology Metallurgy, Architecture (Engineering Course), and the subjects confined to th* Pinal Years at courses for Engineering de grees, excepting Electrical Engineering, Part I. and Mechanical Engineering, Part II. (2) Free Drawing, Graphics, Strength and Elasticity of Materials and Surveying, Part I., in the course for the Degree ot Bachelor of' Architecture. (3) Graphics, Surveying, Electrical Engineering, Part 1., and Parasitology, in the course for the- Degree of Bachelor of Science. (4) Agricultural Engineering and Surveying in the- Agriculture courses. ANNOUNCEMENTS FOR 1936 1061

EVENING LECTURES, 1936. It-is proposed to hold Evening Lectures at theiUniversity in 1936, in the following subjects:— Accountancy, Part I. and English, B.. Business Practice. European History, C. Accountancy, Pt. IIA (1937) French, Parti. Accountancy, Pt. IIB (1936) French, .Part II. •Logic (1936). German', Part I. •Ethics (L937). History of Philosophy. Ancient History. Italian- Auditing. Japanese. Botany, Part 1., with Lab- Latin, Part I. oratory Work. Latin, Part II. British History A. and C. Mixed Mathematics, Part I. Commercial and Industrial Natural Philosophy, Part I., Organisation. with Laboratory Work. Commercial Law, Part T. Philosophy, Part I. Economic Geography. Pure Mathematics, Part I. Economic History. Pure Mathematics, Part II. Economics, Part I. Russian. English, A. Certain of these are held between 4 p.m. and 6 p.m., and are the ordinary lectures in the subject. Those held after 6 o'clock arc for the most part for Pass only. The fees will bo the same as for day lectures. Entry for evening lectures must be made on or before Saturday, 22nd February, 1936. Fees must be. paid into the University account at the National Bank' not later than Saturday, 22nd February : they may be paid by the term or by the year. Lectures begin on Monday, 9th March. No lectures will be given in any subject unless.'tho number ot entries is satisfactory. . Students desiring Evening. Lectures. im any; other subjects are requested to communicate with the''Registrar:

•Trie course irrthese>subjucts,.'if-required, will begiven-inalteraaCa yean; 1062 ANNOUNCKMKNTS FOR 1!«6.

MASSAGE STUDENTS. Lectures and Demonstrations in Anatomy and Physiology specially adapted for Massage Students are provided as follows:— First Year—Junior Anatomy, Physiology. Second Year—Senior Anatomy. The Fees are as follows:— First Year — Lectures : Junior Anatomy - £S 8 0 Dissections : Practical Anatomy 4 4 0 Lectures: Physiology - - 4 4 0 Examination (each subject) - 2 2 0 Second Year—Lectures : Senior Anatomy - .£8 8 0 Dissections: Practical A natomy 4 4 0 Examination 2 2 0

PUBLIC EXAMINATIONS.

EXHIBITIONS AND PRIZES. The following Exhibitions will be open for competition at the School Leaving Examination to be held in December, 1936, viz:— Twenty-six Exhibitions of .£20 each, one in each of the twenty-six subjects of the School Leaving Exam ination. Two Liet Memorial Prizes in French, one of .£15 and the other of ,£10, open to those who have not learnt French as their native language. For the best essay in French submitted at the Leaving Honour Examination the French Government offers annually a medal inscribed with the winning candidate's name. One Prize of £2 10s., in books, for Commercial Principles and another for Commercial Practice to the candidate next to the Exhibitioner. Candidates must be under 19 years of age, and must l>c classed in two subjects, and must pass or have passed the examination as a whole. List of Scholarships, Exhibitions, and Prizes on Special Foundations, Showing Date at which next open for Competition. a o (Note:—The values of Scholarships are being re vised and in many oases the undermentioned amounts must be reduced). Aitchison (£10) • - 1. Undergraduate - Irregular - first Term, 1936 (£70) - - 2. Undergraduate 1936 (,£350) - 3. Travelling - 1937 Alcock (.£100) - Medical Research Annual - December 1st, 1936 Argus (.£70) Engineering „ - First Term, 1937 o (£30) Civil Engineering 193? *1 (£20) Geology, Part I. „ - Fourth „ 1936 Armytage (£25) - Medical Research „ - March 1st, 1937 > Bage Memorial (£45), Engineering „ - First Term, 1937 s Baird Bursary (£25 p.a.) Medical Course Irregular - February 1st, 1937 Bartlett (£100 each) - ; Research Annual - February 1937 S Beaney (£70) - - 1. Surgery „ - First Term, 1937 as (£100) - - 2. Pathology- „ - Fourth „ 1936 English Essay 1937 Boweu (£5) „ - March 1st, o Catto (£90) Zoology „ - First Term, 1937 Scholarships, Exhibitions and Prizes on Special Foundations—(continued). ia—\witnbii,u/Gu/j. o Chamber of Commerce (£15) 1. Commercial Law - Annual - Fourth Term, 1936 a- (£15) 2. Economics, Part 1. - - - „ „ 1936 O (£15)3. Comm'l. and Indus. Organisation „ 1936 O ft > (£15)4. Banking Currency and Exchange " „ I93G X (£15)5. Public Admin, and Financo or Statistical Method Annual - Fourth Term, 1936 T (£15) 6. Accountancy, Part II. - ,, ..' 19,36 Hugh Childers (£6) - Education ,, - Fourth Term, 1930 0f J. G. Chrisp Bursary (£35) Law course - - - - - Irregular - February 1st, 1937 ^ Cobden Chib Medal - Political Economy Annual - First Term, 1937 X James Cuming (£22) - 1. Agricultural Chemistry ,, - Fourth Term, 1936 O (£22) 2- Agricultural Bin-Chemistry „ - .. „ 1936 p; J. Cuming Memorial (£66) Chemistry, Part Til. - ,, - Fourth Term, 1936 > (W4I „ 1936 S 5 Dick Bursary (£40) Irregular - February 1st, 1937 > „ "".. (JB40) - >t „ „ 1939 3 (£40) ,, „ 1937 o z Dixson (£60) - - 1. Chemistry, Part 111. - Annual - Fourth Term, 1936 (£60) - - 2. Natural Philosophy, Part III. „ 1936 (£20) - - 3. Pure Mathematics, Part II. - ., 1936 Scholarships, Exhibitions and Prizes on Special Foundations-—(continued). Dixson (£20) - 4. Mixed Mathematics, Part 11. Annual - Fourth Terfn, 1936 (£20) - 5. Mech. Engineering, Part IT. 1936 ai (£20) - 6. Engineering Design, Part II. „ 1936 a (£20) - 7. Chemistry, Part II. - „ 1936 o (£20) - 8. Natural Philosophy, Part II. „ 1936 .(• CO (£20) - 9. Metallurgy, Part I. (Sc.) - „ 1936 E (£20) -10. Agricultural Engineering - „ 1936 •0 co Dixson (Research) (£100) I. Chemistry First Term, 1937 1 (£100) 2. Natural Philosophy „ 1937 > (£100) 3. Mathematics .... „ 1937 •3 CC (£30) 4. Electrical- Engineering „ 1937 O (£30) 5. Mechanical Engineering „ 1937 "a (£30) 6. Metallurgical Engineering - „ 1937 H (£150) 7. Engineering . . . - „ 1937 > Original Contribution to Literature 3 Dublin (£10) 2! 1 or Science or Art = r January 31st, 1937 > Dwight (£25) r - 1. Education r Fourth Term 1936 (£25) r r 2. Natural Philosophy, Part I. - „ 1936 s (£25) - 3. Chemistry, Part I. - - r „ 1986 as i—' (£60) - 4. History (Final Examination) 7 Fourth Term 1936 o im - - 5. French (Final Examination) - „ 1936 C3 Scholarships, Exhibitions and Prizes on Special Foundations-—i continued). Dwight (£25) 6. Political Phil, and M.P.I. - - Annual First Term, 1937 OS (£25) 7. Parasitology and Pathology and CO Fourth Term,, 1936 a Bacteriology - ,, o (£60) - - 8. English (Final Examination) - „ Fourth Term ,1936 f Harry Emmerton (£25) Jurisprudence Part I and Con 50 Fourth Term,,193 6 CO stitutional and Legal History „ X Fulton (£45) - Obstetrics and Gynecology - - „ First Term, 1937 CO John Grice (£10/10/-)- Architecture Research Prize - Annual Feb. 28th 1937 1 1 Grimwade (£80) Chemical Research ... n March 1st, 1937 a Harbison-Higinbotham >a Economic Research - - - ,, March 1st. M (£100) 1937 CO Maude Harrington (30/-) Accompanying on Pianoforte - ,, Fourth Term ,1936 O **i H. B. Higgins (£40) Greek, Latin, and English Poetry ,, July, 1936 (£40) English, French, and German Poetry ,, ,, 1936 * Howitt (£50) - - 1. Geology „ First Term, 1937 (£50) - - 2. Zoology „ „ >, 1937 3 (£50) - - 3. Botany „ ,, ,, 1937 > Jamieson (£5) - Clinical Medicine ... „ Second Term,, 1936 O Caroline Kay (£150p.a.) 1. Botany ' Biennial First Term, 1937

(£150p.a.)2. Veterinary „ ,» ,,3 1937 Kernot Memorial Medal Engineering achievement - - Annual - 1936 Scholarships, Exhibitions and Prizes on Special Foundations—(continued).

Kernot (Research) (£70) 1. Chemistry - - - - Annual - First Term, 1937 (£70) 2. Natural Philosophy ' - 1937 (£70)3. Geology ... 1937 a m Kilmany (£200) - Economics - - - „ - First Term, 1937 o Knight Research ... ., - February 1937 > George Lansell (£30) - Mining Engineering - First Term 1937 (£20) - Mining, Part I „ - Fourth 'Perm 1936 Laurie (£7) Logic and Philosophy - „ - ,, „ 1936 Jessie Leggatt (£15) - Roman Law • Annual - Fourth Term, 1936 > (£20) - Law of Contract - 1936 (£25) - Law ot Property - 1936 O Levi Memorial (£60) - Medicine ... Annual First Term, 1937 J. C. Lloyd (£25) - 1. Architecture Part I. etc. Annual Fourth Term, 193.6 (£25) - 2. „ II. etc. 1936 as John Madden (£15) - Law ot Wrongs - - . Annual 1936 > (£65) - Constitutional Law Part I 1936 1937 o McBain (Research) (£45) Zoology Biennial 9i McBain (Research) (£45) Botany Biennial 1936 o First Term, 1937 Melvin Memorial(£45) Engineering ... Annual -1 .unions anu rruca uu opcwicii *• UUiiUAliUU & — \i*oii/i/LH(ivaj , o Mollison— each £180 on pro- ") i _ French - - - - - Triennial - First Term 1937 oa ceeding abroad f., o and £50 hirib I Italian - - .... ., 1938 e 3 > months later ) - Japanese - - „ 1936 so Moran Bursary (£90) Law ------Irregular - February 1st; 1937 R (£90) Medicine ----- ,, 1939 3 (£90) Engineering - „ „ 1036 1 (£90) Wesley College pupil - „ 1936 0 '(£90) Methodist Ladies'College pupil- „ 1937 S> Professor Morris (£4) Literary Criticism A nnual - Fourth Term 1936 o Professor Nanson (£12) Mathematics - Biennial - January 31st, 1936 TI John Nevill (£26) - Veterinary Biennial - First Term, 1037 > No. 1 Rest Home g Bursary (£18) Irregular - February 1st, 1966 5 Ormond (£25) - - 1. Music, Entrance Diploma (3) Annual - February, 1937 > (£25) - - 2. Music, Entrance Mus. Bac. (3) „ - Fourth Term, 1936 o a! (£25) - - 3. Music, First Year Mus. Bac. (3) - ,, „ 1936 CO (£25) - - 4. Music, Second Year Mus. Bac. (1) „ „ 1936 Payne (£14) 4th year B.V.Sc. Course Annual - Fourth Term, 1936 Scholarships, Exhibitions and Prizes on Special Foundations—(continued). Shakespeare (£50 p.a.) Triennial - „ 1937 W. G. Sharp Bursary(£60)Medicine Irregular - February 1st, 1936 CO a Baldwin Spence'r(£8 10/-) Zoology Part I. Annual - Fourth Term, 1936 a Stawell (Research) (£75) Eiiijihedrihir " First Term, 1937 > 5C Alwyn Stewiart a Memorial (£48) Medicine - Annual - December 1st, 1936 CO Stewart (£20 p.a.) - 1. Anatomy - Triennial - Fourth Term, 1936 1 (£20 p.a.) 2. Medicine - „ „ 1937 1 (£20 p.a.) 3. Surgery „ „ 1937 > Alexander Sutherland (£4) English Language and Literature B Annual - Fourth Term, 1936 CO William Sutherland (£3 3/-) Natural Philosophy, Part II. - ,, „ 1936 O David Synle (£125) - Scientific Research „ March 1st, 1937 *n David Tliohipson (£25) Engineering Bursary - Irregular - February 1st, 1937 Sir Geo. Turner (£25) Law Annual - Fourth Term, 1936 Gyles Turner £8/10/- Australasian History - Biennial - „ 1937 g Hy. Gyles Turner Agriculture - - . - Irregular - _ _ _ H Lady Turner (£5) Music, First Year Dip. Mus. Annual Fourth Term, 1930 O as Professor Wilson (£16) Mathematics ... Biennial - January 31st, 1937 R. G. Wilson (£15) - British History D or Australasiani o History A nnual Fourth Term, 1936 CO Scholarships, Exhibitions and Prizes on Special Foundations— (continued).

R. G. Wilson (£15) - European History A or B Annual - Fourth Term, 1936 o (£60) - Classical Philology ., - First „ 1937 o (£50) - Germanic Languages - „ „ 1937 > Wright (£20) - - 1. Mechanical Engineering, Parti. - „ - Fourth Term, 1936 35 (£20) - - 2. Engineering Design - „ „ 1936 ^ (£20) - - 3. Instrumental Music - ,, ., 1936 I (£15) - 4. Constitutional and Legal History „ 1936 i - .. d> P. J. Wright (£15) - Economic Geography - A nnual - Fourth Term 1936 K „ (£15) - Economios, Part II. ,, 1936 o Wrixon (£30) - - Agriculture „ „ 1936 •n Wyselaskie (£100 p.i 1. Mathematics . - . - Irregular • - Fourth Term, 1936 »•) X (£90 p.a •) 2. Natural Science - „ - First „ 1936 > „ - Fourth „ 1936 5? (£90 p.a •) 3. English Constitutional History - >

(£60 p.a•• ) 4. Political Economy „ „ 1937 (£80 p.a•• ) 5. Modern Languages . - - ,, „ 1936 2! (£85 p.a"• ) 6. Classical and Comparative Philo logy and Logic - „ - „ ,, 1937 ANNOUNCKMKNTS FOR 193C 1071

AVAR BURSARIES. Six War Bursaries may be awarded by the University each year. They may be granted to sons or daughters of persons previously domiciled in Victoria, who have died on service with the Australian Expeditionary Forces, in cases where there is evidence that without such assistance a University course could not be undertaken or continued. A bursary will carry remission of lecture and examination fees for a" University course. Applications by candidates should be lodged by 1st February.

WALTER AND ELIZA HALL FELLOWSHIP. The Walter and Eliza Hall Trustees provide a Veter inary Science Research Fellowship bearing their name and tenable at the Veterinary Institute. The value is £250 per annum with an allowance of £100 per annum tor expenses. The Fellow must devote his whole time to re search. RESEARCH SCHOLARSHIPS.

RULES. 1. Grades of Award: lb is'proposed'to make awards in the following grades : Minor Research Scholarships, (standard value £60)'. Major, Research. Scholarships, (initial value £120, maximum value-£300). Research . Fellowships, (value £500, less . current percentage reduction). 0 2. Standing in each grade: Minor Research Scholars should normally be of Bachelor -standing, and be proceeding to a Master's degree mainly by-research; Major Research Scholars should normally be r-ofi Master standing (the-formal requirement of Master i standing' being, of* course, interpreted broadly, in, the special casesot'-'Medioal, Dental and Veterinary, graduates) strained in- research ; arid Research Fellows should^ be proved research workers of the highest merit.. : .'.. lU/li RKSEAHC11 SCHOLARSHIPS.

3. Emoluments : other University Income : In fixing the amounts to be awarded, emoluments from any other University sources (scholarships, demonstrator ships, tutorships, etc.) will be taken into consideration and the standard rates reduced accordingly by such amount as may seem reasonable, regard being paid to the extent to which the applicant will bo able to devote himself to research.

4. Qiialt/Ecations/or awards ; In each grade awards will be made only to applicants of first-rate calibre. In the case of a Minor Research Scholarship, as a rule an applicant should have obtained first-class honours in his final examination. The qualification required is the the promise of high capacity for research work, attested by the Head of the Department concerned. For a Major Research Scholarship the applicant must be recommended by the Head of his Department as having proved his capacity for first-rate research work.

5. Tenure: A Minor Research Scholarship will normally be awarded for one year only ; a Major Research Scholarship initially for one year at the minimum rate (£120), but it may thereafter be renewed for further periods of two years, up to a total of five years, with annual increments, normally of £30 j a Research Fellowship will be awarded initially for two years, renewable thereafter up to a total of five years. « 6. Further awards : After five years' tenure the holder of a Major Research Scholarship or a Research Fellowship is eligible for a further award of such Scholarship or Fellowship; but such further award will not be regarded as a renewal but as exceptional, to be made only upon special application and upon a special recommendation from the Head of the Department concerned. ANNOUNCEMENTS FOR 1936 1073

MINING AND METALLURGICAL BURSARIES AND SCHOLARSHIPS. • The principal Australian Base Metal Mining Companies Have established a trust for the award of Bursaries on the following terms :— Students who are British subjects and have completed or received credit for the second year ot tho B.M.E. or B.Met.E. course may apply before 16th March for a Bursary, submitting evidence aa to personality and Scholarship. Two bursaries will be open to competition iu each year, one in Mining and one in Metallurgy, and under the heading ot Scholarship, special consideration will be given to Engineering subjects in the case ot the Bursary in Mining and to Metallurgical subjects in the case of the Bursary in Metallurgy. Each will be worth £30 per annum for the remaining two years of the course, the payment of the second or third annual instalment of •each Bursary being contingent on the bursar's having sufficiently distinguished himself iu his preceding year. Iri general, the attainment of first-class honours in one subject or second-class honours in two subjects will be accepted as evidence of sufficient distinction. Should a Bursary lapse it may be awarded to another candidate who has proved his worth. No award will be made if no candidate is sufficiently qualified.

R.V.I.A. WAR MEMORIAL SCHOLARSHIP. Value £50 per annum. Open in the first instance to students who can show that their architectural education has suffered through the loss of a relative at the War ; or, secondly, to those who are returned soldiers or sons of returned soldiers ; or, thirdly, to students of architecture .generally. Candidates must be students in the course for the Diploma of Architecture or students at the Architectural Ateiier. The scholarship money may be utilised, first, for the payment ot University fees; second, for expenses of travelling to other States for extending knowledge of architecture or attending courses of instruction ; third, tor travelling abroad for extending knowledge.

68A 1074 RHODES SCHOLARSHIP.

Applications must be lodged with the Registrar not later- than 14th December. An Annual Scholarship also presented by. the R.V.I.A. may be awarded at the end of the first year; and,the. Grice- Bronze Medal at the end of the third year. For, furtlieri information candidates arc referred to the Director of the Atelier.

RHODES SCHOLARSHIP.

REGULATIONS FOR THE ELECTION OF THE RHODES SCHOLAR FOB 1936. J.—General Regulations. A Rhodes Scholarship is tenable at Oxford normally for two years, subject to the continued approval of. tho Scholars' College and of the Ehodes Trustees.. As. the, majority of Rhodes Scholars can take a, degree, in two years, appointments are made for two,.years*, a-ndi a Scholar who may wish to continue for. a third, yean must present a deflndte plan, of study satisfactory.-tovhia. College and to the. Trustees. If a third year is granted Scholars may, be allowed- eith.et to postpone it or to spend- that. year, forthwith in,, postr graduate work at another University, The valuo of a Rhodes Scholarship is £400 per year. At most colleges, and for most men, this sum,- is not sufficient to meet a Rhodes Scholar's necessary expense* for Term-time and Vacations, and Scholars who can afford to supplement it by say £50 per year- from-their, own resources will find it advantageous to db so- The- oost of the voyage to and from England'must be> borne by the Scholar; One Scholarship a year is allocated to each State in- the. Commonwealth. 2.—Conditions of Eligibility. The following are the conditions, under, which, candi dates are eligible.: (1); Candidates must be- Bj-itish, subjecte,, nojbh); a* least five, years' domicile, in. Australia.,ot New Zealand, and unmarried. ANNOUNCEMENTS FOR 1936. 1075

(2) Candidates must be of such an age that they will have passed their nineteenth and 'not %ave 'passed theiir twenty-fifth birthday by ''October 1st of the year tor which they are "elected. (3) Candidates must have reached such a stage in ''their course that they will have completed at ."least two years at the University by October 1st • ot'the, year for which they are elected. (4) Candidates may compete either in the State in which they have their ordinary domicile, or in that in which they may have received any considerable part of their education. For each State there will be a Committee of Selection, in whose hands, subject to ratification by the Trustees, the nominations will rest. The Committees will be re sponsible for deciding whether candidates comply with the foregoing conditions. 3.—Basts of Selection. In that section ot the Will in which he defined the general type ot scholar ho desired, Mr. Rhodes men tioned four groups ot qualities, the first two of which •he considered most important: (1) Literary and scholastic attainments; (2) Qualities of manhood, truth, courage, devotion to duty, sympathy for and protection of the weak, kindliness, unselfishness, and fellow ship; (3) Exhibition ot moral force of character and of instincts to lead and to take an interest iu his schoolmates; (4) Physical vigour, as shown by fondness of and success iu manly outdoor sports. Distinction both in character and personality and in intellect is the most important requirement for a Rhodes Scholarship, and it is upon this that Committees will insist. Success in being elected to office in student -organisations may or may not be evidence of leader ship in the true sense of the word. Mr. Rhodes evi dently -regarded leadership as consisting in moral -courage ;and in interest in one's fellow-men quite as 1076 ANNOUNCEMENTS POR 1936. inuch as in the more aggressive qualities. Physical vigour is ar. essential qualification for a Rhodes Scholar ship, but athletic skill is of less importance than the moral qualities developed in playing outdoor games. Poverty does not give a special claim to a Scholarship. The strongest candidate should be appointed regard less of his financial circumstances. In general, candi dates will be preferred who will be under the age of 23 when they go into residence at Oxford. In the absence of a strong candidate the Committees will make no appointment.

4. Method of Application. Each candidate for a Scholarship is required to make application to the Secretary of the Committee of Selec tion ot the State in which ho wishes to compete not later than October 20th, using a prescribed application form. Copies may be obtained at the Registrar's Office.

3.—Material to he submitted hy Candidates. (1) A birth certificate. (2) Evidence as to Courses taken and Degrees, Honours, and other academic distinctions obtained. This evidence should be formally certified by the Registrar or other respon sible officer of the University. (3) A statement by himself as to his general interests and activities (including athletics), his proposed line of study at Oxford, and the character of the work at which he aims in after-life. (4) A medical certificate. (5) Two photographs (preferably unmounted and not larger than 4 in. by 7 in.). (6) References to not less than six persons well acquainted with him, under at least three of whom he must have studied. With the application must be lodged eight oopies of the documents prescribed by Clauses (2) and (3). NOTE—The Victorian Commit.teH asks that the statement which each candidate is required tu submit as to IUK interests and activities should he submitted in the form of a letter, and that any summary of intoreRts and' activities should be (riven in an appendix to the letter. RHODES SCHOLARSHIP. Wll

6.—Standing at Oxford. Holders ot an "approved" degree from an "approved" University who have pursued a course of study at that University for three years at least can obtain " Senior Standing " at Oxford, which carries with it exemption from all examinations prior to the Pinal Honour Schools leading to the B.A. degree, and makes it pos sible to complete the course for that degree in two years. Students who hold a degree in Arts or Science from any Australian University can normally obtain " Senior Standing." A student who has pursued a course of study for two years or more, but who has not yet taken his degree, is not eligible for " Senior Standing." He can, however, obtain " Junior Standing," which gives one year's academic standing, and carries with it exemption from Responsions (though not from the Intermediate Exami nation), provided that (1) his course of study and the standard attained by him in any examinations proper to such course have been approved by the Hebdomadal Council of Oxford University, and (2) that his course has included the study of two of the languages, Latin, Greek, French, German, Italian, Spanish—of which either Latin or Greek must be one. A candidate who does not satisfy the above condi tions cannot matriculate at Oxford without first passing Responsions, or an examination exempting from Re- sponsions, unless specially exempted therefrom on the ground ot being qualified to read for an Advanced Degree.* In Responsions, or any examination which exempts from Responsions, every candidate must offer two of the above-named languages- -of which Latin or Greek must be one. A student from Australia who is not qualified for "Senior" or "Junior Standing," can obtain exemp tion from Responsions if he has gained a Certificate or Certificates of having passed one ot the Examinations enumerated below, provided that in such Examination he has satisfied the Examiners in two languages as stated above.

•See paragraph 9. i07'8 ANNOUNCEMENTS FOU 1938.

(1) The (Public) Leaving Examination of the Uni versity of Adelaide. (2) The School-Leaving Examination of the Univer sity of Melbourne, provided that the holder of the Certificate has passed the Examination as a candidate in Class B -as defined in the Regulations of the said University. (3) The Examination for Leaving Certificates of the Department of Education, New South Wales. (4) The Matriculation Examination of the Univer sity of Sydney, provided that the candidate has passed in four subjecte, including the two languages specified above, at the Higher Standard. (5) The Examination for School-Leaving Certificates of the University of Western Australia. (6) The Senior Public Examination of the University of Queensland. (7) The (Public) Leaving Examination of the Uni versity of Tasmania. (8) The Matriculation Examination or the Entrance Scholarship Examination ot the University ot New Zealand.

7.—Method of Selection. Committees of Selection will summon all candidates to a personal interview. Should they be unable to inter view the candidate selected, a statement of the reasons must be sent to the Trustees before his nomination can be confirmed. Ordinarily a candidate should be selected in the year in which ho is proceeding to his first degree at his homo University, and within a period of not more than four years from his matriculation. Candidates not complying with these requirements may be recom mended for election to the Trustees, provided that the Committee is satisfied that the circumstances justify a departure from the ordinary rule. The selection for any year must bo completed at the latest by November 20th of the preceding year. 'RHODES SCHOLARSHIP 1079

•S'.—Procedure after Selection. The selection once completed, the successful candi dates'9 dossier must be forwarded forthwith, entire, by tho Secretary of the Selection Committee, to th« •General Secretary, for Rhodes Scholarships in -Austra lia, Dr. J. C. V. Behan. Warden's Lodge, Trinity College, Carlton. N. 3, Victoria. Immediately after receiving notice of his selection, the Scholar-elect should write to the Oxford Secretary to the Rhodes Trustees, Rhodes House, Oxford, indicat ing, in the order ot his preference, the'Colleges to which he would moat wish to obtain admission. This list should contain eight names, and a copy ot it accom panied by a definite intimation that the original has been dispatched to Oxford should at the same time be forwarded to Dr. Behan. The Scholar-elect will come into residence in October ol the year for which he is elected. In special oases, however, it may be possible for the Scholar to obtain permission from the Rhodes Trustees to come up in .January instead of October, either postponing the date of his entry by one Term or advancing it by two, according to circumstances. Should a Scholarship be vacated, owing to marriage, resignation, or any other cause, it will not be filled up until the year in which it would normally expire. The first instalment of the Scholarship will be paid at the beginning of the Scholar's first Term at Oxford. No request for earlier payment can be considered.

9.—Courses open to Rhodes Scholars. No restriction is placed upon a Rhodes Scholar's choice of studies. Subject to the approval of his College, he may read for the Oxford B.A. in any of the Final Honour Schools, may enter for one of the so-called Diploma Courses in special subjects, or, if qualified by previous • training, • may be admitted to read for ad vanced idegrees such as the B.C.L., B.Sc., B.Litt., or D.Phil. 1080 ANNOUNCEMENTS KOR 1036.

10.—Information about Oxford. Information as to Oxford Colleges and Courses will be found in " Oxford of To-Day," edited by L. A. Crosby, V. Aydelotte, and C. A. Valentine, which can be obtained at the Oxford University Press, Diocesan Book Depot. St. Paul's Cathedral, Melbourne. Failing this book, the Oxford University " Examination Statutes " are recommended, as giving full information as to examinations and degrees. Three small pamph lets about Oxford can also be obtained from the same publishers: (1) " General Information concerning Ad mission, Residence, etc."; (2) "Facilities tor Advanced Study and Research"; (3) Information concerning the School of Medicine, Medical Degrees and Diplomas, and Post-graduate Medical Study and Research."

1851 EXHIBITION SCHOLARSHIP. The Royal Commissioners of the 1851 Exhibition grant certain Science Research Scholarships each year to candidates selected from those nominated by the Aus tralian Universities. The Scholarships are post gradu ate, and are intended to enable selected students, under 26 years of age, who have already completed a full University course and given evidence of capacity for scientific investigation, to devote themselves for two years to research work under conditions most likely to equip them for practical service in the scientific life of the Empire. The value is d6250 per annum, with addi tional allowances.

ALEXANDER VON HUMBOLDT-STTFTUNG. The Alexander von Humboldt-Stiftung makes available scholarships ot a maxiiuuin value of 1500 marks a year to those who, having completed a University course in Aus tralia with distinction, and being highly recommended, wish to continue their studies at a German University. The scholarships are generally granted for one year, but may be renewed. Applications should reach the Berlin address of the Alexander von Humboldt-Stiftung (NW40, Kronprinzen Uter IS) before the 1st April with a view to beginning a FRKK PASSAGES. 1081'

Course at a German University in the following October. Further particulars are obtainable from the German consul in Melbourne.

. BRITISH PASSENGER LINES FREE PASSAGE SCHEME FOR UNIVERSITY GRADUATES. Four first class return passages are granted annually to graduates of the University nominated by the Council. Applications should bo lodged before the end of March, and should deal with the following points: —(1) the course done in Melbourne, (2) the course ot study proposed in Europe, (3) the applicant's means. The passages are available during the mouths from ,1 une to November.

SUPREME COURT PRIZES. 1. A prize ot Twenty-five pounds open for competition to students at the University of Melbourne not pursuing the course for any degree in law, to be awarded to the can didate who shall bo recommended by the Examiners and placed first at the Honour Examination in November in the subjects ot the Law of Property in Land and Conveyancing and who has at that November Examination passed for tius first time in such subject. 2. A prize ot Fifty pounds open for competition amongst students who have not pursued the course for any Degree in Law to be awarded to the candidate who shall be recommended by the Examiners and placed first at the- Final Honour Examination in Law of the University ot Melbourne in such of the subjects mentioned in Rule 12 of the Rules of the Council of Legal Eduofition of tho year 1921 as are for the time being included in such Final Honour Examination. Candidates may compete only at the Examination at which they complete the passing of the- subjects as prescribed and set out in the said Rule 12. For the purposes of this Rule the Final Honour Examina tions of the University held in December and in March shall be deemed to be a single Examination. 1082 ANNOUNCEMENTS FOR 1936.

3. A prize of .£25 in the first year .and .£100 in' the second year to be given to .the student to whom the Scholar ship is awarded at the Final Honour Examination for the Degree of Bachelor of Laws in the University of Mel bourne.

ADMISSION OF BARRISTERS AND SOLICITORS The admission of barristers ;md solicitors in Victoria is governed by the Rules of the Council of Legal Education, and is controlled by the Board of Examiners appointed by the Supreme Court. In the case of persons not already admitted to practise in some other State ot the Common wealth or in the United Kingdom or in Now Zealand, the main qualification is either (1) graduation as a Bachelor of Laws in the University of Melbourne, and thereafter passing iu Law of Pioceduro and Kvidcnce followed by one year's service under articles ; or (2) the following course:— (a) The candidate must before presenting himself for any of the examinations mentioned in (b), have obtained a certificate from the Registrar of the University of Melbourne either that he has matriculated or that he is qualified to matricu late, and in either case that he has passed at a Public Examination in Latin. ,(b) Hi; must have passed at the University in the manner hereinafter prescribed in the following subjects namely :— (1) Jurisprudence Part 1. (2) Constitutional and Legal History. (3) Law of Wrongs (Civil and Criminal). (4) Law of Contract and Personal Property. (5) Constitutional Law Part I. (6) Law of Property in Land and Conveyancing (7) Constitutional Law Part II. IS) Law of Procedure and Evidence. (9) Equity. (10) Private International Law. (11) Jurisprudence Parti I. Subject to the,provisions of the next succeeding Rule a person may present himself tor examination in any year DENTISTRY. 1085

(whether before, during or after service under articles! in- one or more than one of the subjects proscribed by the last preceding Rule in the sequence indicated'therein : Provided that a person who fails in any subject or subjects may with tho permission of the Faculty present himself for examination therein concurrently with any other subject or subjects; Two ot the subjects prescribed may be passed singly, but save as is otherwise expressly provided credit shall not be given to any person tor any other subject unless he has at the annual examination of the University (including the supplementary examination) at which he passed in the subject, passed iutwo subjects at the least. Credit shall not be given to any person for any- subject passed at a supplementary examination unless he sliall have been recommended by. the examiners at the preceding annual, examination: for examination in that subject in the supplementary, examination or unless., he shall have been admitted to the supplementary examination by the Faculty en account of illness or other serious cause. (c) He must serve for five years as a pupil under articles to a person practising as a barrister or solicitor, or as a barrister and solicitor. In all oases where service under Articles is required the student must before entering into Articles satisfy the Board of Examiners in manner specified in the rules that he has passed all examinations required to be passed before enter ing into Articles, and must file with the Secretary of the Board copies of the certificates and evidence produced before the Board. For further information regarding this and any other matter the student is referred to the rules, and to the Secretary ot the Board of Examiners, Supreme Court Melbourne. DENTISTRY. A Scholarship covering the tuition charges for one year together with the loan of the necessary instru ments is available at the Northwestern University Dental School, Chicago. Tho Scholarship is for one year, and 1084 ANNOUNCEMENTS FOR 1930. is open to any dental graduate of the Melbourne Uni versity. The Scholarship will be awarded upon recom mendation by the Dental Faculty of the Melbourne Uni versity. Applications should be sent to the Dean on or before 31st March. There is also the F. A. Kernot bequest for Dental Research under the control of the Dental College.

SURGEONS TO THE NAVY. The Commonwealth Naval Board will invite the Univer sities of Sydney, Melbourne, and Adelaide, from time to time as positions become vacant to nominate candidates for appointment as Surgeons in the Royal Australian Navy. Candidates should be not more than 28 years of age and must be graduates in Medicine and Surgery with at east one year's experience in a recognised General Hospital.

Library Digitised Collections

Author/s: University of Melbourne

Title: University of Melbourne Calendar 1936

Date: 1936

Persistent Link: http://hdl.handle.net/11343/23405

File Description: 08_Details and Announcements

Terms and Conditions: Terms and Conditions: Copyright in works deposited in the University of Melbourne Calendar Collection is retained by the copyright owner. The work may not be altered without permission from the copyright owner. Readers may only, download, print, and save electronic copies of whole works for their own personal non-commercial use. Any use that exceeds these limits requires permission from the copyright owner. Attribution is essential when quoting or paraphrasing from these works.

Terms and Conditions: To request permission to adapt, modify or use the works outside of the limits of these terms and conditions, please complete the permission request form at: http://www.unimelb.edu.au/copyright/information/fastfind/externalrequest.html